CREO Module 1

Creo for Design Engineers
ACAD-4343A
Training Agenda
Module 01 ― Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process
Module 02 ― Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts
Module 03 ― Using the Creo Parametric Interface
Module 04 ― Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models
Module 05 ― Editing Geometry, Features, and Models
Module 06 ― Creating Sketches for Features
Module 07 ― Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes
Module 08 ― Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs
Module 09 ― Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft
Module 10 ― Creating Rounds and Chamfers
Module 11 ― Creating Patterns
Module 12 ― Assembling with Constraints
Module 13 ― Exploding Assemblies
Module 14 ― Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views
Module 15 ― Advanced Selection
Module 16 ― Creating Sweeps and Blends
Module 17 ― Sweeps with Variable Sections
Module 18 ― Helical Sweeps and Volume Helical Sweep
Module 19 ― Swept Blends and Advanced Bends
Module 20 ― Family Tables
Module 21 ― Reusing Features
Module 22 ― Measuring and Inspecting Models
Module 23 ― Relations and Parameters
Module 24 ― Capturing and Managing Design Intent
Module 25 ― Resolving Failures and Seeking Help
Module 26 ― Creating and Using Component Interfaces
Module 27 ― Creating and Using Flexible Components
Module 28 ― Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies
Module 29 ― Replacing Components in an Assembly
Module 30 ― Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps
Module 31 ― Introduction to the Creo Parametric Sheetmetal Design Process
Module 32 ― Sheetmetal Model Fundamentals
Module 33 ― Creating Primary Sheetmetal Wall Features
Module 34 ― Creating Secondary Sheetmetal Wall Features
Module 35 ― Bending and Unbending Sheetmetal Models
Module 36 ― Sheetmetal Form Features
Module 37 ― Introduction to Drawings
Module 38 ― Creating New Drawings
Module 39 ― Creating Drawing Views
Module 40 ― Adding Model Details to Drawings
Module 41 ― Adding Tolerance Information
Module 42 ― Adding Draft Geometry and Symbols
Module 43 ― Using Layers in Drawings
Module 44 ― Creating and Using Tables in Drawings
Module 45 ― Using Report Information in Drawings
Module 46 ― Detailing Sheetmetal Designs
Module 47 ― Utilizing Intelligent Fasteners
Module 48 ― Utilizing Design Exploration
Module 49 ― Using Unite Technology
Module 50 ― Introduction to Flexible Modeling
Module 51 ― Shape Surface Selection
Module 52 ― Flexible Move
Table of Contents
Creo for Design Engineers
Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Understanding Feature-Based Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Understanding Parametric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Understanding Associative Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Understanding Model-Centric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Recognizing File Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Using the Creo Parametric Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Understanding the Main Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Understanding the Folder Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Understanding the Web Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Understanding the Ribbon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Working with Multiple Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Managing Files in Creo Parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Understanding Datum Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Understanding Display Style Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Understanding the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Creating and Managing View Orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Managing and Editing Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Setting Up New Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Understanding Creo Parametric Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Using Drag Handles and Dimension Draggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Understanding the Model Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Understanding Model Tree Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Using the Geometry Selection Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Understanding Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Selecting Items Using Direct Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Selecting Items Using Query Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Editing Geometry, Features, and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Renaming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Understanding Regeneration and Auto Regeneration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Editing Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Editing Features Using Edit Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Activating and Editing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Deleting and Suppressing Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Editing Feature and Component Visibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Creating Sketches for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Creating Sketches (Sketch Feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Specifying and Manipulating the Sketch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Utilizing Sketch References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Creating Datum Features Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Creating Datum Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Creating Datum Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Creating Solid Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Exercise 1: Creating the Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Adding Taper to Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Exercise 2: Thickening the Piston Wrist Pin Hole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Creating Solid Revolve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Exercise 3: Completing the Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Creating Profile Rib Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Exercise 4: Creating Profile Rib Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Common Dashboard Options - Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exercise 1: Common Dashboard Options - Hole Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Creating Coaxial Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Exercise 2: Creating Coaxial Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Creating Linear Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Exercise 3: Creating Linear Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Creating Radial and Diameter Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Exercise 4: Creating Radial and Diameter Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Exploring Hole Profile Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Creating Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Exercise 5: Shelling the Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Creating Draft Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Creating Basic Split Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Creating Rounds and Chamfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Creating Rounds Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Exercise 1: Creating Rounds on the Rear Engine Block 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Exercise 2: Creating Rounds on the Gearbox Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Exercise 3: Creating Rounds on the Rear Engine Block 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Creating Full Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Exercise 4: Creating Full Rounds on the Connecting Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Creating Round Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Creating Chamfer Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Exercise 5: Creating Chamfers on the Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Creating Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Direction Patterning in the First Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Direction Patterning in the Second Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Exercise 1: Patterning Vents Using a Two-Directional Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Axis Patterning in the First Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Exercise 2: Creating Flywheel Blades Using an Axis Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Axis Patterning in the Second Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Exercise 3: Creating Exhaust Cuts in the Muffler Using a Two-Directional Axis Pattern . . . . . . . . 11-16
Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Creating Reference Patterns of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Exercise 4: Patterning Rounds on the Cylinder Fins Using Reference Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Creating Reference Patterns of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Assembling with Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Understanding Assembly Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Creating New Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Understanding Constraint Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Understanding Assembly Constraint Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Assembling Components Using Default Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Orienting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Creating Coincident Constraints Using Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Creating Coincident Constraints Using Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Creating Distance Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Assembling Using Automatic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Utilizing the Accessory Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
Exploding Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Creating and Managing Explode States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Creating Explode Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Animating Explode States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Creating Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Creating Display Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Creating Appearance States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Creating Layer States in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Creating Combination Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
Advanced Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Advanced Chain Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Advanced Surface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Using the Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Creating Sweeps and Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Exercise 1: Creating a Sweep Through a 3-D Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Creating Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Sweeps with Variable Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Creating Sweeps Using a Constant Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-13
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Using Tangent Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-22
Helical Sweeps and Volume Helical Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Swept Blends and Advanced Bends . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-19
Understanding Swept Blend Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16
Creating Spinal Bends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-19
Creating Toroidal Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21
Family Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Understanding Family Table Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Creating a Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Patternizing Family Table Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Exercise 1: Creating Family Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Creating a Multi-Level Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
Editing Family Table Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15
Reusing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Creating UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Exercise 1: Creating User-Defined Features (UDFs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Placing UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
Exercise 2: Placing User-Defined Features (UDFs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-15
Creating Inheritance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23
Using External Merge to Add Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-26
Using External Merge to Remove Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-30
Measuring and Inspecting Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
Viewing and Editing Model Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Investigating Model Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Assigning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
Analyzing Mass Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
Using the Measure Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Using the Measure Summary Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19
Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-20
Measuring Global Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-24
Exercise 1: Analyzing Design Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-26
Relations and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Understanding Relation Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Understanding Relation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7
Exact Relation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
Creating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13
Creating Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14
Creating Relations for Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18
Creating Section Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-20
Using the Evalgraph Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-23
Using Simultaneous Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-26
Capturing and Managing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Reordering Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6
Inserting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9
Redefining Features and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12
Capturing Design Intent in Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-15
Capturing Design Intent in Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-17
Capturing Design Intent in Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-18
Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-20
Resolving Failures and Seeking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
Understanding and Identifying Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Understanding the Notification Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
Analyzing Geometry Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
Analyzing Open Section Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8
Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
Analyzing Missing Component Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-14
Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
Recovering Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-23
Using Creo Parametric Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-24
Creating and Using Component Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
Understanding Component Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
Using a Placing Component Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
Using a Receiving Component Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
Creating a Component Interface Using the Save as Interface Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-9
Auto Placing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-11
Copying and Pasting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-14
Repeating Component Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-16
Creating and Using Flexible Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
Adding Flexibility to a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4
Exercise 1: Using Measure to Define a Flexible Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-10
Creating Flexible Components with Varied Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-14
Exercise 2: Using Flexibility to Remove Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-17
Using Flexible Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-19
Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
Creating Mirrored Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
Creating Mirrored Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-9
Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-13
Replacing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1
Understanding Component Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
Replacing Components Using Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-3
Replacing Components Using Reference Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
Replacing Components Using By Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7
Replacing Unrelated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-9
Exercise 1: Replacing Unrelated Components Using the Reference Table Method . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-12
Student Preface — Using the Header
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and the header used to begin each
lab in Creo Parametric.
Course Handbook Layout:

• Modules
– Topics
¨ Concept
¨ Theory
¨ Procedure
¨ Exercise (if applicable)
Procedure/Exercise Header:
Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate information after the
course is complete. Each course is organized into modules, each covering a general subject. Each
module contains topics, with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
• Concept – This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and is presented during the class
lecture as an overhead slide, typically with figures and bullets.
• Theory – This section provides detailed information about content introduced in the Concept, and is
discussed in the class lecture but not shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains
additional paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
• Procedure – This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to complete the topic within
Creo Parametric. Procedures are short and focused, and they cover a specific topic. Procedures are
found in the Student Handbook only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge
topics that contain only Concept and Theory.
• Exercise – Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are typically longer and more
involved, and they use more complicated models. Exercises may also cover multiple topics, so not
every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide
and/or the online exercise HTML files.
Note: The first module for certain courses is known as a “process module.” Process modules introduce you
to the generic high-level processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.
Procedure/Exercise Header
To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) as concise as possible, each
begins with a “header.” The header lists the name of the lab, the working directory, and the file you
are to open.
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:
1. Procedure/Exercise Name – This is the name of the lab.
2. Scenario – This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The Scenario is only found in
Exercises.
3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed – A reminder that you should close any open files and
erase them from memory:
• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.
• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.
4. Folder Name – This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are stored in topic folders within
specific functional area folders. The path to the lab files is:
• PTCU\CreoParametric5\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable is the topic folder, so you would
set the Working Directory to PTCU\CreoParametric5\Round\Variable.
• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or browser, and select
Set Working Directory.
5. Model to Open – This is the file to be opened from the working directory. In the above example,
VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and
so on. If you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead create a new
model, you will see Create New.
• To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and select Open.
6. Task Name – Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one or more tasks within a lab.
7. Lab Steps – These are the individual steps required to complete a task.
Two other items to note for labs:
• Saving – Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless otherwise stated.
• Exercises – Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you configure Creo Parametric to
ensure that the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the
training labs on a computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:
• Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\
CreoParametric5\.
• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as the default folder. For
example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric5\.
• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric5 folder. You can then navigate
easily to the functional area and topic folders.
PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the Header
In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo Parametric working environment for
each lab in the course.
Close Window Erase Not Displayed
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1 _Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT
Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure that the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly.
Note: Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer outside of a training center;
otherwise, proceed to Task 2.
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically, such as
C:\PTCU\CreoParametric5.
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be PTCU\CreoParametric5.
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric5 folder. You can then navigate
easily to the functional area and topic folders.
Step 2: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to avoid any possible conflicts.
1. If you currently have files open, click Close from the Quick Access toolbar, until the icon no
longer displays.
2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon.
• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
Step 3: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure and set the folder indicated
in the header as the Creo Parametric working directory.
1. Notice the SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1 _
Folder as indicated in the header above.
2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser tab
from the navigator.
3. Click Working Directory to view the current

working directory folder in the browser.
• Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.
4. Right-click the Topic1 _Folder folder and select Set Working Directory.
5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display the contents of the new
working directory in the browser.
Note: Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the browser to navigate to the topic folder,
and then right-click and select Set Working Directory from the browser.
Step 4: Open the file for this procedure.
1. Notice that the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header above.
• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
• Read the first task.
• Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial datum display for the
procedure or exercise.
• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 5: Set the initial datum display options.
1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum Display types to enable and
disable. For example, “Enable only the following Datum Display types: .”
2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down menu from the In Graphics
toolbar.
3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as

necessary. For example, you could disable the
Select All check box, and then enable only the
desired datum types.
4. The model should now appear as shown.
This completes the procedure.

Module 1
Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process
© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process
You can summarize the Basic Modeling process in four high-level steps.
Figure 1 – Preparing for Part Model Design Figure 2 – Creating a New Part Model
Figure 3 – Creating a New Assembly by Figure 4 – Creating a Drawing of the

Assembling the Part Models New Part Model
Preparing for Part Model Design
Before you create a new part model design, it is often necessary to acquire information about the
components that surround it in an assembly. Consequently, you may want to open and inspect these
parts before beginning the new design. At your company, this preparation stage may occur at the same
time as the new part model design, or it may not occur at all. In either case, establishing knowledge of
adjoining parts can be helpful in the new part model design.
Creating a New Part Model
A new part model accurately captures a design from a concept through solid feature-based modeling.
A part model enables you to graphically view the product before it is manufactured. A part model
can be used to:
• Capture mass property information.
• Vary design parameters to determine the best options.
• Graphically visualize a model before it is manufactured.
Creating a New Assembly by Assembling the Part Models
An assembly is created from one or more parts. The parts are located and assembled with respect to
one another, just as they are on a real product. An assembly can be used to:
• Check for fit between parts.
• Check for interference between parts.
• Capture bill of material information.
• Calculate the total weight of an assembly.
Module 1 | Page 2 © 2021 PTC
Creating a Drawing of the Part or Assembly
Once a part or assembly has been modeled, it is often necessary to document that part or assembly
by creating a 2-D drawing of it. The 2-D drawing usually contains views of the part or assembly,
dimensions, and a title block. The drawing may also contain notes, tables, and further design
information. Not every company requires model drawings.
PROCEDURE - Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process

Objectives
After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Scope the design parameters of an existing part.
• Create a new part model using required design parameters.
• Create a new assembly by assembling part models.
• Create a new drawing of the new part model.
Before you can begin modeling the key handle, you need to scope the design on the adjoining key
base model. You know from experience that the hole in the key base is not large enough in diameter
for a strong key handle, and the key base does not provide enough clearance to use the tool.
Once you have properly scoped the design, you can create the key handle part and assemble it with
the key base. Finally, you can document the key handle design by creating a 2-D drawing.
Step 1: Preparing for part model design – Open and edit the dimensions of an existing part model
to watch the geometry update automatically.
1. To open the KEY_BASE.PRT part model, do the
following:
• Click Open from the ribbon at the top of
the interface.
• In the File Open dialog box, click Working
Directory .
• Double-click the Process folder to view its
contents.
• Right-click the Basic-Modeling folder and
select Set Working Directory.
• Double-click the Basic-Modeling folder to
view its contents.
• Select KEY_BASE.PRT.
• Click Open.

2. From the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the
graphics window, click Datum Display Filters
and clear the check boxes for Axis Display
, Point Display , Csys Display , and Plane
Display to disable their display.
3. To edit the hole diameter from 3.5 to 5, do the

following:
• Click the hole surface in the model to select
it. Notice that it highlights in green and a mini
toolbar appears.
• Click Edit Dimensions from the mini
toolbar.
• Double-click the 3.5 value to edit it.
• Edit the value from 3.5 to 5 and press ENTER.
• Click twice in the graphics window to update
the model geometry to the new diameter
value.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, click Saved Orientations and
select FRONT.
5. To edit the shaft height from 25 to 35, do the
following:
• Click the shaft in the model to select it. Notice
that it highlights in green.
• Click Edit Dimensions from the mini
toolbar.
• Double-click the 25 value to edit it.
• Edit the value from 25 to 35 and press ENTER.
the model geometry to the longer shaft value.

graphics window, click Saved Orientations
and select Standard Orientation.

graphics window, click Datum Display Filters
and select the check boxes for Plane Display
and Axis Display to enable their display.
8. To save the KEY_BASE.PRT part model and close the window, do the following:
• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface.
• Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to close the window containing KEY_BASE.PRT.
Step 2: Creating a new part model – Create a new part model named KEY_HANDLE.PRT and model its
geometry.
1. To create a new part model, do the following:
• Click New from the Quick Access toolbar
near the top of the interface.
• In the New dialog box, select Part as the Type
and Solid as the Sub-type.
• Type key_handle in the File Name field.
• Clear the Use default template check box
and click OK.

2. In the New File Options dialog box, select
mmns_part_solid as the template and click OK.
3. To start a new Sketch feature, do the following:

• Click Sketch from the Datum group in the
ribbon at the top of the interface.
• In the model tree located on the left side of
the interface, click datum plane FRONT to
select it.
• Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
4. To sketch a circle and edit its diameter to 5, do

the following:
• Select Center and Point from the Circle
types drop-down menu in the Sketching
group in the ribbon.
• In the graphics window, cursor over the
intersection of the vertical and horizontal
lines. The cursor snaps to the center. Click to
place the circle at the intersection, drag your
mouse outward to start sketching the circle,
and click again to complete the circle.
• Click One-by-One from the Operations
group in the ribbon. A diameter dimension
appears for the circle.
• Double-click the diameter dimension, edit its
value to 5, and press ENTER.
• If necessary, click Refit from the In Graphics
toolbar at the top of the graphics window.

5. Click OK from the Close group at the top of
the interface.
6. To create an Extrude feature using the sketch

you just created, do the following:
• Ensure that the Sketch feature is still selected.
If it is not highlighted in green, you must click
it to select it.
• Right-click in the background of the graphics
window and click Extrude from the mini
toolbar.
• In the dashboard at the top of the interface,
edit the depth from Blind to Symmetric .
• In the dashboard, edit the depth value to
12 and press ENTER. The orange geometry
depth increases. Orange geometry is preview
geometry and is representative of how the
feature should appear when it is completed.
• Click Complete Feature from the
dashboard.
7. To start a second new Sketch feature, do the

following:
• In the graphics window, click the front surface
of the cylinder geometry to select it as the
sketching plane for the new Sketch feature.
• Click Sketch from the mini toolbar.

8. To sketch a circle and edit its diameter to 7, do
the following:
window and click Center and Point from
the mini toolbar.
• In the graphics window, cursor over the
intersection of the vertical and horizontal
lines. The cursor snaps to the center. Click to
place the circle at the intersection, drag your
mouse outward to start sketching the circle,
and click again to complete the circle.
• Click One-by-One from the Operations
group in the ribbon. A diameter dimension
appears for the circle.
• Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar at
the top of the graphics window.
• Double-click the diameter dimension, edit its
value to 7, and press ENTER.
9. Click OK from the Close group.

10. To create a second Extrude feature using
the second sketch you just created, do the
following:
• Ensure that the Sketch feature is still selected.
If it is not highlighted in green, you must click
it to select it.
window and click Extrude from the mini
toolbar.
• In the dashboard at the top of the interface,
click Change Depth Direction to flip the
orange preview geometry into the existing
geometry.
• In the graphics window, click and drag the
small orange, circular drag handle to edit the
depth to 5.
dashboard.
11. From the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, click Datum Display Filters
and clear the check boxes for Plane Display and Axis Display to disable their display.
12. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to de-select the completed extrude feature.
13. To round two edges of the geometry, do the
following:
• In the graphics window, press CTRL and click
the two edges to be rounded to select them.
• Click Round from the mini toolbar.
• In the dashboard, edit the round radius to 0.5
and press ENTER.
dashboard.
14. Click in the background of the graphics window
to de-select the completed round feature.

15. To mirror the part, do the following:
• In the model tree located on the left side
of the interface, press CTRL and click the
Extrude 2 and Round 1 features to select
them.
• Click Mirror from the mini toolbar.
• In the model tree, click the FRONT datum
plane to select it as the datum from which you
mirror the geometry.
dashboard.
16. To modify geometry dimensions to their proper

length and regenerate the model, do the
following:
• In the model tree located on the left side of
the interface, select the Extrude 1 feature,
and click Edit Dimensions from the mini
toolbar.
• In the graphics window, double-click the 12
dimension, edit it to 60, and press ENTER.
• Click twice in the graphics window to
update the geometry. Notice that the model
geometry grows long.
• Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.

17. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
18. Select Appearances Manager from the
Appearances types drop-down menu in the
Appearance group.
19. To add appearances to be used for the model,
do the following:
• In the Appearances Manager dialog box,
select the drop-down in the Library palette.
• Expand the Metals node and select
Metal-Chrome.dmt.
• Right-click the chrome appearance and
select Copy to My Appearances.
• Select the drop-down menu in the Library
palette again.
• Select the Metal-Aluminum.dmt.
• Right-click the aluminum-anodized-blue
appearance and select Copy to My
Appearances.
20. To create a new appearance, do the following:
• Locate the chrome appearance from the My
Appearances section.
• Right-click on the appearance and select
New.
• Edit the Name of this new appearance from
<chrome> to knurled-chrome.
• Select the Bump tab.
• Select Image from the Select mapping type
drop-down list.
• Click the button next to the drop-down list to
select the bump file.
• In the Open dialog box, select carbon >
Kevlar-bump.jpg and click Open.
• Click Close.
21. To apply an appearance to the whole model,

do the following:
• Select the chrome appearance from the
Appearances types drop-down menu.
• Select KEY_HANDLE.PRT from the model tree
and click OK from the Select dialog box.

22. To apply an appearance to surfaces of the
model, do the following:
• Select the aluminum-anodized-blue
appearance from the Appearances types
drop-down menu.
• Press CTRL and select the two cylindrical
surfaces.
• Click OK.
23. To apply a second appearance to surfaces of

the model, do the following:
• Select the knurled-chrome appearance from
the Appearances types drop-down menu.
• Press CTRL and select the four cylindrical
surfaces.
• Click OK.
24. To see the realistic appearances displayed, do

the following:
• From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading
With Reflections from the Display Style
types drop-down menu.
25. Cursor over the front end of the model, press
CTRL, and middle-click and drag down to zoom
in and observe the appearances.
26. Select Edit Model Appearances from the Appearances types drop-down menu in the
Appearance group.
27. In the Model Appearance Editor dialog box, select the knurled-chrome appearance.
28. Select the Bump tab.
29. To modify the bump map, do the following:
• Click Pick Appearance and select the
knurled model surface.
• Drag the Height slider back and forth to see
how the appearance is affected.
• Edit the Height value to 20 and press ENTER.
• Click Close.

30. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Refit .
31. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
32. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part model, do the following:
• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface.
• In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.
Step 3: Create a new assembly by assembling the part models – Create a new assembly
CHUCK_KEY.ASM and assemble the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and KEY_BASE.PRT.
1. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Datum Display Filters and select the check box for Plane
Display to enable their display.
2. To create the CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly
model, do the following:
• Click New from the Quick Access toolbar
near the top of the interface.
• In the New dialog box, select Assembly as the
Type and verify that Design is the Sub-type.
• Edit the Name to chuck_key.
• Clear the Use default template check box
and click OK.
• Select mmns_asm_design as the template
and click OK.
3. To assemble the KEY_BASE.PRT, do the
following:
• Select Assemble from the Assemble types
drop-down menu in the Component group at
the top of the interface.
• In the Open dialog box, select component
KEY_BASE.PRT and click Open.
• In the dashboard, edit the constraint in the
drop-down list from Automatic to Default
.
• Click Complete Component from the
dashboard.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, disable Plane Display .

5. To start assembling KEY_HANDLE.PRT by
creating the Coincident constraint, do the
following:
• Click Assemble from the Component
group at the top of the interface.
• In the Open dialog box, click the component
KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select it and click Open.
• In the graphics window, click the inside hole
surface on KEY_BASE.PRT to select it as the
assembly reference.
• Click the shaft surface on KEY_HANDLE.PRT
to select it as the component reference. The
KEY_HANDLE.PRT repositions itself through
the hole in KEY_BASE.PRT, and the Coincident
constraint is created.
6. To continue assembling KEY_HANDLE.PRT
by creating the Distance constraint, do the
following:
• In the graphics window, click the flat surface
on KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select it as the
component reference.
• Cursor over the upper left part of the top
surface of KEY_BASE.PRT to pre-highlight it.
Right-click to query the back, flat surface of
KEY_BASE.PRT and click to select it as the
assembly reference. The Distance constraint
is created.
7. To edit the Distance constraint value and

complete the assembly of KEY_HANDLE.PRT,
do the following:
• In the graphics window, click and drag the
small orange, circular drag handle to edit the
offset value of the Distance constraint to 6.
• Click Complete Component from the
dashboard.

8. To edit the shaft length of KEY_HANDLE.PRT
within the assembly, do the following:
• In the model tree, select KEY_HANDLE.PRT
and click Activate from the mini toolbar.
• In the graphics window, select the rounded
shaft of the KEY_HANDLE.PRT, and click Edit
Dimensions from the mini toolbar.
dimension to edit it.
• Edit the 60 dimension value to 45 and press
ENTER.
• Click Regenerate from the Quick Access
toolbar to update the geometry to the new
length.
• In the model tree, select CHUCK_KEY.ASM
and click Activate from the mini toolbar.
to de-select the assembly.
10. To see the realistic appearances displayed, do
the following:
• From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading
With Reflections from the Display Style
types drop-down menu.
11. Middle-click and drag to re-orient the model.
12. Cursor over the bottom of the KEY_BASE.PRT,
press CTRL, and middle-click and drag down to
zoom in and observe the appearances.
13. Middle-click and drag to re-orient the model.

graphics window, click Saved Orientations
and select Standard Orientation.
15. Select Shading from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.

16. To verify the geometry length change in the
KEY_HANDLE.PRT, do the following:
• Click Windows from the Quick Access
toolbar and select KEY_HANDLE.PRT to
switch windows from the CHUCK_KEY.ASM
assembly to the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part
model.
• In the model tree, select Extrude 1 and click
Edit Dimensions from the mini toolbar.
Notice that the shaft length is now 45, even
though it was edited in the assembly.
• Click in the background of the graphics
window to clear the dimensions.
Step 4: Create a drawing of the new part model – Create a new drawing KEY_HANDLE.DRW for the
part model KEY_HANDLE.PRT.
1. To create the new KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing,
do the following:
• Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.
• In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the
Type.
• Edit the Name to key_handle.
• Clear the Use default template check box.
• Click OK.
• In the New Drawing dialog box, verify that the
Default Model is KEY_HANDLE.PRT.
• Select the Use template radio button and
click Browse to browse for the drawing
template.
• In the Open dialog box, select the
STUDENT_TEMPLATE.DRW template and
click Open.
• Click OK in the New Drawing dialog box.
2. The input window prompts you for the drawn_by
parameter. Type your first initial, followed by
your surname, and press ENTER. Your name
is entered into the title block as the drawing
displays in the graphics window.

3. To edit the drawing scale, do the following:
• In the bottom-left corner of the graphics
window, double-click the SCALE value to edit
it.
• The input window prompts you to enter the
new value for scale. Type 5 as the new scale
value and press ENTER. The drawing views
automatically rescale to the new value of 5.
4. To move the Ø7 dimension to the other drawing

view, do the following:
• Click the Ø7 dimension in the right drawing
view to select it. It highlights in green.
• Right-click in the graphics window and select
Move to View .
• Select the left drawing view. The dimension is
moved to this new drawing view.
• Click in the background of the graphics
window to de-select the dimension.
5. To move the Ø5 dimension to another location
in the drawing view, do the following:
• In the graphics window, click the Ø5
dimension in the right drawing view to select
it. It highlights in green.
• Cursor over the highlighted dimension. The
cursor appears as four arrows. This is an
indication that you can now click and drag
this dimension to move it to another location
on the drawing. Click and drag to move the
Ø5 diameter dimension to the center of the
drawing view.
6. Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select KEY_HANDLE.PRT to switch to the
window containing KEY_HANDLE.PRT.
7. To edit the KEY_HANDLE.PRT shaft length and
save it, do the following:
• Select Extrude 1 in the model tree and click
dimension to edit it.
• Edit the 45 dimension value to 60 and press
ENTER.
the geometry.
8. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and close the window, do the following:

• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.
• In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to close the KEY_HANDLE.PRT window.

9. To activate the CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly,
save it, and close the window, do the following:
• Click Windows from the Quick Access
toolbar and select CHUCK_KEY.ASM to switch
to the assembly and activate it.
• Click Regenerate from the Operations
group.
• Click OK in the Save Object dialog box.
• In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to
close the CHUCK_KEY.ASM window.
Note: Note that the geometry and dimension in the
drawing have both updated.
10. To save the KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing, close the window, and erase all files from session
memory, do the following:
• Click OK in the Save Object dialog box.
• In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to close the KEY_HANDLE.DRW window.
• Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
• Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

Module 2
Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts

Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts
Creo Parametric enables you to create solid model representations of your part and assembly
models.
Solid models:
• Are realistic visual representation of designs.
• Contain properties such as mass, volume, and center of gravity.
• Can also be used to check for interferences in an assembly.
Figure 1 – Interference Check Figure 2 – Mass Properties
Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts

Creo Parametric enables you to create realistic solid model representations of your part and assembly
models. These virtual design models can be used to easily visualize and evaluate your design before
costly prototypes are manufactured.
The models contain material properties such as mass, volume, center of gravity, and surface area. As
features are added or removed from the model, these properties update. For example, if you add a
hole to a model, then the mass of the model decreases.
In addition, solid models enable tolerance analysis and clearance/interference checking when placed
into assemblies.

Understanding Feature-Based Concepts
Creo Parametric is a feature-based product development tool.
With feature-based modeling:

• You build one simple feature at a time.
• Each new feature can reference previous features.
Figure 1 – Connecting Rod Features
Understanding Feature-Based Concepts

Creo Parametric is a feature-based product development tool. The models are constructed using a
series of easy to understand features rather than confusing mathematical shapes and entities.
The geometric definition of a model is defined by the type of features used and the order in which
each feature is placed. Each feature builds upon the previous feature and can reference any of the
preceding features, therefore enabling design intent to be built into the model.
Individually, each feature is typically simple; however, as they are added together, they form complex
parts and assemblies.
In this example, we have a connecting rod in seven stages of its creation:
• First, an extrusion is created, which forms the overall shape and size of the model.
• An additional extrusion is created at the top of the model.
• A third extrusion is created at the bottom of the model.
• A hole is created at the bottom of the model.
• Another hole is created at the top of the model.
• A round is created on the four inside edges.
• A small radial hole is created at the top of the model.

Understanding Parametric Concepts
The parametric nature and feature-to-feature relationships in Creo Parametric enable you to easily
capture design intent and make design changes.
Parametric Concepts:
• Model geometry is controlled by parameters and dimensions.
• When you modify dimension values, relevant geometry is automatically updated.
Parent/child relationships:
• Features referenced during creation become parents.
• If parent features change, child features predictably change accordingly.
Figure 1 – Parametric Feature Relationships
Understanding Parametric Concepts

Creo Parametric models are value-driven that use dimensions and parameters to define the size
and location of features within the model. If you edit the value of a feature dimension, that feature
updates accordingly. The change then automatically propagates through to related features in the
model and eventually updates the entire part.
Parent/Child Relationships
Relationships between features in Creo Parametric provide a powerful tool for capturing design intent.
During the modeling process, design intent is added as one feature is created with reference to another.
When creating a new feature, any feature referenced during its creation becomes a parent of the new
feature. The new feature referencing the parent is referred to as a child of the parent. If the parent
feature is updated, any children of the parent update accordingly. These relationships are referred to
as parent/child relationships.
This example shows a piston model intersected with a hole feature. In the middle figure, the piston
height is modified from 18.5 to 25. Notice that the hole moves upward as the piston height increases.
The design intent of the piston is to have the hole located at a specified distance from the top of the
piston. The hole maintains that distance regardless of how tall the piston becomes. This intent was
added by dimensioning the hole to the top surface of the piston.
Alternatively, if the intent of the design is to have the hole located at a specified distance from the
bottom of the piston, the hole would be dimensioned from the bottom surface of the piston, yielding a
different result when the height of the piston is modified.
The right most image in the figure shows modifications made to the location and diameter of the hole.
Best Practices
When creating features in your model, try to reference features and geometry that are robust, unlikely
to be deleted, and provide the desired design intent. While this is not always possible, striving to do so
helps you build robust, easy-to-modify models.
Understanding Associative Concepts
Creo Parametric is a bi-directionally associative product development tool.
Figure 1 – Associativity
Understanding Associative Concepts

Bi-directional associativity means that all changes made to an object in any mode of Creo Parametric
are automatically reflected in every related mode.
For example, a change made in a drawing is reflected in the part being documented in the drawing.
That same change is also reflected in every assembly using that part model.
It is important to understand that the associativity between different modes is possible because the
part shown in a drawing is not copied into the drawing, but rather associatively linked to the drawing.
Likewise, an assembly is not a large file containing copies of every part in the assembly, but rather a file
containing associative links to every model used in the assembly.
Best Practices
Because drawing and assembly files have associative links to the models contained in them, these
objects cannot be opened without the presence of the models they contain.
Essentially, you cannot send your colleague only a drawing file to open. He or she must have the
drawing file along with any model referenced in the drawing. For an assembly, he or she must have the
assembly file and all models used in the assembly.

Understanding Model-Centric Concepts
In Creo Parametric, the model is the center of all downstream deliverables.
Model-centric concepts:
• Assemblies reference the models being assembled.
• The drawing references the model being documented.
• The FEM model references the model being meshed.
• The mold tool references the model being molded.
Figure 1 – Model-Centric Development Tool
Understanding Model-Centric Concepts

In a model-centric product development tool, the design model is the common source for all
deliverables utilizing that specific design model. This means that all downstream deliverables point
directly to a common design model. The model is referenced as components in assemblies, views in a
drawing, the cavity of a mold, geometry meshed in an FEM model, and so on.
The benefit of using a model-centric development tool is that a change made to the design model
automatically updates all related downstream deliverables.

Recognizing File Extensions
There is a unique file extension that is used to identify each Creo Parametric object type.
The following are common Creo Parametric file

extensions:
• .prt – Part file
• .asm – Assembly file
• .drw – Drawing file
Figure 1 – Part File
Figure 2 – Drawing File Figure 3 – Assembly File
Recognizing File Extensions

There are three common Creo Parametric object types: parts, assemblies, and drawings. The following
file extensions are used to identify them:
• .prt – This extension represents a part object.
• .asm – This extension represents an assembly object. An assembly file contains pointers and
instructions that identify and position a collection of parts and sub-assemblies.
• .drw – This extension represents a 2-D drawing. The drawing file contains pointers, instructions, and
detail items for documenting part and assembly models in a drawing.

Module 3
Using the Creo Parametric Interface

Understanding the Main Interface
The main interface includes the following areas:
• Graphics window • Message Log

• Quick Access toolbar • Dialog boxes
• Ribbon • In Graphics toolbar
• Dashboard • Menu manager
• Status bar
Figure 1 – The Main Interface
Understanding the Main Interface

There are many different areas of the Creo Parametric user interface that you utilize when creating
models. The areas that display depend upon the function you are currently performing. Areas of
the main interface include:
• Graphics window – The working area of Creo Parametric in which you create and modify Creo
Parametric models such as parts, assemblies, and drawings.

• In Graphics toolbar – Located at the top of the graphics window, the In Graphics toolbar contains
commonly used tools and filters for the graphics window display. You can customize the tools
and filters displayed in the In Graphics toolbar.
• Quick Access toolbar – By default, the Quick Access toolbar is located at the top of the interface. It
contains a commonly used set of commands that are independent of the tab currently displayed in
the ribbon. These commands are available regardless of the specific mode or ribbon tab in which you
are working. You can customize the Quick Access toolbar to add additional commands.
• Ribbon – A context-sensitive menu across the top of the interface that contains the majority of the
commands you use in Creo Parametric. The ribbon arranges commands into logical tasks through
tabs and groups.
• Dashboard – Locked at the top of the user interface, the dashboard appears when you create or edit
the definition of a feature. The dashboard provides you with controls, inputs, status, and guidance
for performing a task, such as creating or editing a feature. Changes are immediately visible on the
screen. Various dashboard tabs are available with additional feature options. Dashboard icons on
the left include feature controls while the Pause, Preview, Create Feature, and Cancel Feature
options are located on the right.
• Dialog boxes – Content-sensitive windows which display and prompt you for additional information.
• Status bar – Located at the bottom of the interface, the status bar contains icons for toggling the
Navigator and PTC Creo Parametric browser panes on and off. It also contains the message log,
regeneration manager, search tool, 3D box selector, and selection filter.
• Message Log – The message log provides you with prompts, feedback, and messages from Creo
Parametric.

• Menu manager – A cascading menu that appears on the far right of the interface when you use
certain functions and modes in Creo Parametric. You typically work from top to bottom in this menu;
however, clicking Done is performed bottom to top. Bold menu options are automatically selected
when you middle-click.
Understanding the Folder Browser

The Folder Browser is a pane in the Navigator that enables you to browse the folders on your
computer and network.
• The Folder Browser is divided into:

– Common Folders
– Folder Tree
• The Folder Browser enables you to:
– Browse folders.
– View In Session objects.
– View contents of your Desktop and My
Documents, and Network.
– Navigate directly to the Working Directory.
– Resize the width by dragging the window
divider.
• Click Show Navigator from the status bar to
toggle the Navigator on or off.
Figure 1 – The Folder Browser Pane
Understanding the Folder Browser

The Navigator is a pane in the Creo Parametric user interface that contains a series of tabs across the
top. One of those tabs is the Folder Browser. By default, Creo Parametric launches with the Folder
Browser open. The Folder Browser enables you to browse the folders on your computer and network.
You can resize the Folder Browser width by dragging the window divider or close the Navigator entirely
by clicking Show Navigator from the status bar.
The Folder Browser is divided into the Common Folders and the Folder Tree .
The Folder Tree
The Folder Tree enables you to browse your computer's folder structure. By default, the Folder Tree is
collapsed at the bottom of the Folder Browser window. You can also use the Folder Tree to set a new
working directory, add folders to the Common Folders, and add, delete, or rename folders on your
computer. The contents of a folder selected in the Folder Tree are displayed in the Web browser.
The Common Folders
The Common Folders area of the Navigator contains folders that, when selected, direct you to
the folder location in the Folder Tree or Web browser. To add a folder to this area of the interface,
right-click the folder in the Folder Tree or Web browser and select Add to common folders. The five
standard Common Folders include:
• In Session – Enables you to view all files currently In Session.
• Desktop – Enables you to view the contents of your Desktop.
• My Documents – Enables you to view the contents of your My Documents folder.
• Working Directory – Enables you to view the contents of the current Working Directory.
• Favorites – Enables you to view the folders or Web sites you have designated as favorites.
Alternatively, you could also select the Favorites tab from the top of the Navigator.
• Manikin Library – Enables you to view the contents of your Manikin Library.
• Network – Enables you to view the contents of your Network.
Understanding the Web Browser

The PTC Creo Parametric browser is an embedded window that enables you to perform
context-sensitive tasks.
• You can perform the following
tasks with the PTC Creo
Parametric browser:
– Browse the file system.
– Preview Creo Parametric
models.
– Open Creo Parametric models.
– Browse and navigate Web
pages.
– Set the Working Directory.
– Cut/Copy/Paste/Delete
folders and objects.
• Click Show Browser from the
status bar to toggle the Web
Browser on or off.
Figure 1 – The PTC Creo Parametric Browser

Understanding the Web Browser
The PTC Creo Parametric browser, or Web browser, is an integrated content viewer within Creo
Parametric. It works in conjunction with the Folder Browser, so you can find files on your computer
as well as browse Web pages. The Web browser is embedded in the Creo Parametric interface and
slides over the graphics window. The Web browser is divided into three sections: file list, preview
window, and browser controls.
• File list – Displays the contents of a folder selected in the Folder Browser. You can set either List,
Thumbnails, or Details display, filter the list based on file type, or display instances and/or all versions
of a file. Double-click a folder to view its contents or double-click a file to open it in Creo Parametric.
Select a file to preview it in the preview window or drag and drop it into the graphics window to open
it. You can also cut, copy, paste, and delete folders and objects in the file list.
• Preview window – When a model is selected from the file list, you can dynamically preview it by
expanding the preview window. You can Spin, Pan, and Zoom in the preview window to observe
model geometry. You can also edit the model display. By default, the preview window is collapsed
at the bottom of the Web browser.
• Browser controls – The Web browser supports tabbed browsing and contains the following standard
control buttons: Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh, Home, and Print. Select a sub-folder to view its
contents in the Web browser, or type a Web address in the Address field. The Address field uses
breadcrumbs for folder navigation. You can begin typing the name of the desired file or folder in the
Search field to dynamically filter the folder's contents in the Web browser. You can switch between
tabs by clicking on the desired one, and you can add and close tabs.
You can drag the right vertical edge of the Web browser to adjust its width in the same way you can
adjust the size of most other windows. You can also toggle the Web browser on or off by clicking
Show Browser in the status bar.
Note: The Web browser also displays other context-sensitive information, including model and feature
information.

Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files
The Working Directory is the designated location for opening files and saving new files.
• Creo Parametric is started in the default working
directory.
• Different working directories can be set.
• New working directory locations are not saved upon
exiting Creo Parametric.
Figure 2 – Setting the Working Directory in

Figure 1 – Working Directory Common Folder the Folder Tree
Setting the Working Directory
The working directory is the designated location for opening files and saving new files. Typically, the
default working directory is the directory from which Creo Parametric is started. However, there are
three methods to define a new working directory:
• From the Folder Tree or Web browser – Right-click the folder that is to be the new working directory
and select Set Working Directory.
• From the File menu – Click File > Manage Session > Select Working Directory. Browse to and select
the directory that is to be the new working directory. Click OK.
• From the File Open dialog box – Right-click the folder that is to be the new working directory and
Note: You can navigate directly to the working directory at any time by selecting the Working Directory
common folder from the Navigator.
Note: The new working directory setting is not saved upon exiting Creo Parametric.
Opening Files
You can use any of the following methods to open a file:
• Browse to the desired folder using the Navigator (either with Common Folders or through the Folder
Tree) to display its contents in the Web browser. Then, you can either double-click the file in the file
list, or right-click the file in the file list and select Open.
• You can also drag the file from the file list into the graphics window.
• Click File > Open or click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and the File Open dialog box
appears. Browse to the file, select it, and either double-click it or click Open.
Note: The File Open dialog box is the equivalent of the Navigator and Browser combination in the main
interface.
Saving Files
You can use any of the following methods to save a file:
• Click File > Save.
• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar. By default, a new file is saved to the current working
directory. However, if an existing file is retrieved from a directory other than the working directory
and then saved, the file saves to the directory from which it was retrieved.
Saving a Copy of Files
You can also save a copy of an existing file by clicking File > Save As > Save a Copy. Saving a copy
enables you to create an exact copy of a file, but with a different name. When saving a copy of an
assembly, you must also decide how to manage its dependent components. You can save a copy of
the dependent components by renaming them with a suffix or specifying new names for all of them, or
you can decide not to save them at all.
PROCEDURE - Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files
Task 1: Set the working directory, open a file, and then save it.
1. In the Folder Browser , click Working

Directory .
• Click Folder Tree to expand it.
• If necessary, click to expand the
CreoParametric5 folder and click File
to view its contents in the Web browser.
• Right-click the Sample_Topic folder and
Note: For each procedure in this course, the
working directory to be set is specified in the top
header.
2. In the Web browser, double-click Sample_Topic
to view its contents.
• Select NUT.PRT.
• Click Preview at the bottom-right corner of
the Web browser to expand it.
• Click the Preview window edge and drag to
expand it.
• In the Preview window, right-click and select
Refit.
• Double-click NUT.PRT to open it.
3. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

Note: The model is saved to the location it was opened from.
4. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

Task 2: Set a new working directory, open a new model, and then save it.
1. In the Folder Tree , click to expand the
Sample_Topic folder.
2. Right-click Sample_Subfolder and select Set
Working Directory.
3. Double-click Sample_Subfolder to view its
contents in the Web browser.
4. Double-click SCREW.PRT to open it.
5. Click the Folder Browser .

6. In the Folder Tree , right-click the Sample_Topic
folder and select Set Working Directory.
7. Click Save .
Note: Even though the Working Directory has
been changed, the model is still saved to the
location it was opened from.
8. Click Close .
Task 3: Create a new part model and save it.
1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK.
• Notice that the model is to be saved to the Working Directory location.
3. Click OK.

Understanding the Ribbon Interface
Most modes of Creo Parametric have been reorganized into a ribbon-style user interface.
• Ribbon structure:
– File menu.
– Tasks organized into a series of tabs.
– Tabs contain groups of commands.
– Current features stack up in new tabs.
• Command Search Figure 1 – Standby Ribbon and Home Tab
• ALT key shortcuts
Figure 2 – Portion of Active Part Ribbon, Model Tab, and Datum Group
Understanding the Ribbon Interface
Most modes of Creo Parametric have been reorganized into a ribbon-style user interface. The ribbon
appears above the graphics window. The ribbon structure consists of the following:
• The File menu, which contains commonly used system commands.
• Tasks, which are organized into a series of tabs.
• Tabs, which contain groups of icon commands.
• Current features being created, which stack up in subsequent ribbon tabs. For example, Extrude >
Sketch > Rotate Resize.
Command Search
You can activate the command search by clicking Command Search next to the PTC Creo
Parametric Help icon. This activates the Command Search field, which enables you to type
commands. As you begin typing a command, a list appears and dynamically filters results as you type.
When you cursor over any of the list’s results, the system locates and highlights the command in the
ribbon. If you select any of the list’s results, the command starts.
At the bottom of the list, you can click Setup to access the Command Search Settings dialog box.
The following options are available:
• Search for - The following types of commands can be searched for:
– Commands
– TOOLKIT commands
– Mapkeys
– SolidWorks commands
• Options - The following search options are available:
– Search in tooltip
– Search in command name
– Match case
• Match Criteria – The following options are available:
– Any word beginning with
– Containing
– Ending with
ALT Key Shortcuts
If you press and release ALT, shortcut letters display in the UI next to ribbons and icons. You can then
type those letters to activate the ribbon tab or desired command.
PROCEDURE - Understanding the Ribbon Interface

Enhancements\Ribbon-Interface NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Investigate the ribbon in Part mode.
1. Notice the standby ribbon that displays by default.
2. Select the File menu, and notice the commands.
3. In the ribbon, select the Home tab, and notice the available commands.
4. Click New from the Data group.
5. Click OK in the New dialog box.
• Notice the Model tab.
6. Enable only the following Datum Display types:
.
7. Locate and click the Datum group drop-down
menu to view additional commands.
8. From the Datum group, expand the Point types

drop-down menu.
9. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

10. Locate the Measure group.
11. Click to expand the Measure types drop-down
menu.

12. Select the Tools tab.
13. Locate the Model Intent group.
14. Select the View tab.

15. Locate the Model Display group.
16. Select the Model tab.

17. Click in the graphics window background.
18. Press and release ALT .
• Notice that the Analysis tab has a shortcut of
“A.”
19. Press A on your keyboard.
• Notice that the Measure types drop-down
menu has a shortcut of “ME.”
20. Press ME on your keyboard.
• Notice that Angle has a shortcut of “A.”
21. Press A on your keyboard again.
• Notice that the Measure dialog box displays.
22. Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT and
TOP.
23. Close the Measure dialog box.
24. Click Command Search to enable it.
25. In the field, type gr, and notice the commands
that display.
26. Cursor over Graph, and notice its location in the
Datum group.
27. Click Graph from the Command Search.
• Notice that the command has started.
28. Click Cancel .

29. In the Command Search field, type fam and
notice the commands that display.
30. Cursor over each entry, and notice that Family
Table is available in two different locations.
31. In the Command Search field, type map and

notice that this command is not in the ribbon by
default, but can be activated.
32. Click Setup to view the different options.
33. Click Cancel.
34. Click Command Search to disable it.
Working with Multiple Windows

The Window group contains commands for activating, opening, closing, and re-sizing Creo
Parametric windows. You can also switch between open windows.
• A window must be active to use all applicable

Creo Parametric features.
• The word Active appears on the title bar of the
active window next to the model name.
• The active model has a check mark next to its
name in the Windows drop-down list.
• You can switch between active windows using
the Window group or Quick Access toolbar.
Figure 1 – The Window Group
Figure 2 – Switching Between Open Windows Figure 3 – An Active Window
Working with Multiple Windows

Creo Parametric enables you to have multiple windows open at the same time, each containing a
different model. This is a common occurrence during the design process. However, at any given
moment, all applicable functionality is available only on one active window.
You can use the Window group in the View ribbon tab to access commands for working with multiple
windows.
Switching the Active Model Window
When you switch the active window, you automatically switch the active model to the one in that
window. You can switch windows and thus activate a model using any of the following methods:
• Click Windows in the Quick Access toolbar to select the desired model.
• Click Windows in the Window group of the View ribbon tab to select the desired model.
Determining the Active Window
You can determine which window is active in two different ways:
• The word Active appears on the title bar of the active window next to the model name.
• The active model has a check box next to its name when you click Windows .
Other Window Group Functions
In addition to activating windows and switching between open windows, the following additional
functions are available in the Window group:
• Create a new window – When a part or assembly is open, click the Window group drop-down menu
and select New to create a new window with the current object present in the new window.
This new window becomes the active window.
• Close a window – Clicking Close from the Window group closes the active window. If there was
an object in that window, the object remains in memory. If only one window was open, the object is
removed from the window and the window remains open.
Note: In addition, you can always click Close in the Quick Access toolbar to close the window.
• Resize a window – You can resize the Creo Parametric window by clicking the Window group
drop-down menu and selecting Maximize , Restore and Default Size. You can also click the
maximize or minimize buttons in the window's title bar.

Managing Files in Creo Parametric
Creo Parametric is a memory-based system, meaning that files are stored within RAM while you
work on them.
• An object in system memory is In Session.

• Erasing memory (RAM)
– Erase Current
– Erase Not Displayed
• Version numbers are increased by one each
time you save the model.
• Deleting models
– Delete All Versions
– Delete Old Versions
Figure 1 – In Session in the Folder Browser
• Renaming models and File Open Dialog Box
– Rename on disk and in session.
– Rename in session.
Figure 2 – The Rename Dialog Box Figure 3 – Model Versions
Understanding In Session Memory and Erasing Models from It

Creo Parametric is a memory-based system, which means that the files you create and edit are stored
within system memory (RAM) while you are working on them. It is important to remember that until you
save your files, you risk losing them if there is a power outage or system crash. When a model is in
system memory, it is referred to as being In Session.
Models are stored In Session (in system memory, or RAM) until you either erase them or exit Creo
Parametric. When you close the window that contains a model, the model is still In Session. This is
especially important if you are working on files that have the same name but are in various stages of
completion, such as in this course. Both the Folder Browser and File Open dialog boxes provide icons
which enable you to display only In Session models.
There are two different methods to erase models from session:
• Current – Only the model in the current window is erased from system memory (and the window
closed). You can click File > Manage Session > Erase Current to erase the current window's contents
from system memory.
• Not Displayed – Only erases from system memory those models that are not found in any Creo
Parametric windows. You can click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed or you can add the
Erase Not Displayed icon to the Quick Access toolbar.
Erasing models does not delete them from the hard drive or network storage area; it only removes
them from that session.

Understanding Version Numbers
Every time you save an object, you write it to disk. Rather than overwriting the current file on disk, by
default, the system creates a new version of the file on disk and assigns it with a version number that
increments each time the file is saved. This is also known as a dot number, and can be seen in Figure 3.
Note: Depending on your company's configuration, the dot numbers may not be created, and the original
file is overwritten.
Deleting Models
Deleting files permanently removes them from the working directory on your hard drive or network
storage area. Be careful when deleting files; you cannot undo the deletion of files.
There are two different methods to delete models:
• Old Versions – The system deletes all but the latest version of the given file. You can click File >
Manage File > Delete Old Versions to delete the older version files.
• All Versions – The system deletes all versions of the given file. You can click File > Manage File >
Delete All Versions to delete the all version files.
Renaming Models
If you need to edit the name of any model, you can rename it directly from within Creo Parametric.
There are two different methods to rename models:
• On Disk and In Session – The system renames the file both in system memory and on the hard drive.
• In Session – The system renames the file only in system memory.
Note: Problems can result if you rename a file on disk and then retrieve a model (not already in session)
that depends on the previous file name; for example, a part cannot be found for an assembly.
PROCEDURE - Managing Files in Creo Parametric

File\Managing DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT
Task 1: Open and close files to understand the In Session concept.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
3. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group and click OK from the Erase Not Displayed
dialog box.
4. Click Working Directory from the Folder Browser to view the working directory contents
in the Web browser.
5. In the Web browser, double-click DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT to open it again.
6. Click Folder Browser from the top of the
model tree.
7. Click Working Directory .
8. In the Web browser, double-click
DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT to open it.

9. Click Close from the Quick Access
toolbar to close the window containing
DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT. This leaves
DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT still open.
10. Click Show Browser in the status bar to
toggle off the Web browser window.

model tree.
12. In the Folder Browser, click In Session to
view in session contents in the Web browser.
• Right-click DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT and select
Open.

14. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not
Displayed.
15. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box
to erase DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT from system
memory.
model tree.
17. Click In Session from the Folder Browser.
Notice that DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT is no longer in
session memory.
18. Click Show Browser to toggle the Web
browser window off.
Task 2: Rename DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT and erase it from session.

1. Click File > Manage File > Rename.
2. In the Rename dialog box, edit the New Name
to DRILL_BIT_NEW.
3. Verify that the Rename on disk and in session
option is selected.
4. Click OK to complete the rename action.

5. Click Close .
6. Click Erase Not Displayed .
7. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
Understanding Datum Display Options

You can independently control the display of datum entities and datum tags in the graphics window.
• Datum entities include:
– Datum planes
– Datum axes
– Datum points
– Coordinate systems
• Datum tags include:
– Plane Tag Display
– Axis Tag Display
– Point Tag Display
– Csys Tag Display
Figure 1 – Datum Display Options
Figure 2 – Datum Tag Display

Setting Datum Display
Datum entities are 2-D reference geometry that you use for building feature geometry, orienting
models, dimensioning, measuring, and assembling. There are four main datum types:
• Datum planes
• Datum axes
• Datum points
• Coordinate systems
The display of each of these datum types is controlled independently by clicking the following icons
from either the Show group in the View ribbon tab or the In Graphics toolbar:
• Plane Display – Enable/disable datum plane display.
• Axis Display – Enable/disable datum axis display.
• Point Display – Enable/disable datum point display.
• Csys Display – Enable/disable datum coordinate system display.
Note: The initial datum display for a given exercise is included in step 1 for that exercise. For example,
consider the following:Enable only the following Datum Display types: .This indicates that you should
display datum planes only, and that you should not display datum axes, datum points, or datum
coordinate systems.
Setting Datum Tag Display
Each datum entity has a name associated with it, for example, datum plane FRONT. The datums display
in the model tree with this name, and you can display the tags in the graphics window as well. By
default, only the coordinate system tags display.
The display of each of these datum tag types is controlled independently by clicking the following
icons from the Show group in the View ribbon tab:
• Plane Tag Display – Enable/disable display of datum plane tags.
• Axis Tag Display – Enable/disable display of datum axis tags.
• Point Tag Display – Enable/disable display of datum point tags.
• Csys Tag Display – Enable/disable display of datum coordinate system tags.
PROCEDURE - Understanding Datum Display Options

View\Display_Datum DATUM-DISPLAY.PRT
Task 1: Edit the datum display.
2. Enable Plane Display .
4. Enable Plane Tag Display from the Show
group.
5. Disable Plane Display .

6. Enable Axis Display .
7. Enable Axis Tag Display .
8. Disable Axis Display .

9. Enable Point Display .
10. Enable Point Tag Display .

11. Disable Point Display .
12. Enable Csys Display .
13. Disable Csys Display .

14. Disable Plane Tag Display , Axis Tag Display
, and Point Tag Display .
Understanding Display Style Options

You can modify the display style of models in the graphics window.
• Display style options:
– Shading With Edges
– Shading With Reflections
– Shading
– No Hidden
– Hidden Line
– Wireframe
Figure 1 – Display Style Options

Understanding Display Style Options
There are six different 3-D model display options in the graphics window:
• Shading With Edges – The model is shaded according to view orientation and its edges are
highlighted.
• Shading With Reflections – The model is shaded according to view orientation. Shadows and a
reflection are placed on an imaginary floor directly below the model.
• Shading – The model is shaded according to the view orientation. Hidden lines are not visible in
shaded view display.
• No Hidden – Hidden lines in the model are not displayed.
• Hidden Line – By default, hidden lines in the model are displayed in a slightly lighter color than
visible lines.
• Wireframe – Hidden lines are displayed as regular lines (all lines are the same color).
In Figure 1, the same model is displayed in six different ways. Clockwise from the top left, the display is
Shading With Reflections, Shading With Edges, Shading, Wireframe, Hidden Line, and No Hidden.
Repainting the Screen
You can repaint a view to remove all temporarily displayed information. Repainting redraws the screen,
and is performed by clicking Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.
PROCEDURE - Understanding Display Style Options
View\Display_Style DISPLAY-STYLE.PRT
Task 1: Edit the model display style.
3. Select Shading With Reflections from the
Display Style types drop-down menu in the
Model Display group.
4. Select Shading With Edges from the Display

Style types drop-down menu.

drop-down menu.
6. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden

from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.

7. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden
Line from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
8. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Wireframe

from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
9. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading
from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation

Manipulate the 3-D orientation of your design models in the Creo Parametric graphics window.
• Keyboard/mouse orientation:
– Spin
– Pan
– Zoom
– Turn
– Wheel Zoom
• Additional orientation options:
– Previous
Figure 1 – 3-D Orientations Using the Keyboard
– Refit and Mouse
– Saved Orientations
– Spin Center
Figure 2 – The Spin Center
Orientation Using Keyboard and Mouse Combinations

To view a model in a specific orientation, you can spin, pan, and zoom the model using a combination of
keyboard and mouse functions. For each orientation, you press and hold a key and click the appropriate
mouse button, as shown in the following table:

Orientation Keyboard and Mouse Selection
Spin
Pan
Zoom
Turn
Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function uses the cursor position as its
area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scroll wheel. To control the level of zoom, press a
designated key while using the scroll wheel, as shown in the following table:
Zoom Level Keyboard and Mouse Selection
Zoom
Fine Zoom
Coarse Zoom
Additional Orientation Options

In addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the following additional model orientation
options are available:
• Previous – Reverts the model to the previously displayed orientation.
• Refit – Refits the entire model in the graphics window.
• Saved Orientations – Displays a list of saved view orientations available for a given model. Select
the name of the desired saved view, and the model reorients to the selected view. The default Creo
Parametric template includes the following views:
– Standard Orientation – The initial 3-D orientation which cannot be altered.
– Default Orientation – Similar to the Standard Orientation, but its orientation can be redefined to a
different orientation.
– BACK, BOTTOM, FRONT, LEFT, RIGHT, and TOP.
• Spin Center – Enables and disables the spin center. When enabled, the model spins about the
location of the spin center. When disabled, the model spins about the cursor location. Disabling the
spin center can be useful when orienting a long model, such as a shaft.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation
View\3D_Orientation ORIENT.ASM
Task 1: Use saved views.
2. Click Saved Orientations from the In
Graphics toolbar and select TOP.
3. Click Saved Orientations and select LEFT.
4. Click Saved Orientations and select Default
Orientation.
Task 2: Use the spin center.

1. Middle-click and drag to spin the assembly.
2. Spin the assembly again in a different direction.
3. Spin the assembly in a third direction.
Note: The assembly is spinning about the spin center.
4. Click Saved Orientations and select Standard Orientation.
5. Click Spin Center from the In Graphics toolbar to disable it.
6. Cursor over the lower portion of the assembly,
near the CHUCK_2.PRT, and spin the assembly.
8. Click Previous from the Orientation group.
9. Cursor over the upper portion of the assembly
and spin the assembly. Notice that the center of
rotation is the cursor location.
10. Click Spin Center from the In Graphics
toolbar to enable it.
Task 3: Pan the assembly.

1. Press and hold SHIFT, and then middle-click
and drag to pan the assembly.
2. Click Saved Orientations and select
Standard Orientation.

Task 4: Turn the assembly.
1. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click
and drag to the left to turn the assembly
counterclockwise.
2. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and
drag to the right to turn the assembly clockwise.
Task 5: Zoom in and out of the assembly.

1. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag upward to zoom out.
2. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag downward to zoom in.
3. If your mouse is equipped with a wheel:
• Roll the mouse wheel away from you to zoom out.
• Roll the mouse wheel towards you to zoom in.
• Press and hold CTRL, and then roll the mouse wheel away from you to coarsely zoom out.
• Press and hold SHIFT, and then roll the mouse wheel towards you to finely zoom in.
5. Cursor over the hole next to the teeth. Press
and hold CTRL, then middle-click and drag
downward to zoom in to the hole.
6. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar to refit the model.

Understanding the View Manager
The view manager is a powerful, content-sensitive dialog box that enables you to edit how a model
displays in the graphics window.
• Use the view manager to create and

manage:
– Simplified representations
– View orientations
– Appearances
– Cross-sections
– Explode states
– Layer states
– Model display style
Figure 1 – The View Manager
Understanding the View Manager

The view manager is a content-sensitive dialog box that enables you to edit how a model displays
in the graphics window. The view manager contains numerous tabs that enable you to create and
manage the following:
• Simplified representations
• View orientations
• Appearances
• Cross-sections
• Explode states
• Layer states
• Model display style
Some important facts about the view manager include:
• The active item is indicated by an arrow next to its name. In Figure 1, the active view orientation is
the Front.
• A plus sign after the name of the active item indicates that it has changed. You can either save the
modified item to capture what has changed, or double-click it or another item to dismiss the changes.
In Figure 1, view orientation Front has been modified from how it was saved.

Creating and Managing View Orientations
You can create and edit view orientations using the View Manager and View dialog box.
• View dialog box:
– Orient by reference
– Two references and two directions required
– You can reorient existing view orientations
Figure 1 – Typical TOP View Orientation
Figure 2 – Typical LEFT View Orientation Figure 3 – Typical FRONT View Orientation
Saved View Orientation
A model displays in a certain view orientation when it is first created and any time it is retrieved. In
addition to using mouse and keyboard methods to orient a model, you can create predefined view
orientations and save them as part of the model. This enables you to set the model orientation in a
repeatable, consistent manner for company standards, drawing creation, and quick navigation. Not
only does a saved view capture the model's orientation, it also captures the model's level of zoom in
the graphics window.
Creating a New View Orientation
You can create a new view orientation using the View Manager or the View dialog box. When you
create a new view orientation, a default name is created for your view. If desired, you can edit the view
name. The new view orientation is automatically created at the current model orientation. You can edit
the view orientation by redefining it. The View dialog box enables you to specifically define your model
orientation, compared to using keyboard and mouse functions, which are more approximate.
Note: The view orientations that display in the Orient tab of the view manager are the same as those that
are displayed in the Saved Orientations and View dialog box.
Orient by Reference
One method of changing the model orientation in the View dialog box is to Orient by reference. The
Orient by reference option enables you to select references by which to orient the model. Two
directions and two references are required to orient a model.
You can click Cancel from the View dialog box to undo any changes that you made. The model returns
to its most current view state.
Creating View Orientations in the View Dialog Box
You can click Reorient from the bottom of the Saved Orientations drop-down list from the In
Graphics toolbar or from the Orientation group in the View tab to open the View dialog box directly.
This method displays the saved views directly inside of the dialog box. Therefore, you can Orient
by reference and save a new view orientation directly within the dialog box, which is an alternative
to using the view manager.
Reorienting Using View Normal
You can also select View Normal from the bottom of the Saved Orientations drop-down list from
the In Graphics toolbar. When you select a reference entity on the model, the model is automatically
reoriented based on the reference selected. The following reference types are available:
• Planar surface – The model is oriented such that the surface is parallel to the screen.
• Straight edge – The model is oriented such that the straight edge is normal to the screen.
• Curved surface – The model is oriented such that an imaginary plane oriented normal to the curved
surface is parallel to the screen.
• Curved edge – The model is oriented such that the imaginary planar surface created through the
curve is parallel to the screen.
PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing View Orientations

View\Orientation MANAGE_ORIENT.ASM
Task 1: Create view orientations with the view manager.
2. Orient the model as shown.
3. Click View Manager from the In Graphics
toolbar.
• Select the Orient tab and click New.
• Edit the name to 3D-1 and press ENTER.
4. In the View Manager, double-click Default Orientation, and then double-click 3D-1.
5. Zoom in on the assembly as shown.
6. In the View Manager, click New.
• Edit the Orientation name to Conn_Rod and
press ENTER.
• Click Close.
Task 2: Create view orientations with the View dialog box.
1. Click Saved Orientations from the In Graphics toolbar and select Default Orientation.

2. Click Saved Orientations and select Reorient
.
3. Select the surface in the upper figure as
Reference One.
4. In the View dialog box, edit the Reference Two
direction from Top to Left.
5. Select the surface in the lower figure as
Reference Two.
6. In the View Name field, type the name of the

saved view as CYL_HOLE.
• Click Save and then click OK.
Task 3: Redefine view orientations with the view manager.
1. Click View Manager .

• Double-click 3D-1.
3. In the View Manager, right-click 3D-1(+) and
select Save.
4. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog
box.
5. In the view manager, double-click Cyl_Hole.

• Right-click Cyl_Hole and select Redefine.
6. Orient the assembly as shown.
7. Select the surface shown in the upper figure as
the new Reference One.
• In the graphics window, select the surface
shown in the lower figure as the new
Reference Two.
• Click OK in the View dialog box.

8. Click Close from the View Manager.
Task 4: Reorient using View Normal.

1. Orient the assembly as shown.
2. Click Saved Orientations and select View
Normal .
3. Select the edge shown in the upper figure.
• Notice the assembly is automatically
reoriented based on the reference selected.

Managing and Editing Appearances
You can create and manage appearances and apply them to your models.
• A company-standard appearance file
is common.
• Use the Appearances Manager to
manage, create, and edit appearances.
• Use the Appearance Gallery to select
and apply appearances.
• Apply appearances to parts, surfaces,
or components.
• Clear selected or all appearances.
Figure 1 – Appearances Applied
Figure 2 – The Appearances Manager

Managing and Editing Appearances
A new model is assigned a grayish, solid appearance by default. The appearance palette can be used
to set a new appearance for an entire model, surface, or component in an assembly. The appearance
gallery contains a list of user-defined appearances that a company typically creates and distributes
as its standards. Your company-specific appearance gallery is usually loaded automatically when
you launch Creo Parametric.
Appearances within Creo Parametric typically revolve around three main tasks:
• Creating and editing appearances.
• Applying and clearing appearances.
• Managing appearances.
The Appearance Gallery
You access the appearance gallery from the Appearances types drop-down menu. The appearance
gallery is divided into three distinct palettes:
• My Appearances – Displays a list of available user-defined appearances.
• Model – Displays the appearances that are applied to a component, part, or surface display.
• Library – Displays a predefined library of appearances from which to use. These libraries accurately
simulate real world materials including metals and plastics. You can switch the library that is
displayed by expanding the drop-down list next to it.
The Appearances Manager
The appearances manager enables you to manage your appearances. You access the appearances
manager by selecting Appearances Manager from the Appearances types drop-down menu. The
Appearances Manager is also accessible from the Tools tab, Utilities group. The Appearances Manager
dialog box contains both the contents of the appearance gallery on the left and the appearance editor
on the right.
Creating and Editing Appearances
An appearance consists of both Color and Highlight Color. You can modify the properties of both
within the appearance editor to create your desired appearance. You can even apply textures and
decals to your appearance.
To edit an appearance within the appearances manager, you must first copy it into the My Appearances
palette. You can copy the appearance from the Library palette or Model palette by right-clicking and
selecting Copy to My Appearances. You can also select an appearance in the My Appearances palette
and click New Appearance , which copies the appearance to a new name.
You can also edit an appearance by right-clicking it in the appearance gallery and selecting Edit.
This launches the Appearance Editor.
Tip: Use preexisting appearances as a starting point to quickly and easily create new appearances.
Applying Appearances
Once an appearance has been created, you can apply it to entire part models, part surfaces, or
components in an assembly. You can use the selection filter, if necessary, to filter the item that you wish
to apply the appearance. If an appearance is assigned to a part at the assembly level, the appearance
is saved in the context of the assembly and does not change the appearance of the part at the part
level. You can select the appearance first and then apply it to the reference, or you can select the
reference first and then apply the appearance.
To apply an appearance, you first select it from the Appearances types drop-down menu in the Model
Display group. This selected appearance is now the active appearance, and is the appearance that is
applied to the selected references. You can also search for the appearance using the Search field at the
top of the appearance gallery and appearances manager. Clicking the upper half of the Appearances
types drop-down menu enables you to apply the last active appearance.
Model Appearances versus My Appearances
Appearances that are applied to a component, part, or surface display in the Model palette of the
appearance gallery and appearances manager. You can modify a Model appearance either within the
appearances manager or within the model appearance editor. This enables you to replace, or edit, the
Model appearance to dynamically change all applied occurrences without affecting the appearance
located in the My Appearances palette. Once you are satisfied with the modified appearance, you can
copy it into the My Appearances palette within the appearances manager.
Clearing Appearances
To clear appearances applied to a part or surface, you can either click Clear Appearance or Clear
All Appearances from the appearance gallery. When clearing an appearance, you are prompted to
select the references from which you want the appearance removed. However, the Model appearance
is still retained. You can also click Clear Assembly Appearances from the appearance gallery
to clear only assembly appearances.
For a part, clearing all appearances removes all Model appearances and reverts the part to its default
assigned appearance. For an assembly, clearing all appearances removes all Model appearances and
returns the components to the appearances they were assigned at the part level.

PROCEDURE - Managing and Editing Appearances
View\Appearance APPEARANCE.ASM
Task 1: Copy a library appearance into the My Appearances palette.
Model Display group.
3. In the Appearances Manager dialog box, select
the drop-down in the Library palette and select
std-metals.dmt, if necessary.
• Click File > Open.
• Select APPEARANCE.DMT and click Open.
• Click Override all, if necessary.
4. Right-click the ptc-std-aluminum-polished
appearance and select Copy to My
Appearances.
5. Locate and select this new appearance from the
My Appearances section.
6. Click Close.
Task 2: Apply an appearance to assembly components.
1. In the model tree, press and hold CTRL
and select GEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT and
GEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT.
2. Select the ptc-std-aluminum-polished
drop-down menu.
Task 3: Copy and edit an appearance.
1. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearances types drop-down menu.

2. Select the ptc-std-aluminum-polished
appearance sphere from the Model section.
3. Right-click and select Copy to My Appearances.
4. In the My Appearances section of the dialog box,
select the new <ptc-std-aluminum-polished>
appearance and edit the name to
aluminum-polished-transparent.
5. In the Properties tab, select Generic from the
Class drop-down list.
6. Drag the Transparency slider to 70 and click
Close.
7. Select the aluminum-polished-transparent

drop-down menu.
8. Press and hold CTRL and select GEARBOX_
REAR_5.PRT and GEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT.
9. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
Task 4: Create a new appearance.

1. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.
2. Click Appearances Manager from the
Utilities group.
3. In the My Appearances section of the dialog
box, select the upper-left appearance sphere,
ref_color1 .
• Click New Appearance to copy the
ref_color1 appearance.
• Edit the new appearance Name to MyColor1.
4. In the Properties tab, click the Color rectangle

to edit the color.
• Expand the RGB / HSV sliders section, if
necessary.
• Edit the RGB colors to 127, 137, and 145, and
click OK > Close.

Task 5: Apply an appearance to a part.
1. In the model tree, expand DRILL_CHUCK_5.ASM.
2. Select CHUCK_5.PRT and click Open from
the mini toolbar.
4. Select the MyColor1 appearance from the
5. In the model tree, select CHUCK_5.PRT.
7. Click Close to view the new part appearance
in the assembly.
Task 6: Apply an appearance to a group of surfaces.

1. In the model tree, select CHUCK_COLLAR_5.PRT
and click Open from the mini toolbar.
2. Select the View tab and select the black
drop-down menu.
3. Press and hold CTRL, and select the five

surfaces shown.
5. Click Close to view the new part surface

appearance in the assembly.

Setting Up New Part Models
Your company can create customized templates that can be used to create new part models.
• Create new parts using the New dialog
box.
• Use customized part templates.
• Part templates include:
– Datums
– Layers
– Units
– Parameters
– View Orientations
Figure 1 – New Part Created using Template
Figure 2 – Examples of Parameters Figure 3 – Layers Created from Part Template

Creating New Parts
You can create new part models within Creo Parametric by clicking File > New, or clicking New from
the Quick Access toolbar or the Data group. You type the name of the part and select whether you
want to use a default template. Unless you select the Empty template, the new part displays in the
graphics window with some default datum features.
Using Templates
New models should be created using a template. Your company has most likely created customized
templates for you to use. Using a template to create a new model is beneficial because it means that,
regardless of who created it, the model contains the same consistent set of information, including:
• Datums – Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and default coordinate system, all
named appropriately.
• Layers – When every model contains the same layers, management of both the layers and items
on the layer is easier.
• Units – Most companies have a company standard for units in their models. Creating every model
with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are not made.
• Parameters – Every model can have the same standard metadata information.
• View Orientations – Ensuring that every model contains the same standard view orientations aids
the modeling process.
Viewing and Creating Parameters
Parameters are metadata information that can be included in a model template or created by a user in
his or her own part or assembly. Parameters are important because they enable you to add additional
information into part and assembly models. Parameters have several uses:
• Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be driven by relations.
• Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, the parameter Cost might have
a different value for each instance.
• Parameter values can be reported in drawings, or viewed with data management tools such as
Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions.
• User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, or component) or to a feature
or pattern.
You can view a model’s parameters and create new ones by clicking Parameters from the Model
Intent group in the ribbon.
You can create parameters that accept the following types of values:
• Real Number – Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3, and PI.
• Integer – Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257.
• String – Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (letters or numbers).
• Yes/No – Accepts either the YES or NO value.
PROCEDURE - Setting Up New Part Models

File\New_Part NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create a new part by selecting a template.
1. Without an open model, notice only the Home tab displays in the ribbon.
2. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.

• In the New dialog box, select Part as the Type
and Solid as the Sub-type.
• Edit the Name to new_part.
• Click OK.
3. In the New File Options dialog box, select the
mmns_part_solid template.
• Click OK.
5. Explore the default datum features created in

the graphics window and model tree.

6. Notice that the ribbon has populated with tabs specific to the type of open file.
7. In the model tree, click Show and select

Layer Tree .
• Notice the default layers.
8. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to

access the Model Properties dialog box.
• Notice the units that are set.
• Click Close.
9. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Parameters .
10. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter Value field.
• Edit the value to NEW PART and press ENTER.
• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED.
• Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default value of NO.
• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PART_NUMBER.
• Edit the Type to Integer.
• Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289.
• Click OK.
11. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Saved
Orientations .
• Notice the default view orientations.
12. Click in the background of the graphics window.

Task 2: Create a new part by selecting a different template.

• Select Part as the Type and Solid as the
Sub-type.
• Edit the Name to select_template.
• Click OK.
inlbs_part_solid template and click OK.
3. Again, notice the datum features.
access the Model Properties dialog box.
5. Notice the units that are set.
6. Click Close.

Module 4
Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models

Understanding Creo Parametric Basic Controls
The graphics window provides you with color-based feedback for mouse and keyboard inputs.
• System color assignments in the graphics

window:
– Transparent orange – Preselection
highlighting
– Green – Selected geometry
– Wireframe green – Selected features
– Orange – Preview geometry or component
Figure 1 – Preselection Highlighting
– Purple – Partially constrained component
• Keyboard and mouse actions perform different
functions.
Figure 2 – Selected Surface
Figure 3 – Selected Edge Figure 4 – Preview Geometry
Understanding Creo Parametric Basic Controls

Creo Parametric provides you with color-based feedback during various operations that you perform
on models in the graphics window. The following list explains the system color assignments:
• Transparent orange: Preselection highlighting – When you cursor over a model or an area of a
model, various geometry becomes shaded in the transparent orange color. This is called Preselection
Highlighting, which is an indicator of what would be selected if you were to click that location.
• Green: Selected geometry – Selected surfaces and edges display in opaque green. Selected
features display in wireframe green.
• Orange: Preview geometry or component – New feature geometry in a model previews orange,
enabling you to preview the completed model. Similarly, a newly assembled component that is
fully constrained also previews orange.
• Purple: Preview Component Assembly – While you are assembling a new component in an assembly,
the new component displays in purple. Once the component is fully constrained, it displays in orange.
Note: Preview colors are beneficial because they provide feedback as you create valid geometry.
Mouse and Keyboard Controls for Making Selections
Different combinations of keyboard and mouse controls enable you to use different methods to make
different selections. The following table displays the keyboard and mouse selections that comprise
various selection types:

Selection Type Keyboard and Mouse Selection
Preselection Highlighting (Transparent orange
color)
Query to Next Item (Geometry or Component
Beneath)
Select Highlighted Geometry (Opaque green
color) or Select Features (Wireframe green
color)
Add or Remove Items from Selection
Select Range of Geometry (Chain/Set

Selection)
Clear Selection
On Background

Using Drag Handles and Dimension Draggers
Drag handles and dimension draggers are graphical objects used to manipulate geometry,
components, or dimensions during creation, editing, or redefinition in real time.
• Drag handles are used to:

– Resize geometry.
– Reorient geometry.
– Move geometry.
– Reference geometry.
– Adjust component offset.
– Access context-sensitive options by using the
right-click menu.
• Dimension draggers are used to:
– Dynamically adjust dimension values.
Figure 1 – Dragging Extrude Depth
Figure 2 – Adjusting Distance Offset Figure 3 – Dragging the Cut Height
Using Drag Handles

Drag handles are small, orange circles that display in the graphics window. These graphical objects
are used to manipulate geometry during creation, editing, or redefinition in real time. Using your
mouse, drag the handles to resize or reorient geometry, move feature geometry in a model, or
reference geometry. In an assembly, drag the handle to adjust component offset. Your changes
display dynamically in the graphics window. Right-click a drag handle to access context-sensitive
menu options.
You can specify various keyboard and mouse combinations to modify how the drag handle is used. The
following table displays dragging options comprised of various keyboard and mouse combinations
performed on a drag handle.

Keyboard and Mouse
Dragging Option
Selection
Adjust Drag Handle — Resize, reorient, move, and reference
geometry; adjust component offset.
Snap Drag Handle — Reference geometry, such as a datum plane,

edge, point, vertex, or surface.
+
Access context-sensitive menu options.
Using Dimension Draggers

When editing or redefining features or sketching entities, the arrow heads of certain dimensions
become filled white dimension draggers, as shown in Figure 3. Dimension draggers are graphical
arrow heads used to manipulate dimensions while sketching, editing or redefining geometry. Using
your mouse, drag a dimension dragger to dynamically adjust its corresponding dimension value. The
resulting dependent geometry also updates in real time.
Understanding the Model Tree

The model tree lists the features in a model, in the order in which they were created. The model
tree also displays the order of the parts and sub-assemblies in an assembly.
• The model tree enables you to:

– Visualize model features
– Visualize feature order
– Select items
– Edit items
• Show options include:
– Layer/Model tree
– Expand/Collapse All
– Preselection highlighting
– Highlight Geometry Figure 1 – The Model Tree
Figure 2 – Layer Tree Figure 3 – Show Menu Options

Model Tree Basics
The model tree is part of the Navigator window and, by default, displays along the left side of the main
interface. When you open a part model, assembly, or drawing, the Navigator automatically changes its
display to the model tree. The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in the
order in which they were created, as well as the display status (hidden/unhidden or suppressed) of
those features and components. The model tree can also be customized to display other information.
You can use the model tree in the following ways:
• Visualize model features/assembly components – The model tree displays all features that comprise
a model. For assemblies, the model tree also displays the components that comprise that assembly,
and can display the assembly constraints for each assembled component.
• Visualize feature order/component assembly order – A model's features are displayed in the order in
which they were created, from top to bottom. Similarly, an assembly's components are displayed
in the order in which they were assembled, from top to bottom.
• Selection – Selecting a feature or component in the model tree results in the selection of that feature
or component in the graphics window.
• Editing – The model tree can be used to edit features or components, including their display and
name.
The model tree is part of the Navigator. It can be toggled on or off by clicking Show Navigator in
the status bar. You can also resize the model tree by dragging the right edge of the pane to make it
larger or smaller.
Model Tree Show Options
The Show menu is located at the top of the model tree and is accessed by clicking Show , as shown
in Figure 3. The Show menu contains the following options:
• Layer/Model Tree – As shown in Figure 2, this option toggles the model tree to the layer tree so
that all layers associated with a model, assembly, or drawing are displayed. If the layer tree is
displayed and the Show menu is selected, the Layer Tree menu selection is replaced by the Model
Tree menu selection.
• Simple Search – Available in the Assembly and Part mode, Simple Search option enables you to
type a search criteria into the search field. In Assembly mode, components that match the search
criteria highlight in both the model tree and in the graphics window in a solid green color. All other
components display in solid gray. While in Part mode, features that match the search criteria
highlight in the model tree in solid green color. A set of predefined searches is also available
in assembly as well as in part mode.
• Show PopUp Viewer – Enables you to cursor over a component and display a thumbnail of it. Clicking
the thumbnail launches Creo View in the window, enabling you to manipulate the thumbnail.
• Auto Locate in Tree – Locates the object selected in the graphics window in the model tree. This
option is especially useful when locating an embedded object such as a pattern instance or
component in a sub-assembly.
• Expand All – Fully expands every branch within the model tree and mechanism tree.
• Collapse All – Fully collapses every branch within the model tree and mechanism tree.
• Preselection Highlighting – Toggles preselection highlighting on or off. When you cursor over an
item in the model tree when preselection highlighting is turned on, the item is preselected in the
graphics window. By default, this option is turned off.
• Highlight Geometry – Toggles Highlight Geometry on or off. When you select an item from the model
tree when Highlight Geometry is turned on, the item is also selected (in green) in the graphics window.

Understanding Model Tree Filters
You can use model tree filters to control both item and feature type display.
Figure 2 – Model Tree Display Features

Figure 1 – Model Tree Items Dialog Box Filter Before and After
Figure 3 – Model Tree with Suppressed Figure 4 – Model Tree Used Sketches
Objects Turned On Before and After
Understanding Model Tree Filters
The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in the order created. You can
filter what is displayed in the model tree both in terms of item display and feature types. The filtering
of item display and feature types is controlled by the Model Tree Items dialog box, shown in Figure
1. Open the Model Tree Items dialog box by clicking Settings from the top of the model tree, and
then selecting Tree Filters.
The filters applied to the model tree are unique to each window except in the case of assemblies,
where applied filters only propagate to sub-assemblies of assemblies.
Controlling Model Tree Item Display
The display of the following specific types of items is controlled on the left side of the Model Tree
Items dialog box:
• Features – Figure 2 shows the model tree with the display of features turned on and off. Notice that
when features are turned off, they are turned off in both the assembly and part levels of the model
tree. When features are turned off in the assembly, you can only see the components that are
assembled, but nothing more granular. By default, features are turned on for parts and turned off
for assemblies.
• Placement folder – Toggles the display of component placement constraints within assembly
components.
• Materials – Toggles the display of materials.
• Annotations – Toggles the display of annotations.
• Sections – Toggles the display of cross-sections.
• Suppressed Objects – Toggles the display of suppressed features and components. Suppressed
objects in the model tree are preceded with a black square. In Figure 3, the EDGE_ROUNDS and
LUBE_HOLE features are suppressed. If the display of suppressed objects was turned off, these two
features would not be visible in the model tree.
• Incomplete Objects – Toggles the display of incomplete features.
• Excluded Objects – Toggles the display of excluded components.
• Blanked Objects – Toggles the display of blanked mold/cast components.
• Envelope Components – Toggles the display of envelope components.
• Copied References – Toggles the display of copied references.
• Weld Bodies – Toggles the display of weld bodies.
Controlling Model Tree Feature Types Display
The display of feature types is a more granular method of determining which level of feature display
you wish to use. In the Feature Types section of the Model Tree Items dialog box, you can specifically
control which features to display in the model tree:
• Datum Planes
• Datum Axes
• Curves
• Datum Points
• Coordinate Systems
• Rounds
• Auto Round Members
• Cosmetics
• Sketches
• Used Sketches – Used sketch features are those external sketches that are used in another feature,
such as an Extrude or Revolve feature. When a sketch is used, it is automatically changed to a
hidden status, as shown in Figure 4.
Saving Model Tree Display
The model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Click Settings from the top of
the model tree and select Save Settings File to save the current model tree display. The default save
location is the working directory, and the default settings file name is tree.cfg. You can configure Creo
Parametric to always consider tree.cfg as the default model tree display.

Using the Geometry Selection Filter
When you select geometry, the system is smart enough to know what features the geometry
belongs to.
• Select surfaces and edges.

• Mini toolbar displays context-sensitive options.
• Modify the parent feature.
• The press ALT and click combination bypasses
Geometry selection filter.
Figure 1 – Redefining a Feature
Figure 2 – Redefining a Different Feature Figure 3 – Bypassing the Geometry Filter
Using the Geometry Selection Filter

Creo Parametric uses the Geometry selection filter by default. The Geometry selection filter enables you
to select geometry directly and display mini toolbar options that are valid for the selected geometry.
You can select surfaces and edges.
When you select geometry, the system is smart enough to know what features the geometry belongs
to, and gives you a context-sensitive mini toolbar. For example, if you select an edge belonging to
an Extrude feature, clicking Edit Definition enables you to redefine the corresponding Extrude
feature, whereas if the edge belongs to a round the system enables you to redefine the corresponding
Round feature.
The following also happens when making a selection in the graphics window:
• The system automatically highlights the part in the model tree for geometry selected on the model
in an assembly.
• The system automatically highlights the feature in the model tree for geometry selected on the
feature.
• Model tree nodes that were collapsed are expanded automatically. The model tree then collapses
again automatically if a different model is selected.
The press ALT and click combination bypasses the Geometry selection filter, enabling you to select
features directly in Part mode and components directly in Assembly mode.

PROCEDURE - Using the Geometry Selection Filter
Selection\Geometry CONNECTING_ROD.PRT
Task 1: Use the Geometry selection filter.
2. Select the connecting rod surface.
3. Notice the mini toolbar and the commands.
4. Notice the MAIN feature is highlighted in the
model tree.
5. Click Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.

6. Notice that the MAIN feature is being redefined.
7. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.
8. Click in the background to de-select all
geometry.
9. Select the connecting rod outer edge.

10. Notice the mini toolbar and the commands.
11. Notice the BASE feature is highlighted in the
model tree.
12. Click Edit Definition .

13. Notice that the BASE feature is being redefined.
14. Click Complete Feature .
geometry.
16. Select the hole edge.

17. Notice that the hole feature is highlighted in the
model tree.

19. Notice that the hole feature is being redefined.
geometry.
22. Select the round surface.

23. Notice that the round feature is highlighted in
the model tree.

25. Notice that the round feature is being redefined.
geometry.
Task 2: Bypass the Geometry selection filter.

1. Press ALT and cursor over the upper hole.
2. Notice that the hole feature is prehighlighted
orange.
3. Click to select the hole feature.
geometry.
5. Press ALT and cursor over the round feature.

6. Click to select the round feature.
7. Click Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.

Understanding Selection Filters
The selection filter provides various filters to help you select items.
• Selection filters include:

– Geometry
– Vertex
– Part
– Feature
– Sketch Region
Figure 1 – The Selection Filter in the Status Bar
Figure 2 – The Selection Filter

in Part Mode Figure 3 – The Selection Filter in Assembly Mode
Understanding Selection Filters

Each filter in the selection filter narrows the item types that you can select, enabling you to easily
select the desired item. All filters are context-sensitive, so that only those filters that are valid for the
geometrical context are available. For example, the Parts filter would not be available while working
in a part; rather it would be available while working in an assembly. Creo Parametric automatically
selects the best filter according to the context; however, you can always change the filter by simply
selecting it from the selection filter.
The following filters are available in Part mode and Assembly mode:
• Geometry – Enables you to only select geometry, such as edges, surfaces, datums, curves, quilts
and annotations.
• Vertex – Enables you to only select vertices.
• Part – Available in Assembly mode only, this filter enables you to only select components in the
assembly.
• Feature – Enables you to only select features in a part or component in the assembly.
• Sketch Region – Enables you to only select sketch regions in a part or in an assembly.

PROCEDURE - Understanding Selection Filters
Selection\Filters SELECTION_FILTERS .ASM
Task 1: Use the selection filter in an assembly.
2. In the status bar, edit the selection filter to Part.
3. Select BOLT _5-18_7.PRT from the graphics
window.
4. Select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRT from the graphics

window.
5. Notice that BOLT _5-18_7.PRT is automatically
de-selected.
6. Press CTRL and select FLYWHEEL _7.PRT from

7. Press CTRL and select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRT
from the graphics window. Notice that it
de-selects.
8. De-select FLYWHEEL _7.PRT.
9. Edit the selection filter to Feature.

10. Press CTRL and select the two round features.
11. De-select the rounds.
12. Press CTRL and select the two hole features.

13. De-select the holes.

14. Edit the selection filter to Geometry.
15. Zoom in on ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_7.PRT and
select the front surface.
16. Zoom in on the BOLT _5-18_7.PRT component.

17. Select the inner planar surface on the hex of
BOLT _5-18_7.PRT, as shown on the left.
18. Select the top edge on the hex of
BOLT _5-18_7.PRT, as shown on the right.
19. Edit the selection filter to Vertex.
20. Select the top vertex on the hex of
BOLT _5-18_7.PRT.
21. De-select the vertex.
22. Enable Plane Display and Axis Display .
24. Enable Plane Tag Display and Axis Tag
Display from the Show group.
25. Edit the selection filter to Datums.
26. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_4 and
datum plane TOP.
27. De-select the datum plane.
28. Disable Plane Tag Display and Axis Tag
Display .

Selecting Items Using Direct Selection
Direct selection occurs when you cursor over a feature or component and click to select it.
• You can direct select:

– Components
– Features (by pressing ALT)
– Surfaces
• You can perform direct selection in:
– The graphics window.
– The model tree.
• Select multiple items by pressing CTRL. Figure 1 – Select Components in Model
• Select a range of items by pressing SHIFT. Tree or Graphics Window
Figure 2 – Select Features in Model Tree

or Graphics Window Figure 3 – Select Surfaces Directly
Selecting Items Using Direct Selection

After selecting features, geometry, or components in a model, assembly, or drawing, you are able to
make modifications to the selected items. Direct selection is one of the three basic methods of selection.
Direct selection occurs when you cursor over a feature or component and click to select it. Some
key factors regarding direct selection include:
• You can perform direct selection on components in an assembly, and features or surfaces in a model.
• You can perform direct selection in both the graphics window on a model or assembly, and in the
model tree. When you initially cursor over a model in the Creo Parametric graphics window, the
component or feature preselects in the transparent orange color. When you select the component or
feature, it highlights in green wireframe.
The selected item is dependent on whether you have a part or assembly open. If you have a part
open, a selected feature highlights in green wireframe. If you have an assembly open, the selected
component highlights in green wireframe.
In a part or assembly, you can select a feature directly by pressing ALT . With ALT selected, features
preselect in transparent orange. When the surface is selected it highlights in green.
• You can select multiple items by pressing CTRL.
• You can select a range of items from the model tree by pressing SHIFT. If you select an item and
then press SHIFT and select a second item, the entire range of items between them is also selected.
• You can de-select components or features two different ways:
– Press CTRL and click the selected item again.
– Click in the graphics window background.

PROCEDURE - Selecting Items Using Direct Selection
Selection\Direct DIRECT_SELECTION.ASM
Task 1: Select components using direct selection.
3. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from the graphics
window.
to de-select the component.
5. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from the model tree.
6. De-select the component.
7. Press CTRL and select ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_6

.PRT and ENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRT from the
graphics window.
8. Press CTRL and select ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_6.
PRT from the graphics window to de-select it.
9. Press CTRL and select ENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.
PRT from the model tree to de-select it.
10. Press CTRL and select the two BOLT _5-18_6.PRT

and the three BOLT _5-28_6.PRT from the model
tree.
to de-select all components.
Task 2: Select features using direct selection.

1. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from the graphics
window, and click Open from the mini toolbar.
2. Press ALT and select the hole from the graphics
window.
• Notice that the feature highlights in the
graphics window and model tree, and that the
feature name is SPARK_PLUG_HOLE.
3. De-select the feature.

4. Press ALT and select SPARK_PLUG_HOLE.
5. Press ALT+CTRL and query select BASE_ROUND
from the graphics window.
6. Press CTRL and select SPARK_PLUG_HOLE
from the graphics window to de-select it.
7. Press CTRL and select BASE_ROUND from the
model tree to de-select it.
8. Press CTRL and select the four mount hole

features from the model tree.
to de-select all features.
Task 3: Select surfaces using direct selection.

1. Select the surface shown.
to de-select all surfaces.
3. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to
return to the assembly.
4. Select the surface shown.

to de-select all surfaces.

Selecting Items Using Query Selection
Query selection enables selection of features, geometry, or components that are hidden beneath
another item.
• Query selection enables:

– Selection by querying the model.
– Selection using the Pick From List menu.
Figure 1 – Pick From List
Figure 2 – Original Model, Cursor Over to Highlight, Query to Highlight, Select
Selecting Items Using Query Selection

Query selection is one of the three basic methods of selection. Query selection enables you to select
features, geometry, or components that are hidden beneath another feature or model. For example, in
Figure 2, you may want to select the piston so you can change the overall height of the part. However,
the cylinder part obstructs your attempts to click and select the piston. In this situation, you can easily
query and select the piston. There are two methods of query selection:
• Select by querying the model – When you cursor over a model directly in the Creo Parametric
graphics window, the transparent orange color designates a preselected item. By right-clicking the
preselected model or feature, you can query directly through the initial model or feature to the next
model or feature. You can continue to right-click to query the next model or feature. When you have
queried to the desired model or feature, you then click to make your selection.
• Select using the Pick From List – The Pick From List method is similar to querying the model, except
that all of the query possibilities are listed in the dialog box for the cursor location. To activate the
Pick From List menu, cursor over the location you want to query, and then right-click and select Pick
From List . Items highlighted in the Pick From List menu also preselected in the graphics window.
Note: Cursor over to highlight, right-click to query, and click to select.

PROCEDURE - Selecting Items Using Query Selection
Selection\Query QUERY_SELECT.ASM
Task 1: Use query selection in an assembly.
3. Cursor over the CYLINDER_9.PRT.
4. Right-click to query until the PISTON_9.PRT

highlights, and then click to select it.
5. Move the cursor down slightly until the

CYLINDER_9.PRT model preselects.
6. Press CTRL, then right-click and select Pick
From List .
Note: It is necessary for you to right-click and
hold to display pop-up menus.
7. Still pressing CTRL, select CONNECTING_ROD_
9.PRT from the Pick From List dialog box.
• Click OK.
8. Press CTRL and cursor over PISTON_9.PRT.

Right-click to query until the PISTON_9.PRT
highlights, and then select it. This de-selects
the component.

Task 2: Use query selection in a part model.
1. In the graphics window, select CYLINDER_9.PRT,
and click Open from the mini toolbar.
2. Press ALT and cursor over the bottom, center
area of the CYLINDER_9.PRT.
3. Right-click and select Pick From List .
4. In the Pick From List dialog box, click the

down arrow until the CYLINDER_CUT feature is
preselected.
5. Click OK from the Pick From List dialog box.
7. Cursor over the area where the CYLINDER_CUT

feature is located, press ALT, right-click to query
until the CYLINDER_CUT feature highlights, and
then select it.
8. Orient the model to observe the CYLINDER_CUT
feature.

Module 5
Editing Geometry, Features, and Models

Renaming Objects
You can rename objects with more descriptive names so that they are easily recognized in the
model tree.
• Objects that can be renamed include:

– Features
– Components
¨ Rename single/multiple components
¨ Use template
¨ Use prefix/suffix
Figure 1 – Features Before and After Rename
Figure 2 – The Rename Dialog Box
Renaming Features
When you create a feature in a part model, it is automatically assigned a generic name based on its
type. For example, the feature may be called Sketch 1 or Extrude 2, or Revolve 3. While these names
describe the type of feature, they do not describe what the feature is in the context of the design.
Consequently, it can be helpful to rename the feature to something more descriptive. Figure 1 shows
the model tree before and after feature renaming has occurred. You can see that the model tree is
more intuitive once the features have been renamed with more descriptive names. As a result, it is
much easier to find a feature when it needs to be edited.
You can rename model features by using any of the following methods:
• Select the feature in the model tree or graphics window, then right-click and select Rename from
either the graphics window or model tree.
• Select the feature to be renamed in the model tree. Once selected, select it again from the model
tree.
Note: Names can contain up to 31 characters and may not include spaces.
Renaming Components
To avoid assembly failures, you must rename components within the context of the assembly instead
of using Windows Explorer to rename components on the hard drive.
You can rename components by using either of the following methods:
• Rename on disk and in session – The system renames the component both in system memory
and on the hard drive.
• Rename in session – The system renames the component only in system memory.
Click File > Manage File > Rename to rename the assembly or its components. Within the Rename
dialog box, as shown in Figure 2, you can rename the assembly. Notice that the assembly is the item
to be renamed when this dialog box appears.
After clicking OK from the Rename dialog box, the Assembly Rename dialog box displays, enabling you
to rename any of the components within the assembly. To rename components individually, click in the
New Name column for the component you want to rename and type in the new name. The Action
column for that component switches from Keep Name to New File Name.
You can also rename multiple components at once. Select the components you want to rename and
then select any of the following name or number generation options:
• Use Template – Rename components by editing existing characters in the name to new characters.
You can also use wildcards. For example, *_7* = *_9* renames any components with *_7 in their
name to an _9.
• Use Prefix – Specify a prefix to apply to all the selected components to be renamed.
• Use Suffix – Specify a suffix to apply to all the selected components to be renamed.
Once the desired option(s) have been set, click Generate New File Names.
Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations

You can easily undo and redo model changes.
Undo and Redo Capabilities:

• Pop-Up Te xt
• Undo List
• Redo List
Figure 1 – Pop-Up Te xt
Figure 2 – Undo List Figure 3 – Redo List
Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations

You can undo and redo most of the operations performed on a model. The operations are sequentially
stacked in memory as they are performed. You have access to the undo/redo stack when you click the
Undo or Redo icons.
Operations valid for undo or redo include creating, deleting, editing, redefining, suppressing, resuming,
patterning, and reordering.
The Undo and Redo operations have the following capabilities:
• Pop-Up Te xt – A preview of the operation that is to be undone or redone.
• Undo List – You can select one or many sequential actions to undo.
• Redo List – You can select one or many sequential actions to redo.

Understanding Regeneration and Auto Regeneration
Regenerating a model recalculates the model geometry, incorporating any changes made since
the last time the model was saved or regenerated.
• Auto Regenerate automatically regenerates

the model while you edit it.
– Orange preview geometry displays.
– Auto Regenerate is enabled by default.
• You can toggle Auto Regenerate off.
– Preview geometry is turned off.
– Dimensions can be directly edited only.
– Draggers are toggled off. Figure 1 – Auto Regenerate Toggled Off
Figure 2 – Making Multiple Edits to the Model Figure 3 – Auto Regenerate Toggled Back On
Understanding Regeneration and Auto Regeneration

When you edit features in Creo Parametric, you are editing dimension values which control the
geometry. After you edit a feature’s dimensions, the Regenerate function recalculates the model
geometry, incorporating any changes made since the last time the model was saved or regenerated. It
is necessary to regenerate a model after you have edited it.
Auto Regenerate eliminates the need to regenerate the model after making changes. Rather, the
model is automatically regenerated dynamically while models are edited.
By default, Auto Regenerate is enabled. However, if you wish to make multiple changes to a feature
or features before regenerating the model, you can toggle Auto Regenerate off temporarily. When
Auto Regenerate is toggled off, you can only edit dimensions directly, and all draggers are toggled off.
You also cannot drag section entities.
When you are ready for the model to regenerate, toggle Auto Regenerate back on.

Editing Features
Edit enables you to alter dimensions of a selected feature or component.
• Edit:
– Edit a dimension directly.
– Select the Most Recently Used option.
– Use draggers.
– Drag section entities.
• Features are regenerated in real time.
• Child features regenerate in real time.
Figure 1 – Editing a Model
Figure 2 – Dynamically Editing Depth Figure 3 – Dynamically Editing a Section
Editing Features
Edit Dimensions is a menu selection from the mini toolbar and is available in the model tree and
graphics window. After selecting Edit Dimensions, the dimensions of the selected features or
components display in the graphics window. You can also double-click a feature to open the Edit mode.
Using Edit Dimensions, you can quickly change the dimensions of a selected feature using one of
the following methods:
• Edit the dimension directly – To edit a dimension directly, simply double-click it and edit its value.
• Edit using the Most Recently Used option – When you edit a model’s dimensions, you can also utilize
the Most Recently Used option. When you double-click a dimension, a drop-down list displays the
most recent values of the model. You can select a suitable value from this list.
Note: The Most Recently Used option only displays recent values from the current session. It does not
display values used in the previous Creo Parametric sessions.
• Use draggers – Drag the handles that display for rounds and chamfers, pattern dimensions, or a
feature’s depth or angle. You can also use the dimension draggers that display over the arrow heads
of certain dimensions to dynamically edit that specific dimension.
• Drag section entities – You can drag a section’s entities to dynamically update the geometry.
By default, features are regenerated in real time when they are edited. Additionally, child features also
regenerate in real time. Real-time regeneration may be slow if you are dragging a parent feature
in a large model.
If you edit a feature in such a way that it cannot successfully regenerate, a caution icon displays next
to your cursor and the geometry displays red. You can simply undo the edit or edit the feature back
to a successful status. Other affected downstream features that do not successfully regenerate
display in blue.

Edit Right-Click Options
While in the Edit mode, when you right-click in the model tree or the graphics window, the following
options appear in the pop-up menu.
• Show/Hide Draggers – Enables you to toggle the display of drag handles on and off.
• Show/Hide Dimensions – Enables you to toggle the display of dimensions on and off. When
dimensions are toggled off, you can still drag the feature’s section entities.
• Show/Hide Sketch Dimensions – Enables you to toggle the display of the section dimensions on and
off. When section dimensions are toggled off, you can still drag the section’s entities.
• Show/Hide Sketch Constraints – Enables you to toggle the display of the sketch constraints on
and off.
• Show/Hide Sketch Entity Locks – Enables you to toggle the display of the lock status for sketched
entities on and off. If you are editing a sketch that has the entities locked, showing sketch entity locks
display the lock symbol next to the locked entity.
• Auto Regenerate – Enables you to toggle the auto regenerate function on and off. When auto
regenerate is toggled off, all draggers are toggled off, and you can only update the dimensions
directly or drag section entities. The geometry is not dynamically updated, and you must manually
regenerate the model.
PROCEDURE - Editing Features

Edit\Features EDIT-FEATURES.PRT
Task 1: Edit features in a model using various techniques.
2. In the graphics window, press ALT and
double-click Extrude 3.
3. Double-click the depth dimension 8, edit it to
12, and press ENTER.
4. Click once in the background.
5. Double-click the dimension 12, edit it to 10, and

press ENTER.
7. Double-click the dimension 10 and select 12
from the drop-down list.

9. Click the dimension dragger 8 and drag it to
approximately 7.
10. Click in the background to exit Edit mode.

Graphics toolbar and select 3D.
12. In the model tree, select Extrude 1, and click
13. Click the circular section and drag it to a
diameter of approximately 12.5.
15. In the model tree, select Extrude 4, and click

Edit Dimensions .
16. Right-click and select Display Sketch
Dimensions to toggle their display off.
17. Drag the depth handle to approximately 21.
18. Right-click and select Display Sketch
Dimensions to toggle their display on.
20. Select Extrude 5, and click Edit Dimensions .

21. Drag the depth handle to approximately 10.
22. Right-click and select Auto Regenerate to
toggle it off.
23. Notice that the orange preview geometry
disappears.

24. Double-click this approximate dimension and
edit it to 6.
25. Notice that the geometry did not dynamically
update.
26. In the model tree, select Extrude 4.

27. Double-click the dimension 3 and edit it to 3.5.
29. Select Auto Regenerate from the Regenerate
types drop-down menu in the Operations group.
30. Notice that the geometry updated for both edits.
Editing Features Using Edit Definition

Edit Definition enables you to modify feature type, size, shape, location, references, or options.
• Edit Definition using:

– The dashboard
¨ Preview Feature
¨ Pause Feature
¨ Resume Feature
– Drag handles
– Context-sensitive options available by
right-clicking
Figure 1 – Modifying a Feature’s Depth
Figure 2 – Modifying a Feature’s References Figure 3 – Modifying a Feature’s Shape

Editing Features Using Edit Definition
Using Edit Definition, you can significantly change the model by redefining the following aspects of
a feature:
• Type – Change a protrusion into a cut, for example.
• Size – Make a feature larger or smaller.
• Shape – Change a round cut into a square cut, for example.
• Location – Move a cut from one reference to a different reference.
• References – Change the location of the feature or change the dimensional references.
• Options – Change the additional details of the feature, such as its depth.
When you finish editing the definition of a feature, the system automatically regenerates the model for
you to incorporate the changes you have just made.
In Edit Definition, you can modify the model by:
1. Editing with the dashboard – This is the graphical area in which you can change a feature's type,
size, shape, and location.
2. Editing with drag handles – You can directly change features on a model by manipulating the
drag handle. Your changes display dynamically in the graphics window.
3. Using the various context-sensitive options – Accessed by right-clicking the dynamic preview
or drag handles.
The set of icons along the right side of the dashboard perform the following operations:
• Preview Feature – Provides a preview of how the completed feature or component will look in
• Pause Feature – Pauses the current feature's edit definition operation, enabling you to perform
other functions such as inserting datum features.
• Resume Feature – Resumes a paused feature's edit definition operation.
PROCEDURE - Editing Features Using Edit Definition

Edit\Definition EDIT-DEFINITION.PRT
Task 1: Edit the definition of features in a part model.
2. In the model tree, select BASE and click Edit
Definition from the mini toolbar.
3. Drag the drag handle to 12.
5. In the model tree, select UPPER and click Edit

Definition .
6. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.
• Edit the Side 1 depth to To Selected .
• Select the lower front surface.
• Edit the Side 2 depth to To Selected .
• Query select the lower rear surface.

8. In the model tree, select BASE and click Edit

Definition .
9. In the graphics window, select the square
sketch.

Activating and Editing Models
You can activate components and sub-assemblies within a top-level assembly and edit their
features and components, respectively.
• From an assembly, you can activate:

– Components
– Sub-assemblies
• Perform the following operations on the active
component or subassembly:
– Edit Dimension
– Edit Definition
– Create features
Figure 1 – Viewing the Activated Component
Figure 2 – Editing the Definition of a Chamfer Figure 3 – Editing the Number of Fins in
in the Activated Crankshaft the Activated Flywheel
Activating and Editing Models

From an open assembly, you can activate individual components or sub-assemblies within the
assembly. You can then perform Edit Dimension and Edit Definition operations on features of the
activated component or components of an activated subassembly.You can also create features on the
activated part or sub-assembly in the context of the top-level assembly.
Note: If you know you need to edit many features within the context of the assembly, consider toggling on
the display of features within the model tree to help with selection.
Note: Activating a component or sub-assembly in an assembly is different than activating a window by

clicking Windows . However, you can click this icon to reactivate the top-level assembly.
An active component or sub-assembly is denoted in the Creo Parametric interface in three ways:
• A green symbol displays in the model tree next to the active component.
• Te xt in the graphics window states which component is active.
• All other non-active components become unavailable and display in gray in the graphics window.

PROCEDURE - Activating and Editing Models
Edit\Activate ACTIVATE _EDIT.ASM
Task 1: Activate assembly components and edit their features.
2. In the model tree, expand the CRANK_10.ASM
sub-assembly.
• Select FLYWHEEL _10.PRT and click Activate
from the mini toolbar.
3. Press ALT, select one of the fins, and click Edit

Dimensions from the mini toolbar.
4. Double-click the 16 FIN_ROUNDS value, edit it

to 10, and press ENTER.
5. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access
toolbar.
6. Click Windows from the Quick Access

toolbar and select ACTIVATE _EDIT.ASM to
activate the top-level assembly.

7. In the model tree, select CRANKSHAFT_10.PRT
and click Activate .
8. Zoom in to the end of the CRANKSHAFT_10.PRT.
9. Select the chamfer and click Edit Definition
10. Drag the drag handle to a value of 1.
12. In the model tree, select ACTIVATE _EDIT.ASM and click Activate .
13. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select the assembly.
Deleting and Suppressing Items

Suppressing an item removes it from the graphics display and regeneration cycle, but the item can
be resumed. Deleting an item is permanent.
• Delete:
– Is permanent.
– Follows parent/child relationships.
• Suppress:
– Items can be restored via Resume.
– Follows parent/child relationships.
• Resume:
– Selected items.
– All items. Figure 1 – Suppressed Items in the Model Tree
Figure 2 – Viewing Children of Item to

Be Suppressed Figure 3 – Both Parents and Children Suppressed
Deleting and Suppressing Items
If you delete an item from a model and save it, that item is permanently removed from the graphical
display and regeneration cycle of the model. Suppressing an item also removes it from the graphical
display and regeneration cycle. However, you can restore a suppressed item by resuming it. Resuming
a suppressed item returns it to the graphical display and regeneration cycle.
• Suppressed items are denoted in the model tree by a black square. By default, however, suppressed
items are not displayed in the model tree. Figure 1 shows two suppressed items.
• Suppressing items causes regeneration speed to increase. However, suppressing items is not meant
to be a technique for managing complex models or large assemblies.
• You can resume all suppressed items by clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and
selecting Resume > Resume All.
• You can select an object and delete from that object to the end of the model by selecting Delete to
End of Model from the Delete types drop-down menu in the Operations group. You can select
an object and suppress from that object to the end of the model by clicking the Operations group
drop-down menu and selecting Suppress > Suppress to End of Model.
• You can select an object and delete all objects other than the selected one and its parents by
selecting Delete Unrelated Items from the Delete types drop-down menu in the Operations
group. You can select an object and suppress from that object to the end of the model by clicking
the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Suppress > Suppress Unrelated Items.
Handling Parent/Child Relationships
If you suppress an item that is a parent to another item, the child item highlights in blue and the system
warns you that the child item would suppress, too. In Figure 2, the gear is a parent to the drill chuck
sub-assembly in how it was assembled. Therefore, when the gear is suppressed, the chuck assembly
is also suppressed, as shown in Figure 3. The same parent/child relationships hold true if you try to
delete an item that is a parent to another item. Again, the child item highlights in blue and the system
warns you that the child item would need to be deleted, too.
Best Practices
It is recommended that you use Suppress and Resume to temporarily remove features or components
in the graphics window to test design variations. It is a best practice to remove (delete) all suppressed
features or components before saving your final design.
If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphics window for the long term, it is
a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.
PROCEDURE - Deleting and Suppressing Items

Edit\Delete-Suppress DELETE_SUPPRESS.ASM
Task 1: Delete, suppress, and resume items from an assembly.
2. In the model tree, select DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM.
3. Select Delete from the Delete types
drop-down menu in the Operations group.
4. Click OK in the Delete dialog box.
5. Click Undo from the Quick Access toolbar.

6. At the top of the model tree, click Settings
and select Tree Filters .
7. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the
Suppressed objects check box.
• Click OK.
8. Select DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM again and click
Suppress from the mini toolbar.
9. Click OK in the Suppress dialog box.
10. Click Undo .
11. In the status bar, select Part from the selection
filter.
12. Query select the FINAL_GEAR_SHAFT_12.PRT.
13. Right-click and select Delete .
14. Read the contents of the Delete dialog box and
click Cancel.
15. With the component still selected, right-click
and select Suppress .
16. Click OK in the Suppress dialog box.
17. With both suppressed components selected in the model tree, right-click and select Resume .
Task 2: Delete and suppress items in a part.
1. Expand the DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM node.
the mini toolbar.
3. Select Feature from the selection filter.
4. Select FRONT_ROUND and press DELETE.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Undo .
7. Select FRONT_ROUND again and click
Suppress .
8. Click OK.
9. Select the radial hole.
10. Right-click and select Delete .
11. Read the contents of the Delete dialog box and
click OK.
12. Click Undo .
13. Select the radial hole again and click Suppress
.
14. Click OK.
15. Click Undo .

Editing Feature and Component Visibility
The Hide and Show operations, respectively, remove and display components or non-solid feature
geometry in the graphics window.
• Hide/Show:
– Components in an assembly
– Datum features
– Solid features
• Show Only, Show All Except:
– Components in an assembly
– Datum features
– Solid features
– Quilts Figure 1 – Hiding Components
– Sketched entities
• Does not affect parent/child relationships.
• Changes are not saved by default.
– Save Status
Figure 2 – Show and Hide in Dashboard

and Mini Toolbar Figure 3 – Hidden Features in the Model Tree
Editing Feature and Component Visibility
The Hide and Show operations, respectively, remove and display components or non-solid
feature geometry in the graphics window. You can hide items to enable easier selection and
visualization while completing tasks. You may then show items to return them to the display after
your tasks are complete.
In addition to Hide and Show, there are two additional commands for showing and hiding objects.
These commands are available in the Part and Assembly mode and provide easier control over
visibility, by the type of objects.
• Show Only – This command enables you to show the selected object. All the other objects of
the same type are hidden.
• Show All Except – This command does not show the related object. All the other objects of
the same type appear.
These commands control visibility for items like components, datum features, solid features, quilts,
and sketched entities. You can access these commands either from the Show drop-down menu in
the Visibility group of the View ribbon tab or from the mini toolbar after selecting or right-clicking the
object in the model tree or in the graphics window.
• Hidden objects are grayed out in the model tree. The datum features and holes in Figure 3 are hidden.
• Hiding objects does not affect parent/child relationships with other components or features.
• Hiding solid geometry features in a part does not remove the geometry from the display; rather, it
hides only the non-solid components of the feature (such as the axis of a hole) from the display.
• Hidden items are placed in the Hidden Items layer in the Layer tree.
• You can show all hidden objects at once by selecting Unhide All from the Show types drop-down
menu in the Visibility group. Unhide All does not show items that were automatically hidden by Creo
Parametric, such as layer items and datums created on the fly or used sketches.
Saving Feature and Component Visibility
If you want hidden items to open in their still-hidden state the next time the file is opened (once it
has been erased from the session), you must select the Save Status option in the Status types
drop-down menu in the Visibility group to save changes to the Hide/Show status before saving the
model. Changes to the Hide/Show status are not saved with the model by default.
Best Practices
It is recommended that you use Hide/Show to temporarily remove non-solid features or components
in the graphics window. If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphics
window for the long term, it is a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.
PROCEDURE - Editing Feature and Component Visibility

View\Visibility FEAT_COMP_VISIBILITY.ASM
Task 1: Edit component visibility in an assembly.
2. In the model tree, press CTRL and
select GEARBOX_REAR_13.PRT and
GEARBOX_FRONT_13.PRT.
3. Click Hide from the mini toolbar.
4. Press CTRL and select all four BOLT _5-18_13.

PRT components.
5. Click Hide .
Graphics toolbar and select LEFT.
8. Expand the message log to two lines, if necessary.
9. Notice the warning message stating that the layer display was not saved.
11. Select Save Status from the Status types drop-down menu in the Visibility group.
12. Click Save .

Task 2: Edit feature visibility in a part.
1. Expand the DRILL_CHUCK_13.ASM node.
the mini toolbar.
3. Enable Plane Display and Axis Display .
4. Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT,
TOP, and FRONT from the graphics window.
5. Click Hide .
6. Expand the first Pattern (Hole) feature in the
model tree.
• Select each Hole feature to highlight it.
• Select the first Hole id 156 and click Hide .
Note: The axis is hidden, but there is no effect on the
hole itself.
7. Press CTRL and select the other two Hole
features.
8. Click Hide .

10. Click Save Status .
11. Click Save .
Task 3: Edit the visibility using Show Only and Show All Except.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar,

select MIRROR_ASSY.ASM, and click Open.
2. Enable only Plane Display .
3. In the model tree, select STOPPER_COVER.PRT.
5. Click Show Only from the Show types
drop-down menu in the Visibility group.
• Notice that the selected object is shown, and
all the other objects of the same type are
hidden.

7. Select ASM TOP:F3 (Datum Plane) from the
graphics area.
8. Click Show All Except from the mini toolbar.
• Notice that the selected object is hidden, and
all the other objects of the same type are
shown.

Module 6
Creating Sketches for Features

Creating Sketches (Sketch Feature)
To create a Sketch Feature, specify the Sketch Setup, select additional sketch references, and
sketch the geometry.
• You can modify the Sketch Setup.

• You can use references to snap geometry or
dimensions.
• You can create 3-D geometry by using the
Sketch feature.
• Sketched features have various requirements.
Figure 1 – Specifying Sketch Setup
Figure 3 – Sketch Geometry Snapped

Figure 2 – Modifying Sketch Setup to Added References
Creating Sketches (Sketch Feature)

You can create a sketch feature by clicking Sketch from the Datum group in the Model ribbon tab
and from the mini toolbar. Creating a sketch feature involves the following three steps:
• Specify the sketch setup. Once the sketch setup has been defined, you can always change it
to another plane.
• Select additional sketch references that you intend to dimension from or snap to with sketch
geometry. For example, in Figure 3, some of the existing geometry was specified as sketch
references for a new Sketch feature.
• Sketch the geometry.
Sketch Feature Requirements
The following rules apply to sketched sections when creating sketch features:
• A sketched section should not contain any gaps or open ends.
• A sketch cannot contain any overlapping entities.
• An open section sketch is required for creating a rib feature.
• All loops of a multiple loop section must be closed.
• When creating a revolve feature, you must only sketch geometry on one side of the centerline.

Specifying and Manipulating the Sketch Setup
The Sketch Setup determines the sketching plane and the model's orientation in the graphics
window.
• Sketch Setup consists of:

– Sketch Plane
– Sketch Orientation
• Current model orientation becomes the
default sketch orientation.
• Use Sketch View to orient the sketch plane
parallel to the screen in 2-D.
• Select right-click options to temporarily
manipulate the sketch orientation.
Figure 1 – Current Model Orientation Becoming
Default Sketch Orientation
Figure 3 – Sketch Plane Modified from

Figure 2 – Viewing 2-D Sketch Orientation FRONT to RIGHT
Specifying the Sketch Setup

When you create a sketch feature, the Sketch Setup identifies the plane where the sketch should be
created and specifies the orientation of the sketch:
• Sketch Plane – The 2-D sketch is created on, and exists in, this planar reference. The sketching plane
can be either a datum plane or a planar surface of an existing solid or surface feature. If you create
consecutive sketches on the same sketch plane, you can click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box
to use the previous sketch feature's sketch setup.
• Sketch Orientation – Determines how the sketch is oriented in the graphics window and model when
viewed in the 2-D sketch orientation. Sketch orientation consists of two items:
– Orientation Reference – The orientation reference determines the 2-D orientation of the sketch.
This reference is also either a datum plane or a planar surface and must be normal to the sketch
plane.
– Orientation Direction – Determines the direction that the orientation reference faces when viewing
the sketch in the 2-D sketch orientation. The orientation reference can be assigned to face top,
bottom, right, or left. These directions are named to reflect how the reference orients with regard
to the Creo Parametric graphics window. Note that datum planes have two sides, brown and gray,
and that the brown, or positive side, orients to the selected direction.
Tip: If you use an object-action workflow and select the sketch plane reference before starting the Sketch
tool, Sketcher immediately opens with the Sketch Orientation reference and direction automatically
selected. These automatic selections are based on the model’s orientation in the graphics window when
you started the sketch tool. Working in this manner enables you to entirely bypass the Sketch dialog box.

Manipulating the Sketch Setup
When you enter Sketcher, you still remain in the current 3-D orientation by default.
Tip: You can edit the sketcher startup to set the sketching plane parallel to the screen in the PTC Creo
Parametric Options dialog box.
At this point, you have three options available with respect to the sketch setup and orientation:
1. Retain the current default sketch orientation and begin sketching entities.
2. Revert to the default 2-D sketch orientation – The system creates this default 2-D sketch
orientation based on the specified Orientation Direction and Orientation Reference. You can
click Sketch View to reorient the sketch into this 2-D sketch orientation. When this occurs,
the sketch plane is oriented parallel to the screen, and the Orientation Reference points in the
Orientation Direction.
3. Edit the sketch setup – While sketching, you can always reenter sketch setup by clicking Sketch
Setup from the Setup group. You can switch the sketch plane or update the sketch orientation,
keeping in mind that the sketch orientation references are only used in the 2-D sketch orientation.
Different combinations of selected orientation reference and orientation direction yield the same
2-D sketch orientation in the graphics window. You can also reverse the sketch orientation by
clicking Flip in the Sketch dialog box.
Within the Properties tab of the Sketch dialog box, you can modify the name of the sketch feature
as it appears in the model tree.
Temporarily Manipulating Section Orientation
While in Sketcher, you may wish to temporarily manipulate the section orientation without losing the
previous orientation or modifying the sketch setup. To do this, you can right-click in the graphics
window and select Section Orientation > Set horizontal reference or Section Orientation > Set vertical
reference. When you specify an entity for the desired reference direction, the sketch dynamically
reorients so that the selected reference is in the specified orientation. To return to the original sketch
orientation, you can right-click and select Section Orientation > Restore section orientation. You can
also flip either the section orientation or the sketching plane.

Utilizing Sketch References
Sketch references are used to capture design intent by snapping geometry or dimensioning to them.
• Use the following types of entities:

– Existing geometry
– Sketches
– Datum features
• Automatically snap to existing geometry:
– Model edges that lie on the sketching plane.
– Surface edges normal to the sketching plane.
– Edges parallel to the screen.
• Press ALT to select entities and add them
dynamically.
• Unused references automatically removed.
Figure 1 – Automatically Snapping to Geometry
Figure 2 – Manually Adding Additional

Sketching References Figure 3 – Viewing References
Utilizing Sketch References

You use sketch references to snap sketch geometry to them, which can cut down the number of
dimensions required. Sketch references are also used by the system for creating the initial weak
dimensions and constraints. If further dimensions are required, you can dimension to or from sketch
references. Sketch references appear as dashed entities in the Sketcher.
When selecting or snapping to entities from existing features, you create a parent/child relationship
between the sketch and the entity you added as a reference. However, if you add a sketch reference
and it goes unused, the system automatically removes it as a sketch reference. Conversely, if you
dimension to or from an entity the system automatically adds it as a sketch reference.
While sketching, the system tries to help you capture design intent by snapping to existing geometry.
Sketcher automatically snaps to the following geometry types:
• Model edges that lie on the sketching plane.
• Surface edges normal to the sketching plane but not on the sketching plane.
• Edges parallel to the screen but not on the sketching plane.
When Sketcher snaps to one of these geometry types, its endpoint and midpoint guides highlight.
This enables you to snap to any point along the geometry but more easily snap to the geometry
endpoint or midpoint.
In addition to the system automatically snapping to various existing geometry types, you can manually
add sketch references in three different ways:
1. You can click References from the Setup group. This opens the References dialog box. You
can also right-click and select References to open the dialog box. Select the references to
be added.
2. Before sketching, you can add references by pressing ALT, highlighting the desired entity to add
as a reference, and selecting it. Then right-click and select Add references. You can add multiple
references by pressing CTRL+ALT when selecting references.
3. While sketching, you can add references on-the-fly by pressing ALT, highlighting the desired
entity to add as a reference, and selecting it. Pressing CTRL+ALT enables you to select multiple
edges for multiple dynamically added references.
The References dialog box consists of the following items:
• Select References – Select entities in the graphics window. The following types of entities can be
selected as sketch references:
– Existing geometry – Select the edges or surfaces of features that have already been created. You
can also select silhouette edges when the sketch is in the correct orientation. Silhouette edges are
rounded surfaces that display as edges when the model is in the correct orientation.
– Sketches – Select geometry from existing sketches.
– Datum Features – Select datum planes, datum axes, points, and coordinate systems.
• Select Xsec References – Select a surface or datum plane to intersect with the sketching plane.
• Selection Filters – Used for selecting items within the Reference list. Choices from the drop-down list
include Use Edge/Offset, All Non-Dim. Refs, Chain Refs, and All References.
• Replace – Select a reference from the list, click Replace, and select a new reference.
• Delete – Delete the selected reference from the list.
• Reference Status – Displays the status of the sketch with respect to references. Status options
include Unsolved Sketch, Partially Placed, and Fully Placed.
• Solve – You can solve an unsolved or partially placed sketch after changing references.
PROCEDURE - Utilizing Sketch References

Sketcher\References REFERENCES.PRT
Task 1: Select and use references in Sketcher.
.
2. Notice the boss coming off the side of the
model.
4. Select the surface.

5. Click Sketch from the mini toolbar.

6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display
types: .
7. Select Line Chain from the Line types
drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
8. Cursor over the vertical geometry edge.
• Notice that Sketcher snaps to the edge and
highlights the endpoint and midpoint guides.
Note: These geometry edges lie on the sketching
plane.
9. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics
toolbar.
10. Select the midpoint guide, as shown.
11. Press ALT and select the angled edge.

• Notice that you have added a new reference
dynamically.
12. Using this new reference, sketch the remaining

lines, as shown.
13. Middle-click twice to exit the line tool.
14. Click Line Chain and snap to the left, vertical

edge.
15. Start line creation at the intersection of the
horizontal reference and the vertical reference.
Note: Notice that even though the vertical edge does
not lie on the sketching plane, the system still snaps
to it.

16. Press ALT and select the datum plane.
17. Sketch the four lines and complete the sketch
as shown.
18. Click References from the Setup group.

• Notice the references, including datum plane
DTM1.
19. Middle-click twice to exit the line tool.

20. Press CTRL and select the left angled and
horizontal line, as well as the two inner vertical
lines.
21. Press DELETE to delete them.
22. Click Corner from the Editing group.

23. Trim the angled line to the left vertical line.
24. Trim the bottom horizontal line to the left
vertical line.
26. Right-click and select Edit Definition from

the mini toolbar.
27. Click References .
• Notice that the system automatically removed
the no longer used sketcher references.

Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher
You can reuse existing geometry by selecting it with Use Entity from Edge within Sketcher.
• Two types:
– Project Edge
– Offset Edge
• Select edge types:
– Single
– Chain
– Loop
Figure 1 – Reused Entities from Edge
Figure 2 – Selecting the Desired Entity

from Edge Chain Figure 3 – Reused Entities Offset from Edge
Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher
The Project and Offset options in Sketcher create sketcher geometry by projecting selected
geometry edges onto the sketching plane. The two options are the same except the offset edge
enables you to specify an offset value to the edges. A positive offset value causes the geometry to
become larger, whereas a negative offset value causes the geometry to become smaller. Each entity
created displays the constraint symbol.
Note: The resulting dimensions are always positive when shown in a drawing.
When using the entity from edge options, you can select edges three different ways:
• Single – Edges are selected one at a time.
• Chain – Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities. Select two edges from the same
surface or face and select which chain of geometry you wish to create. Figure 2 displays one possible
chain selection from the selected entities.
• Loop – Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. When you select a surface or
face, the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If more than one loop exists, you must
select the desired loop.
PROCEDURE - Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher

Sketcher\Use_Edge USE_OFFSET_EDGE.PRT
Task 1: Use the edges of geometry in Sketcher.
2. Select the front surface, as shown.
3. Click Sketch from the mini toolbar.

types: .
5. Click Project from the Sketching group.
6. Select the top and bottom edges of the circle.
7. Select Chain from the Type dialog box.

8. Select the bottom arc and top arc.
9. Click Next from the menu manager.
• Click Accept.
• Click Close.
10. Select Line Tangent from the Line types

• Sketch two tangent lines.
11. Click Delete Segment from the Editing group.
• Trim the four overhanging arcs.
Task 2: Offset the edges of existing geometry in Sketcher.
1. Click Sketch from the Datum group.

• Click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box.
2. Click Offset from the Sketching group.
3. Select Loop in the Type dialog box.
4. Select the surface, as shown.
5. Click Accept from the menu manager.

6. Type 10 and press ENTER.
7. Middle-click in the background to stop

sketching.
8. Edit the Offset dimension to -10.
9. Click References from the Setup group to
view the sketcher references.
• Click Close.

10. Click OK .
11. Click in the background to de-select the sketch.

Module 7
Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes

Creating Datum Features Theory
Datum features are commonly required as references when creating other features.
• The following types of datum

features can be created:
– Datum Planes
– Datum Axes
– Datum Points
– Datum Coordinate Systems
Figure 1 – Examples of Datum Features
Creating Datum Features Theory

Datum features are commonly required as references when creating other features. Datum features
can be used as dimensioning references, feature placement references, and assembly references.
The default color of datum features in the graphics window is brown (datum planes are both brown
and gray, depending upon which side is currently being viewed). The following four types of datum
features can be created:
• Datum Planes
• Datum Axes
• Datum Points
• Datum Coordinate Systems
Examples of each type of datum feature are shown in Figure 1.

Creating Datum Axes
Datum axes are particularly useful for making datum planes, placing items coaxially, and creating
axis patterns.
• Definition:
– No mass, infinite linear reference
– Display length can be changed
• Uses:
– Construction geometry
– Reference
• Types:
– Auto axis
– Axis feature
– Geometry point
– Geometry centerline
Figure 1 – Various Datum Axis Types
Figure 2 – Geometry Axis (Centerline) Created

for Revolve Feature
Datum Axis Definition
Datum axes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A datum
axis is a linear reference that has no mass. It is infinite in length, but its display length can be edited by
selecting a reference, specifying a value, or dragging the drag handle.
Datum Axis Uses
A datum axis can be used as construction geometry in a feature. It can also be used as a reference for:
• Other datum features, such as datum planes.
• Other features, such as a hole location.
• Assembling components.
Datum Axis Types
There are four different types of datum axes that can be created within Creo Parametric:
1.Auto Axis – Belongs to another feature and is created in the following two circumstances:
• A circle is extruded.
• A hole is created.
2. Axis Feature – Select almost any combination of geometry that defines a line in 3-D space. You
can select single or multiple references which are set as a combination of Through, Normal,
Tangent, and Center constraint types. The following types of axis features can be created:
• Through an edge
• Normal to a plane
• Through a cylindrical surface
• Through the intersection of two planes or planar surfaces
• Through two points or vertices
• Through the center of an arc
• Tangent to an edge
• Through a point or vertex, normal to a plane
• Through the X, Y, or Z axis of a coordinate system
3. Geometry Point – When created in Sketcher and when the sketch is completed, the axis appears
at the location of the geometry point, normal to the sketch plane. A geometry point within a
sketch can only create axes when used for internal sketches of extrude features.
4. Geometry Centerline – Created only in Sketcher. A geometry centerline is created in the sketching
plane, and when the sketch is completed, it displays as a datum axis within the graphics window.
A geometry centerline can be used as the axis of revolution for a revolve feature. When a
geometry centerline is selected in Sketcher, you can right-click and select Construction to convert
it to a sketch entity. Similarly, you can select a centerline and right-click and select Geometry to
convert the centerline to a geometry centerline.
Selecting Datum Axes
You can select datum axes using the following methods:
• Select the axis line.
• Select the axis name tag.
• Select the axis in the model tree.
• Search for the axis by name in the search tool.
PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Axes

Datum\Axes DATUM_AXIS.PRT
Task 1: Create datum axes on a part model.
2. Select the edge, as shown.

3. Click Axis from the mini toolbar.
4. Click in the background to de-select the datum
axis.
6. Enable Axis Tag Display from the Show
group.
7. In the ribbon, select the Model tab.
8. Select the surface, as shown.

9. Click Axis .
10. De-select the datum axis.

11. Click Axis from the Datum group.
12. Press CTRL and select datum plane FRONT in
the model tree and the surface.
13. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the Display

tab.
• Select the Adjust outline check box.
• Select Reference from the drop-down list.
• Select the same surface again.
14. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the
Properties tab.
• Edit the Name to REF_1.
• Click OK and de-select the datum axis.
15. Click Axis .
17. Right-click and select Offset References.

18. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.
19. Edit the values to 22 and 3.
20. Click OK and de-select the datum axis.

22. Disable Axis Tag Display .

Creating Datum Planes
Datum planes are 2-D reference geometry that you use to build feature geometry.
• Definition:
– No mass, infinite planar reference
– Display size can be changed
– Two sides
• Uses:
– Default datum planes
– Construction geometry Figure 1 – Viewing Datum Plane Sides
– Reference
• Types:
– Through
– Normal
– Parallel
– Offset
– Angle
– Tangent
Figure 2 – Datum Plane Types
– Blend section
Datum Plane Definition
Datum planes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A datum
plane is a planar reference that has no mass. It is infinite in size, but its display size can be edited to
visually fit a part, feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius. You can also drag its drag handle. A datum
plane has two sides that display brown and gray, as shown in Figure 1. The front, or brown side, is
considered to be positive, while the back, or gray side, is considered to be negative.
Datum Plane Uses
The RIGHT, FRONT, and TOP datum planes included in all the default templates are known as the
default datum planes. Every feature is directly or indirectly created off of these datum planes. A datum
plane can be used as construction geometry for a feature. It can also be used as a reference for:
• Other datum features, such as datum axes.
• Other features, such as sketches on an angle.
• Assembling components.
Datum Plane Types
When creating datum planes, you can select almost any combination of geometry that defines a
plane in 3-D space. You can select single or multiple references, which are set as a combination of
the following seven constraint types:
1. Through – Select any of the following:
• Axis, edge, or curve
• Point or vertex
• Plane
• Cylinder
2. Normal – Select any of the following:
• Axis
• Edge
• Curve
• Plane
3. Parallel – Select a plane
4. Offset – Select either of the following:
• Plane
• Coordinate system
5. Angle – Select a plane
6. Tangent – Select a cylinder
7. Blend Section – Select a blend feature and a section number
Selecting Datum Planes
You can select datum planes using the following methods:
• Select the datum frame.
• Select the datum plane tag.
• Select the datum plane in the model tree.
• Search for the datum plane by name in the search tool.
PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Planes

Datum\Planes DATUM-PLANE.PRT
Task 1: Create datum planes in a part model.
.
2. Select the right surface.
3. Click Plane from the mini toolbar.
4. Drag the drag handle to an offset of 12.
5. Click OK in the Datum Plane dialog box.
7. Enable Plane Tag Display from the Show
group.
8. In the ribbon, select the Model tab.
9. With DTM1 still selected, click Plane from the

Datum group.
10. Drag the drag handle to an offset of 8.
11. Click OK in the Datum Plane dialog box.
12. Click in the background to de-select the datum
plane.
14. Click Plane .
15. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Through
from the drop-down list.

16. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select the
Display tab.
• Select the Adjust outline check box.
• Select Reference from the drop-down list.
• Select the surface again.
• Select Size from the drop-down list.
• Edit the Width and Height to 14 and 10,
respectively.
• Click OK and de-select the datum plane.
17. Click Plane .
18. Press CTRL and query-select the left-rear
cylinder surface and edge.
19. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Tangent

from the surface reference drop-down list.
20. Click Plane .

21. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and
datum plane RIGHT.
22. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Parallel
from the datum plane reference drop-down list.
• Click OK.
23. With DTM5 still selected, click Plane .
24. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2.
25. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Normal
from the datum plane reference drop-down list.
26. Click Plane .
27. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and the
surface.
28. Edit the Offset Rotation value to 10 or -10 to
attain the proper direction and click OK.
29. In the model tree, select DTM4 and click Edit
Display tab and click Flip.
• Click OK.
33. Disable Plane Tag Display .

Module 8
Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs

Creating Solid Extrude Features
You can create extruded features from 2-D sketches.
• Extrude sections perpendicular to the sketching

plane.
• Add or remove material from the model.
• Automatically add/remove material by changing
the direction.
Figure 1 – Viewing 2-D Sketches
Figure 3 – Extrude Feature Removing Material

Figure 2 – Extrude Feature Adding Material
Creating Solid Extrude Features

An extrude feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. It linearly extrudes a sketch perpendicular to
the sketching plane to create or remove material. You can either select the sketch first and then start
the Extrude tool, or you can start the Extrude tool and then select the sketch.
Note: In an assembly, you cannot create an extrude feature that adds material. You can only remove
material.
Automatically Adding and Removing Material
You can automatically add and remove material by changing the direction of an extrude feature either
in or out of a model. When this action is performed, the feature preview automatically updates.
Additionally, a pop-up message appears, alerting you to the fact that the material removal option has
been switched. Also, the dashboard Remove Material option is toggled accordingly.
This functionality is enabled by default. To turn off this functionality, you can set the auto_add_remove
configuration option to no. The default option is yes.
Consider the following when using Auto Add and Remove functionality:
• This functionality is available for both internal and external sketches.
• You must place the sketch on a single solid surface, which determines the add or remove status.
• This functionality is only available upon initial definition of the feature. It is intentionally unavailable
when you edit the feature or definition. This protects you from unintentionally flipping feature material.

PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Extrude Features
Extrude\Solid EXTRUDE.PRT
Task 1: Create solid extrude features.
.
2. In the model tree, select Sketch 1 and click
Extrude from the mini toolbar.
3. Drag the drag handle down below datum plane
TOP to a depth of 16.
5. Select Sketch 2 and click Extrude .

6. Notice the feature is adding material by default.
7. Drag the depth handle down into the model.

8. Notice the caption, and that the feature is now
removing material.
9. Edit the depth to 10.
10. Notice that Remove Material has been

selected in the dashboard.
11. Edit the height to -24.
12. Notice that the feature is now adding material.

14. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.
15. Select Sketch 3.
16. Notice that the feature is removing material.
17. Edit the depth to Through All .

Exercise 1: Creating the Crankshaft

Objectives
• Create multiple extrude features to create the Crankshaft.
Scenario
As part of the new design for the gas powered drill, you have been assigned to the crankshaft. Create
the crankshaft main journal and connecting rod journal, adhering to the existing sketch.
Extrude\Crankshaft CRANKSHAFT.PRT
Task 1: Create reference geometry and a sketch feature on CRANKSHAFT.PRT.
.
2. In the model tree, select datum plane TOP and
click Plane from the mini toolbar.
3. Drag the drag handle up to an offset value of 14,
editing it if necessary.
Properties tab.
• Edit the Name to OFFSET.
• Click OK.

5. With datum plane OFFSET still selected, press
CTRL and select datum plane RIGHT.
6. Click Axis from the mini toolbar.
7. In the model tree, right-click the newly created
axis and select Rename.
• Type CRANK_PIN and press ENTER.

9. Select datum plane FRONT, and click Sketch in
the Sketch dialog box.
types: .
12. Select datum axis CRANK_PIN as a new
reference.
13. Click Close in the References dialog box.
14. Select Center and Point from the Circle
types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
15. Sketch the circle with the center snapping to
the CRANK_PIN reference. Middle-click to stop
circle creation and edit the diameter to 10.
16. Click OK .
17. Click in the background to de-select the sketch.
Task 2: Create the main crankshaft journal.
1. Disable Plane Display and Axis Display .

2. In the model tree, select SKETCH_CRANK and
click Extrude from the mini toolbar.
3. Select the Options tab in the dashboard and
select Blind for Side 2.
4. Edit the depth for Side 1 to 46.5 and the depth
for Side 2 to 73.5.

6. Select SKETCH_LOBE and click Extrude .
7. Select the Options tab in the dashboard and
select To Selected for Side 1.
• Select datum plane LOBE_FRONT from the
model tree as the reference.
8. In the Options tab, select To Selected for
Side 2.
• Select datum plane LOBE_REAR from the
model tree as the reference.
Task 3: Create the cut for the connecting rod journal.

2. In the dashboard, click Remove Material , if
necessary.
• Click Change Material Direction .
• Edit the depth to Symmetric , and edit the
depth value to 10.

5. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current >
Yes to erase the model from memory.
This completes the exercise.
Adding Taper to Extrude Features

The Add Taper option enables you to create an angle within an Extrude feature that appears similar
to draft created using the Draft tool.
• All extruded surfaces are tapered.

• The sketch plane begins functioning as a pivot
plane.
• Positive or negative angle can be entered.
• A model dimension is created that is available
upon feature edit.
• Positive direction of angle is determined by
sketch plane reference.
• The enable_tapered_extrude configuration
option controls availability in the dashboard.
Figure 1 – Original Extrude Feature
Figure 2 – Add Taper Option Figure 3 – Extrude Feature with Taper Added

Adding Taper to Extrude Features
The Add taper option enables you to create an angle within an Extrude feature that appears similar
to the draft created using the Draft tool. You can enable and specify the taper angle in the Options
tab of the Extrude dashboard.
Consider the following when selecting the Add taper option:
• All extruded surfaces are tapered.
• The sketch plane begins functioning as a pivot plane.
• Positive or negative angle can be entered.
• A model dimension is created that is available upon feature edit.
• Positive direction of angle is determined by sketch plane reference.
– If the sketching plane is on a part surface, the section size reduces as the feature is extruded.
– If the sketching plane is off the surface of the part, the section size increases as the feature is
extruded.
– Positive draft angle direction is determined upon feature creation.
• The enable_tapered_extrude configuration option controls availability in the dashboard. This option
is enabled by default.
Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth

You can extrude a sketch to many different depth options.
• Extrude depth options:
– Blind
– Symmetric
– To Next
– Through All
– Through Until
– To Selected
– Side 1/Side 2
• Set using dashboard or
right-clicking drag handle.
Figure 1 – Extrude Depth Options

Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth
When you create an extrude feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth at which the feature extrudes can be
set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. You can specify the
desired depth option using the dashboard or by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window.
Extrude depth options include:
• Blind (Variable) – This is the default depth option. You can edit this depth value by dragging the drag
handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard.
• Symmetric – The section extrudes equally on both sides of the sketch plane. You can edit the total
depth at which the feature extrudes, just as you can with the Blind depth option. Therefore, the
Symmetric depth is essentially the same as a Blind Symmetric depth.
• To Next – This option causes the extrude to stop at the next surface encountered. A depth dimension
is not required, as the next surface controls the extrude depth.
• Through All – This option causes the section to extrude through the entire model. A depth dimension
is not required, as the model itself controls the extrude depth.
• Through Until – This option causes the extrude to stop at the selected surface. A depth dimension
is not required, as the selected surface controls the extrude depth. Note that the section must
pass through the selected surface.
• To Selected – This option causes the extrude to stop at the selected surface. A depth dimension is
not required, as the selected surface controls the extrude depth. Unlike the Through Until depth
option, the section does not have to pass through the selected surface.
• Side 1/Side 2 – You can independently control the depth at which the section extrudes on each side
of the sketching plane. By default, the section extrudes on Side 1; however, you can cause the
section to extrude on Side 2 as well. Any of the above options can be used for either side, except
for Symmetric.
• Side 1/Side 2 Blind – You can independently control the depth at which the section extrudes on each
side of the sketching plane. By default, the section extrudes on Side 1; however, you can cause the
section to extrude on Side 2 as well and in a negative direction if desired. Instead of creating an offset
datum plane as a sketch reference, you can provide a Blind negative depth value.
The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry present at the time (in the feature order)
when the extrude is created. Features created after the extrude feature is created do not cause the
extrude feature's depth to change.
Note: You can also switch depth options by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window.
PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth

Extrude\Depth EXTRUDE-DEPTH.PRT
Task 1: Create extrude features using different depth options.
2. In the model tree, select BLIND and click
5. Select SYMMETRIC and click Extrude .

6. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Symmetric
and edit the depth to 125.
8. Select TO_NEXT and click Extrude .

9. Edit the depth to To Next .

11. Select THRU_ALL and click Extrude .
12. Edit the depth to Through All and click
Remove Material .
14. Select THRU_UNTIL and click Extrude .

15. Edit the depth to Through Until and select
the surface.
17. Select TO_SURFACE and click Extrude .

18. Edit the depth to To Selected and select the
surface.
• Notice the contour at the extrude end.

21. Select TO_PLANE and click Extrude .
22. Edit the depth to To Selected and select
datum plane DTM1.
24. Select BOTH_SIDES and click Extrude .

26. Select the Options tab from the dashboard and
edit the Side 2 depth to To Next .

28. Select BOTH_SIDES_BLIND and click Extrude
.
30. Select the Options tab, edit the Side 2 depth to
Blind , and edit the depth to -150.
Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction

You can edit the depth direction and material direction of a feature.
• Depth Direction
– Side 1
– Side 2
• Material Direction
• Flip the directions using the arrows or the
dashboard.
Figure 1 – Same Feature, Flipped Material Direction
Figure 2 – Same Feature, Flipped

Depth Direction Figure 3 – Same Feature, Side 2 Depth Direction Added
Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction

When you create a feature, such as an extrude feature, there are two arrows that appear in the
interface, as shown in Figure 1.
In each image in Figure 1, the arrow on the right displays perpendicular to the section and denotes the
depth direction. The arrow on the left displays parallel to the section and denotes the material direction.
Specifying the Depth Direction
The depth direction arrow in the interface shows you which direction the feature is created with respect
to the sketching plane. You can flip the direction of the feature creation either by using the dashboard
or by clicking the arrow in the interface. In Figure 2, the depth direction was flipped.
By default, the feature is created in only one direction. This is known as Side 1. However, you can add
the second direction so the feature is created in both directions from the sketch plane. This second
side is Side 2. In Figure 3, the Side 2 depth direction was added to the feature.
Specifying the Material Direction
The material direction arrow in the interface shows you which side of the sketch material is removed
when creating a cut. This arrow only displays when removing material. Similar to the depth direction
arrow, you can flip the material direction either by using the dashboard or by clicking the arrow in the
interface. In Figure 1, the material direction for the cut was flipped from the inside to the outside.
Consequently, the material that was removed flipped from the inside to the outside.
PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction

Extrude\Direction FEATURE-DIRECTION.PRT
Task 1: Modify the depth and material directions for various extrude features.
2. In the model tree, select HEX and click Edit
3. Click Change Depth Direction from the
dashboard.
• Click Preview Feature from the dashboard.
4. Orient the model and notice the cut is now on
the underside of the model.
5. Click Resume Feature from the dashboard.

6. Click Change Material Direction from the
dashboard.
• Click Preview Feature . The hex feature is
now removing material on the outside of the
sketch.
Note: The hex feature is still removing material from
the model (the base).
7. Click Resume Feature .
8. Click Change Material Direction .
dashboard.
9. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard
Orientation.

10. Select OVAL and click Edit Definition .
• Notice the depth direction points upward.
• Edit the Side 2 depth to Blind and edit the
value to 28.
• Click Complete Feature .
12. Orient the model and view the underside of the

model.
Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch

The Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features, including extrude, revolve, blend,
and sweep features.
• Create solids or cuts.

• Edit the material thickness.
• Flip the side that thickens.
• Thicken open or closed sections.
Figure 1 – Creating a Thickened Cut
Figure 2 – Original Thicken Side Figure 3 – Thicken Side Flipped

Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch
The Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features, including extrude, revolve, blend, and
sweep features. When creating one of these features, you can use the Thicken sketch option to
assign a thickness to the selected section outline.
• You can create features that either add or cut away material.
• You can edit the material thickness, as shown in Figures 2 and 3.
• You can also change the side of the sketch where the thickness is added, or add thickness to both
sides of the sketch by using Change Thickness Side to toggle through the options.
• You can use this option on both open and closed sketches.
For example, you can use the Thicken Sketch option to sketch a circle and extrude it into a pipe shape
with a specified wall thickness, or you can use it to sketch a rectangle and extrude it into box-shaped
tubing, again with a specified wall thickness.
PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch

Extrude\Thicken THICKEN-SKETCH.PRT
Task 1: Thicken the sketches of various extrude features in a model.
2. Notice the hex cut in the bottom of the model.
Orientation.
4. In the model tree, select OVAL and click Edit

5. Click Thicken sketch from the dashboard.
• Edit the thickness value to 4.
6. Click Change Thickness Side from the

dashboard.

8. Select OVAL and click Edit Definition .
9. In the dashboard, edit the depth value to 10.
• Click Change Depth Direction .
• Click Remove Material .
10. Click Change Thickness Side to thicken on

both sides of the sketch.
Exercise 2: Thickening the Piston Wrist Pin Hole

Objectives
• Create a thicken feature to strengthen the piston part.
Scenario
You have determined that the piston model and the stress that will be generated by the wrist pin are
too high for the current amount of material around the wrist pin hole. Add additional material around
the wrist pin hole so it meets design criteria.
Extrude\Thicken PISTON.PRT
Task 1: Thicken the piston's wrist pin hole area.
2. Middle-click and drag to orient the model.

4. Select the Options tab from the dashboard and
select To Next for Side 1.
• Select To Next for Side 2.
• Click Thicken sketch .
• Edit the material thickness to 2.
• Click Change Thickness Side as necessary
to toggle the thickness to the outside of the
sketch.
Task 2: Cut out the center of the thickened extrude feature.

2. In the dashboard, click Remove Material .
• Edit the depth to Symmetric .
• Edit the depth to 14.
• Click Thicken sketch .
• Edit the material thickness to 2.
• Click Change Thickness Side as necessary
to toggle the thickness to the outside of the
sketch.


Creating Solid Revolve Features
You can create revolved features from 2-D sketches.
• Revolve a section about the axis of revolution in
a sketching plane.
• Add or remove material from the model.
• Select different axes of revolution.
– First geometry centerline
– Axis or edge
• Automatically add/remove material by changing
the direction.
Figure 1 – Viewing 2-D Sketches
Figure 2 – Same Revolved Sketch using Figure 3 – Removing Material using a

Different Axes of Revolution Revolve Feature
Creating Solid Revolve Features
A revolve feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. You can use a revolve feature to revolve a
sketch about an axis of revolution (in the sketching plane) to create or remove material. You can
either select the sketch first and start the Revolve tool, or you can start the Revolve tool and then
select the sketch.
When you select a sketch to be revolved, the feature uses, by default, the first geometry centerline
sketched within the section as the axis of revolution, as shown in the left image in Figure 2. However,
you can also select any other straight curve or edge, datum axis, or coordinate system axis as the
axis of revolution. If the sketch you are revolving does not contain a geometry centerline, you need
to select one of these other references as the axis of revolution. In the right image in Figure 2, the
axis of revolution has been changed to the horizontal datum axis. There are two rules for defining
the axis of revolution:
1. Geometry must be sketched only on one side of the axis of revolution.
2. The axis of revolution must lie in the sketching plane of the section.
You can revolve either an open or closed sketch. In Figure 2, a closed sketch is used to create the
feature that adds material, while an open section is used to create the cut that removes material
in Figure 3.
You can also thicken the sketch used to create a revolve feature.
Automatically Adding and Removing Material
You can automatically add and remove material by changing the direction of a revolve feature either
in or out of a model. When this action is performed, the feature preview automatically updates.
Additionally, a pop-up message appears, alerting you to the fact that the material removal option has
been switched. Also, the dashboard Remove Material option is toggled accordingly.
This functionality is enabled by default. To turn off this functionality, you can set the auto_add_remove
configuration option to no. The default option is yes.
Consider the following when using Auto Add and Remove functionality:
• This functionality is available for both internal and external sketches.
• You must place the sketch on a single solid surface, which determines the add or remove status.
• This functionality is only available upon initial definition of the feature. It is intentionally unavailable
when you edit the feature or definition. This protects you from unintentionally flipping feature material.
PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Revolve Features

Revolve\Solid REVOLVE .PRT
Task 1: Create solid revolve features using different axes of revolution.

Revolve from the mini toolbar.
3. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.
4. Right-click and select Axis of Revolution

Collector.
5. Highlight datum axis REV and then select it.
7. In the model tree, right-click Revolve 1 and click

Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.
8. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and
click Internal CL.
11. Select Sketch 2 and click Revolve .

• Notice the caption and that the feature is
removing material.
12. Edit the revolve angle to 75 and press ENTER.

14. Right-click Revolve 2 and click Edit Definition
.
15. Edit the revolve angle back to 360 and press
ENTER.
17. Click the Operations group drop-down menu

and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
18. Click Revolve from the Shapes group.
• Notice the feature is adding material by
default.
19. Edit the revolve angle to 90 and press ENTER.

20. Drag the revolve angle handle down into the
model.
• Notice the caption and that the feature is now
removing material.
21. Edit the revolve angle to 180.

Exercise 3: Completing the Crankshaft
Objectives
• Create multiple revolve features to complete the Crankshaft.
Scenario
You have been assigned to complete the crankshaft. Create the tapers on either end of the crankshaft.
Revolve\Solid CRANKSHAFT.PRT
Task 1: Create the sketch for the taper on one side of the CRANKSHAFT.PRT.
3. Select datum plane RIGHT, orient datum plane
TOP to face Top , and click Sketch in the Sketch
dialog box.
toolbar.
types: .
6. Select No Hidden from the Display Style
types drop-down menu from the In Graphics
toolbar.
7. Click References from the Setup group and
select the top and right surfaces of the main
shaft as new references.
9. Create the sketch:
• Click Centerline from the Datum group
and sketch a horizontal geometry centerline
down the center of the shaft.
• Zoom in on the right side of the sketch.
• Select Line Chain from the Line types
drop-down menu in the Sketching group and
sketch two lines, snapping the endpoints to
the references.
• Click Dimension and edit the sketch
dimensions as shown.
Orientation.
drop-down menu in the In Graphics toolbar.

Task 2: Cut the taper on the crankshaft using the sketch.
1. Click Revolve from the Shapes group.

2. Click Solid from the dashboard.
3. Click Remove Material from the dashboard.
Task 3: Create the sketch for the step on the other side of the CRANKSHAFT.PRT.
1. Click Sketch .
2. Click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box.
3. Click No Hidden .
4. Click Sketch View .
5. Click References and select the top and left
surfaces of the main shaft as new references.
7. Create the sketch:
• Click Centerline and sketch a horizontal
geometry centerline down the center of the
shaft.
• Select Corner Rectangle from the
Rectangle types drop-down menu in the
Sketching group and sketch the rectangle,
snapping to the references.
• Edit the dimensions as shown.
8. Click OK .
Orientation.
10. Click Shading .

Task 4: Cut the step on the crankshaft using the sketch.
1. Click Revolve .


Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle
You can revolve a sketch to many different angle depths.
Revolve angle options:

• Variable
• Symmetric
• To Selected
• Side 1/Side 2
Figure 1 – Variable Revolve Angle Depth
Figure 3 – Side 1 Revolve Angle To Selected,

Figure 2 – Symmetric Revolve Angle Depth Side 2 Revolve Angle Variable
Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle

When you create a revolve feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth angle at which the feature revolves
can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. Revolve angle
options include:
• Variable (Blind) – This is the default revolve angle option. You can edit this revolve angle value
by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. The
dashboard also contains four predefined angles that you can select: 90°, 180°, 270°, and 360°.
• Symmetric – The section revolves equally on both sides of the sketch plane. You can edit the total
angle at which the feature revolves just as you can with the Variable depth angle option. Therefore,
the Symmetric angle is essentially the same as the Variable Symmetric depth.
• To Selected – Selecting this option stops the revolve at the selected surface or datum plane. A
dimension for angle value is not required, as the selected surface controls the revolve angle. The
location where you select the datum plane or surface determines where the revolve stops in
relation to the axis of revolution. In Figure 3, the datum plane was selected to the right of the axis of
revolution. If the datum plane was selected to the left of the axis of revolution, the feature would
have revolved another 180° before stopping.
• Side 1/Side 2 – You can independently control the angle at which the section revolves on each side
of the sketching plane. By default, the section revolves on Side 1; however, you can set the section to
revolve on Side 2. Any of the above options can be used for either side except for Symmetric.
Note: You can also switch revolve angle options by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window.

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle
Revolve\Angle REVOLVE -ANGLE.PRT
Task 1: Use the various revolve angle options for a revolve feature.
Revolve from the mini toolbar.
3. Select datum axis REV.
5. Edit the revolve angle to 90 and click Change

Angle Side from the dashboard.
6. Select the Options tab from the dashboard.

7. Edit the Side 2 depth to Variable and type -30
as the value.
8. Edit the Side 2 depth to None.
9. Click Change Angle Side again.

10. Edit the depth to Symmetric .

11. Edit the depth to To Selected .
13. Select datum plane DTM2 to the right of the
axis of revolution.
14. Edit the Side 2 depth to Variable .

15. Drag the drag handle counter-clockwise to 90.
16. Edit the Side 2 depth to To Selected .

17. Select datum plane DTM2 to the left of the axis
of revolution.

Creating Profile Rib Features
A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section
sketch.
• Profile rib features require an open sketch.

• You can edit the side that thickens.
• You can flip to which side of the sketch you
want to create the rib.
• Rib geometry adapts to the adjacent, solid
geometry.
Figure 1 – Viewing Open Sketches
Figure 2 – Editing the Side that Thickens Figure 3 – Flipping Which Side the Rib is Created
Creating Profile Rib Features

Ribs are typically used to strengthen parts. A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion,
except that it requires an open section sketch. The rib also conforms to existing planar or cylindrical
geometry when it is extruded. After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Creo
Parametric automatically creates the profile rib feature by merging it with your model. The system
can add material above or below the sketch, and the thickness can be applied on either side, or be
symmetric about the sketch. The Profile Rib feature enables you to create rib in less time than it
would take for you to create and sketch a protrusion.
PROCEDURE - Creating Profile Rib Features

Rib\Profile RIB.PRT
Task 1: Create profile rib features on a part model.
2. Select Profile Rib from the Rib types
drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
3. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.
4. Drag the drag handle and edit the width to 75.

6. Click Profile Rib .
Graphics toolbar and select RIGHT.
9. Drag the drag handle and edit the width to 25.
• Notice that the rib is centered about the
sketch.
10. Click Change Thickness Option from the

dashboard.
• Notice that the rib moves to the left of the
sketch.
11. Click Change Thickness Option again.

• Notice that the rib moves to the right of the
sketch.
13. Reorient the model, as shown.

14. Click Profile Rib .
• Notice that the rib is above the sketch.
16. Click the arrow in the graphics window.

• Notice that the rib is now on the bottom of the
sketch.

Exercise 4: Creating Profile Rib Features
Objectives
• Create profile rib features.
Scenario
Rib features are used to add structural strength to parts. Product testing has indicated that the engine
block part needs an additional rib to strengthen it against premature failure. Your assignment is to
add the additional profile rib feature.
Rib\Profile ENG_BLOCK.PRT
Task 1: Create a profile rib on ENG_BLOCK.PRT.
.
2. Select datum plane RIB and click Sketch
from the Datum group.
types: .
toolbar.
• Select the three silhouette edges shown
(highlighted in green) as references, resulting
in a total of five specified references.
• Click Close in the References dialog box.
7. Zoom in and create the sketch, as shown:
• Right-click and select Line Chain . Sketch
a horizontal line starting from the diagonal
reference, stopping short of the vertical
reference.
• Right-click and select 3-Point / Tangent
End . Start the arc on the unfinished end
of the sketched line, and finish on the vertical
reference. Middle-click to stop sketching arcs.
• Right-click and select Dimension . Select
the left end of the arc and the horizontal
reference, and place the first dimension.
• Type 2 and press ENTER.
• Select the horizontal line you sketched
and the horizontal reference, and place the
second dimension.
• Type 5 and press ENTER.
• Edit the arc radius to 6.

9. Middle-click and drag to orient the model.
10. With the sketch still selected, select Profile Rib

from the Rib types drop-down menu in the
Engineering group.
• Select the References tab from the
dashboard.
• Click Flip and then edit the thickness to 2.
• Click Change Thickness Option from the
dashboard as necessary to set the rib feature
symmetric about the sketch.


Module 9
Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft

Common Dashboard Options - Hole Depth
You can drill a hole to several different depth options.
• Hole depth options:

– Blind
– Symmetric
– To Next
– Through Until
– To Selected
– Through All
– Side 1/Side 2
• Set using dashboard or
right-clicking drag handle Figure 1 – Hole Depth Options
Common Dashboard Options - Hole Depth

When you create a hole, the depth at which the hole drills into a model can be set in a variety of
ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. You can specify the desired depth
option using the Hole dashboard or by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window. Hole
depth options include:
• Blind (Variable) – This is the default depth option. You can edit this depth value by dragging the drag
handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard.
• Symmetric – The hole bores equally on both sides of the placement plane. You can edit the total
depth at which the hole bores, in the same way you can with the Blind depth option. The Symmetric
depth is actually a Blind Symmetric depth.
• To Next – This option ensures that the hole depth stops at the next surface encountered. A depth
dimension is not required, as the next surface controls the hole depth.
• Through Until – This option ensures that the hole stops at the selected surface. A depth dimension is
not required, as the selected surface controls the hole depth. Note that the hole must pass through
the selected surface.
• To Selected – This option ensures that the hole stops at the selected surface. A depth dimension is
not required, as the selected surface controls the hole depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option,
the hole does not have to pass through the selected surface.
• Through All – This option causes the hole to drill through the entire model. A depth dimension is not
required, as the model itself controls the hole depth.
• Side 1/Side 2 – You can independently control the hole depth on each side of the placement plane.
By default, the hole drills on Side 1; however, you can opt to drill the hole on Side 2 as well. Any of the
previous hole depth options, except Symmetric, can be used for either side.
The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry which is currently present (in the
feature order) when the hole is created. Features you create after the hole is created do not impact
the depth of the hole.
Note: You can also switch depth options by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window.

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options - Hole Depth
Hole\Depth HOLE_DEPTHS.PRT
Task 1: Redefine the depth options of the six holes.
2. Select BLIND_1 in the model tree and click Edit
3. Edit the depth value to 0.5.
4. Click Complete Feature from the Hole
dashboard.
5. Select BLIND_2 and click Edit Definition .

8. Select TO_NEXT and click Edit Definition .

9. Edit the depth to To Next .
11. Select TO_SELECTED and click Edit Definition

.
12. Edit the depth to To Selected and select the
surface.
14. Select THRU_ALL and click Edit Definition .


18. Select SYMMETRIC and click Edit Definition
. Notice that the hole placement plane is a
floating datum plane.
19. Edit the depth to Symmetric .

21. In the dashboard, select the Shape tab.
22. Edit the Side 2 depth to Through All .

and select Resume > Resume All to resume the
suppressed feature CUT and view the holes.

Exercise 1: Common Dashboard Options - Hole Depth
Objectives
• Specify hole cut depths.
Scenario
Edit the definition of a hole feature and test the available depth options. Get a good understanding of
each depth option by observing the results each option produces.
Hole\Depth CYLINDER.PRT
Task 1: Edit the depth of a hole feature.
.
2. Select HOLE_2 in the model tree and click Edit
Definition from the mini toolbar. Notice that
the current depth option is Blind.
3. Drag the depth handle to 20, editing the value
if necessary, and click Preview Feature
from the Hole dashboard. Then click Resume
Feature from the dashboard.
4. Cursor over the depth handle. Right-click and
select To Next. Click Preview Feature from
the dashboard. Then click Resume Feature
from the dashboard.
select Through All. Click Preview Feature
from the dashboard. Then click Resume
select To Selected. Middle-click to spin the
model and select the bottom surface of the fin,
as shown. Click Complete Feature .
Note: Depth options can also be specified by
selecting the flyout depth options from the
dashboard.

Creating Coaxial Holes
A coaxial hole is placed at the intersection of an axis and a surface.
• Placement references:
– Datum axis
– Surface or datum plane
• Offset references:
– None
Figure 1 – Selecting Placement References
Figure 2 – Coaxial Holes

Hole Creation Theory
When creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selecting placement (primary) and
offset (secondary) references. The first piece of geometry selected to place the hole is the placement
reference. Next, you either select additional placement references or offset references to further
dimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected as the placement reference
determines the type of hole being created.
Creating Coaxial Holes
To create a coaxial hole, you only select placement references. An axis is selected as the first
placement reference. This axis identifies the location of the hole. A second placement reference, either
a surface or datum plane, is then selected to specify the surface where the hole starts drilling into the
model. In Figures 1 and 2, the datum axis and front surface comprise the placement references.
Note: You can also view your selected references in the Placement tab of the dashboard.
Once the hole references are satisfied, the hole preview displays with a default diameter dimension
and depth value. You can edit these values by using the drag handles or dashboard, or by editing
the dimensions on the model.
PROCEDURE - Creating Coaxial Holes

Hole\Coaxial HOLES_COAXIAL.PRT
Task 1: Create two coaxial holes in the model: one Through All and the other of Blind depth.
.
2. Select the front surface and click Hole from
the mini toolbar.
4. Edit the diameter to 1.
dashboard.

7. Select the front surface and click Hole .
9. In the Hole dashboard, select the Placement
tab. Notice that your selected references are
added to the collector.
10. Edit the diameter to 1.5.

Exercise 2: Creating Coaxial Holes
Objectives
• Create axes through cylinders.
• Create linear axes.
• Create coaxial holes.
Scenario
To assemble the drill, you must create holes on a number of parts that act as bolt interfaces. You
create the holes with predefined shapes that remove material on the front engine block to enable
you to insert bolts during assembly.
Hole\Coaxial ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.PRT
Task 1: Create a datum axis through a cylinder and a coaxial hole feature.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display type:
.
2. Select the cylindrical surface and click Axis
3. In the model tree, right-click datum axis A_30
and select Rename .
4. Edit the datum axis name to GEARBOX1 and
press ENTER.
Note: The axis should remain selected between these
steps. Do not click in the graphics window, as this will
de-select it.
5. With datum axis GEARBOX1 still selected

(highlighted in green), click Hole from the
Engineering group.
• Press CTRL and select the surface shown as
the second placement reference.
• Click To Next from the dashboard.
• Edit the diameter to 6 and click Complete
Feature from the Hole dashboard.
Note: The datum axis GEARBOX1 serves as the first
placement reference. The surface reference is the
second placement reference. The surface reference
provides you with a starting location defining the
depth of the hole.

6. Select the axis GEARBOX1 from the model tree
and drag it onto the Hole 1 feature.
7. Expand the Hole 1 feature in the model tree
and notice that the axis GEARBOX1 is now
embedded in the hole feature and hidden.
Note: Embedding the axis GEARBOX1 in the hole
feature simplifies the model tree and adds additional
design intent to the model. Note that all embedded
datums are automatically assigned a hidden display
status.
Task 2: Create a second coaxial hole feature using an embedded datum axis.
1. From the Engineering group, click Hole .

2. In the dashboard, click Datum and select
Axis .
• Select the cylindrical surface shown in the
figure as the reference.
• Click OK to complete the feature.
3. Click Resume Feature to continue creating

the hole feature.
• Click To Next from the dashboard.
• Edit the diameter to 6 and click Complete
Feature .
4. Expand the Hole 2 feature in the model tree

and notice that the axis was created as an
embedded datum.

Task 3: Create a linear axis and a coaxial hole feature.

2. Click Hole .
3. In the dashboard, click Datum and select
Axis . Select the surface in the location shown
in the following figure. Right-click and select
Offset References. Press CTRL and select
the FRONT and RIGHT datum planes from the
model tree.
4. Double-click each distance dimension and type
17.50. Select the Properties tab from the Datum
Axis dialog box and type CYLINDER1 as the
Name. Click OK to complete the feature.

6. Click Resume Feature to continue creating
the hole feature.
• Edit the diameter to 5 and the depth to 10,
then click Complete Feature .
Note: You can edit values from the dashboard or
directly from the model.

8. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current > Yes to erase the model from memory.

Creating Linear Holes
A linear hole is created by selecting one placement reference and two offset references.
• Placement references:
– Datum plane or surface
• Offset references:
– Datum plane or surface
– Edge
– Datum axis
Figure 1 – Selecting Placement Reference
Figure 2 – Selecting Offset References Figure 3 – Completed Hole

Creating Linear Holes
To create a linear hole, a planar surface is selected as the placement reference. This surface identifies
where the hole starts 'drilling' into the model. Two offset references are then selected to dimensionally
constrain the hole feature. In Figure 1 on this slide, the front surface of the model is the placement
reference. In Figure 2, the top surface and datum plane are the offset references. You can select
offset references directly from the model or you can drag the green reference handles to the desired
reference.
You can view your selected references in the reference collectors in the Placement tab of the
dashboard. Within this tab, you can edit offset reference values as well as modify whether the hole is
offset or aligned to an offset reference. In Figure 2, the hole is aligned to the datum plane.

PROCEDURE - Creating Linear Holes
Hole\Linear HOLES_LINEAR.PRT
Task 1: Create two different linear holes on a model.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display type
.
2. Select the front surface and click Hole from
the mini toolbar.
3. Right-click and select Offset References
Collector.
4. Press CTRL and select the top surface and

datum plane DTM1.
5. Edit the offset values to 3.5 from the top surface
and 3.0 from datum plane DTM1.
6. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50 and the depth
value to 2.

dashboard.

Collector.
10. Press CTRL and select the top surface and
datum plane DTM1.
11. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab.

• In the Offset References collector, select
Align from the DTM1 drop-down list.
• Edit the offset value to 3.5 from the top
surface.
12. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50 and the depth
value to 2.

Exercise 3: Creating Linear Holes
Objectives
• Create linear holes.
Scenario
To assemble the drill, you must create holes on parts that act as bolt interfaces. You create the holes
with predefined shapes that remove material on the rear engine block to enable you to insert bolts
during assembly.
Hole\Linear ENG_BLOCK_REAR.PRT
Task 1: Create a linear hole feature.
2. Select the surface shown and click Hole from
the mini toolbar.
Collector. Press CTRL and select datum planes
FRONT and RIGHT in the model tree as the
offset references.
Tip: You can also drag the reference handles to snap
to reference.
4. Drag the location, diameter, and depth handles

to the approximate positions shown.
5. Edit the diameter to 5 and the depth to 10 in
the dashboard. Then select the Placement tab
in the dashboard and type 17.5 for the offset
values. Click Complete Feature .
Note: You can edit values from the dashboard or
directly in the model.
Tip: To move the hole to the opposite side of the
model, you can either drag the hole using the handles
or you can type a negative value. The negative value
moves the hole to the opposite side of the RIGHT
datum plane.

Creating Radial and Diameter Holes
Radial and diameter holes are created by selecting one placement reference and two offset
references.
• On a cylindrical surface:
– Create radial holes only.
– Select one offset reference for offset.
– Select one offset reference for angle.
• On a planar surface:
– Create either radial or diameter holes. Figure 1 – Radial and Diameter Holes
– Select one datum axis.
– Select one surface or datum plane for angle.
• Angle value based on quadrant of pick point from
axis.
Figure 2 – Cylindrical Surface Radial Hole
Figure 4 – Planar Surface Radial Hole
Figure 3 – Diameter Hole

Creating Radial Holes on a Cylindrical Placement Surface
You can create a radial hole on a cylindrical surface by selecting the cylindrical surface as the
placement reference. This cylindrical surface identifies where the hole starts “drilling” into the
model. For a radial hole, the specific location chosen on this surface determines the direction from
which the angle is measured. For example, in Figure 2, if the surface was chosen below the datum
plane, the measured angle would be 45° clockwise from the datum plane instead of measuring 315°
counterclockwise. To flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side of the datum plane, you
can simply specify a negative value.
Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole. You can select references
directly from the model or you can drag the red reference handles to the desired reference. The
first offset reference is a planar reference from which to offset the hole, and the second is a planar
reference to determine the angle. In Figure 2, the offset references are the front surface of the model
and the datum plane.
Creating Radial or Diameter Holes on a Planar Placement Surface
You can select a planar surface as the placement reference to create both a radial or diameter hole.
This placement reference identifies where the hole starts “drilling” into the model. For a radial hole, the
specific location chosen on this surface determines the location from which the angle is measured. For
example, in Figure 4, if the surface was chosen above the datum plane but to the right instead of the
left, the measured angle would be 65° counterclockwise from the datum plane instead of measuring
115° clockwise. To flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side of the datum plane, you can
simply specify a negative value.
Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole. The first offset reference is
an axis from which to locate the hole radially, and the second is a planar reference to determine the
angle. For the planar placement radial hole in Figure 4, the secondary references are datum axis A_2
and the datum plane. For the diameter hole in Figure 3, the secondary references are datum axis A_2
and the datum plane.
If a planar surface is selected as the placement reference, you can toggle the hole type between
Linear, Radial, and Diameter. When you toggle the hole type, the offset references automatically
toggle between radius, diameter, angle, or offsets.
PROCEDURE - Creating Radial and Diameter Holes

Hole\Radial_Diameter HOLES_RADIAL_DIAMETER.PRT
Task 1: Create radial and diameter holes on a model.
2. Select the cylindrical surface and click Hole
3. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.

4. Press CTRL and select datum plane TOP and the front surface.
• Edit the offset angle to 45 from datum plane
TOP.
• Edit the offset axial value to 0.40 from the
front surface.
6. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and the hole depth
to To Next .
dashboard.

10. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane TOP.

• Edit the hole Type from Linear to Radial.
• Edit the radius to 0.5 from datum axis A_2.
• Edit the angle to either 65 or -65 to attain the
proper direction above datum plane TOP.
12. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and the hole depth
to To Next .

16. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.
• Edit the hole Type from Linear to Diameter.
• Edit the diameter to 1.5 from datum axis A_2.
• Edit the angle to either 60 or -60 to attain the
proper direction from datum plane RIGHT.
18. Edit the hole diameter to 0.50 and the hole
depth to Through All .

Exercise 4: Creating Radial and Diameter Holes
Objectives
• Create a radial hole on a cylindrical surface.
Scenario
Add an additional hole to the chuck part for the chuck key.
Hole\Radial_Diameter CHUCK.PRT
Task 1: Create a radial hole feature.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display type:
.
2. Select the cylindrical surface in the location
shown and click Hole from the mini toolbar.
Note: It is important to select the surface in the
quadrant shown to ensure that the angle is measured
properly.
3. In the graphics window, right-click and select

Offset References Collector.
• Press CTRL and select datum planes FRONT
and TOP from the model tree.
• Select the Placement tab from the dashboard.
Edit the angle to 60 and the axial distance to
52.5.
• Edit the diameter to 5.5 and the depth to 8,
as shown.

dashboard.
Exploring Hole Profile Options

You can add a drill point to your hole and add countersinks or counterbores.
• Hole profile options include:
– Rectangle hole profile
– Drill point profile
– Add counterbore
– Add countersink
¨ Exit countersink
– Lightweight hole display
• Dimension drill point profile to:
– Shoulder
– Tip
Figure 1 – Hole Profile Options
Figure 2 – Drill Point Dimensioning Schemes Figure 3 – The Shape Tab

Exploring Hole Profile Options
When you create a hole in Creo Parametric, the default profile is a rectangular shape, as shown in the
top hole in Figure 1. This is the Rectangle hole profile. Other hole profiles and options available include
the following, and are shown in Figure 1, respectively:
• Drill point profile – Adds the drill tip to the hole profile. You can edit the drill tip angle.
• Add counterbore – Creates a counterbore on the hole. You can edit the counterbore diameter
and depth.
• Add countersink – Creates a countersink on the hole. You can edit the countersink angle and
diameter. You can also create an exit countersink on a Through All hole.
• Lightweight hole display – Creates a hole that displays as a ring on the placement surface. Toggling
a hole feature to lightweight hole display affects the model's mass properties.
Dimensioning the Hole Depth for the Drill Point Profile
When you select the drill point profile, you can dimension the hole depth following two different
methods:
• Shoulder – You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the end of the shoulder. This is
shown in the left image in Figure 2.
• Tip – You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the tip of the hole. This is shown in
the right image in Figure 2.
The Dashboard Shape Tab
At any time during the hole creation process, you can select the Shape tab from the dashboard to view
the hole profile you are creating. This hole profile image updates automatically as you modify hole
profile options, enabling you to preview the final result. Within the Shape tab, you can perform the
following operations:
• Edit hole diameter and depth.
• Edit drill tip angle.
• Edit counterbore diameter and depth.
• Edit countersink diameter and angle.
• Enable an exit countersink on a Through All hole.
PROCEDURE - Exploring Hole Profile Options

Hole\Profiles HOLE_PROFILES.PRT
Task 1: Redefine four holes to modify their profiles.
2. Select HOLE_1 in the model tree and click Edit
3. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole Profile .
dashboard.
5. Select HOLE_2 and click Edit Definition .

• Select the Shape tab to view the profile.
• Select Tip Depth from the drop-down list.

• Click Counterbore .

• Click Countersink .
• Edit the hole depth to Through All .
• Select the Exit Countersink check box.

EXTRUDE_CUT feature and compare holes.

16. In the dashboard, click Rectangle Hole Profile
.
• Click Lightweight Hole .

19. Notice the Hole Icon for HOLE_2 updates in the
model tree.
Creating Shell Features

The Shell feature hollows out the inside of a solid model, leaving a shell of a specified wall thickness.
• To create a basic shell feature:

– Select surfaces for removal.
– Specify thickness.
Figure 1 – Original Model
Figure 2 – Shelled Model with Surfaces Removed Figure 3 – Hollowed Out Model
Creating Shell Features

Shell features remove surfaces to hollow out a design model, leaving walls with specified thickness
values. There are two parts to the creation of a basic shell feature:
• Select Surfaces for Removal — Select the surface(s) you want to remove from the model. You
may decide not to remove surfaces from the shell, which results in the creation of a closed shell. A
closed shell is an entirely hollowed out part.
• Thickness — Specify the thickness of the model walls that remain.
You create shells in the design process to support your design intent. However, be aware that several
features could reference a shell created early in the design process.
Shells can be created using the Lead or Follow workflow. You can use drag handles or the dashboard
to modify the thickness of the shell feature. Clicking Change Thickness Direction in the dashboard
is equivalent to specifying a negative shell value.
PROCEDURE - Creating Shell Features

Shell\Shell SHELL.PRT
Task 1: Create a shell feature in a model.
2. Click Shell from the Engineering group.
3. Click Complete Feature from the Shell
dashboard to create a hollow shell.
4. Select Shell 1 and click Edit Definition from

the mini toolbar.
5. Select the top surface to remove it.
6. Edit the thickness to 20.
8. Select Shell 1 and click Edit Definition .

9. Press CTRL and select the left and right surfaces
to remove them.

Exercise 5: Shelling the Fuel Tank
Objectives
• Create shell features that remove single surfaces.
Scenario
To complete the drill’s fuel tank, you hollow out the part and create an opening using a shell which
provides the drill with a gasoline storage location.
Shell\Shell FUEL_TANK_SHELL.PRT
Task 1: Create a shell feature.
2. Select the surface shown and click Shell
3. Edit the shell thickness to 1 and click Preview
4. Click Resume Feature and edit the thickness

to 3.
5. Click Complete Feature from the Shell
dashboard.


Creating Draft Features
Draft features are typically used as finishing features in molded and cast parts.
• Draft features consist of:
– Draft surfaces
– Draft hinges
– Pull direction
– Draft angles
Figure 1 – Draft One or Multiple Surfaces
Figure 2 – Same Model, Same Draft Angle, and Different Draft Hinges
Creating Draft Features Theory

You can use draft features as finishing features in molded and cast parts, or anywhere sloped or angled
surfaces need to be created. You can define several types of draft features by selecting different
combinations of curves, edges, surfaces, and planes for the draft surfaces, draft hinges, pull direction,
and split plane (optional). Drafts can add or remove material from a model.
A basic draft feature consists of the following four items:
• Draft surfaces — These are the surfaces that are to be drafted. You can select a single surface,
multiple individual surfaces, or loop surfaces as the draft surfaces. In Figure 1, the left image has one
surface drafted, while the right image has four surfaces drafted.
• Draft hinge — Determines the location on the model that remains the same size after the draft
is created. The draft surfaces pivot about their intersection with this plane. There does not have to
be a physical intersection. Rather, the intersection can be extrapolated. You can select a datum
plane, solid model surface, curve chain, or surface quilt as the draft hinge. In Figure 2, the same
model was drafted at the same angle, but with the specified draft hinge progressively lower in
the model, as highlighted.
• Pull direction — Direction that is used to measure the draft angle. The pull direction is also called the
reference plane. By default, the pull direction is the same as the draft hinge. The direction reference
is used to define the draft angle direction, and the draft angle is measured normal to this reference.
You can select a datum plane, planar model surface, linear reference such as an edge or two points,
or a coordinate system axis. The mold opening, or pull direction, is usually normal to this plane.
• Draft angle — Values range from -89.9 degrees to +89.9 degrees. When you specify the draft angle,
you can reverse the direction from which material is added or removed by typing a negative value,
clicking Reverse Angle in the dashboard, or right-clicking the angle drag handle and selecting
Flip Angle.
You can also toggle the different collectors for draft surfaces, draft hinges, and pull direction by
right-clicking in the graphics window.
Best Practices
If possible, create draft features as some of the last features of your model.
PROCEDURE - Creating Draft Features
Draft\Draft DRAFT.PRT
Task 1: Draft three features using three different methods.
.
2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down
menu in the Engineering group.
3. Select the cylinder surface to draft.
4. In the dashboard, select the References tab.
• Click in the Draft hinges collector and select
the top cylinder surface.
• Edit the draft angle to 10.
• Click Reverse Angle .
5. Click Complete Feature from the Draft
dashboard.
6. Click Draft .
7. Press CTRL and select the four vertical surfaces
of the center extrude feature to draft.
8. In the dashboard, click in the Draft hinges
collector and select datum plane DTM2.
• Edit the draft angle to -10.
10. Click Draft .

11. Press CTRL and select the four vertical surfaces
of the left extrude feature to draft.
12. Right-click and select Draft Hinges.
13. Select the top surface of the main protrusion.
14. Edit the draft angle to -10.

16. Orient to the FRONT view and compare the
differences in the results of the rectangular
protrusions.
Creating Basic Split Drafts

Split draft enables you to apply different draft angles to different portions of a surface.
• Split options include:
– No split
– Split by split object
¨ Select a plane
– Split by draft hinge
• Side options:
– Independently
– Dependently
– First/Second side only
• Draft tangent surfaces check box Figure 1 – Drafting Sides Independently
Figure 2 – Drafting Sides Dependently Figure 3 – Drafting First Side Only

Creating Draft Splits Theory
You can create draft features with or without split. Splitting a draft enables you to apply different
draft angles to different portions of a surface.
Splitting the Draft
You can split a draft feature in two different ways:
• Split by Split Object – Split the draft using a specified datum plane or surface.
• Split by Draft Hinge – Split the draft using the specified draft hinge.
Side Options
Once you split the draft, there are four different options available to control how the draft is handled on
either side of the split:
• Draft sides independently – Enables you to specify two independent draft angles for each side of the
drafted surface. If you use this option, the system adds a second draft angle to the dashboard. In
Figure 1, both sides are drafted independently with different draft angles.
• Draft sides dependently – Enables you to specify a single draft angle, with the second side drafted in
the opposite direction at the same draft angle. In Figure 2, both sides are drafted dependently.
• Draft first side only – Drafts only the first side of the surface, with the second side remaining in the
neutral, undrafted position. In Figure 3, only the first side is drafted.
• Draft second side only – Drafts only the second side of the surface, with the first side remaining in the
neutral, undrafted position.
Draft Tangent Surfaces
By default, the system automatically drafts any surfaces tangent to those selected for drafting. For
example, you can select half of a cylinder, and the system drafts the entire 360 degrees around the
cylinder. You can disable this behavior by clearing the Draft tangent surfaces check box in the Options
tab of the dashboard.
PROCEDURE - Creating Basic Split Drafts

Draft\Split DRAFT_SPLIT.PRT
Task 1: Redefine three draft features and add split to them.
.
2. Select Draft 1 and click Edit Definition from
the mini toolbar.
3. In the dashboard, select the Split tab.
• Edit the Split option to Split by draft hinge.
• Select Side option Draft first side only.
4. Click Complete Feature from the Draft
dashboard.
5. Select Draft 2 and click Edit Definition .
6. Select the Split tab.
• Select Side option Draft sides independently.
7. Edit Angle 2 to -10.
9. Select Draft 3 and click Edit Definition .

10. Select the Split tab.
• Select Side option Draft sides dependently.

Module 10
Creating Rounds and Chamfers

Creating Rounds Theory
Rounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitions between existing geometry.
• Rounds can add or remove material.

• You can select edges or surfaces.
Figure 1 – Round Preview: Adding Material
Figure 2 – Round Preview: Removing Material Figure 3 – Completed Rounds
Creating Rounds Theory

Rounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitions between existing geometry. In Figure 3,
one round adds material and the other removes material. When creating round features on a model,
Creo Parametric awaits the selection of edges and/or surfaces to be used as references. The round
tool adapts according to the references that you select to create the round feature.
After the references are selected, the round preview displays with a default radius dimension, which
can be modified by using the radius drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the
dashboard. In Figures 1 and 2, the round preview is shown.

Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges
The rounds created by selecting edges are constructed tangent to the surfaces adjacent to the
selected edges.
• You can select one or more

edge.
• Rounds propagate around
tangent edges.
Figure 1 – Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges
Figure 2 – Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges
Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges

You can create rounds by selecting an edge or a combination of edges. Each edge that you select is
rounded. If you select an edge that has adjacent tangent edges, the round automatically propagates
around those tangent edges by default. The rounds are constructed tangent to the surfaces adjacent
to the selected edges.
In Figures 1 and 2, the edges selected for rounding are highlighted on the left. The resulting rounds are
shown on the right. Note that because the edges in Figure 2 are tangent to other edges, the round
feature is automatically created on the tangent edges.
PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges

Round\Edges ROUND_EDGE_1.PRT
Task 1: Create rounds on an L-Block.
2. Select the outer edge and click Round from
the mini toolbar.
3. Press CTRL and select the inner edge.
4. Edit the radius value to 2.
5. Click Complete Feature from the Round
dashboard.

6. Notice that the left round adds material, while
the right round removes material.
Task 2: Create tangent rounds on an oval block.

select ROUND_EDGE_2.PRT, and click Open.
2. Select the outer edge and click Round from
the mini toolbar.
3. Press CTRL and select the inner edge.
4. Edit the radius value to .25.
6. Notice that the left round adds material, while

the right round removes material.
7. Also notice that although only two edges were
selected, all edges tangent to the selected
edges were rounded.

Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge
Rounds created by selecting a surface and edge are constructed tangent to the surface and pass
through the edge.
• You can select a surface and
an edge.
• Rounds propagate around
tangent edges.
Figure 1 – Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge
Figure 2 – Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge

Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge
You can create rounds by selecting a surface first and then an edge. These round features are
constructed tangent to the selected surface and pass through the selected edge. If the selected
edge has adjacent tangent edges, the round automatically propagates around those tangent edges
by default.
In Figures 1 and 2, the surfaces and edges selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting
rounds are shown on the right.
PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge

Round\Surface-Edge SURF-EDGE_1.PRT
Task 1: Create rounds on a stepped block.
2. Select Round from the Round types
3. Press CTRL and select the surface and edge.
dashboard. Notice that the round adds material.
6. Click Round .
9. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the
round removes material.

Task 2: Create tangent rounds on an oval block.

select SURF-EDGE_2.PRT, and click Open.
2. Click Round .
4. Edit the radius value to 0.60.
6. Notice that the round adds material. Also notice

that although only one edge was selected, the
round follows all edges tangent to the selected
edge.
Exercise 1: Creating Rounds on the Rear Engine Block 1

Objectives
• Create an edge to surface round.
Scenario
Create an edge to surface round on a boss that is part of the engine block.
Round\Surface-Edge ENG_BLOCK_REAR_1.PRT
Task 1: Attempt an edge chain round on ENG_BLOCK_REAR_1.PRT.
Graphics toolbar and select ROUND.
• Press CTRL and select the two edges shown.
Edit the radius to 2.
• Click Preview Feature from the Round
dashboard. Notice that the Troubleshooter
dialog box appears because the rounds
overlap.
• Click Cancel in the Troubleshooter dialog box
and click Yes.
• Click Cancel Feature from the Round
dashboard. Click Yes.

Task 2: Create a surface-to-edge round on ENG_BLOCK_REAR_1.PRT.
1. Click Round .
• Select the surface shown.
• Press CTRL and select the edge shown.
• Edit the radius to 4.

dashboard.

Exercise 2: Creating Rounds on the Gearbox Front
Objectives
• Create basic rounds.
Scenario
To reduce stresses and remove sharp edges, you add rounds to the front gearbox.
Round\Gearbox GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT
Task 1: Create the first of three edge round features on GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT.
2. Select the large circular edge as shown and
click Round from the mini toolbar.
• Drag the radius handle to 5.
3. Press CTRL and select the small circular edge

to add it to the round set.
4. Type 3 as the radius in the Round dashboard,
and notice that both the rounds update.
5. Select the Sets tab in the Round dashboard.
Select the Edge:F7(PROTRUSION) reference,
right-click and select Remove.
Note: You can also de-select references by
pressing CTRL and selecting the reference.
dashboard.
7. Select the large circular edge as shown and
click Round .
8. Edit the radius to 2 and click Complete Feature
.

Task 2: Create the second of three edge round features on GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT.

Graphics toolbar and select 3D_BACK.
drop-down menu in the Engineering group,
select the edge shown, and edit its radius to 2.
4. Click Round .
• Select the surface as shown.
• Press CTRL and select the edge shown.
• Drag the radius handle to 6 and click
Complete Feature .
Task 3: Create the final edge round feature on GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT.

1. Select the RIB_ROUND from the model tree and
click Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.
• Press CTRL and select the two additional
edge references shown.


Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces
Rounds created by selecting two surfaces can span gaps or engulf existing geometry.
• You can select two surfaces.
• Rounds can span gaps.
• Rounds can engulf existing
geometry.
• You can manage round pieces.
Figure 1 – Round that Spans a Gap
Figure 2 – Round that Engulfs Existing Geometry

Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces
You can create rounds by selecting two surfaces. The rounds are constructed tangent to the selected
surfaces. If the selected references have adjacent tangent geometry, the round automatically
propagates around that geometry by default.
For rounds created by selecting two surfaces, the system creates the round between the selected
surfaces; therefore, it has the ability to span gaps or engulf existing geometry. In addition, rounds
created by selecting two surfaces can also provide more robust round geometry in cases where rounds
created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry.
In Figures 1 and 2, the surfaces selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting rounds are
shown on the right.
Managing Round Pieces
When a round traverses a gap, as shown in Figure 1, it comprises two different pieces. You can manage
the round pieces individually in the dashboard by specifying their display.
PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces

Round\Surface-Surface SURF-SURF_1.PRT
Task 1: Create rounds on a block with a hole in it.
dashboard. Notice that the round spans the gap.

6. Select Round 1 and click Edit Definition .
7. In the dashboard, select the Pieces tab.
• Edit Piece 2 to be Excluded in the drop-down
list.
round no longer spans the gap.
Task 2: Create rounds on another block.

select SURF-SURF_2.PRT, and click Open.
2. Click Round .
6. Notice that the round engulfs the existing

material.

Exercise 3: Creating Rounds on the Rear Engine Block 2
Objectives
• Create a surface to surface round.
Scenario
Create a surface to surface round on a boss that is part of the engine block.
Round\Surface-Surface ENG_BLOCK_REAR_2.PRT
Task 1: Create a surface to surface round on ENG_BLOCK_REAR_2.PRT.
Graphics toolbar and select ROUND.
• Press CTRL and click the two surfaces, as
shown.

dashboard.

Creating Full Rounds
Full rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to the surface it replaces.
• You can select two edges.

• You can select three surfaces.
Figure 1 – Full Round Created by Selecting Two Edges
Figure 2 – Full Round Created by Selecting Three Surfaces
Creating Full Rounds

Full rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to the surface it replaces. You can create full
rounds either by selecting a pair of edges or a pair of surfaces. If a pair of edges is selected, the system
initially creates individual rounds on each edge, and can be quickly converted to a full round either
from the dashboard or by right-clicking. If a pair of surfaces is selected, a third surface must also be
selected as the surface to remove with the creation of the round.
In either case, the full round is constructed with a rounding surface forming a tangent connection
between the selected references. If the selected references have adjacent tangent geometry, the
round automatically propagates around that geometry.
In Figure 1, the full round was created by selection of two edges. The edges selected are highlighted
on the left, and the resulting round is shown on the right. This round is removing material. In Figure 2,
the full round was created by selecting three surfaces. The surfaces selected are highlighted on the
left, and the resulting round is shown on the right. This round is adding material.
PROCEDURE - Creating Full Rounds

Round\Full ROUND_FULL_1.PRT
Task 1: Create rounds on a block by selecting edges.
3. Press CTRL and select the two edges.
4. Right-click and select Full round.
dashboard. Notice that the round removes
material.

6. Select the left edge and click Round from
the mini toolbar.
7. Press CTRL and select the right edge.
8. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab and click
Full round.
round adds material.
Task 2: Create rounds on a block by selecting surfaces.

select ROUND_FULL_2.PRT, and click Open.
2. Click Round .
4. Press CTRL and select the bottom cut surface.

6. Click Round .

8. Press CTRL and select the top outer surface.
Exercise 4: Creating Full Rounds on the Connecting Rod

Objectives
• Create full rounds.
Scenario
To reduce stresses and remove sharp edges, add rounds to the connecting rod.
Round\Full CONNECTING_ROD.PRT
Task 1: Create a full round on CONNECTING_ROD.PRT.
2. Select the front edge and click Round from
the mini toolbar.
3. Press CTRL and select the back edge.
4. Right-click and select Full round.

dashboard.

Task 2: Create edge rounds on CONNECTING_ROD.PRT.
1. Select the left edge and click Round .

2. Press CTRL and select the right edge.
3. Edit the radius to 2.

Creating Round Sets

Round sets enable you to create rounds of different radii in a single round feature.
• Create multiple round sets in a single round feature.

• Each round set can have a different radius value.
• Each set may be created by selecting different entities.
Figure 1 – Three Round Sets in a Single Round Feature
Creating Round Sets

Round features can contain multiple sets of references within a single round feature. When references
for a round are selected, they can be selected as part of the same set, or in additional sets. Each round
set can have different radius values. Each set may have also been created differently, such as a full
round versus a round created by selecting surfaces. You can add new sets, or delete existing set for
a round using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, or simply by selecting a new
reference on the model. When you create a new round set, you can view the rounds from the other
sets in the same feature in their previewed state.
In Figure 1, all three rounds are created within the same round feature. Each round is from a different
set. The round in the left image was created by selecting an edge. The round in the middle image
was created by selecting a surface and edge. The round on the right is a full round. Notice that the
rounds have different radius values.
Round sets are important for two reasons:
1. Simplification – Round sets enable you to decrease the number of features in the model tree.
2. Transitions – Round sets enable you to manually specify the appearance of the transitional
surface where the round sets intersect.

Round Set Selection Guidelines
When an edge is selected for rounding, the following two guidelines determine which set the round
belongs to:
• Selecting edges while pressing CTRL enables you to add rounds to the same set.
• Selecting edges without pressing CTRL enables you to create a round in a new set.
PROCEDURE - Creating Round Sets

Round\Sets ROUND-SETS.PRT
Task 1: Create three round sets in a single round feature.
2. Select the edge and click Round from the
mini toolbar.
4. Right-click and select Add set. Notice that the

first round remains previewed.
6. Edit the radius value to 6.5.
7. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab.

• Click *New set. Notice that the previous two
rounds are still previewed.
• Press CTRL and select the two edges.
8. Click Full round from the dashboard.
9. In the Sets tab, select Set 2.

10. Edit the Radius value from 6.5 to 5.

dashboard.
12. Notice the single round feature created in the
model tree.

Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges
Chamfers add or remove material by creating a beveled surface between adjacent surfaces and
edges.
• You can select one or more

edge.
• Chamfers can add or remove
material.
• Chamfers propagate around
tangent edges.
Figure 1 – Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges
Figure 2 – Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges
Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges

Similar to round features, chamfers add or remove material by creating a beveled surface between
adjacent surfaces and edges selected as references. You can create chamfers by selecting an edge or
a combination of edges. Each edge that you select is chamfered. Similar to rounds, if the selected
edge for chamfering has adjacent tangent edges, the chamfer automatically propagates around
those tangent edges by default.
In Figures 1 and 2, the edges selected for chamfering are highlighted on the left. The resulting chamfers
are shown on the right. Note that because the edges in Figure 2 are tangent to other edges, the
chamfer feature is automatically created on the tangent edges.
PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges

Chamfer\Edges CHAMFER-EDGE_1.PRT
Task 1: Create chamfers on an L-Block.
2. Select the right edge and click Edge Chamfer
3. Press CTRL and select the left edge.
4. Edit the D value to 1.75.
5. Click Complete Feature from the Edge
Chamfer dashboard.

6. Notice that the left chamfer adds material, while
the right chamfer removes material.
Task 2: Create tangent chamfers on an oval block.

select CHAMFER-EDGE_2.PRT, and click Open.
2. Select the edge and click Edge Chamfer .
3. Drag the D value to 3.
5. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer

types drop-down menu in the ribbon.
6. Select the edge.
7. Edit the D value to 1.
9. Notice that the inner chamfer adds material,

while the outer chamfer removes material.
10. Also notice that although only two edges were
selected, all edges tangent to the selected
edges were chamfered.

Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes
There are several different ways to dimension a chamfer to capture desired design intent.
• Dimensioning
schemes include:
– DxD
– D1 x D2
– Angle x D
– 45 x D
Figure 1 – Four Different Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

with the Same Geometry
Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

There are several different dimensioning schemes available when creating chamfers:
• D x D – Size of chamfer is defined by one dimension, as shown by the upper-right chamfer in Figure 1.
• D1 x D2 – Size of chamfer is defined by two dimensions, as shown by the upper-left chamfer in
Figure 1.
• Angle x D – Size of chamfer is defined by a linear and angular dimension, as shown by the lower-left
chamfer in Figure 1.
• 45 x D – Size of chamfer is defined by a linear dimension at a 45-degree angle, as shown by the
lower-right chamfer in Figure 1. This type is only valid for perpendicular surfaces.
You can edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme either by using the dashboard or by right-clicking in
the graphics window and then selecting the new scheme.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

Chamfer\Schemes DIM-SCHEMES.PRT
Task 1: Create four chamfer dimensioning schemes on a block.
2. Select the edge and click Edge Chamfer
3. Drag the D value to 7.
Chamfer dashboard.

6. In the dashboard, edit the dimensioning scheme
to D1 x D2.
7. Edit the D1 value to 7 and the D2 value to 7.

to Angle x D.
11. Edit the Angle value to 45 and the D value to 7.

to 45 x D.

Graphics toolbar and click FRONT.
18. Press CTRL, select all four Chamfer features,
and click Edit Dimensions from the mini
toolbar. Notice that all four chamfers have
the same geometry, but contain different
dimensioning schemes.

Creating Chamfer Sets
Chamfer sets enable you to create chamfers of different dimensioning schemes or D values in a
single chamfer feature.
• Create multiple chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.

• Each chamfer set can have a different D value.
• Each set may be created with a different dimensioning scheme.
Figure 1 – Three Chamfer Sets in a Single Chamfer Feature
Creating Chamfer Sets

Chamfer features can contain multiple sets of references within a single chamfer feature. When
references for a chamfer are selected, they can be selected as part of the same set, or in additional sets.
Each chamfer set can have different D values. Sets can also be created with different dimensioning
schemes, for example, a D x D chamfer versus an Angle x D chamfer. You can add new sets to a
chamfer using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, or simply by selecting a new
reference on the model. When you create a new chamfer set, you can view the chamfers from the
other sets in the same feature in their previewed state.
In Figure 1, all three chamfers are created within the same chamfer feature but with different
dimensioning schemes. Each chamfer is from a different set. The D x D chamfer in the left image was
created by selecting an edge. In the middle image, the Angle x D chamfer was created by selecting
an edge. The D1 x D2 chamfer on the right was created by selecting a different edge. Notice that
the chamfers are different D values.
Chamfer sets are important for two reasons:
1. Simplification – Chamfer sets enable you to decrease the number of features in the model tree.
2. Transitions – Chamfer sets enable you to manually specify the appearance of the transitional
surface where the chamfer sets intersect.
Chamfer Set Selection Guidelines
When an edge is selected for chamfering, the following two guidelines determine which set a chamfer
belongs to:
• Selecting edges while pressing CTRL enables you to add chamfers to the same set.
• Selecting edges without pressing CTRL enables you to create chamfers in a new set.

PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfer Sets
Chamfer\Sets CHAMFER-SETS.PRT
Task 1: Create three chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.
2. Select the edge and click Edge Chamfer
3. Drag the D value to 2, editing it, if necessary.
4. Select the next edge. Notice that the first

chamfer remains previewed.
5. Edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme to Angle
x D.
6. Edit the Angle value to 19 and the D value to 6.5.

• Click *New set. Notice that the previous two
chamfers are still previewed.
• Select the edge.
• Edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme to D1
x D2.
• Edit the D1 value to 3 and the D2 value to 1.75.
Chamfer dashboard.

Exercise 5: Creating Chamfers on the Crankshaft
Objectives
• Create chamfers.
Scenario
In this exercise, you create multiple chamfers on the crankshaft.
Chamfer\Sets CRANKSHAFT.PRT
Task 1: Create the first of three chamfer features on CRANKSHAFT.PRT.
2. Select the far-left circular edge and click Edge
Chamfer from the mini toolbar.
3. Edit the chamfer value to 2 in the Chamfer
dashboard.
4. Select the far-right circular edge of the

crankshaft (without pressing CTRL).
5. Drag the distance handle to 1, then edit its value
to 2, as shown.
Chamfer dashboard.
Note: The chamfer sets are independent of each
other. Selecting references without pressing CTRL
creates independent sets.Selecting while pressing
CTRL adds/removes references to the same set.
Task 2: Create the second of three chamfer features on CRANKSHAFT.PRT.
1. Select the edge shown and click Edge Chamfer
.
• Select the D1 x D2 dimension scheme in the
dashboard.
• Edit D1 to 2 and D2 to 3 in the dashboard.
• Click Interchange Distances .
• Click Preview Feature in the dashboard.

• Select the Angle x D dimension scheme in
the dashboard.
• Click Switch Surfaces .
• Edit the angle to 15 and the distance to 3 by
double-clicking the model dimensions.
Task 3: Create the final chamfer feature on CRANKSHAFT.PRT.

1. Press CTRL, select the two edges shown, and
click Edge Chamfer .
• Edit the chamfer distance to 2.
Note: Unlike the previous chamfers, this one has
added material.


Module 11
Creating Patterns

Direction Patterning in the First Direction
The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction.
• Direction and increments based on selected

reference.
• Select a first direction reference.
• Specify number of members and increment.
• Specify additional, optional dimensions to
increment.
Figure 1 – Direction Patterning an Extrude

in One Direction
Figure 2 – Editing the Direction Pattern and Pattern Leader
Patterning Features Theory

The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features, or pattern of features.
When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified
dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned
instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature, or
pattern leader. The pattern leader is always the first member in an expanded pattern feature in the
model tree. In the graphics window, the pattern leader's instance “dot” border is always bolder than
the other pattern members, as shown in Figure 1. In Figure 2, the width of the pattern leader has been
modified between the images third from the left and fourth from the left. Consequently, all pattern
members' widths have been updated as well.
Direction Patterning in the First Direction Theory
The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction. The following items are
required to create a direction pattern in one direction:
• Specify a First Direction reference – The pattern extends in a direction based on the reference
selected. If you select a plane or surface, the pattern extends normal to the reference, and if you
select a linear curve, edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You can also toggle the
direction in which the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the figures, the first direction reference
specified is the datum plane.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction – Type the number of members in either
the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader.
In Figure 2, the model in the left-most image has four pattern members, while the model in the image
second from the left has six pattern members.
• Specify the increment in the first direction – The increment is the spacing between pattern members.
You can edit the increment in the dashboard or in the graphics window or by dragging the drag
handle.
Incrementing Additional Dimensions
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the same time to create a "varying"
pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first direction:
• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader – The pattern leader displays
with all dimensions used to create the feature.
• Specify the increment value – In Figure 2, the extrude feature height was incremented by 0.5.
Consequently, each pattern member's height increases 0.5 over the previous pattern member.
PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the First Direction

Pattern\Direction_First DIR_PATTERN _1ST.PRT
Task 1: Direction pattern an extrude feature.
.
2. Select Extrude 2 and click Pattern from the
mini toolbar.
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to
Direction.
4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Flip First
Direction from the Pattern dashboard.
5. Edit the number of members to 4 and edit the
spacing to 2.
Note: You can also drag the increment handle to
edit the increment.
6. Click Complete Feature from the Pattern
dashboard.
7. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 2, if necessary and
click Edit Dimensions from the mini toolbar.
8. Edit the number of patterned extrudes from 4
to 6.
9. Click twice in the background to de-select all
features.

10. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 2 and click Edit
11. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab.
• Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector.
• Select the 1 height dimension and edit the
increment to 0.5.

13. Click in the background to de-select all features.
14. In the model tree, expand the pattern feature.

15. Select Extrude 2 [1] and click Edit Dimensions
.
16. Edit the width from 2 to 3.
features.

Direction Patterning in the Second Direction
The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction.
• Direction and increments based on selected
references.
• Select a first and second direction reference.
• Specify number of members and increments in
first and second directions.
increment.
Figure 1 – Direction Patterning a Group

in Two Directions
Figure 2 – Direction Patterning a Group in Figure 3 – Direction Pattern, Two Directions,

Two Directions Result Two Additional Dimensions

instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature,
or pattern leader.
Direction Patterning in the Second Direction Theory
The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in two directions. The following items are required
to create a direction pattern in two directions:
• Specify the First and Second Direction references – The pattern extends in the directions based on
the references selected. If you select a plane or surface, the pattern extends normal to the reference,
and if you select a linear curve, edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You can also
flip the direction the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the figures, the first direction reference
specified is datum plane RIGHT, and the second direction reference specified is datum plane FRONT.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions – Type the number of
members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members can be
different for each direction. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In the
figures, the first direction has four pattern members, while the second direction has five pattern
members.
• Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions – The increment is the spacing between
pattern members. You can edit the increment in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging
the drag handle. Again, the increment can be different between the first and second directions. In the
figures, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second direction increment is 2.
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction, or both, at the same time
to create a varying pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the
first and second directions:
• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader – The pattern leader displays with
all dimensions used to create the feature. The dimension selected can be different for each direction.
Note also that you can select multiple dimensions for each direction if desired.
• Specify the increment value – Again, the increment value for each direction can be different. In Figure
3, the extrude feature width was incremented by -0.2 in the first direction, and the extrude feature
height was incremented by 0.5 in the second direction. Consequently, each pattern member's
width decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the height increases by 0.5 in the second direction
over the previous pattern member.
PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the Second Direction

Pattern\Direction_Second DIR_PATTERN _2ND.PRT
Task 1: Direction pattern an extrude feature.
.
2. Press CTRL, select Extrude 2, Round 1 and click
Group from the mini toolbar.
3. Right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP and select
Rename .
• Type OVAL and press ENTER.
4. Select Group OVAL and click Pattern from
the mini toolbar.
5. In the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type
to Direction.
• Select datum plane RIGHT as the first direction
reference.
• Edit the number of members to 4 and edit the
spacing to 2.50.
6. In the dashboard, click in the Direction 2

Reference collector.
• Select datum plane FRONT as the second
direction reference.
• Click Flip Second Direction .
• Edit the second direction number of members
to 5 and edit the second direction spacing to
2.

dashboard.
8. Select Pattern 1 of OVAL and click Edit

• Select the 2 extrude width dimension and edit
the increment to -0.20.
• Press CTRL and select the R0.1 radius
dimension and edit the increment to 0.075.
10. In the Dimensions tab of the dashboard, click in
the Direction 2 Dimension collector.
• Select the 1 extrude height dimension and
edit the increment to 0.50.
12. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of OVAL.

13. Select Group OVAL and click Edit Dimensions
• Edit the width from 1 to 0.75.
features.

Exercise 1: Patterning Vents Using a Two-Directional Pattern
Objectives
• Create direction patterns in two directions.
Scenario
You are assigned to increase the number of vents on the engine cover model. Complete this task
quickly using a directional pattern.
Pattern\Direction_Second ENGINE_COVER.PRT
Task 1: Pattern the side vents on ENGINE_COVER.PRT.
Orientations and select LEFT.
3. Select the GROUP SIDE_VENT and click Pattern
4. Edit the pattern type to Direction in the
dashboard and create a pattern, as shown:
• Select datum plane FRONT from the model
tree as the direction reference.
• Right-click and select Direction 2 Reference.
• Select datum plane TOP from the model tree.
• Click Flip Second Direction in the
dashboard.
• Edit the number of members in the first
direction to 3 and its spacing to 23.
• Edit the number of members in the second
direction to 5 and its spacing to 8.
dashboard.

Axis Patterning in the First Direction
The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specified axis.
• Direction based on selected axis.
• Specify number of members and angular
spacing.
• Set angular extent.
• Specify member orientation.
increment.
Figure 1 – Axis Patterning an Extrude

in One Direction
Figure 2 – Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing a Dimension

or pattern leader.
Axis Patterning in the First Direction Theory
The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specified axis. The following items are
required to create an axis pattern in one direction:
• Specify the axis reference – The pattern extends angularly about the selected reference axis. You
can toggle the angular direction the pattern extends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the
figures, the axis reference specified is datum axis AXIS.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction – Type the number of members in
either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members includes the pattern
leader. In Figure 2, there are six pattern members.
• Specify the angular spacing – Specified in degrees, you can edit the angular spacing in the
dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle.
There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creating axis patterns:
• Set Angular Extent – This option automatically spaces the pattern members equally about the axis
reference. You can also select values of 90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or
type in the desired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular extent value
supersedes the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular extent has been set to 360 degrees.
• Member orientation – Determines how the pattern members are to be oriented about the axis
reference. With the Follow axis rotation check box selected by default, pattern members are
oriented such that the relationship between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern
member. In Figure 2, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation. With the check box for this
option cleared, all pattern members have a constant orientation that is the same as the pattern
leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image displays all members having a constant orientation.
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the same time to create a varying
pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first direction:
• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. The pattern leader displays with all
dimensions used to create the feature.
• Specify the increment value – In Figure 2, the extrude feature length was incremented by 0.3 in the
right-most image. Consequently, each pattern member's length increases by 0.3 over the previous
pattern member.
PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the First Direction

Pattern\Axis_First AXIS_PATTERN _1ST.PRT
Task 1: Axis pattern an extrude feature.
.
2. Select Extrude 2 and click Pattern from the
mini toolbar.
to Axis.
• Select datum axis AXIS.
angle increment to 45.
4. In the dashboard, click Set Angular Extent .
• Edit the Angular Extent value from 360 to 90.
5. Edit the Angular Extent value back to 360.

dashboard.

• Clear the Follow axis rotation check box.

Definition .
• Select the 2 length dimension and edit the
increment to 0.3.

Definition .
14. In the dashboard, click Flip Pattern Direction .

Exercise 2: Creating Flywheel Blades Using an Axis Pattern
Objectives
• Create axial patterns.
Scenario
You are assigned to increase the number of blades on the flywheel model. Complete this task quickly
using an axial pattern.
Pattern\Axis_First FLYWHEEL .PRT
Task 1: Create an axis pattern on the FLYWHEEL .PRT.
.
2. Select Group BLADE and click Pattern from
the mini toolbar.
to Axis and create a pattern, as shown:
• Select datum axis CRANK from the model as
the axis reference.
• Drag the angle handle on the model to
approximately 45°.
• Edit the number of members in the dashboard
from 4 to 6, and then drag the angle handle
on the model to approximately 30°.
• In the dashboard, click Set Angular Extent .
• Edit the number of members in the dashboard
from 6 to 16.
dashboard. The pattern takes a few moments to
calculate.

Axis Patterning in the Second Direction
The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specified axis.
• Direction based on selected axis.
• Specify number of members and angular
spacing in first and second directions.
• Set angular extent.
• Specify member orientation.
increment.
Figure 1 – Axis Patterning a Group in
Two Directions
Figure 2 – Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing Dimensions

or pattern leader.
Axis Patterning in the Second Direction Theory
The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially and outward from a specified axis. The
following items are required to create an axis pattern in those two directions:
• Specify the axis reference – The pattern extends angularly about the selected axis reference in the
first direction and radially outward from the axis in the second direction. You can toggle the angular
direction the pattern extends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axis reference
specified is datum axis AXIS.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the first and second directions – Type the number of
members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members can
be different for each direction. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In
the figures, the first direction has eight pattern members, while second direction has three pattern
members.
• Specify the angular spacing in the first direction – Specified in degrees, you can edit the angular
spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle.
• Specify the radial spacing in the second direction – This increment is the spacing between pattern
members outward from the axis reference. Again, you can edit the increment in the dashboard, in the
graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. In the figures, the spacing increment is 2.5.
There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creating axis patterns:
• Set Angular Extent – This option automatically spaces the pattern members equally about the axis
reference. You can also select values of 90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or
you can type the desired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular extent
value supersedes the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular extent has been set to 360 degrees.
• Member orientation – Determines how the pattern members are to be oriented about the axis
reference. With the Follow axis rotation check box selected by default, pattern members are
oriented such that the relationship between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern
member. In Figure 2, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation. With the check box for this
option cleared, all pattern members have a constant orientation that is the same as the pattern
leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image displays all members having a constant orientation.
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction, or both, at the same time
to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the
first and second directions:
• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. The pattern leader displays with all
dimensions used to create the feature. The dimension selected can be different for each direction.
Also note that you can select multiple dimensions for each direction, if desired.
• Specify the increment value – Again, the increment value for each direction can be different. In the
right-most image of Figure 2, the left hole diameter was incremented by 0.075 in the first direction,
and the right hole diameter was incremented by 0.25 in the second direction, along with the extrude
height incremented by 1. Consequently, each pattern member's left hole diameter increases by
0.075 in the first direction and the right hole diameter increases by 0.25 in the second direction with
the extrude height increasing 1 over the previous pattern member.
PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the Second Direction

Pattern\Axis_Second AXIS_PATTERN _2ND.PRT
Task 1: Axis pattern an extrude feature.
.
2. Press CTRL, select Extrude 2, Hole 1, Hole 2
and click Group from the mini toolbar.
3. Right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP and select
Rename .
• Type OVAL and press ENTER.
4. Select Group OVAL and click Pattern from
the mini toolbar.
to Axis.
• Select datum axis AXIS as the pattern center.
direction to 8.
• Click Set Angular Extent .
6. Edit the number of members in the second
direction to 3 and edit the spacing value to 2.5.
dashboard.

• Clear the Follow axis rotation check box.

Definition .
• Select the Follow axis rotation check box.
• Zoom in on the pattern leader.
• Select the left 0.25 hole diameter dimension
and edit the increment to 0.075.
14. Click in the Direction 2 Dimension collector.
• Select the right 0.25 hole diameter dimension,
press CTRL and select the 1 height value
dimension.

Orientation.

Exercise 3: Creating Exhaust Cuts in the Muffler Using a Two-Directional Axis
Pattern
Objectives
• Create axial patterns in two directions.
Scenario
You are assigned to create exhaust cuts in the muffler model. Complete this task quickly using an
axis pattern in two directions.
Pattern\Axis_Second MUFFLER_PATTERN .PRT
Task 1: Create a two-directional axis pattern on MUFFLER_PATTERN .PRT.
.
Orientations and select TOP.
3. Select EXHAUST and click Pattern from the
mini toolbar.
4. Select the pattern type Axis in the dashboard
and create a pattern, as shown:
• Select datum axis CENTER from the model
as the axis reference.
direction from 4 to 6.
• Click Set Angular Extent to evenly space
the instances.
• Edit the number of members in the second
direction to 5 with a spacing of 3.

7. Select Pattern 1 of EXHAUST and click Edit
• Select the Dimensions tab from the
dashboard and activate the Direction 2
dimension collector.
• Select the 0.5 dimension from the graphics
window and edit the Increment to 3.


Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types
The Direction pattern also enables you to pattern with different direction types.
• First and Second Direction types:

– Translate
– Rotate
– Coordinate System
Figure 2 – Translation and Rotation Directions Figure 3 – Completed Pattern
Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types

The Direction pattern option enables you to pattern using different direction types for the first and
second directions. By default, both the first and second directions are set to translate. However,
you may specify either Translate , Rotate, or Coordinate System for the first and second directions
independently.
This capability enables you to capture translation and rotation within a single pattern. Alternatively,
you can create a pattern of a pattern to accomplish similar results.
In the figures, a translation is used as the first direction, and a rotation is used for the second direction.

Creating Reference Patterns of Features
A Reference pattern enables you to pattern a feature on any other underlying patterned features.
• You can reference pattern:

– Features
– Groups
– Patterns along an existing pattern
• Reference pattern types:
– Feature
– Group
– Both
Figure 1 – Reference Patterning a Group
Figure 2 – Editing Reference Pattern Reference Types
Creating Reference Patterns of Features

A Reference pattern patterns a feature on any other underlying patterned features. If you create a
new feature on any member of an existing pattern, you can Reference pattern that new feature. In
Figure 1, an extrude feature was created and patterned. A cut and round feature was then created
on the pattern leader’s extrude feature. Consequently, the cut and round feature can be Reference
patterned. If the quantity or spacing of the underlying pattern is updated, the quantity or spacing of
the Reference pattern is automatically updated.
Depending on how the features were created, there are three different Reference pattern types that
can be created:
• Feature – The Reference pattern references an existing feature pattern. In Figure 2’s left image, the
round feature is being Reference patterned based on the existing axis pattern.
• Group – The Reference pattern references either a group or existing pattern of a pattern. In Figure
2’s middle image, an axis pattern is then direction patterned, resulting in a pattern of a pattern. The
round feature is Reference patterned based on the axis pattern that was patterned.
• Both – The Reference pattern references both an existing feature pattern and a group pattern. In
Figure 2’s right image, the round is Reference patterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern)
and the group pattern (the pattern of the axis pattern).
Note: When creating a Reference pattern of a sketch-based feature (such as an extrude), you must either
Reference pattern the sketch first, group the sketch and sketch-based feature together, or use an internal
(unlinked) sketch. To simplify Reference pattern creation, an internal (unlinked) sketch is recommended.
Reference patterns of other feature types, such as rounds or holes, are not an issue.

PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns of Features
Pattern\Reference_Features REF-PATTERN .PRT
Task 1: Reference pattern a group.
2. In the model tree, press CTRL, select
OVAL_CUT, ROUND_2 and click Group from
the mini toolbar.
3. Select Group LOCAL_GROUP and click Pattern
Task 2: Direction pattern AXIS_PATTERN and Reference pattern a round feature.

Orientation.
2. In the model tree, select AXIS_PATTERN and
click Pattern .
to Direction.
• Select datum plane FRONT.
• Click Flip First Direction .
spacing to 50.
5. Select ROUND_1 and click Pattern .
• Notice the default pattern type is Reference
pattern and that the default Reference type
is Feature. Also notice that the Reference
pattern only occurs on the axis pattern.

6. In the Pattern dashboard, edit the Reference
type to Group.
• Notice that the round only patterns once per
direction pattern group.
7. Edit the Reference type to Both.

• Notice that the round patterns on each
member of the axis pattern, as well as each
member of the Direction pattern of the axis
pattern.

Exercise 4: Patterning Rounds on the Cylinder Fins Using Reference Patterns
Objectives
• Create reference patterns of features.
Scenario
You are assigned to add some rounds to the fins on the cylinder model. Complete this task quickly
using a Reference pattern.
Pattern\Reference_Features CYLINDER_2.PRT
Task 1: Create and reference pattern a round on the cooling fins of CYLINDER_2.PRT.
2. Create a full round, as shown:
• From the In Graphics toolbar, click Saved
Orientations and select FIN_CUT.
• Select Round from the Round types
• Select the upper surface of the fin, as shown.
• Press CTRL, right-click to query the underside
surface of the same fin, and select it.
• Select the outer thin surface of the fin.
dashboard.
3. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
4. Select Round 1 and click Pattern from the
mini toolbar.

5. Notice that the Reference pattern type is
specified in the dashboard.
Creating Reference Patterns of Components

You can use a Reference pattern to quickly assemble multiple instances of a component.
• Assemble component to pattern member.

• Reference pattern the component.
• Number of Reference patterned components
updates automatically.
Figure 1 – Reference Patterning a Bolt
Figure 3 – Updating the Number of

Figure 2 – Reference Patterning a Bolt Bosses and Holes
Creating Reference Patterns of Components

Reference patterns can also be used at the assembly level. For example, if a bolt is assembled into a
hole which is a pattern member of a pattern of holes, the bolt can be Reference patterned, as shown in
Figures 1 and 2. To do this, a component is placed into each member of the underlying pattern. If the

number of patterned holes changes, the number of patterned bolts updates accordingly, as shown
in Figure 3.
PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns of Components

Pattern\Reference_Components REF_PAT _COMP.ASM
Task 1: Reference pattern the bolts in the assembly.
2. In the model tree, select each component to
highlight it in the graphics window.
3. With the last BOLT _8.PRT selected, click
Pattern from the mini toolbar.
dashboard.
Note: The BOLT _8.PRT is not assembled to the
pattern leader, which is the top hole in BASE.PRT.
5. Edit the selection filter to Part.

6. Select the top BOLT _8.PRT from the graphics
window and click Pattern .

Features check box and click OK.
10. Expand BASE.PRT, select Pattern 4 of EAR, and
click Edit Dimensions from the mini toolbar.
11. Edit the number of pattern members from 6
LOCAL GROUPS to 8 LOCAL GROUPS.
features.
13. Expand COVER.PRT, select Pattern 1 of Extrude
4 and click Edit Dimensions .
14. Edit the number of pattern members from 6
EXTRUDES to 8 EXTRUDES.
toolbar.
• Notice that the number of Reference
patterned bolts also increases to 8.

Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members
You can either delete an entire pattern or disable individual members of a pattern.
• Delete – Deletes the pattern and the feature

used to create the pattern.
• Delete pattern – Deletes the pattern but keeps
the original feature.
• Click the black dots to disable that particular
pattern member.
Figure 1 – Using the Delete Function
Figure 2 – Using the Delete Pattern Function Figure 3 – Disabling Individual Pattern Members
Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members

You have three options available for deleting patterns or members of a pattern:
• Delete the pattern and the original feature – You can select the pattern, right-click, and select Delete
to delete the pattern, in addition to the original feature used to create the pattern. Note also that
any other patterns that reference this feature are deleted as well. In Figure 1, the extrude feature
and pattern are to be deleted. The system indicates that the Reference pattern which consists of
the cut and round is also going to be deleted.
• Delete the pattern – You can select the pattern, right-click, and select Delete Pattern to delete
the pattern, leaving the original feature intact, as shown in Figure 2. Note that the Reference pattern
which consists of the cut and round is also updated automatically.
• Disable individual members of a pattern or Reference pattern – When previewing a pattern or
Reference pattern, each pattern instance is represented by a black dot. If any of the pattern preview
dots are selected, their display changes to white, which disables that particular member of the
pattern. To restore the pattern member, click the white dot at any time while redefining the pattern.
In Figure 3, the second and fourth pattern members have been disabled. Notice that the Reference
pattern has updated automatically.

PROCEDURE - Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members
Pattern\Delete DELETE_PATTERN .PRT
Task 1: Delete patterns and disable pattern members.
2. In the model tree, right-click OVAL_PATTERN
and select Delete .
• Notice that all features are deleted in addition
to all features of the REF_PATTERN Reference
pattern.
5. Select REF_PATTERN and click Edit Definition

6. Click the black dots for members 2 and 4 to
disable those members.
8. In the model tree, right-click REF_PATTERN and

select Delete Pattern .
9. In the model tree, right-click OVAL_PATTERN
and select Delete Pattern .
• Notice the original instance is still intact.
Task 2: Delete and disable additional patterns and pattern members.

Orientation.
2. Select ROUND_REF_PATTERN and click Edit
Definition .
3. Click the top black dot for each patterned
cluster to disable them.

5. In the model tree, right-click ROUND_REF_
PATTERN and select Delete Pattern .
6. Right-click ROUND_1 and select Delete .
7. Click OK in the Delete dialog box
8. In the model tree, expand PATTERN _OF_AXIS_

PATTERN .
9. Select AXIS_PATTERN and click Edit Definition
.
10. Click the top black dot to disable that member.
12. Select PATTERN _OF_AXIS_PATTERN and click

Edit Definition .
13. Click the top, bottom, left, and right black dots
to disable those cluster members.

Module 12
Assembling with Constraints

Understanding Assembly Theory
An assembly is a collection of parts and other sub-assemblies that you combine using constraints.
• Create assembly models from standardized templates.

• Capture assembly design intent using constraints.
• Create assembly constraints.
Figure 1 – An Assembly Model is Comprised of Parts
Understanding Assembly Theory

There are multiple methods to assemble components using Creo Parametric. Assembling components
with constraints is one of the primary methods used to create Creo Parametric assemblies.
Like part models, all new assembly models share several characteristics in common. By creating your
assembly models from standardized templates, you save time by avoiding the need to repeatedly
define company standard information. This standard template enables all engineers to have a
consistent starting point. After you create and name the new assembly, you can begin adding parts to
it. Assemblies contain design intent in the same way that part models contain design intent. Assembly
design intent is based upon which component is assembled first, and the constraints that you use
during the assembly process. Design intent is important because it ensures that your assembly updates
in a predictable manner when edited and regenerated.
Sub-assemblies share all of the same characteristics as assemblies. In fact, a sub-assembly is nothing
more than an assembly that is assembled into another assembly.
Creo Parametric provides several types of constraints, such as Coincident, Distance, Parallel, Normal,
and Angle Offset. To easily utilize these constraints, select the Automatic option to enable Creo
Parametric to automatically determine the constraint type based upon the orientation and position of
the component and the references you select.
Note: Every assembled component contains a Placement node in the model tree that you can expand
to view the constraints used in that component's placement. You must enable the Placement folder
filter to view this node.
Assembling with component interfaces is the second method available for assembling components.
This method is especially useful when assembling common components because it can significantly
reduce the number of selections that you make when constraining a component. By using component
interfaces, you save the referenced interfaces on the common part. Then, when you place the common
part, you only need to select the assembly references.

Creating New Assembly Models
Your company can create customized templates that you can use to create new assembly models.
• Create new assemblies in the New dialog

box.
• Use customized assembly templates.
• Assembly templates include:
– Datums
– Units
– Parameters
– Layers
– View Orientations
Figure 1 – New Assembly Created Using Template
Figure 2 – Examples of Parameters Figure 3 – Layers Created from Assembly Template
Creating New Assemblies

Assemblies are composed of parts and other sub-assemblies that you combine. You can create new
assembly models within Creo Parametric either by clicking File > New, or by clicking New . You can
type the name of the assembly and select whether you want to use a default template. Unless you
select the Empty template, the new assembly displays in the graphics window with the default datum
features associated with the selected template.
Using Templates
New assemblies should be created using a template. Assembly templates are similar to part templates
in that they enable you to create a new assembly with predefined general information. Your company
has most likely created customized templates to use that contain your company's standards. Using a
template to create a new assembly is beneficial because it ensures that regardless of who created it,
the assembly contains the same consistent set of information, including:
• Datums – Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and default coordinate system, all
named appropriately.
• Units – Most companies have a company standard for units in their assemblies. Creating every
assembly with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are not made.
• Parameters – Every assembly can contain the same standard metadata information.
• Layers – When every assembly contains the same layers, it is easier to manage both the layers and
items on them.
• View Orientations – Ensuring that every assembly contains the same standard view orientations
aids the modeling process.

Viewing and Creating Parameters
Parameters are metadata information that can be included in an assembly template or created by a
user in his or her own part or assembly. Parameters are important because they enable you to add
additional information to part and assembly models. Parameters can have several uses:
• Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be driven by relations.
• Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, the parameter Cost might have
a different value for each instance.
• Parameter values can be reported in Drawings, or viewed with data management tools such as
Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions.
• User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, or component) or to a feature
or pattern.
You can view an assembly’s parameters and create new ones by clicking Parameters from the
Model Intent group in the Model ribbon tab.
You can create parameters that accept the following types of values:
• Real Number – Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3, and PI.
• Integer – Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257.
• String – Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (letters or numbers).
• Yes/No – Accepts either the YES or NO value.
PROCEDURE - Creating New Assembly Models

File\New_Assembly NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create a new assembly by selecting a template.
1. Without an open model, notice only the Home
tab displays in the ribbon.

• Select Assembly as the Type and Design as
the Sub-type.
• Edit the Name to new_assembly.
• Click OK.
mmks_asm_design template.
• Click OK.
.
• In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the

6. Explore the default datum features created in
the graphics window and model tree.
7. Notice that the ribbon has populated with tabs

specific to the type of open file.
8. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree . Notice the default layers.
9. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to open
the Model Properties dialog box.
11. Click Close.
12. Click Parameters from the Model Intent group.

13. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter Value field.
• Edit the value to NEW ASSEMBLY and press ENTER.
• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED.
• Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default Value of NO.
• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to ASSY_NUMBER.
• Edit the parameter type to Integer.
• Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289.
• Click OK.
Graphics toolbar.
• Notice the default view orientations.
15. Click in the background of the graphics window.

Task 2: Create a new assembly by selecting a different template.

• Select Assembly as the Type and Design as
the Sub-type.
• Edit the Name to select_template.
• Click OK.
inlbs_asm_design template and click OK.
3. Again, notice the datum features.
4. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.
6. Click Close.
Understanding Constraint Theory

Constraints determine how a part is located in an assembly.
• Most constraints are applied between parts
within an assembly.
– Select component reference.
– Select assembly reference.
• Constraints are added one at a time.
• The box of the active constraint is highlighted.
• Double-click a constraint's tag to modify it.
Figure 1 – Selecting Placement References
Figure 2 – Viewing the Active Constraint Figure 3 – Modifying a Constraint

Understanding Constraint Theory
You can assemble components using constraints. Constraints determine how a part is located within an
assembly. There are many different types of constraints that you can use to assemble components.
Most constraints are applied between parts within an assembly. They specify the relative position
of a pair of references. The system adds constraints one at a time. Use placement constraints in
combinations to specify both placement and orientation. It is important to select your constraints based
on the design intent of your assembly, so that when you edit a dimension on a part, the assembly
reacts as predicted.
When you create a constraint, its references highlight on the models and the Constraint Type displays.
For most constraints, it is necessary that you select two references, a component reference on the
component being placed, and an assembly reference from an item in the assembly. When the first
reference has been selected, a green, dashed line connects the first selected reference to your cursor
until you select the second reference, as shown in Figure 1.
When multiple constraints are created, a box surrounding the active constraint highlights. For example,
in Figure 2, the Oriented constraint is the active constraint. To activate a different constraint, simply
select the displayed name or select it from the Placement tab in the dashboard. You can then
right-click to perform a desired action.
You can also double-click a constraint's tag in the graphics window to edit the constraint, as shown in
Figure 3. Editing options include switching the constraint type, changing the constraint orientation, and
viewing as well as deleting the constraint's placement references.
You can toggle Constraints To Connections in the dashboard to convert existing connections to
constraints within an assembly.
Understanding Assembly Constraint Status

Ideally, when you complete a component's placement, it should be at a Fully Constrained status.
• Range of assembly constraint status:

– No Constraints
– Partially Constrained
¨ Packaged
– Fully Constrained
– Constraints Invalid
• The system can also Allow Assumptions to facilitate
component placement.
Figure 1 – No Constraints
Figure 2 – Range of Assembly Constraint Status

Understanding Assembly Constraint Status
You can assemble a component into an assembly by using placement constraints. Constraints
determine how a part is located within an assembly. As constraints are added, a component becomes
further and further constrained and progresses through a range of constraint statuses which display in
the dashboard. The constraint status range includes:
• No Constraints – No constraints have been added to the component being assembled, as shown in
Figure 1. The preview color of components having no constraints is purple.
• Partially Constrained – At least one constraint has been applied to the component being assembled,
but not enough constraints have been added to render the component fully constrained. That
is, the orientation of the component can still be changed, so its position is open to interpretation.
The left-most image in Figure 2 shows the component Partially Constrained. The preview color
of partially constrained components is purple.
• Fully Constrained – Enough constraints have been applied to the component being assembled that it
cannot move. Ideally, when you complete the component placement, the component should be
fully constrained. The right-most image in Figure 2 is Fully Constrained. The preview color of fully
constrained components changes to orange.
• Constraints Invalid – Two constraints conflict with how they are trying to place the component in
the assembly. If this condition arises, you must edit or delete one or more constraints to eliminate
the conflict.
Allowing Assumptions
The Allow Assumptions option can become available when placing a component in an assembly. When
this option is selected, the system makes additional constraint assumptions to help fully constrain the
component. If you clear this check box, the system returns the status to Partially Constrained. If you
properly further constrain a component that is fully constrained with Allow Assumptions enabled, the
Allow Assumptions option disappears and appears as Fully Constrained, as there is no longer a need
for the system to make assumptions. The middle image in Figure 2 is Fully Constrained as long as the
Allow Assumptions option is enabled. If the Allow Assumptions check box is cleared, the component is
no longer Fully Constrained, as it can rotate. Either an additional constraint would need to be added
or the Allow Assumptions check box would need to be selected.
Leaving Components Packaged
If you complete the component placement when the status reads Partially Constrained, the Message
Log alerts you that the system leaves the component packaged only. An open square symbol also
displays in the model tree next to the packaged component. You can drag components that are
packaged based on their partial constraints.

Assembling Components Using Default Constraint
It is standard practice to assemble the first component of an assembly using the Default constraint.
• Benefits of using the Default constraint:

– No references are specified.
– No parent/child relationships are created.
• Sub-assemblies using the Default constraint can
be assembled.
Figure 1 – Assembling Component Using

Default Constraint
Figure 2 – Completed Component Placement Figure 3 – Assembling a Sub-Assembly
Assembling Components Using Default Constraint

The Default constraint enables you to align the internal system created coordinate system of the
component to the internal system created coordinate system of the assembly. The system places
the component at the assembly origin. Because the internal system coordinate system is used, no
references are specified or no parent-child references are created. It is a standard practice to assemble
the initial assembly component using a Default constraint, as shown in Figure 2.
You can also assemble sub-assemblies by using the Default constraint. Similar to individual
components, assembling a sub-assembly using the Default constraint creates no parent-child
references.

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components Using Default Constraint
Assembly\Default DEFAULT _CONST.ASM
Task 1: Assemble BODY.PRT using a Default constraint.
.
2. Select Assemble from the Assemble types
drop-down menu from the Component group.
3. In the Open dialog box, select component
BODY.PRT and click Open.
4. Notice that the component turns purple. Also,
notice that in the dashboard, the constraint
STATUS says No Constraints.
5. From the dashboard, select Default from the
Constraint Type drop-down list.
6. Notice that the constraint STATUS now reads
Fully Constrained.
7. Notice that the component is now orange.
8. Click Complete Component from the

dashboard.
9. Notice that the color is now the actual
component color.
10. In the model tree, click Settings and select

Tree Filters .
12. View the model tree and notice the assembled
component.

Task 2: Assemble sub-assembly SUB.ASM using the Default constraint.
1. Click Assemble .
SUB.ASM and click Open.
3. Right-click and select Default Constraint.

4. Click Complete Component .
5. Expand SUB.ASM in the model tree.

Orienting Components
You can reorient a component with respect to the assembly during placement.
• 3D Dragger
– Rotate and translate about the three axes.
– Move in 2-D plane.
– Free move.
– 3D Dragger portions gray out as degrees of
freedom are reduced through constraints.
• Press CTRL+ALT and click, right-click, or
middle-click.
Figure 1 – Default Position
Figure 2 – Orienting Around Red and Blue Axes Figure 3 – Component Positioned on Top of Model
Orienting Components
When assembling a component, you can reorient it with respect to the assembly. Reorienting the
component closer to its assembly location aids in the component’s assembly by enabling you to more
easily select references. When you select the Automatic option, the system is able to more easily
determine the correct placement constraints to use.
You can reorient the component according to the applied constraints. As constraints are applied, the
degrees of freedom are reduced, further limiting the movement of the component.
Using the 3D Dragger
The 3D Dragger is the primary method you can use to orient components. The 3D Dragger is a
dynamically changing graphical interface that displays over any component being assembled. You can
use the 3D Dragger to orient new components as follows:
• Rotate components about the three axes – Click and drag around the shaded arcs to rotate the
component about that specific axis.
• Translate components along the three axes – Click and drag along the shaded arrows to translate the
component along that specific axis.
• Move components in a 2-D plane – Click and drag in the translucent shaded quadrant to move
the component within that 2-D plane.
• Free move the components – Click and drag on the small central sphere at the origin of the axes.
As you create constraints, portions of the 3D Dragger are grayed out, as the degrees of freedom are
reduced. For example, if a constraint is applied that prohibits component movement along a certain axis,
that 3D Dragger axis becomes grayed out since the component cannot move in that degree of freedom.
Using Keyboard Shortcuts
You can also use the following keyboard shortcuts to orient new components:
Operation Keyboard and Mouse Selection
Pan
Spin
Component Drag – Drags the component based on existing

constraints, which is the same as the Drag Components .
Use this functionality when you have created constraints
+
and wish to their movement with remaining degrees of
freedom.
+
Dragging Components Along Geometry

You can also drag components along specified geometry by right-clicking the 3D Dragger and
selecting the Drag along geometry check box. You can then select geometry, and the 3D Dragger
appears over the selected geometry with the available degrees of freedom based on the geometry
selection. These degrees of freedom change based on whether you select a cylinder, plane, or other
geometry shapes. This functionality is similar to the Move tab in the dashboard.

PROCEDURE - Orienting Components
Assembly\Component_Orient COMP_ORIENT.ASM
Task 1: Use the 3D Dragger and component placement controls.
drop-down menu in the Component group.
SHAFT.PRT and click Open.
4. Notice the 3D Dragger which appears over the
component.
5. Rotate the model 90 degrees by dragging the
red arc.
6. Rotate the model 180 degrees by dragging the

blue arc.
7. Drag the model forward along the green axis.
8. Position the component by dragging the

location sphere.
9. Press CTRL+ALT and right-click to pan the
component.
10. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the
component.
11. Return the component back to the location
shown.

Task 2: Drag components along existing geometry.
1. Right-click the 3D Dragger and select the Drag
along geometry check box.
2. Select an edge of the component as shown.
3. Rotate and drag the component along the

available 3D Dragger axes.
4. Select an alternate reference surface.
5. Rotate and drag the component along the

available 3D Dragger axes.

6. Right-click the 3D Dragger and clear the Drag
along geometry check box.
dashboard.
Creating Coincident Constraints Using Geometry

Use the Coincident constraint to position two cylindrical surfaces coaxial or two planar surfaces
coincident.
• Cylindrical/Conical surfaces:
– Surfaces are inserted, resulting in coincident
axes.
– The surfaces do not need to be the same
diameter.
• Planar surfaces:
– Surfaces are made coincident to each other.
– You can toggle the constraint orientation to
mate or align surfaces.
Figure 1 – Selecting Cylindrical Surfaces

- Axes to be Coincident
Figure 2 – Selecting Planar Surfaces Figure 3 – Selecting Alternate Planar

to be Coincident Surfaces to be Coincident
Creating Coincident Constraints Using Cylindrical or Conical Surfaces
The Coincident constraint enables you to insert one cylindrical or conical surface into another cylindrical
or conical surface, making their respective axes coaxial. For example, you can create a Coincident
constraint to match a shaft to a hole, as shown in Figure 1. This constraint is especially useful when
axes are unavailable or inconvenient for selection. Remember that the Coincident constraint only
constrains the rounded surfaces coaxial, and does not slide one component into another. Because the
two specified surfaces are constrained coaxial, they do not need to be the same diameter.
Creating Coincident Constraints Using Planar Surfaces
The Coincident constraint also enables you to position two specified planar surfaces to lie in the same
plane (coplanar), and either face each other or face in the same direction, as shown in Figures 2 and
3, respectively. You can select the Change Constraint Orientation option from the dashboard to
rotate the surfaces so that their normals switch from facing each other to facing in the same direction,
and vice versa.
When planar surfaces of components are assembled coincident to one another, it is the same as
assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not created for editing. The components
can be positioned in any location as long as the two specified surface normals either face each other
or face the same direction.
PROCEDURE - Creating Coincident Constraints Using Geometry

Assembly\Coincident_Geometry COINCIDENT_1.ASM
Task 1: Assemble the SHAFT.PRT using Coincident constraints.
2. In the model tree, select SHAFT.PRT and click
3. In the dashboard, select Coincident as the
Constraint Type.
4. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT surface coincident to
the BODY.PRT hole cylindrical surface.

• Click New Constraint.
• Select Coincident as the Constraint Type.
6. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT top surface coincident
to the top BODY.PRT surface.
7. In the Placement tab, click Flip.

• Click Flip again.

8. In the Placement tab, right-click the second
Coincident constraint and select Delete.
• Drag the SHAFT.PRT upwards.
9. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT bottom surface
coincident to the inner BODY.PRT surface.
dashboard.
Task 2: Assemble the COVER.PRT using Coincident constraints.

COVER.PRT and click Open.
3. Reorient the COVER.PRT approximately as
shown.
4. In the dashboard, select Coincident as the
Constraint Type.
5. Constrain the COVER.PRT inner diameter
coincident to the inner BODY.PRT diameter.
6. Select the Placement tab.

7. Constrain the COVER.PRT hole coincident to the
BODY.PRT hole.
Note: In this situation, the system may convert the
Coincident constraint to an Oriented constraint.
8. In the Placement tab, click New Constraint.

9. Constrain the COVER.PRT surface coincident to
the BODY.PRT surface.
10. Review the constraints and click Complete

Component .

Creating Coincident Constraints Using Datum Features
Use the Coincident constraint to position two datum axes coaxial or two datum planes coincident.
• Datum Planes:
– Aligns positive (brown) sides in the same
direction by default.
• Datum Axes:
– Aligns positive (tag) sides in the same
direction by default.
• You can flip the direction.
Figure 1 – Selecting Datum Planes to be Coincident
Figure 2 – Selecting Datum Axes to be Coincident
Creating Coincident Constraints Using Datum Planes

The Coincident constraint enables you to position two specified datum planes to lie in the same plane
(coplanar), and either face each other or face in the same direction. Datum planes have positive and
negative sides designated by color. If you rotate a model with datum planes displayed, you see that
the colors are brown and gray. If the datum planes face each other, their positive (brown) sides face
each other. If the datum planes face in the same direction, their positive sides face in the same
direction. By default, the system aligns the positive sides in the same direction. You can use the
Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboard to rotate the datum planes so that their
positive sides face each other.
When the datum planes of components are assembled coincident to one another, it is the same as
assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not created for editing. The components
can be positioned in any location as long as the two specified datum plane normals either face each
other or face the same direction.
Creating Coincident Constraints Using Datum Axes
The Coincident constraint enables you to align datum axes coaxial. Like datum planes, datum axes also
have a positive direction, which is the side on which the datum tag displays. By default, the system
aligns the positive sides in the same direction. Again, you can use the Change Constraint Orientation
option in the dashboard to rotate the datum axes so their positive sides face each other.

Creating Distance Constraints
Use Distance constraint to specify an offset value between different types of geometry.
• Select geometry pairs (for example, two points

or two planes).
• Select geometry combinations (for example, a
point and plane).
• Distance constraint is the same as the
Coincident constraint, except that the selected
references can be offset from one another.
Figure 1 – Distance Between a Vertex

and Datum Plane
Figure 2 – Distance Between Two Surfaces Figure 3 – Distance Constraint Flipped
Creating Distance Constraints

A Distance constraint enables you to specify an offset value between the selected geometry types. For
example, you could select two points, two planes, and so on, or you can select geometry combinations
such as a point and a plane, or a point and an edge or axis. Distance constraint is the same as the
Coincident constraint, except that the selected references can be offset from one another at a specified
distance. The distance value becomes a dimension that can be edited.
When you use the Distance constraint, the system sets the current offset direction as a positive offset
direction. To offset in the opposite direction, either drag the location handle to the other side of the
selected assembly reference or edit the offset to a negative value. The component moves to the
opposite side, and this offset direction is now set as the positive offset direction.
If components are assembled with one another with a Distance constraint offset value set to zero, it is
same as assembling them with a Coincident constraint, except that a distance value is available for
editing. You can double-click the Distance constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint
type to a Coincident constraint, and vice versa.
You can also use the Change Constraint Orientation option from the dashboard to flip the
component orientation for the Distance constraint. For example, the component orientation was flipped
between Figure 2 and Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Creating Distance Constraints
Assembly\Distance DISTANCE.ASM
Task 1: Utilize a Distance constraint between the planar surfaces.
2. In the model tree, select COVER.PRT and click
Hide from the mini toolbar.

4. In the Open dialog box, select SUB.ASM and
click Open.
5. Reorient SUB.ASM approximately, as shown.
6. From the dashboard, select Coincident as
the Constraint Type.
7. Constrain the two cylindrical surfaces to
coincide.
8. Right-click and select New Constraint.
9. Select Distance as the Constraint Type.
10. Drag the sub-assembly upward, if necessary.
11. Select the two surfaces.
12. Reorient the model.

13. Drag the sub-assembly and edit its distance to
15.

14. From the dashboard, click Change Constraint
Orientation .
15. Click Change Constraint Orientation to
toggle it back.

Orientation.
17. Drag the sub-assembly upward.
18. Right-click and select Clear.
19. From the dashboard, select the Placement
tab and notice that the references have been
removed.
20. Select the two new surfaces.
22. Drag the sub-assembly and edit its distance to
15.

23. Click Change Constraint Orientation .
24. Click Change Constraint Orientation to
toggle it back.
25. Edit the distance value to 1.
Task 2: Use a Distance constraint between other geometry.

Orientation.
3. On the Placement tab, de-select the Allow
Assumptions check box.
4. Rotate the component approximately, as shown.
5. On the Placement tab, click New Constraint.

• Select Distance as the Constraint Type.
6. Select the vertex and the datum plane.

8. Edit the distance value to -65.
dashboard.

Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle Constraints
Use the Parallel, Normal, and Angle Offset constraints to specify a particular component orientation.
• The Parallel constraint forces references

parallel to each other.
– Similar to Coincident constraint without
coplanar requirement.
• The Normal constraint forces references normal
to each other.
• The Angle Offset constraint enables you
to specify a rotation angle between planar
references.
Figure 1 – Viewing a Parallel Constraint
Figure 2 – Viewing a Normal Constraint Figure 3 – Viewing an Angle Offset Constraint
Constraining Components Using the Parallel Constraint

The Parallel constraint enables you to force a selected datum plane or surface into a particular
orientation without regard to an offset value. The Parallel constraint forces selected surfaces or datum
planes to become parallel with each other. The Parallel constraint is similar to the Coincident constraint,
except that the selected references do not have to be coplanar.
You can use the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboard to toggle the specified
references from facing each other to facing in the same direction, and vice-versa. You can also
double-click the Parallel constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a
Distance, Angle Offset, Coincident, or Normal constraint.
Constraining Components Using the Normal Constraint
Similar to the Parallel constraint, the Normal constraint enables you to force a selected datum plane or
surface into a particular orientation without regard to an offset value. The Normal constraint forces
selected surfaces or datum planes to become normal with each other.
You can use the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboard to rotate the specified
references 180 degrees. You can also double-click the Normal constraint tag in the graphics window
and edit the constraint type to a Distance, Angle Offset, Parallel, or Coincident constraint.

Constraining Components Using the Angle Offset Constraint
The Angle Offset constraint enables you to specify a rotation angle between planar references. The
component reorients to the Angle Offset value that you specify. Typically, the Angle Offset constraint is
used after the component has already been partially constrained with a Coincident constraint
You can use the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboard to rotate the angle offset
180 degrees to the other side of the assembly reference. You can also double-click the Angle Offset
constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Distance, Parallel, Coincident,
or Normal constraint.
PROCEDURE - Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle Constraints

Assembly\Parallel_Normal_Angle ORIENT.ASM
Task 1: Utilize a Parallel and Normal constraint.
2. In the model tree, select SUB.ASM and click Edit
• Notice the constraint status is Fully
Constrained.
• Clear the Allow Assumptions check box.
4. Drag the component as shown.
5. In the Placement tab, select Parallel as the
Constraint Type.
6. Select the two surfaces shown.
7. Notice the component orientation, and click Flip.
8. In the Placement tab, edit the Constraint Type

to Normal .
• Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the
component 180º, as shown.

Task 2: Utilize an Angle Offset constraint.
to Angle Offset .
• Edit the angle to 45.
• Click Flip.
2. Right-click in the graphics window and select

Clear.
3. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the
component approximately, as shown.
5. Select the two planes.
6. Edit the angle to 25 and click Complete
Component from the dashboard.

Assembling Using Automatic
Use the Automatic option to enable Creo Parametric to determine the constraint type based on
selections and component location or orientation.
• Assemble components using Automatic .

– Typically the system generates a Coincident
constraint.
• Toggle or create other constraints as
necessary.
– Offset, Angle Offset, Coincident, Centered,
and so on.
Figure 1 – Orientation Determining Constraint

Type Created
Figure 2 – Creating an Angle Offset Constraint

Based on Orientation
Assembling Using Automatic

When you assemble a component, the default Constraint Type is Automatic . With the Automatic
option, the system automatically determines the constraint type that is created when you select a
reference pair. The following items influence the constraint type that is created:
• The references selected – The references you select can automatically eliminate a particular
constraint type that can be created.
• The component's location – In Figure 1, the component is located above the area it is to be assembled
to when references are selected; therefore, a Distance constraint is created. If the component is
located along the side at approximately the same height as its desired final placement location when
references are selected, the system creates a Coincident constraint.
• The component's orientation – In Figure 2, the component is oriented in such a way that the selected
references face at an angle to each other and are not coplanar; therefore, the system automatically
creates an Angle Offset constraint.
In between the creation of constraints, you can further reorient the component to refine its position.
This can help the system more accurately determine the next constraint type and offset, or it may
help you easily select the next set of references. Of course, the created constraints dictate how the
component moves.
When you select a reference pair, the system automatically creates a constraint. At this point, the
system usually waits for you to select a second reference pair to create a second constraint. The
system automatically keeps creating new constraints until the component is Fully Constrained.

Right-Click Menu Options
When assembling components, there are various right-click menu options available to increase your
speed and efficiency, including the following:
• New Constraint – Useful when you need to create additional constraints above what the system
minimally requires.
• Clear – Clears the references specified for the currently active constraint.
Best Practices
Assemble components using Automatic . The system typically generates a Coincident constraint
from the specified references. You can then toggle, or create as necessary, the Offset, Angle Offset,
Coincident, Centered, and so on, Constraint Types. The Centered constraint lines up spheres, cones,
tori, or cylinders with no Flip option.
PROCEDURE - Assembling Using Automatic

Assembly\Automatic AUTOMATIC .ASM
Task 1: Use the Automatic option to assemble components.
BODY.PRT and click Open.
5. Middle-click to complete the component.
6. Click Assemble .
7. In the Open dialog box, select the component
SHAFT.PRT and click Open.
8. Reorient the assembly.
9. Reorient SHAFT.PRT approximately as shown.

10. Notice that the Constraint Type is set to
Automatic .
11. Select the surfaces, as shown.
12. Notice that the system creates a Coincident
constraint.
13. Drag the SHAFT.PRT up and out of the hole.

• Edit the Constraint Type to Distance if
necessary.

to Angle Offset if necessary.
20. Edit the angle value to 215 to achieve the
position shown.
22. Click Assemble .

COVER.PRT and click Open.
24. Reorient COVER.PRT approximately as shown.
25. Again, notice that the Constraint Type is set to

Automatic .
26. Select the surfaces.
constraint.

30. Notice that the system creates an Oriented
constraint.

33. Select the Placement tab.
• Edit the Constraint Type to Coincident if
necessary.
35. Click Assemble .

ARM.PRT and click Open.
37. Reorient ARM.PRT approximately, as shown.

38. Again, notice that the Constraint Type is set to
Automatic .
39. Select the surfaces.
constraint.
41. Notice that the taper direction of the cones is
not aligned.

• Edit the Constraint Type to Centered .

45. Select the two planes.
46. Notice that the system creates an Angle Offset
constraint.

to Coincident .

Utilizing the Accessory Window

The accessory window enables you to manipulate the incoming component individually to facilitate
reference selection.
• Accessory window uses:
– Component placement
– Data sharing
– Sheetmetal forms
• Toggle the accessory window on or off.
• The accessory window can be docked or undocked.
Figure 1 – Viewing the Accessory Window Figure 2 – Docked Accessory Window Model Tree
Utilizing the Accessory Window
When assembling components, you can use the accessory window. The accessory window displays
only the incoming model, enabling you to manipulate the component individually to facilitate reference
selection. You can toggle the accessory window on or off by clicking the Show In Separate Window
icon. The accessory window can be used in the following instances:
• Component placement – The accessory window can be particularly beneficial if you are assembling
a very small component into a very large assembly.
• Data sharing
• Sheetmetal forms
The accessory window contains its own In Graphics toolbar, enabling you to control the contents of the
accessory window separately from that of the graphics window.
When the accessory window is toggled on, you can select whether or not to display the incoming
model in the graphics window by clicking the Show In Assembly Window icon. Of course, you can
select references on the incoming model in either the accessory window or the graphics window,
depending on where it is displayed.
The accessory window can be docked or undocked. If docked, it appears within the Creo Parametric
graphics window, and always in front, preventing windows from getting lost behind other open
windows. You can drag the window to a different location within the graphics window or resize it in the
same way you can modify any other conventional window. When the accessory window is docked,
the model tree pane splits and displays the incoming model's model tree at the lower portion. The
accessory window model tree supports layer tree functionality.
If the accessory window is undocked, the incoming model's model tree displays in that window. The
undocked accessory window model tree also supports layer tree functionality. You can undock the
accessory window by setting a configuration option.
Accessory Window Config.pro Options
The following configuration options determine the accessory window behavior:
• accessory_window_display – Controls the display of the accessory window. Options include:
– docked – Places the accessory window as a separate window within the graphics window.
– undocked – Places the accessory window as a separate window in addition to the Creo Parametric
window.
• comp_assemble_start – Sets the initial assembly placement behavior when assembling a new
component. Options include, but are not limited to:
– default – Displays the incoming model in the main graphics window only.
– constrain_in_window – Displays the incoming model in the accessory window only.

Module 13
Exploding Assemblies

Creating and Managing Explode States
Explode states enable you to easily save assembly and disassembly views.
• Position components into desired location.

– Select motion type
– Select Movement Reference
– Move component(s), with or without children.
• Toggle between exploded and unexploded states.
• Explode states can be used in drawings.
Figure 1 – Unexploded Assembly Figure 2 – Exploded Assembly
Creating and Managing Explode States

You can use explode states to quickly reposition components in 3-D space and save these assembly or
disassembly views by selecting the view manager’s Explode tab. You can select explode states when
placing a drawing view or use them to create assembly or disassembly procedures. You can toggle an
explode state on or off, and you can also create multiple explode states.
Specifying the Motion Type and Movement Reference
Before you can explode components from an assembly, you must specify the Motion type and
Movement Reference.
• Motion type – Specify the type of motion for a selected component. Motion types include:
– Translate Component – Linearly moves the selected component. This is the default motion
type.
– Rotate Component – Rotates the selected component about a specified Movement Reference.
– Copy Position – Copies the exploded position from the selected component to other components.
This option is available in the Options tab of the dashboard.
– Toggle Explode Location – Toggles the placement location of the selected component
between its original location and its current location. You can select this option to reset a
component's position.
• Movement Reference – Specifies the reference to define the direction of movement for the selected
component. This reference is required when rotating components, but is optional for translating
components when you require a direction other than the three default directions. Available reference
types include all datum features, planar surfaces, edges, and vertices.
You can also click View Plane from the dashboard, which enables you to explode components
parallel to the screen in the assembly's current orientation.

Exploding Components
Once the Motion type and Movement Reference have been defined, you can select the components
you wish to explode. There are three methods available:
• Move one component – Move a single component in an assembly or sub-assembly by selecting it.
• Move many components – Press CTRL and select multiple components to move them all at once.
• Move with Children – In the Options tab of the dashboard, you can select the Move with Children
check box. This option enables you to select a component to explode, and move its children with it.
When you select a component for translation, the 3D Dragger displays at that location along with a
coordinate system. You can cursor over any of the three 3D Dragger axis arrows and drag to explode
the component in that direction. When you select a component for rotation, a drag arrow displays. You
can use the drag arrow to rotate the component about the Movement Reference.
You can also specify the Motion increment of the component you are exploding. The default Motion
increment value is Smooth, which enables the components to explode smoothly and enables you to
drop them at any relative position. You can also increment values of 1, 5, or 10 by selecting the desired
value from the drop-down list, or you can type in your own increment value. The units used for the
increment value are the same units used in the assembly. For example, if the assembly units are
measured in millimeters, when you select an increment value of 10, the component explodes in 10
millimeter increments, snapping to each increment.
Additional Explode State Facts
When using the explode functionality, consider the following:
• If you explode a sub-assembly in the context of a higher-level assembly, the system does not
explode the components in the sub-assembly.
• When you unexplode an assembly, the system retains the information so that the components can
have the same explode position if you explode the assembly again.
• All assemblies have a Default Explode state that the system creates automatically from the defined
component placement constraints.
• Multiple occurrences of the same sub-assembly can have different explode states.
PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing Explode States

View\Explode_States EXPLODE.ASM
Task 1: Create explode state Exp0001.
toolbar.
3. In the view manager, select the Explode tab.
• Click New and press ENTER to accept the
default name.
• Click Close.
4. Notice the note in the graphics window.

5. Click Edit Position from the Model Display
group.
6. In the dashboard, verify that Translate
Component is selected.
7. Select SHAFT.PRT.
8. Cursor over the X-axis arrow and drag upward
to explode the component.
9. Select ARM.PRT.
10. Cursor over the Y-axis arrow and drag upward
to explode the component.
11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and

select the Move with Children check box.
12. Select COVER.PRT, cursor over the X-axis arrow,
and drag upward. Notice that the bolts explode
with it.
13. Select the pattern leader BOLT .PRT, as shown.
14. Cursor over the X-axis arrow, and drag upward
to explode all three bolt members.

Motion Reference.
16. Select the front, planar surface of BODY.PRT.
17. Select PLATE.PRT, cursor over the X-axis arrow,
and drag to the left.

18. In the Options tab, clear the Move with Children
check box.
19. Select the References tab.
• Right-click in the Movement Reference
collector and select Remove.
• Click in the Components to Move collector.
20. Select one BOLT .PRT, press CTRL, and select
the second BOLT .PRT member.
21. Cursor over the X-axis arrow, and drag the bolts
to the left.
23. Click View Manager , right-click Exp0001,
and select Save.
24. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog
box.
25. Click Close from the view manager.

Creating Explode Lines
Explode lines are used to denote the alignment of exploded components when the assembly
is unexploded.
• Create explode lines by specifying references on two components.
• Edit explode lines:
– Extend or shorten lines
– Add/Remove Jogs
• Modify line style, font, or color.
Figure 1 – Unexploded Assembly Figure 2 – Explode Lines in Exploded Assembly

Creating Explode Lines
You can create cosmetic explode lines to display the alignment of exploded components when the
assembly is unexploded. Explode lines automatically update to reflect position changes made to the
exploded components they reference. Creating new explode lines or editing existing explode lines
modifies the explode state. You can save the modified explode state in the view manager Explode tab.
You can create an explode line in an explode state by specifying a reference on two different
components. You can select surfaces, edges, or curves as references on the components. The explode
line is then created between the two selected references and displays in the model tree as an Offset
Line. If you select a cylindrical surface, you can specify that the resulting offset line either use the
cylinder axis or be created normal to the surface at the selected location.
Note: Explode lines are also known as Offset lines.
Editing Explode Lines
You can edit existing explode lines by selecting the explode line and clicking Edit Explode Line
from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard. You can also right-click and select Edit Explode Line.
You can perform the following edit operations on an explode line:
• Edit the explode line length – You can extend or shorten the ends of an explode line by dragging the
handle at the desired end.
• Add Jogs – Select the explode line location where you want to create the jog, right-click, and select
Add Jog. You can then drag the jog to its desired location. You can delete the jog by right-clicking its
handle and selecting Remove Jog.
Modifying Explode Line Style
You can modify the style of existing explode lines by selecting the explode line and either clicking Edit
Line Styles from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard, or by right-clicking in the graphics window
and selecting Modify Line Style. You can modify the line style to be Hidden, Geometry, Leader, Cut
Plane, Phantom, or centerline. You can also modify the Line Font and Color. Clicking Default Line
Style from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard enables you to modify the default line style for
every offset line created subsequently.
Removing Explode Lines
You can remove explode lines by selecting the explode line and clicking Remove Explode Line in
the Explode Lines tab from the dashboard. You can also right-click and select Remove Explode Line.
Press CTRL to select multiple explode lines at once.
PROCEDURE - Creating Explode Lines

View\Explode_Lines EXPLODE_LINES.ASM
Task 1: Create offset lines between exploded components.
2. Click Exploded View from the Model Display
group.
3. Notice the note in the graphics window.
4. Click Edit Position from the Model Display

group.
5. Click Create Explode Line from the
dashboard.
6. Edit the selection filter to Surface.
7. Zoom in and select the surfaces on
COVER_2.PRT and ARM_2.PRT.
8. Click Apply in the Cosmetic Offset Line dialog
box to create the explode line.
9. Select the inner hole surface on COVER_2.PRT
and the outer surface on the corresponding
BOLT _2.PRT, and click Apply to create the
explode line.
10. Create explode lines for the other two
BOLT _2.PRT components.

11. Select the inner hole surface on COVER_2.PRT
and the outer surface on the SHAFT_2.PRT tip,
and click Apply to create the explode line.
12. Select the inner hole surface on BODY_2.PRT

and the outer surface on SHAFT_2.PRT, and
click Apply to create the explode line.
13. Select the upper bolt hole surface on

PLATE_2.PRT and the corresponding outer
surface on BOLT _2.PRT, and click Apply to
create the explode line.
14. Create another explode line for the second
plate bolt.
15. Select the inner surface of BODY_2.PRT.

16. Query-select the back surface of PLATE_2.PRT
in approximately the center and click Apply.
17. Click Close in the Cosmetic Offset Line dialog
box and click Complete Feature from the
dashboard.

toolbar.
19. In the view manager, select the Explode tab.
• Right-click Exp0001, select Save, and click
OK.
• Click Close.

Animating Explode States
You have the option of animating your explode states for both exploding and unexploding
operations.
• Toggle animation on or off.
• Options include:
– Maximum seconds an animation takes between explode states.
– Follow explode sequence.
• You can set default behavior.
Figure 1 – Animation Not Following the Figure 2 – Animation Following the

Explode Sequence Explode Sequence
Animating Explode States

You have the option of animating your explode states for both exploding and unexploding operations.
The system animates the movement of components from their start to end positions in the explode
state. To enable animation, click File > Options and select the Show animation while exploding the
assembly check box under the Assembly display settings section of the Entity Display category.
You can also control the following options:
• Maximum seconds an animation takes between explode states — Sets the duration of time the
system takes to explode or unexplode the assembly.
• Follow explode sequence — If enabled, this option causes the components to explode or unexplode
in the order they were moved when the explode state was created, following the drag motions you
used. If this check box is cleared, the system selects the shortest distance to move the components.
All components are also moved at once, regardless of the order they were moved when the explode
state was created.
Explode lines appear at the end of the animation when exploding, and display until the end of the
animation while unexploding.
Animated Explode State Config Options
The following configuration options determine the default animated explode state behavior:
• animate_explode_states — Controls whether explode states are animated. This option is set to
yes by default.
• explode_animation_max_time — Sets the default duration of time necessary to explode or unexplode
the assembly.

Module 14
Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views

Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections
You can create planar, offset, and zone cross-sections in an assembly.
Assembly Cross-Sections:
• Planar
• Offset
• Zone
Figure 1 – Planar Cross-Section
Figure 2 – Offset Cross-Section Figure 3 – Zone

Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections
You can create a cross-sectional cut through an assembly to view the contents of the assembly at
that section. You can view a cross-section as cross-hatching or a clipped cut in the assembly, or
you can reference it to create a drawing view.
You can separately define and edit the cross-hatching shown in each intersected component of the
assembly.
Creating Assembly Cross-Sections
You create cross-sections using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section dashboard from
either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View ribbon tab, or from
the Sections tab of the view manager. Several types of cross-sections are available:
• Planar – A planar cross-section is defined by a datum plane, coordinate system, or planar surface
intersecting the model.
• X Direction – An X Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the X-axis
of the default coordinate system.
• Y Direction – A Y Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the Y-axis of
the default coordinate system.
• Z Direction – A Z Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the Z-axis of
the default coordinate system.
• Offset – An offset cross-section uses a sketched cut line to intersect the assembly. The cut line shape
is then extruded in one or both directions from the sketch plane.
• Zone – A zone cross-section defines a region within an assembly that can be used to select a number
of intersecting components.
Component Intersection
Using the Models tab in the Section dashboard, you can define how the section intersects the
assembly’s components. Available options are:
• Section Assembly – You can select the entire assembly for intersection.
• Section Part – You can select a single part in the assembly for intersection.
• Include all models – Section all components intersected by the cross-section.
• Include selected models – Section only the selected components that are intersected by the
cross-section.
• Exclude selected models – Section all components intersected by the cross-section, except those
selected.
• Include Quilts – Toggle the inclusion of quilts on and off.
Cross-Section Display Options
You can configure several different cross-section display options in the view manager, including:
• Activate – Specifies the active cross-section, with the default selection being No Cross-Section.
When a cross-section is specified as active, the model geometry is clipped at that cross-section.
• Flip the Clipping Direction – Flips the geometry side that is clipped about the active section.
• Show Section – Toggles the cross-hatching display on or off.
• Show Region Boundary – Displays the boundary of the zone.
• Zone References – Displays the references of the selected zone.
• Zone Components – Highlights the components of the selected zone.
• Zone Only – Displays only the components of the selected zone on the model.
Editing Cross-Sections
There are numerous editing operations that you can perform on cross-sections, including the following:
• Edit Hatching – Enables you to edit existing hatch patterns or create new patterns.
• Delete – Enables you to delete a cross-section from a model.
• Rename – Enables you to rename the cross-section name.
• Copy – Enables you to copy the selected cross-section to a new cross-section.
• Copy from File – Enables you to copy a cross-section from another model and specify a new
reference.
• Description – Enables you to add a text description to a cross-section.

You can create planar cross-sections in an assembly.
• Available types:
– Planar
– X Direction
– Y Direction
– Z Direction
– Offset Sections
– Zone
• Cross-section options
• Model selection
• Edit cross-section hatching Figure 1 – Creating a Cross-Section in
• Display management an Assembly Model
Figure 2 – Viewing a Cross-Section in the

2D Section Viewer Figure 3 – Patterning a Cross-Section

You can create new planar cross-sections in an assembly model. The following planar cross-section
types are available:
• Planar – Enables you to select a planar surface or datum plane through which a cross-section
is created.
• X Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assembly’s default
coordinate system X-axis.
• Y Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assembly’s default
coordinate system Y-axis.
• Z Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assembly’s default
coordinate system Z-axis.
• Offset Sections – Creates an offset cross section by extruding a section outline perpendicular to the
sketching plane. This type of cross section is valuable for opening up the part to display several
features with a single cross section.
• Zone – Zone cross sections are 3-dimensional cross sections created by defining zones. The zones
contain the same functionality as normal zones. To make large models more manageable, you can
define specific regions called zones within a model.
These cross section types are created using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section
dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View
ribbon tab, or from the Sections tab of the view manager.
New cross sections are given the default names of XSEC0001, XSEC0002, and so on. You can always
rename a cross section either during or after creation, similar to any feature. You can also redefine
cross sections or manage their display using either the Sections node in the model tree or the Sections
tab in the view manager.
Cross Section Options
The following cross section creation options are available in the Section dashboard:
• Distance from plane – Enables you to type a distance to offset the cross section from the specified
reference. You can also dynamically drag the cross section in the graphics window.
• Direction from plane – Enables you to toggle the direction in which the cross section is offset from
the specified reference.
• Cap section – Enables you to cap the surface of the cross section.
• Fill surface color – Enables you to fill the capped surface with a specified color. This option is only
available if the cross section is capped.
• Enable hatching – Enables you to toggle the cross section’s hatch pattern on or off. The system
automatically varies the hatching of the various components in the assembly.
• 3D Dragger – You can enable the 3D Dragger and use it to translate or rotate the cross section about
the three axes. This is similar to the 3D Dragger in Assembly mode.
• View 2-D section in separate window – Enables you to display the 2-D cross section in a separate
window. Components display in model color in this dialog box. Interference between components
displays in red by default, although you can change this interference color in the Options tab in
the Section dashboard.
Editing Cross Section Hatching
If the hatch pattern is enabled for a given cross section, you can edit the hatching either from the
Sections node in the model tree or from the view manager. When you edit the hatch pattern, the Edit
Hatching dialog box displays with the following options:
• Pattern – Enables you to edit the hatch pattern used. You can select from a default library of ANSI or
ISO hatch patterns, or choose from a user-defined library hatch pattern. You must first select the
component for which the hatch pattern is to be edited.
• Angle – Enables you to specify the angle of the hatch pattern.
• Scale – Enables you to size the pattern. You can type a value, or use the two options to either halve
or double the existing hatch spacing.
• Color – Enables you to modify the color that the hatch pattern displays in the graphics window.
Model Selection
When creating a cross section in an assembly model, you can specify which models in the assembly
are sectioned. The following options are available:
• Include all models – All models in the assembly are sectioned. This is the default option.
• Include selected models – Enables you to specify only the models to be sectioned in the assembly.
• Exclude selected models – Enables you to specify the models that are not to be sectioned in the
assembly.
Cross Section Display Management
You can manage the display of a given cross section from the Sections node in the model tree from
the view manager or by selecting the cross section in the graphics window. The following right-click
• Show Section – Enables you to enable or disable the cross section within the graphics window. This
option enables or disables both the section itself and the hatch pattern.
• Activate/Deactivate – Activates or deactivates cut on the geometry based on the cross section.

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Cross-Sections
View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Planar SECTIONS.ASM
Task 1: Create default X, Y, and Z cross-sections.
3. Select X Direction from the Section types
drop-down menu from the Model Display group.
4. In the dashboard, click Hatch Pattern .
• Notice that the hatch pattern for BODY.PRT is
not easily distinguishable.
6. In the model tree, right-click XSEC0001 and
select Edit Hatching .
• In the graphics window, select BODY.PRT.
• Edit the Angle to 15 and press ENTER.
• Click Halve Hatch Size two times.
• Click Apply and close the Edit Hatching dialog
box.
7. In the model tree, select XSEC0001 and click

Deactivate from the mini toolbar.
8. Right-click and select Show Section to toggle
it off.
to de-select all geometry.
10. Select Y Direction from the Section types

drop-down menu.
11. In the dashboard, click Flip Clipping Direction
.

12. In the dashboard, click 2D View .
13. In the 2D Section Viewer dialog box, click Rotate
Right if necessary.
14. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and
select the Show Interference check box.
• Notice the interference highlighted in red.
Deactivate .
17. Select Z Direction from the Section types
drop-down menu.
18. Edit the offset value to 28.
19. In the dashboard, select the Models tab.
• Select Exclude selected models.
• Select PLATE.PRT.
20. In the dashboard, click Fill Surface and select
the darkest red color.
Deactivate .
Task 2: Create and pattern a cross-section based on a selected plane.
1. Select Planar from the Section types drop-down menu.

2. Click Find from the Status bar.
3. In the Search Tool dialog box, select ARM.PRT from the Look in drop-down list.
• Click Find Now.
• Select Z-AXIS and click Add Item .
• Click Close.
4. Edit the offset to 0 and press ENTER.
• Click 2D View .
6. Zoom in on the keyway detail.
Deactivate .

9. Select XSEC0004 and click Pattern from the
mini toolbar.
10. Select the top surface of ARM.PRT.
11. In the dashboard, click Flip First Direction .
• Edit the quantity to 5.
• Edit the spacing to 22.
13. In the model tree, expand the Pattern 2 of

XSEC0004 feature.
• Select XSEC0004, press CTRL, and select the
remaining four patterned sections.
• Right-click and select Show Section.
Task 3: Investigate cross-sections from the view manager.

toolbar.
2. In the view manager, select the Sections tab.
• Click New and view the available options.
• Right-click XSEC0001 and notice the available
options.
• Click Close.

Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections
Offset cross-sections enable you to sketch the shape of the cross-section intersecting your
assembly.
Offset Cross-Section Options:
• Define cut line sketch.
• Section direction.
• Models to intersect.
• Hatching display.
• Interference display.
Figure 1 – Offset Cross-Section
Figure 2 – Adjustable Hatching Figure 3 – Cut Line Sketch

Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections
An offset cross-section uses a sketched cut line to intersect the assembly. You define the cut line
shape in Sketcher and then extrude it in one or both directions from the sketch plane. You can only
sketch the cut line for an offset cross-section using straight lines. If you want the cross-section to be
viewed in a clipped display, the sketch must be an open sketch.
Creating an Offset Cross-Section
To create an offset cross-section, select Offset Section from the Section types drop-down menu in
the Model Display group of the View tab. Then type a name and press ENTER. You can also click New >
Offset from the Sections tab of the view manager.
The Section dashboard opens and provides the following options:
• Flip Clipping Direction – Changes the side of the sketch on which the section is created.
• Extend Section First Side – Extends the cross-section to the first side of the sketch plane, or
enables you to select none.
• Extend Section Second Side – Extends the cross-section to the second side of the sketch plane,
or enables you to select none.
• Cap Section – Displays surfaces over openings in the sectioned solid geometry.
• Fill Surface – Enables you to select a color from the palette for the surface of the cross-section.
By default, the colors from the individual components are used.
• Hatch Pattern – Toggles the display of cross-hatching on and off.
The Models tab has several options available for determining which models are intersected by the
section:
• Include all models – Sections all components intersected by the cross-section.
• Include selected models – Sections only the selected components that are intersected by the
cross-section.
• Exclude selected models – Sections all components intersected by the cross-section, except
those selected.
The Options tab enables you to toggle the display of interference and to change the display color of
any interference.
PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections

View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Offset OFFSET_XSEC.ASM
Task 1: Create an offset section through the assembly.
2. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters .
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.
4. Select Offset Section from the Section types drop-down menu from the Model Display group.
5. In the dashboard, select the Properties tab.
• Edit the Name to b.
6. Select ASM_FRONT as the sketch plane.
7. Click Project from the Sketching group.
8. Select Loop from the Type dialog box.
9. Select the datum curve named SECT_B-B, as
shown.
10. Click OK .
11. Right-click and select Flip clipping direction.

12. Click Hatch Pattern from the dashboard.

Task 2: Edit the hatching of the cross-section.

toolbar.
3. Right-click Section B and select Edit Hatching.
4. In the model tree, expand the DRILL_CHUCK.
ASM node and select CHUCK.PRT.
5. Select Use hatch from the part from the Edit
Hatching dialog box.
6. Edit the Angle to 30.
7. Click Halve Hatch Size .
8. Click Apply.
Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections

Create a zone to organize your large assembly.
Zone Definition Methods:
• Half-Space
• Inside-Outside
• Radial Distance From
• Offset CSYS
Figure 1 – Half-Space Orientation
Figure 2 – Activated Zone Figure 3 – Zone Region Boundary

Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections
Zones are 3-D cross-sections that define a region in the assembly. Zones are used to identify, select,
and manage components within the assembly. Components are identified and selected based on their
position inside or outside of the defined region of the zone.
You can use zones for the following:
• Organize an assembly.
• Control view clipping.
• Select components using the Find tool.
• Define envelope parts.
To create a zone, select Zone from the Section types drop-down menu from the Model Display
group, or click New on the Sections tab of the view manager.
In the Zone dialog box, you can use any combination of the following zone definition methods:
• Half-Space – The negative or positive side of a selected planar reference.
• Inside-Outside – Inside or outside of a selected closed quilt.
• Radial Distance From – A radial distance from a selected entity.
• Offset CSYS – Inside or outside of a bounding box created by offset distances from a selected
coordinate system.
You can select more than one reference to define an assembly zone. When you select a reference in
the references area of the dialog box, it is highlighted in the graphics window. Two or more references
always have logical AND and OR capabilities.
Best Practices
Everyone's design environment is different; however, you typically only use the Zone tool for managing
very large assemblies. You may not see a benefit using it with small to medium sized assemblies.
PROCEDURE - Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections

View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Zone ZONES.ASM
Task 1: Create a half-space zone to define a selection of components.
2. Select Zone from the Section types
drop-down menu from the Model Display group.
3. Select the front circular face of the
GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT.
Note: Notice the arrows pointing away from the selected surface, towards the models to be included
in the zone.
4. In the Xsec0001 dialog box, click Display > Mark Tree .
• Notice that this adds a column to the model tree, identifying the components intersected by
the zone.
5. Click Change Orientation to edit the direction of the zone.
6. Click Display > Mark Tree again.
• In the model tree, notice that the components identified to be included in the zone have
changed.

7. Click OK to complete the zone creation.
toolbar.
10. Right-click section XSEC0001 and select
Rename.
11. Edit the name to Zone1 and press ENTER.
12. Double-click Zone1 to activate it.
13. Double-click No Cross Section to activate it.
14. Right-click Zone1 and select Show Region
Boundary.
15. Observe the components intersected by the
zone.
• Orient to the RIGHT view orientation.
• Orient to the TOP view orientation.
• Orient to the Default Orientation view
orientation.
Task 2: Use the zone to select components to include in a new simplified rep.
1. Right-click Zone1 and select Show Region Boundary to toggle it off.
2. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab and click New.
3. Type from_zone1 and press ENTER.
4. In the component chooser, click Select > Advanced Search.
5. In the Search Tool dialog box, do the following:
• Select the Geometry tab.
• Ensure that Zone is the selected Rule.
• Ensure that Inside the zone is selected from the Comparison drop-down list.
• Ensure that ZONE1 (ZONES.ASM) is selected from the Value drop-down list.
• Click Find Now.
• Press CTRL+A to select all the items in the found column.
• Click Add Column and click Close.
6. In the component chooser, right-click
the selected components and click Set
Representation to > Master.
7. Click Open to complete the simplified rep.
Note: The simplified rep includes all components that are a part of the zone.

Creating Display Styles
Use display styles to assign display settings to individual components of an assembly.
• Model display settings are independent of the assembly.

• Display options include:
– Wireframe
– Hidden Line
– Shaded
– Transparent
• You can also blank, or hide, components individually.
Figure 1 – Original Model Figure 2 – Viewing a Display Style
Creating Display Styles

The display of models in a Creo Parametric session are controlled by the four following display options:
Wireframe, Hidden Line, No Hidden, and Shaded. You can also assign display styles to individual
components in an assembly that can be used regardless of those overall session settings.
Use the Style tab in the view manager to create display styles for your assembly.
You can assign one of the following display styles to components in an assembly:
• Wireframe – Shows front and back lines equally.
• Hidden Line – Shows hidden lines in ghost tones.
• No Hidden – Does not show lines behind forward surfaces.
• Shaded – Shows the model as a shaded solid.
• Transparent – Shows the model as a transparent solid.
• Blank – Does not show the model.
You can apply existing display styles to sub-assemblies using the By Display tab. When you select a
sub-assembly from the model tree, the available display styles for that sub-assembly display in the By
Display tab, enabling you to specify the desired one.
You can also modify component display styles without using the view manager. You can select
desired models in the graphics window, model tree, or search tool and click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select Component Display Style to assign a display style to the selected models.
You can store these temporary edits with a new display style or update them to an existing one.
After you define the default style, it appears each time the model is opened.
Uses of Display Styles
You use display styles to do the following:
• Increase system performance by either blanking components from display or limiting the number of
components being calculated for hidden line display.

• Create and save display settings used in presentations or other common situations where it is helpful
to change the display of components within an assembly.
Note: You cannot use display styles in drawing view.Blanked components are not removed from session
memory; they are only removed from display. For this reason, you cannot use display styles to reduce
the amount of memory required to open and work with an assembly. You reduce the required memory
using simplified reps.
PROCEDURE - Creating Display Styles

View\Display-Style_View-Manager GEARBOX_S2.ASM
Task 1: Create a new display style using the view manager.
2. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
3. Select the Style tab from the view manager.
4. Click New.
5. Press ENTER to accept the default name
Style0001.
• Notice this opens the EDIT dialog box on the
Blank tab.
6. In the model tree, select GEARBOX_REAR_S2.
PRT.
7. Click Preview.
8. In the model tree, select the four BOLT _5-18.PRT

models.
• Notice that the Blank component status is
shown in the Edit column of the model tree.
9. Click Preview.
10. In the EDIT dialog box, select the Show tab and
select Transparent .
11. In the model tree, expand the DRILL_CHUCK_
S2.ASM node and then select CHUCK_S2.PRT
and GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT.
12. Click Preview.
13. Click OK in the Edit dialog box.
Task 2: Copy and redefine to create a new display style.

1. With Style0001 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0002.
3. Double-click Style0002 to activate it.
4. Click Edit > Redefine from the view manager.

5. In the model tree, select CHUCK_S2.PRT and
PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT to also be blanked.
6. Click Preview.
7. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden
Line from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
8. Click OK in the Edit dialog box.
Task 3: Use the model tree to edit a display style.

1. With Style0002 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0003.
3. Double-click display style Style0003 to activate it.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
5. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns .
6. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select
Display Styles from the Type drop-down list.
7. In the Display Style list, select STYLE0003 and
click Add Column to add the column to the
model tree.
8. Click OK.
9. In the STYLE0003 column of the model tree,
click to the right of GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT
and select Blank from the drop-down list.
10. Click to the right of PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT, select
Undo from the drop-down list.
11. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns .
12. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, click Remove Column and OK.
Note: Using the model tree to edit display styles does not provide you with the option to preview or
reset any edits that you make.

Creating Appearance States
Appearance states enable you to assign and capture multiple appearance combinations of the
same part or assembly.
• Solves the problem of a single appearance per

component.
• Different reasons for different appearances:
– Modeling
– MBD
– Engineering
– Marketing
• Created in the view manager.
• Clear assembly appearances from an
appearance state.
– Options if appearance is used in multiple
states. Figure 1 – Appearance State on a Model
Figure 3 – Different Appearance State

Figure 2 – Appearance State in an Assembly in an Assembly
Creating Appearance States

Appearance states enable you to assign and capture multiple appearance combinations of the same
part or assembly. Appearance states solve the problem of having only a single appearance per
component occurrence. You can create a different appearance state for each example scenario:
• When modeling a part you may wish to display the model so that references can easily be seen.
• You may want to highlight specific surfaces in an MBD combination state.
• Engineering may want model colors one specific way for purposes of design.
• Marketing may want to display the model in a different state for rendering purposes.
You can create and switch appearance states on the Appearance tab in the view manager. You can
also copy an appearance state. Simply double-click an appearance state to activate it. When you
create an appearance state it automatically becomes the active appearance state, any appearance you
subsequently apply to a model or surface is applied to that appearance state. Unlike view orientations
or explode states, there is no need to re-save the appearance state if a change is made to it.
The default Creo Parametric start model templates include the following appearance states:
• Default Appearance – The initial appearance state which can be altered.
• Master Appearance – Similar to the Default Appearance, but its appearance state cannot be altered.
If you do alter the Master Appearance, it displays as modified in the view manager. You can right-click
it and select Save to save the modified Master Appearance as a new appearance state.
Note: If the same appearance is used in more than one appearance state and you edit that appearance,
the system notifies you of this and alerts you that editing it will influence those other appearance states.

Clearing Assembly Appearances
You can also clear assembly appearances. However, if you clear an assembly appearance in an
appearance state that is used in other appearance states, the system alerts you, and you have two
options:
• Remove all active appearances from the current model – Only removes the appearances from
the active appearance state.
• Remove all active and non-active appearances from the current model – Removes all appearances
from both active and inactive appearance states.
PROCEDURE - Creating Appearance States

View\Appearance_States BODY.PRT
Task 1: Create appearance states in a part model.
With Edges from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.
toolbar.
4. In the view manager, select the Appearance tab.
5. Notice the default appearance states.
6. Click New from the view manager, edit the
name to MBD, and press ENTER.
7. Select the View tab in the ribbon.
8. In the Appearance group, expand Appearances
and select ptc-glass.
9. Select the BODY.PRT node in the model tree
10. Select the inner cylindrical surface.

11. Press SHIFT and query-select the rear surface,
top surface, and front surface to create the seed
and boundary selection of all inner surfaces.

and select ptc-painted-red.
13. In the view manager, double-click Master

Appearance.
and select ptc-metallic-aluminum.
15. Select the BODY.PRT node in the model tree
16. Right-click Master Appearance and select Save.
17. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the
Appearance value to Engineering and click OK.
18. Double-click appearance Mbd.
19. Double-click appearance Engineering.
20. Double-click appearance Default Appearance.
21. Click Close.
Task 2: Create appearance states in an assembly.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar

and double-click APPEARANCE.ASM.
2. Click View Manager and select the
Appearance tab if necessary.

3. Click New, type Render, and press ENTER.
4. In the Model Display group, expand
Appearances and select ptc-metallic-gold.
5. Press CTRL and select the BODY.PRT and
COVER.PRT components, and click OK from the
Select dialog box.
6. Expand Appearances and select

ptc-painted-green.
7. Press CTRL and select the PLATE.PRT and
SHAFT.PRT components, and click OK.

ptc-plastic-red.
9. Select the ARM.PRT component and click OK.
10. Type bolt in the model tree search field.

11. Click Add .
ptc-steel-brushed.
13. Click Clear Search .
14. In the view manager, with the Render appearance state still selected, click Edit > Copy.
15. In the Copy Render dialog box, edit the name to Render2 and click OK.
16. Double-click Render2 to activate it.
Note: Notice that the Render2 appearance state is identical to the Render appearance state.
ptc-painted-green.
18. Press CTRL, select the COVER.PRT and
BODY.PRT components, and click OK.

19. Double-click appearance state Render.
20. Double-click appearance state Render2.
Note: Notice that you can use an existing appearance state as the basis for a new one by copying it,
and then editing either one accordingly.
Task 3: Edit an appearance.
1. Click Edit Model Appearances from the

2. In the Model Appearance Editor dialog box,
select the ptc-plastic-red color to edit it.
3. Click OK from the Confirm dialog box.
Note: When you edit an appearance that is used in
other non-active appearance states, these states will
be automatically updated with the new edits.
4. Click the red color square to edit it.
5. Edit the R value to 255.
6. Click OK in the Color Editor dialog box.
7. Click Close in the Model Appearance Editor
dialog box.
8. In the view manager, double-click appearance

state Render to activate it.
9. Notice that the edited ptc-plastic-red color
updated in this appearance state, also.
Task 4: Clear appearances from appearance states.
1. Expand Appearances and select Clear

Assembly Appearances from the drop-down
list.
2. Select Remove all active appearances from
the current model in the Confirm dialog box
and click OK.
3. Notice that all appearances are removed from
this appearance state.

4. In the view manager, double-click appearance
state Render2 to activate it.
5. Notice that none of the appearances were
removed from this appearance state.
Note: If you had selected the Remove all active and
non-active appearances from the current model
option, then the appearances would have also been
cleared from the Render2 appearance state.
Creating Layer States in an Assembly

Use layer states to efficiently save and recall combinations of layer statuses in an assembly.
Layer States:
• Save current layer statuses
• Recall defined layer statuses
Manage display of layers for:
• Annotations
• Datum Features
• Construction Geometry
Figure 1 – Layers Tab of the View Manager
Figure 2 – Layer State Example Figure 3 – Another Layer State Example
Creating Layer States in an Assembly

Layer states are created on the Layers tab of the view manager. Layer states enable you to save and
recall a set of defined layer statuses in a model. You can create multiple states to capture different
combinations of layer statuses and quickly toggle between each state as needed.
To create a layer state, you first set the status of layers as you want to save them. For example, you
may want to hide all layers containing datum features and then save that status. In the Layers tab of the
view manager, click New to create a layer state that saves the current layer statuses.
If a layer state is active and the display of layers is edited, the active layer state is marked with a plus
sign (+), indicating that it is modified. You can do the following:
• Double-click the layer state to reset the model's layers as defined by the unmodified layer state.
• Right-click the layer state and select Activate to reset the model's layers as defined by the
unmodified layer state.

• Right-click the layer state and select Save to save the modified layer state using the model's current
layers statuses.
Note: The hiding an item action places that item on the Hidden Items layer. Therefore, the statuses of
hidden items are also saved in a layer state.
Best Practices
It is a best practice to use simplified reps, instead of layers, to exclude components from display in an
assembly. Layer states are best used to manage the display of the following:
• Annotations – The display of annotations can be controlled using layer states in combination with
combination views to document a model.
• Datum Features – Datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems.
• Construction Geometry – Surfaces, curves, and other features used to create complex model
geometry.
PROCEDURE - Creating Layer States in an Assembly

View\Layer-States_Assembly LAYERS.ASM
Task 1: Create a layer state to hide the assembly's datum features and reference geometry.
.
2. In the model tree, click Show and select
Layer Tree .
3. In the layer tree, select 01_ALL_DTM_PLN.
• Press SHIFT and select 06__PRT_ALL_SURFS.
• Right-click and select Hide.
toolbar and select the Layers tab.
5. In the view manager, click New
6. Type datum_refs_hide and press ENTER.

Task 2: Create a layer state to hide the assembly's datum features but not surfaces and curves.
1. In the layer tree, select 03_ALL_CURVES.
Right-click and select Show.
2. Select 03___PRT_ALL_CURVES. Right-click and
select Show.
3. Select 06_ALL_SURFS. Right-click and select
Show.
4. Select 06___PRT_ALL_SURFS. Right-click and
select Show.
5. Click View Manager and click New.
6. Click No from the Modified State Save dialog

box.
Note: You click No because you do not want to
modify DATUM _REFS_HIDE.
7. Type curves_surfs_unhide and press ENTER.
9. Click in the graphics window. Spin, pan, and
zoom the model to see that curves and surfaces
are now unhidden.
10. Orient to the Standard Orientation view.
11. In the layer tree, right-click and select Reset Status.
12. Click in the graphics window. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar to update the display.
13. Click View Manager and double-click Datum_Refs_Hide.
Note: The layer display statuses change in the layer tree as you edit layer states.
14. Double-click Curves_Surfs_Unhide.
15. Double-click Datum_Refs_Hide.
16. Click Close.

Creating Combination Views
Combine and save simplified reps, style states, cross-sections, orientations, and exploded views
as combination views.
Combine the following:
• Simplified Reps
• Display Styles
• Cross-Sections
• Orientations
• Exploded Views
• Layer States Figure 1 – Simplified Reps and Styles
Figure 2 – Cross-Section with Display Styles Figure 3 – Exploded View with Display Styles
Creating Combination Views
A combination view enables you to combine and apply multiple view manager states. You can save
combination views to quickly switch between customized combination views.
You can create and activate combination views on the All tab of the view manager. The following
display states can be combined and saved within a combination view:
• Simplified Reps
• Display Styles
• Cross-Sections
• Orientations
• Exploded Views
• Layer States
Tabbed Display of Combination Views
When you select Display combined views on the All tab of the view manager, each combination view
displays in a tabbed window at the bottom of the Creo Parametric graphics window. You can select
each tab to quickly navigate from one combination view to another.
You can hide a tab by de-selecting the Tab Display check box next to a view name in the All tab or
by right-clicking the tab and selecting Hide. Additional right-click options enable you to configure
and edit the tabbed display as follows:
• Redefine – Open the combination view dialog box (the name of the dialog box changes depending
on the view name) to edit the view's definition.
• Remove – Delete the selected combination view and display tab.
• Rename – Rename the combination view and display tab.
• Description – Type or edit the description of the selected combination view.
• Display Customization – Open the view manager to the All tab and edit the tab display.
• View – Set the size of the tab previews to Small, Medium, or Large.
Uses of Combination Views
You typically use combination views to do the following:
• Save the common working configuration. For example, you can use a view including a specific
orientation, cross-section, and simplified rep when designing a component within an assembly.
• Save combinations used to create images for presentations. For example, you can save a view
including specific orientations and styles for reproducible image captures.
Combination views can be placed in drawings for documentation or presentation purposes.
Originals or Copies
Each time you create a new combination view, the New Presentation State dialog box opens and
presents you with the following choices:
• Reference Originals – This option uses existing orientations, styles, simplified reps, and so on, to
create the combination view.
• Create Copies – Be aware that this option creates a copy of every display state used in the
combination view. It uses the new copies to create the combination view.
Using the Create Copies option creates new orientations, styles, simplified reps, and so on, in your
model.
Best Practices
Combination views are a useful tool for accessing the specific combination of display views that you
use repeatedly to design or display your product.
PROCEDURE - Creating Combination Views

View\Combination COMBO.ASM
Task 1: Create a new combination view.
toolbar, select the All tab, and click New.
3. Press ENTER to accept the default name
Comb0001.
4. Click Reference Originals in the New
Presentation State dialog box.
5. In the view manager, click Edit > Redefine to
open the COMB0001 dialog box.
6. Select 3D_Side from the Orientation drop-down

list.
7. Select Datum_Refs_Hide from the Layers
drop-down list.
8. Click Preview.

9. Select Cut_Away from the Simplified Rep
drop-down list.
10. Click Preview.
11. Select Trans _Rear from the Style drop-down

list.
12. Click Preview.
13. Select the Show exploded check box.

14. Click Preview.
15. Clear the Show exploded check box.

16. Click OK.
Task 2: Save selected states and views to a combination view.

1. In the view manager, double-click the
combination view named Default All.
2. Select the Simp Rep tab and double-click
Rear_Box.
4. Select the Style tab and double-click

Wire_Gears.
5. Select the Sections tab and double-click A.
6. Select the Orient tab and double-click 3D_Front.
7. Click Refit .
8. Right-click the 3D_Front(+) modified view and
select Save.
9. Click OK from the Save Display Elements dialog
box.
10. Select the All tab and click New.
11. Press ENTER to accept the default name Comb0002.
12. Click Reference Originals from the New Presentation State dialog box.
13. On the All tab of the view manager, select the Display combined views check box.

• Notice that selecting the Display combined
views check box adds a tabbed display of the
combination views at the bottom of the main
graphics window.
15. Select each combination view tab at the bottom
of your graphics window and notice the preview
as you cursor over each tab.
16. Right-click the Comb0002 tab and select Hide.
17. Right-click the Comb0001 tab and select Display Customization.
18. On the All tab of the view manager, notice the Tab Display check box has been cleared for
Comb0002.
Note: If you select Hide, only the tab for that view is hidden. If you select Remove, the view is deleted.

Module 15
Advanced Selection

Advanced Chain Selection
You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different types of chains to increase
efficiency and feature robustness.
• Chain types:
– Intent chain
– One-by-one
– Tangent chain
– Surface loop
– Surface loop from to
– Boundary
Figure 1 – Intent Chain
– From-to Boundary loop
– Multiple chains
• Selection methods:
– Direct with mouse
– Chain dialog box
Figure 2 – Surface Loop
Advanced Chain Selection

You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different types of chains to increase efficiency
and feature robustness. A chain is a collection of adjacent edges and curves that share common
endpoints. Chains can be open-ended or closed-loop, but they are always defined by two ends.
Chain Types
The following are the different types of chains that can be used to select edges:
• Intent chain – Enables you to select edges based on their intent. For example, say you use an intent
chain to select the four edges of a square cut for purposes of rounding them. If the square cut is
redefined into a hexagon cut, the intent chain automatically adds the two additional edges and
rounds them, because your intent was to round the edges of the cut. If you instead select the edges
one at a time and round them, the round feature either fails or does not round the newly added edges.
• One-by-one – Enables you to select adjacent edges one at a time along a continuous path.
• Tangent chain – Enables you to select all the edges that are tangent to an anchor edge.
• Surface loop – Enables you to select a loop of edges on a surface.
• Surface loop from to – Enables you to select a range of edges from the surface loop.
• Boundary – Enables you to select the outermost boundaries of a quilt.
• From-to Boundary loop – Enables you to select a range of edges from the boundary.
• Multiple chains – You can select multiple chains by selecting the first chain, pressing CTRL and
selecting an edge for a new chain, then holding down SHIFT and completing the new chain from the
selected edge.
Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities:
• Directly with the mouse.
• Using the Chain dialog box – The Chain dialog box enables a GUI approach to selection. This dialog
box is only available in the context of a tool. You can click the Details button near the tool's reference
collector to display the Chain dialog box.
Figure 3 – Chain Dialog Box
PROCEDURE - Advanced Chain Selection

Selection\Adv_Chain ADV_CHAINS.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the different chain selection types.
2. Cursor over one of the top edges and right-click
to query-select the end edges Intent chain.
3. Cursor over one of the vertical edges and

right-click to query-select the side edges Intent
chain.
4. De-select all geometry.
5. Select the top, front horizontal edge.

6. Press SHIFT and select the two adjacent edges
One-by-one.
8. Select the top, front horizontal edge.

9. Press SHIFT and select the top, right front edge
to select the Tangent chain.

11. Select one of the top, front edges.
12. Press SHIFT and select the top, right flat surface
to select the Surface loop.
14. Select the top, front edge.

15. Press SHIFT and select the top, back edge to
select the Surface loop from to chain.
16. Select an edge of the quilt.

17. Press SHIFT and select the quilt to select the
Boundary.
19. Select the front, vertical edge.

20. Press SHIFT and select the back, vertical edge
to select the From-to Boundary loop.

Advanced Surface Selection
You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using different types of sets.
• Surface set types:

– Individual Surfaces
– Solid Surfaces
– Intent Surfaces
– Seed and Boundary
– Loop Surfaces
– Exclude Surfaces
• Selection methods:
– Direct with mouse
Figure 1 – Selecting Multiple Individual Surfaces
– Chain dialog box
Figure 2 – Selecting a Surface Loop
Advanced Surface Selection

You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using different types of sets. A surface set is a
collection of surface patches from solids or quilts. Surface patches do not need to be adjacent.
Surface Set Types
The following are the different types of surface sets that can be used to select surfaces:
• Individual Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces from solids or quilts one at a time. To select
multiple individual surfaces, press CTRL.
• Solid Surfaces – Enables you to select all surfaces of the solid geometry in a part model.
• Intent Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces based on their intent. An intent surface set tends to
be more robust because it can account for changes made to geometry.
• Seed and Boundary Surfaces – Enables you to select all surfaces from the selected seed surface up
to the boundary or boundaries.
• Loop Surfaces – Enables you to select all the surfaces that are adjacent to the edges of a surface.
• Exclude Surfaces – Enables you to exclude surface patches during or after a surface set has been
created.
Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities:
• Directly with the mouse.
• Using the Surface Sets dialog box – The Surface Sets dialog box enables a GUI approach to selection.
This dialog box is only available in the context of a tool. You can click the Details button next to the
tool's reference collector to display the Surface Sets dialog box.

Figure 3 – Surface Sets Dialog Box
PROCEDURE - Advanced Surface Selection

Selection\Adv_Surface ADV_SURFACE -SETS.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the different surface set selections.
2. Select the front surface of Extrude 1.
3. Press CTRL and select the second individual
surface.
5. Select any surface on that feature.

6. Right-click and select Solid Surfaces .
8. Right-click to query and select the Intent

surface of Extrude 2 cut feature.

10. Select the front surface on the silver protrusion
as the seed surface.
11. Press SHIFT and select the top, right flat surface
as the Boundary.
12. Release SHIFT to select all the surfaces from

the seed surface up to the Boundary.
Note: You can continue to use SHIFT to select
additional boundaries.
13. Select the top, flat surface.

14. Press SHIFT and select the front edge.
15. Release SHIFT to select the Surface loop.
16. Press CTRL and click to de-select the two

surfaces, excluding them from the loop.

Using the Search Tool
Using the Search Tool is a powerful method for selecting many types of objects.
• Search by various methods and then select

items
– Look for
– Look by
– Look in
– Name
– Found/Selected Objects
Figure 1 – The Search Tool
Figure 2 – The Found and Selected Lists Figure 3 – Axes Selected using Search Tool
Using the Search Tool

The Search Tool is one of the three basic methods of selection. It includes several options for searching
models by a variety of criteria, including:
• Look for – Specifies the type of items you want to search for. For example, you can search for only
datum planes, components, or axes.
• Look by – Specifies the types of items you want to search by. This is a further refinement to the Look
for option, and is context-sensitive based on the Look for option specified.
• Look in – Specifies which model or models the search is conducted against. If an assembly or
sub-assembly is specified as the Look in object, you can choose whether sub-models are included.
You can set the Look in object either by selecting it from the drop-down list in the Search Tool dialog
box, or you can click Select Model and select the model from the graphics window.
• Name – Enables you to refine the search by typing in part or all of the name of the item you want to
search for. You can also type wildcards, both at the beginning and end of the name search string. In
Figure 1, wildcards are used to search for all features containing pin in their name.
The items that fulfill the criteria specified display in the items foundlist on the left side of the Search Tool .
If you select items in the items found list, they preselect in the graphics window. You can select multiple
items by pressing CTRL or SHIFT, or you can select all items by pressing CTRL+A. Move items to the
items selected list on the right to select them in the graphics window and therefore perform operations.
The Search Tool becomes invaluable as the complexity of your model increases.

PROCEDURE - Using the Search Tool
Selection\Search SEARCH_TOOL.ASM
Task 1: Use the Search Tool in an assembly model.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

3. Click Find from the Investigate group.
4. In the Search Tool dialog box, select Component
from the Look for drop-down list.
• Type *gear_shaft_11 as the Criteria Value.
• Click Find Now.
• In the Found list, select the first component,
press CTRL, and select the second and third
components.
• Select REDUCTION_GEAR_SHAFT_11 and
click Add Item .
• Click Close.
• De-select the component.
5. Click Find to start the Search Tool .

6. In the Search Tool dialog box, select Feature
from the Look for drop-down list.
• Select Datum Plane from the Look by
drop-down list.
• Type front as the Criteria Value.
• Click Find Now.
7. In the Search Tool dialog box, select
DRILL_CHUCK_11.ASM from the Look in
drop-down list.
8. Click Find Now.
9. Edit Look in to CHUCK_11.PRT.
10. Click Find Now.
11. In the Found list, click Add Item and click
Close.

Task 2: Use the Search Tool in a part model.
1. Open GEARBOX_FRONT_11.PRT.
2. Press CTRL+F to start the Search Tool .
3. In the Search Tool dialog box, edit Look for to
Feature if necessary.
• Edit Look by to Feature.
• Type reduction* as the Criteria Value.
• Click Find Now.
• Select REDUCTION_GEAR_HOLE and click
Add Item .
• Click Close.
5. Select the Tools tab and click Find to start
the Search Tool .
Datum Plane.
• Type rib* as the Criteria Value.
• Click Find Now.
• Select RIB_PLANE_3 and click Add Item .
• Click Close.
8. Click Repaint .
9. Click Find from the Status bar.

Axis.
• Type *pin* as the Criteria Value.
• Click Find Now.
• Select ALIGNMENT_PIN_TOP and click Add
Item .
• Click Close.

Module 16
Creating Sweeps and Blends

Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories
A sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, or traverses, along a trajectory.
• Components of a sweep feature:
– Trajectory
¨ Select the trajectory.
¨ Define the Start point.
– Section
¨ Placed at the trajectory start point, and
denoted by crosshairs.
¨ Closed or open.
• Creation methods:
– Add/remove solid material. Figure 1 – Sweeping a Closed Sketch
– Surface. Along an Open Trajectory
– Thin.
Figure 2 – Sweeping an Open Sketch

Along an Open Trajectory
Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories
You can create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section feature that follows a trajectory
curve. A sweep feature can also have a variable section, but this topic discusses the constant section
only. A sweep can add or remove material. It can also be created as a thin feature or as a surface. A
sweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section.
Note: If your company has legacy data that contains Simple sweep features, the classic menu manager
interface displays when redefining them.
Selecting the Trajectory
The trajectory is the path along which the section sweeps. The trajectory must be selected, rather than
sketched. The trajectory can be open, meaning that it does not have to create a loop, as shown in the
figures. It can have sharp or tangent corners, as shown in the Figure 1 protrusion and the Figure 2
cut, respectively.
When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available:
• Select a previously created external sketch.
• Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To include additional adjacent edges as
the trajectory, you can press SHIFT while selecting them.
• Select an intent chain.
Note: Within the Sweep dashboard, you can click Datum and select Sketch at the right end; however,
this does not make the sketch internal to the sweep.
Once the trajectory has been selected, you may decide that you do not want the trajectory to traverse
the entire length of your selected sketch or geometry. You can drag the trajectory endpoint handles to
lengthen or shorten the overall trajectory. If you press SHIFT while dragging you can snap the endpoints
to entities such as vertices, datum planes, or edge endpoints. You can also directly specify a value.
You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is the location from which the
section begins to sweep, and displays in the graphics window with a magenta arrow. You can click the
arrow to toggle the start point to the opposite trajectory endpoint.
Defining the Section
Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch the section that is swept along
the trajectory. The sketch plane for the section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point.
The crosshairs seen in the sketching plane represent the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.
The sketched section may be either open or closed. The swept protrusion in Figure 1 is a closed
section, while the swept cut in Figure 2 is an open section.
Causes of a Sweep Failure
A constant section sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occurs:
• A trajectory crosses itself.
• You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when
it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.
• A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself
while traversing around the arc.
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories

Sweep\Open-Trajectory _Solid SWEEP_OPEN-TRAJ.PRT
Task 1: Create a sweep with a closed sketch.
2. Select the trajectory (Sketch 1) from the graphics window and click Sweep from the mini
toolbar.
3. Click Create Section from the dashboard.
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
5. Click Palette from the Sketching group.
6. In the Sketcher Palette dialog box, select the
Profiles tab.
• Drag the T-profile into the graphics window.
• In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 0.5.
• Right-click the X Location handle and drag it
to the midpoint of the top horizontal line.

7. Locate the section on the trajectory.
8. Click Accept Changes from the dashboard.

11. In the model tree, select Sketch 1 and click Hide
Task 2: Create a sketch for the next sweep trajectory.

2. Click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box.
toolbar.
4. Select Centerline from the Sketching group
and place the cursor on the upper edge of the
model.
5. Notice the cursor snaps to the edge and guides
appear on momentarily keeping the cursor on
the edge, as shown.

6. Drag the cursor to the center of the edge. The
cursor snaps to the center.
7. Click to place the start point of the centerline.
This converts the selected edge as the
reference.
8. Drag the cursor down to vertically position the
centerline, and then click to place the centerline,
as shown.
9. Select Center and Point from the Circle

• Sketch two circles at vertices, tangent to
reference and centerline.
• Sketch two vertical lines, as shown.
11. Select Line Tangent from the Line types

drop-down menu.
• Create the tangent line, as shown.
12. Click Delete Segment from the Editing group
and trim the circle entities.
13. Click OK .
Orientation.

Task 3: Create a sweep that removes material with an open section.
1. With the sketch still selected, click Sweep

from the Sweep types drop-down menu in the
Shapes group.
2. Click the arrow to flip the start point to the
bottom, if necessary.

• Click Create Section .
4. Select Center and Ends from the Arc types
• Zoom in and then sketch and dimension the
arc.
5. Click OK .

Exercise 1: Creating a Sweep Through a 3-D Curve
Objectives
• Create a sweep through a 3-D curve.
Scenario
You are assigned to create the cord of the coil part that connects the main body of the coil to the spark
plug adapter. Sweep a solid along the existing 3-D curve.
Sweep\Open-Trajectory _Solid COIL.PRT
Task 1: Create a sweep using the curve as a trajectory.
2. Select the 3-D curve as the trajectory in the
graphics window and click Sweep from the
mini toolbar.
types: .
5. Sketch as shown:
• Right-click and select Center and Point .
• Sketch a circle at the intersection of the
centerlines.
• Double-click the dimension and edit the
diameter to 5.5.
• Click OK from the Close group.

geometry.
Appearance group.
10. Load the appearance.dmt if necessary, and
click Close.
11. Select the solid_black appearance sphere from
the Appearancs types drop-down menu.
12. Complete the following:
• Press CTRL and select the front and back
sweep surfaces.
• Click OK in the Select dialog box.
Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories

A sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, or traverses, along a trajectory.
• Components of a sweep feature:

– Trajectory
¨ Select the trajectory
¨ Define the start point
– Section
¨ Placed at the trajectory start point,
and denoted by crosshairs
¨ Closed or open Figure 1 – T Section Sketch Swept Along a
¨ If you sketch an open section for Closed Trajectory
the solid feature type, the system
automatically toggles to surface
• Creation methods:
– Add/remove solid material
– Surface
– Thin
Figure 2 – L Section Swept Along a Closed Trajectory

and Trajectory Extruded
Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories

You can create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section feature that follows a trajectory
curve. A sweep feature can also have a variable section, but this topic discusses the constant section
only. A sweep can add or remove material. It can also be created as a thin feature or as a surface. A
sweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section.
Note: If your company has legacy data that contains Simple sweep features, the classic menu manager
interface displays when redefining them.
The trajectory is the path along which the section sweeps. The trajectory must be selected, rather
than sketched. The trajectory can be closed, meaning that it creates a loop, as shown in the figures.
It can have sharp or tangent corners.
When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available:
• Select a previously created external sketch.
• Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To include additional adjacent edges as
the trajectory, you can press SHIFT while selecting them.
• Select an intent chain.
Note: Within the Sweep dashboard, you can click Datum and select Sketch at the right end; however,
this does not make the sketch internal to the sweep.
You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is the location from which the section
begins to sweep, and displays in the graphics window with a magenta arrow. You can drag the start
point along the closed loop, or you can press SHIFT to snap the start point to one of the entity endpoints.
Defining the Section
Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch the section that will be swept
along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the
start point. The crosshairs seen in the sketching plane represent the intersection of the trajectory
and sketch plane.
The sketched section may be either open or closed. If you try to sketch a solid open section, the
system automatically toggles the feature creation to that of a surface. To create the type of solid
feature shown in Figure 2, you can sweep the perimeter shape first and then extrude the trajectory
sketch upward to fill in the middle.
Causes of a Sweep Failure
A constant section sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occurs:
• A trajectory crosses itself.
• You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when
it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.
• A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself
while traversing around the arc.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories
Sweep\Closed-Trajectory _Solid SWEEP_CLOSED-TRAJ.PRT
Task 1: Create a sweep with a closed trajectory.
2. Select the trajectory in the graphics window and
click Sweep from the mini toolbar.
3. Drag the start point to snap to the arc tangent
endpoint.
Sketch.

types: .
6. Click Palette from the Sketching group.
7. In the Sketcher Palette dialog box, select the
Profiles tab.
• Drag the T-profile into the graphics window.
• In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 0.5
and drag the Rotation handle to 180.
• Right-click the X Location handle and drag it
to the midpoint of the bottom horizontal line.
8. Locate the section on the trajectory.
9. Click Accept Changes from the dashboard.


Task 2: Edit the section and “fill” the center of the sweep.
1. With the Sweep still selected, right-click in the
graphics window and click Edit Definition
Sketch.
4. Sketch the vertical line on the vertical reference.
5. Click Delete Segment from the Editing group
and trim the left side of the sketch.
6. Click OK .

9. In the graphics window, right-click the depth
handle and select To Selected.
• Select the green surface shown.
10. Select the upper surface and click Complete

Feature .

Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes
You can edit the attributes for the ends of an open trajectory sweep feature.
• Select the Merge Ends option on the ends of

a sweep feature.
Figure 1 – Merge Ends Disabled Figure 2 – Merge Ends Enabled
Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes

If the trajectory of a sweep feature is open (meaning that the start and end points of the trajectory do
not touch), you can enable or disable the Merge Ends attribute for the ends of the sweep feature. The
Merge Ends attribute is located in the Options tab in the Sweep dashboard.
• Merge Ends disabled – Do not attach the sweep ends to the adjacent geometry. This is the default
option, and is shown in Figure 1.
• Merge Ends enabled – Merge the ends of the sweep into the adjacent solid. To do this, the sweep
ends must touch the other solid geometry. The merged sweep ends are shown in Figure 2.

Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections
You can create a blend feature by selecting existing sketches or sections or chains or loops, of a
model’s existing feature edges.
• A blend feature must contain two or more

sections.
• Selected sections are connected using a
smooth curve.
• Sections are blended based on selection order.
• You can reorder or remove sections.
Figure 1 – Blend Feature
Figure 2 – Blending Three Selected Sections Figure 3 – Blend with Twisting Due to
Misaligned Start Points
Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections

You create blend features when you need to create models that contain different transitional
cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enables you to create geometry that starts as a circular
cross-section, but then changes to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of the
feature. Blend features can add or remove material.
Selecting the Sections
A blend feature must contain two or more sections. You can select existing sketches or sections, or
chains or loops of a model’s existing feature edges. The sections you select may be non-parallel,
although this functionality is not discussed in this topic. By default, the system connects the selected
sections together using a smooth curve.
Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). There are two exceptions to
this rule:
• The blend can start or end as a single point.
• You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an entity. For example, a
blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables the system to blend to a square. The system
essentially connects the points of each section to create the blend feature.
Section Start Points
Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond between sections to avoid a
twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You can individually drag the start point for each section

to a different vertex in that section. In Figure 3, the start point for Section 2 is in a different location,
resulting in the twisting effect. In Figures 1 and 2, the start points are properly aligned.
Note: The start point arrow direction can be flipped, but this does not affect blending.
Manipulating Selected Sections
Consider the following regarding manipulating selected blend sections:
• By default, sections are blended together in the order of selection. However, you can always move
sections up or down in the blend order.
• You can remove sections.
• The offset, or depth, between sections is based on the selected section’s depth with respect to the
other selected sections. You cannot specify a different depth.
• When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the active section at any time. To set a
given section as the active section, you can either select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard,
or you can select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section then
changes color, and all right-click options pertain to this active section. In Figures 2 and 3, Section 2
is the active section.
PROCEDURE - Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections

Blend\Select-Sections_Parallel_Solid BLEND_SELECT_1.PRT
Task 1: Select existing sections to create a 3-section blend.
2. Notice the three Sketch features in the graphics
window.
3. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and

select Blend .
4. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab.
• Select Selected sections.
5. Select Sketch 1 as the first section.
6. In the Sections tab, click Insert.

7. Select Sketch 3 as the second section.

9. Select Sketch 2 as the third section.
10. Notice the blend is following the order of
selection.
11. With Section 3 still selected, click Move Up in

the Sections tab.
12. Notice that Section 3 is now reordered as #2 in
the blend feature.
13. With Section 3 still selected, click Remove in

the Sections tab.
• Right-click Section 2 and select Remove.
Insert.
15. Select Sketch 2 as the second section.
Insert.
17. Select Sketch 3 as the third section.
18. In the Sections tab, notice the # display for each
blend section.
• Each section has four entities.
19. In the graphics window, select the #2 Section 2

leader note to activate the section.
20. Drag the start point to the upper-right vertex.
21. Click Preview Feature from the dashboard.

23. Drag the Section 2 start point back to the
upper-left vertex.

25. In the model tree, select Sketch 1, press CTRL,
and select Sketch 2 and Sketch 3.
26. Click Hide from the mini toolbar.

Creating Blends by Sketching Sections
You can create a blend feature by sketching the sections through a series of Sketcher sessions
while within the Blend tool.
• A blend feature must contain two or more
sections.
• Sketched sections are connected using a
smooth curve.
• Section sketch plane is projected:
– Offset dimension
– Reference
• Sections are blended based on order of
insertion.
• You can remove sections. Figure 1 – Blends Adding and Removing Material
Figure 2 – Sketching a Section Figure 3 – Projecting the Sections

Creating Blends by Sketching Sections
You create blend features when you need to create models that contain different transitional
cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enables you to create geometry that starts as a circular
cross-section, but then changes to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of the
feature. Blend features can add or remove material.
Sketching the Sections
A blend feature consists of a series of parallel sketches. The blend feature must contain two or more
sections. You can sketch the sections through a series of Sketcher sessions while within the Blend tool.
If desired, you can reference previous geometry from section to section.
Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). There are two exceptions to
this rule:
• The blend can start or end as a single point.
• You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an entity. For example, a
blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables the system to blend to a square. The system
essentially connects the points of each section to create the blend feature.
Specifying the Depth of Sketched Sections
By default, the system connects the sketched sections together using a smooth curve. After Section 1,
the depth by which each subsequent section is offset can be defined using two methods:
• Offset dimension – Enables you to specify the distance by which the section’s sketch plane is offset.
By default, the section is offset by a specified distance from the previously created section. However,
you can select any other section in the blend feature from which to offset a new section.
• Reference – Enables you to define the section’s sketch plane location by selecting a reference. For
example, you can select a datum plane. This option is similar to the To Selected depth option
of an extrude feature.
Section Start Points
Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond between sections to avoid a
twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You can manage start points within each sketched section.
In Figure 2, the start point in the sketch is at the upper-left corner.
Manipulating Sketched Sections
Consider the following regarding manipulating sketched blend sections:
• By default, sections are blended together in the order they are inserted. You cannot switch the order.
• You can remove sections.
• When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the active section at any time. To set a
given section as the active section, you can either select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or
you can select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section then changes
color, and all right-click options pertain to this active section.
PROCEDURE - Creating Blends by Sketching Sections

Blend\Sketch-Sections_Solid BLEND_SKETCH_1.PRT
Task 1: Sketch sections to create a 3-section blend.

2. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend .
• Select Sketched sections, if necessary.
• Click Define.
4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
types: .
7. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle
8. Select the reference origin as the rectangle start
point.
9. Extend the rectangle up and to the right, and
click again to place the rectangle.
10. Middle-click, edit the horizontal dimension to
18, and edit the vertical dimension to 16.
12. Select the Sections tab.
13. Notice that you are now defining Section 2.
14. Notice that the default offset dimension is from Section 1.
15. Click Sketch.

16. Click Center Rectangle .
17. Select the new section reference origin as the
rectangle start point.
18. Extend the rectangle up and to the right, and
19. Middle-click, edit the horizontal dimension to 4,
and edit the vertical dimension to 6.
20. Click OK .
22. Click Insert.
23. Notice that you are now creating Section 3.
24. Notice that the default offset dimension is from
Section 2.
25. Select Section 1 from the Offset from
drop-down list and edit the value to 26.
26. Click Sketch.
27. Click Center Rectangle .
28. Select the new section reference origin as the
rectangle start point.
29. Extend the rectangle up and to the left, and
30. Middle-click, edit the horizontal dimension to
12, and edit the vertical dimension to 10.
31. Click OK .
32. Notice the twist between the second and third

section.
33. In the graphics window, select the #2 Section
2 leader note.
34. Drag the depth to approximately 16.

35. In the graphics window, select the #3 Section
3 leader note.
36. Right-click and select Sketch.
37. Select the upper-left vertex, right-click, and
select Start Point.
38. Click OK .
Task 2: Redefine the blend to reference datum planes.

2. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
3. Click in the background to de-select all features.
4. In the model tree, select Blend 2 and click Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.
• Select Section 2.
• Select Reference.
• Select datum plane DTM2.
6. In the Sections tab, select Section 3.

• Select Reference.
• Select datum plane DTM3.

Task 3: Redefine the blend to remove material from the previous blend.
and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
2. In the model tree, select Blend 2.
3. Notice this blend is inside of the newly resumed
blend feature.
4. Right-click Blend 2 and select Edit Definition .


Module 17
Sweeps with Variable Sections

Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory
A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that can change shape and orientation
along the feature.
• Create a solid or a surface feature.

• Add or remove material.
• Main components:
– Section
¨ Constant or variable.
¨ Sits on an x-y-z frame.
– Trajectories
¨ Use one or more.
¨ Section attached to Origin trajectory.
¨ Section sweeps along Origin trajectory Figure 1 – Creating a Sweep with a
length. Variable Section
Figure 2 – Completed Feature
Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory

A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that can change shape and orientation
along the feature. With the Variable Section Sweep feature, you can create a solid or surface feature.
You add or remove material while sweeping a section along one or more selected trajectories, by
controlling the section’s orientation, rotation, and geometry. You can create a sweep using a constant
section or a variable section.
The main components of the sweep tool are the section and trajectories. The sketched section
sits on an x-y-z frame that is attached to the Origin trajectory and moves along its length to create
geometry. The Origin trajectory is the first selected trajectory. The Origin trajectory, along with the other
trajectories and other references such as the planes, axes, edges, or an axis of the coordinate system,
define the orientation of the section along the sweep. In Figure 1 and Figure 2, the curved datum curve
is the Origin trajectory that the rectangular section sweeps along.
The frame is essentially a coordinate system that slides along the origin trajectory and carries with itself
the section to be swept. Axes of the coordinate system are defined by auxiliary trajectories and other
references. The frame is important because it determines the orientation of the sketch as it is being
moved along the origin trajectory. The frame is oriented by additional constraints and references. The
system places the sketched section in a specified orientation with respect to these references and
attaches it to a frame that moves along the origin trajectory and sweeps the section.
Best Practices
A good way to understand sweeps with variable sections is to think of yourself on a roller coaster
holding a picture frame. The Origin trajectory is the track of the roller coaster. The frame you are
holding is the frame referred to in this topic. While you ride the roller coaster, you are moving along on
the track, but you can point and reorient the frame to a different direction while doing so.
Creating Sweeps Using a Constant Section
A sweep with a constant section does not change its shape as it is swept along the trajectories.
• The orientation of the frame can change.

• Merge ends:
– Constant sections only.
– Must be a solid surface at the ends.
• Sketch placement point:
– Specify a different point on Origin trajectory.
– Does not affect the start point of sweep.
Figure 1 – Constant Section Sketch
Figure 2 – Constant Section without Ends Merged Figure 3 – Constant Section with Ends Merged
Creating Sweeps Using a Constant Section

When a sketched section sweeps along the Origin trajectory, the section geometry can vary and change
shape based on how the sketch is constrained, dimensioned, and so on. The references to which the
sketch is constrained can even change the shape of the section. The section shape can be variable
because the sketch regenerates at points along the trajectory and updates its shape accordingly.
You can, however, create a sweep that uses a constant section. A sweep with a constant section does
not change its shape as it is being swept along the trajectories. Only the orientation of the frame on
which the section lies changes. If the Origin trajectory contains entities that are non-tangent, you must
use a constant section. Figure 1 displays a sweep with a constant section along an origin trajectory with
non-tangent entities.
When creating a sweep protrusion or cut, you can decide whether to merge the ends of the sweep
using the Merge ends option. The Merge ends option merges the ends of the sweep. There must be a
solid surface at the ends of the sweep to perform a merge. Figure 2 displays the sweep without the
merged ends option selected. Notice how the sweep feature does not fully join to the surfaces of the
solid walls. Figure 3 displays the sweep with the merged ends option selected. Notice that the sweep
feature extends to fully intersect the inside surfaces of the solid walls.
You can also specify a different Sketch placement point. The Sketch placement point option enables
you to specify the point on the Origin trajectory at which you want to sketch the section. The start point
of the sweep is not affected. The start point of the sweep is used as the default location where you
sketch the section if the Sketch placement point is empty.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Using a Constant Section
Sweep\Constant-Section_Solid CONSTANT_SECTION.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion using a constant section.
2. Select the curve and click Sweep from the
mini toolbar.
3. Click Create Section then click Sketch View

.
types: .
5. Click Center and Point and sketch a circle at
the references intersection.
6. Click One-by-One and edit the circle
diameter to 2.
7. Click OK .
8. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.
9. Click Preview Feature .
10. Notice that the ends are not merged with the
existing geometry.

12. Select the Options tab.
13. Select the Merge ends check box.

Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory
The moving frame of a sweep is always normal to a specified trajectory when the Normal To
Trajectory option is specified.
• Normal To Trajectory:
– Frame is normal to the Origin trajectory by
default.
– Frame can be normal to any additional
trajectory.
¨ Select N check box for that trajectory.
• X direction reference at start:
– Sets initial X-orientation of frame.
Figure 1 – Section Normal to Origin Trajectory
Figure 3 – Section Normal to Origin Trajectory,

Figure 2 – Section Normal to Chain 1 Trajectory Different X Direction
Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory

When the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, the moving frame is always normal to the
specified trajectory. By default, the frame is created normal to the Origin trajectory, but it can be normal
to any additional trajectory. To switch the trajectory the frame is normal to, simply select the N check
box in the dashboard for that trajectory. In Figure 1, the frame is normal to the Origin trajectory. In the
Figure 2, the frame is normal to the Chain 1 trajectory, and the geometry changes as a result.
Specifying the X Direction Reference at Start
Specifying the X direction reference at start sets the initial X-orientation of the frame on which the
sketch is created. The reference specifies the positive X for the sketch view. Specifying the X direction
reference at start is similar to specifying the Sketch Orientation Reference for a Sketch Orientation
direction that is always set to Right. In Figure 1, the X direction reference is the right model surface.
In Figure 3, the X direction reference has been changed to the right chamfer surface. As a result, the
frame has rotated slightly to face the new reference and the sketched geometry has as well. Note that
if you do not assign an X direction reference at start, the system assigns a default direction.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory
Sweep\Normal-Trajectory _Solid NORM_TRAJ.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion normal to trajectory.
2. Select the left curve as the origin trajectory and
click Sweep from the mini toolbar.
3. Notice that the highlighted trajectory with an
arrow indicates the start.

.
5. Notice the default sketch orientation.
6. Click Cancel and click Yes to quit Sketcher.
Orientation.
8. Select the References tab from the Sweep tab
in the ribbon.
• Click in the X direction reference at start
collector and select the right side of the
model.
.
10. Notice both the orientation and the crosshairs at
the sweep origin.
types: .
12. Click Corner Rectangle and sketch the
rectangle so that it is symmetrical about the
horizontal reference and offset more to the right
side of the vertical reference.
13. Click One-by-One and edit the overall width
to 40, the height to 25, and the offset 15 to the
left side.
14. Click OK and orient to the Standard
Orientation.
15. Notice the sweep shape.
16. Select the References tab, press CTRL, and
select the curve on the right as a second
trajectory.
• Select the N check box to set Chain 1 to
normal.

17. Click Create Section , then click Sketch View
and notice that the Sketch is the same except
that the Sketch plane is reoriented.
18. Click Cancel , click Yes, and orient to the
19. Select the References tab and select the N

check box to set Origin back to normal.
• Click in the X direction reference at start
collector and select the right side chamfer
surface.
20. Notice the sweep shape and click Complete
Feature .
Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal Direction

When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is used, the Z-axis of the moving frame
is parallel to a specified direction.
• The section becomes parallel to the specified

reference.
• Geometry updates if the reference is modified.
Figure 1 – Section Normal to Origin Trajectory
Figure 2 – Constant Normal Direction Figure 3 – Constant Normal Direction

Set to Datum Plane Reference Modified

Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal Direction
When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is used, the Z-axis, or section normal, of
the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction. This means the section becomes parallel to the
specified reference. The direction reference collector enables you to add or delete references.
In Figure 1, the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, so the geometry and sketch plane
are normal to the Origin trajectory. In Figure 2, the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control has
been specified, and the datum plane has been specified as the reference. Consequently, the Z-axis of
the frame has become normal to the datum plane, and the geometry has updated. In Figure 3, the
datum plane angle has been flipped, and the variable section sweep geometry has updated as well.
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal Direction

Sweep\Constant-Normal-Direction_Solid CONSTANT_NORMAL.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion using constant normal direction section plane
control.
.
3. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

and notice the sketch orientation.
5. Click Refit from the In Graphics Toolbar .
Orientation.

of the ribbon.
• Edit the Section plane control to Constant
Normal Direction and select datum plane
NORM.
9. Notice that the geometry has updated.

and notice the new sketch orientation.
11. Click Refit from the In Graphics Toolbar .
12. Click OK .
13. Click Complete Feature and orient to the
14. Edit NORM.
• Edit the angle value to -35 and click twice in
the background of the graphics window to
regenerate.
17. Notice that the geometry has updated.

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection
When the Normal to Projection Section plane control is used, there are two levels of control
provided for the moving frame.
• The Y-axis of the moving frame is normal to the

specified direction.
• The Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the
origin trajectory along the specified direction.
• You must specify the direction.
Figure 1 – Normal to Projection Diagram
Figure 2 – Y-axis of Moving Frame Parallel Figure 3 – Z-axis Tangent to Projection

to Direction Reference of Origin Trajectory
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection

As illustrated in Figure 1, when the Normal to Projection Section plane control is used, the Y-axis of
the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction, and the Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the
Origin trajectory along the specified direction. The direction reference collector enables you to add
or delete references.
In Figure 2, the Direction reference specified is datum plane DTM1. The Y-axis of the frame is parallel to
the datum plane normal. If the datum plane were rotated, the Y-axis of the frame would also rotate to
remain parallel to the datum plane normal. The resulting geometry would rotate as well.
In Figure 3, the Direction reference is still datum plane DTM1. In this particular view, the projection of
the Origin trajectory onto this datum plane is directly on top of the Origin trajectory. Notice that the
Z-axis of the frame remains tangent to this projection along the entire sweep length.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection
Sweep\Normal-Projection_Solid NORM_PROJ.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion normal to projection.
.
2. In the model tree, select ORIGIN_TRAJ to view it.
3. Select PROJECT_SAMPLE and click Show
Note: Curve PROJECT_SAMPLE is shown in the plane
for visual reference only.

in the ribbon.
• Notice the available options.
• Edit the Section plane control drop-down list
to Normal To Projection and select datum
plane DTM1.
7. Notice the sweep curves in this view.
8. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation.

9. Notice that the sweep's Z-axis is tangent to the
projection of the origin trajectory in this view.

Orientation.

13. Select the References tab and click Flip to flip
the direction.

Orientation.

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation around the sketch plane's
normal is controlled along the sweep.
• Automatic:
– Section plane automatically oriented in XY
direction.
• Normal To Surface:
– Y-axis of section plane normal to surface on which
Origin trajectory lies.
• X-Trajectory:
– X-axis of section plane “points” to specified
X-Trajectory .
Figure 1 – Automatic Control
Figure 2 – Normal to Surface Control Figure 3 – X-Trajectory Control

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation around the sketch plane's normal is
controlled along the sweep. There are three types of Horizontal and Vertical control:
• Automatic – The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction. Creo Parametric
calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic
is the default for an Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference
collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation at the start of the sweep.
Sometimes it is necessary to specify the X-axis direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or
trajectories that have a straight segment at the start. In Figure 1, the X direction referenced at start is
the right surface of the base feature. Consequently, the X-axis of the frame faces this X direction
reference at start along the entire sweep.
• Normal To Surface – The Y-axis of the section plane is normal to the surface on which the Origin
trajectory lies. This is the default option when the Origin trajectory reference is a curve on a surface,
one-sided edge of a surface, two-sided edge of a surface or solid edge, a curve created though an
intersection of surfaces, or two projection curves. The Next option enables you to move to the next
normal surface. In Figure 2, the Next option is toggled to display the different possible solutions. In
the upper-left image of Figure 2, the normal surface is the back surface, while in the upper-right
image the right surface is the normal surface.
• X-Trajectory – The X-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection point of the specified
X-trajectory and the section plane along the sweep. In Figure 3, the Horizontal/Vertical control is
specified as X-Trajectory . The X-axis of the section plane passes through the specified X-Trajectory,
where the Chain 1 trajectory is the X-Trajectory, along the entire sweep. Notice that the geometry
twists according to the Chain 1 trajectory.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps
Sweep\Horizontal-Vertical-Control_Solid HORIZ_VERT.PRT
Task 1: Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a variable section sweep protrusion.
3. Select the References tab and view the current
settings.
4. Notice the two trajectories selected.

8. In the References tab, right-click the X direction
reference at start collector and select Remove.

9. Edit the Horizontal/Vertical control to Normal
To Surface.
10. Click Next four times to view the possibilities.
11. In the References tab, select the X check box

for Chain 1.
13. Select START from the model tree, press CTRL,

and select END.
14. Notice that the X-direction of the Sketch follows
the X-trajectory to reorient the sketch.

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple Trajectories
You can create sweeps with variable sections using multiple trajectories.
• Each additional trajectory creates a reference

point in Sketcher.
• Reference points move along the trajectories.
• Different geometry effects are possible
depending on dimensioning scheme.
Figure 1 – Section Dimensioned to One Trajectory
Figure 2 – Section Dimensioned to Two Figure 3 – Section Dimensioned and

Trajectories Constrained Differently
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple Trajectories

You can create sweeps using multiple trajectories. Each additional trajectory defined creates a
reference point in Sketcher for the section. The reference points move along each of the trajectories as
the sweep is created. If the sketch is constrained or dimensioned to these trajectory reference points,
the section gets stretched or pulled by these trajectories to change its shape. Depending on exactly
how the section is constrained or dimensioned to the reference points, different geometry effects are
possible from the same section and trajectory. In Figure 1, the section is constrained and dimensioned
only to one of the two trajectories and results in the geometry shown. In Figure 2, the section is
constrained and dimensioned to both trajectories. The right line of the rectangle is dimensioned along
the X-axis to the additional trajectory reference. The resulting geometry is pulled only in the X-axis
by the additional trajectory. In Figure 3, the midpoint of the right rectangle line is constrained to the
additional trajectory reference. Hence the resulting geometry is pulled in both the X and Y axes.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple
Trajectories
Sweep\Multiple_Traj MULT _TRAJ.PRT
Task 1: Create variable section sweeps using multiple trajectories.
3. Notice that there are two trajectories selected.
4. Click Create Section then click Sketch View .
types: .
6. Click Dimension and dimension the right line
to the additional trajectory point. Type 5 as the
value and press ENTER.
7. Click OK and orient to the RIGHT view. Notice

that the additional trajectory does not pull the
Sketch to the right.
8. Orient to the FRONT view orientation and notice
that the additional trajectory does pull the
Sketch.

.
11. Press CTRL, select the right-side midpoint
and the additional trajectory point, then click
Coincident from the mini toolbar.
12. Click Delete in the Resolve Sketch dialog box to
delete the 5.00 dimension.
13. Click OK and orient to the RIGHT view. Notice
that the additional trajectory pulls the Sketch
to the right.
14. Orient to the FRONT view orientation and notice
that the additional trajectory also pulls the
Sketch.

.
17. Select the top line's Horizontal constraint and
delete it.
18. Select the new weak dimension and click
Strong , then press ENTER.
Orientation.
20. Notice that only the right side is affected by the
additional trajectory.
22. Suppress Sweep 1.
• Click OK.
23. Hide TRAJ_1.

24. Press CTRL, select TRAJ_2 and TRAJ_3, and
then click Show from the mini toolbar.
26. Select the middle curve and click Sweep .
27. Press CTRL and select the left and right curves.
.
29. Click Corner Rectangle and sketch a
rectangle using the reference points as three of
four vertices.

Orientation.

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Using Tangent Trajectories
You can specify trajectories to be tangent trajectories.
• Enable tangency for a trajectory:

– Select the T check box.
– Use the Tangency tab.
• Centerline appears in Sketcher for each
tangent trajectory.
• Available options:
– None
– Side 1/Side 2
– Selected
Figure 1 – References and Tangency Tabs
Figure 2 – Viewing Tangent Centerlines Figure 3 – Resultant Tangent Geometry
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Using Tangent Trajectories

You can specify trajectories to be tangent trajectories, which is useful when you want the surfaces
of the variable section sweep to be tangent with existing geometry. You can specify a trajectory to
be tangent either by selecting the T check box in the References tab, or by using the Tangency tab
as shown in Figure 1.
For each tangent trajectory specified, a centerline appears in Sketcher. This centerline pivots as
necessary on the trajectory to maintain the tangency. Therefore, any geometry constrained to the
centerline remains tangent as well along the sweep. In Figure 2, there is a tangent centerline at each
tangent trajectory. The resulting completed geometry is shown in Figure 3.
You can specify a tangent trajectory to be tangent to a surface or to the surfaces of solid geometry.
If you specify a solid geometry edge as the tangent trajectory, the system enables you to specify to
which of the adjacent surfaces the resulting geometry will be tangent. The following tangent options
are available in the dashboard's Tangency tab:
• None – Removes the tangency from the trajectory.
• Side 1 – Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on side 1 of the trajectory. The
resulting tangent surface is specified within the Tangency tab.
• Side 2 – Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on side 2 of the trajectory. The
resulting tangent surface is specified within the Tangency tab.
• Selected – Enables you to manually specify surfaces for the tangent centerlines in the sweep section.
In the References tab, there are two different T check boxes for each tangent trajectory. Toggling the
selected check box switches the tangency from Side 1 to Side 2, and vice versa. De-selecting the T
check box in the References tab is the same as selecting None from the References drop-down list
in the Tangency tab.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Using Tangent
Trajectories
Sweep\Tangent -Trajectory _Solid TANGENT_TRAJ.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion with tangent trajectories.
3. Notice the Origin trajectory and two additional
trajectories.
5. Select the curve and click Sweep from the

mini toolbar.
6. Press CTRL and select the upper-right and
upper-left surface edges.
Note: You are selecting edges, not curves, so that you
can set up tangency to the adjacent surfaces.

• Select the left T check box for both Chain 1
and Chain 2.
8. Select the Tangency tab and select Chain 1.

• Notice that it is set to be tangent to TOP_SURF.
• Edit the References drop-down list to Default
2, which should specify RIGHT_SURF as the
tangent surface.
• Select Chain 2 and ensure that it is set to be
tangent to LEFT_SURF.

• Notice that the T check marks have updated.
• Edit the Section plane control drop-down
list to Constant Normal Direction, close the
References tab, and select datum plane
FRONT.
10. Click Create Section .
11. Click Conic and sketch the conic, tangent to

both the left and right edges.
12. Click One-by-One and edit RHO to 0.35.
13. Click OK .

Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options and Rules
A variable section sweep has several trajectory options and rules.
• Trajectory options:
– Flip trajectory direction
– Trajectory handles:
¨ Dragging
¨ Extend To
¨ Trim At
• Rules:
– Tangency
– Trajectory requirements
Figure 1 – Trajectory Start Point on Left
Figure 3 – Trajectory Both Trimmed

Figure 2 – Trajectory Start Point on Right and Extended
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options
The following trajectory options are available when creating a variable section sweep:
• Flip trajectory direction – You can click the arrow on the trajectory to flip the sweep to the opposite
end. The section is sketched at the indicated start point on the trajectory. In Figure 1, the start point
is located on the left end of the trajectory. Consequently, the section is sketched from the left
side. Conversely, in Figure 2, the start point is located on the right end of the trajectory, resulting in
the section being sketched from the right side.
• Trajectory handles – You can perform several operations on the trajectory handles to cause different
resultant geometry. The following three options are available:
– Dragging – You can drag the trajectory end handles to shorten or lengthen the trajectory. When
you shorten the trajectory, the T value at the end becomes a negative value; if you lengthen the
trajectory, the T value at the end becomes positive.
– Extend To – Extends the sweep along the current trajectory to a selected reference. In Figure 3,
the right endpoint of the trajectory has been extended to datum plane OFFSET.
– Trim At – Trims the trajectory at a selected reference location. In Figure 3, the left endpoint of the
trajectory has been trimmed at datum point PNT0.
To “reset” the trajectory to the original curve length, you can simply re-select the curve.
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Rules
The following are rules regarding tangency for variable section sweeps:
• When using the Variable section option, all entities within the trajectory must be tangent.
• You can use the Constant section option for non-tangent trajectories.
• When using the Normal To Projection Section plane control, the projection of entities on the
reference must be tangent as viewed in the reference direction.
The following are rules regarding trajectory requirements for variable section sweeps:
• An X-Trajectory cannot intersect the origin trajectory, except at the endpoints.
• All trajectories must intersect the moving frame of the sweep, at least for the desired length of
the sweep.
• When using trajectories of different lengths, the shortest trajectory sets the length of the sweep.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options

and Rules
Sweep\Options-Rules_Solid OPTIONS_RULES.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the various trajectory options and rules for a variable section sweep.
.
2. Select the center curve and click Sweep
3. Notice that the start point is on the left.
4. Click the arrow to flip the start point to the right.

6. Notice the crosshairs on the right.
7. Click Center and Point and sketch a circle

with center at the crosshairs.
8. Click One-by-One and edit the diameter to
40.
9. Click OK .
10. In the graphics window, click the arrow to flip

the start point to the left.
12. Notice that the Sketch and crosshairs are now
on the left.
13. Click OK .

15. Drag the left handle to -15.
16. Right-click the left handle and select Trim At.

17. Select datum point PNT0.
18. Right-click the right handle and select Extend

To .
19. Select datum plane OFFSET.
20. Re-select the center curve as the Origin.

21. Notice that it returns to the default length.
22. Press CTRL and select the upper curve.
23. Select the References tab and select the N
check box for Chain 1.
24. Notice that the section is normal to this Chain 1
trajectory.
25. Press CTRL and select the lower curve as an
additional trajectory.
26. Notice that the sweep is limited to the shortest
trajectory.

Module 18
Helical Sweeps and Volume Helical Sweep

Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory
Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other helical geometry.
• Can be protrusions, cuts, or surfaces.

• Helical sweep components:
– Sketch profile
– Sketch section
– Pitch values
• Helical sweep options:
– Pitch points
– Section orientation
– Variable section
– Helix direction
Figure 1 – Threads Cut Into a Part Model
Figure 2 – Spring Figure 3 – Helical Surface Geometry

Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory
Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other helical geometry. The dashboard
interface enables helical sweeps to be created by adding or removing material, or as surfaces. In
Figure 1, the threads were created by removing material, in Figure 2, the spring was created by adding
material, and in Figure 3, the helical geometry was created with surfaces.
Components of a Helical Sweep
The helical sweep feature uses each of the following components to generate a helical shape:
• Sketch profile – Defines the shape and diameter of the helix. For example, the sketched profile for a
typical spring is a straight line parallel to the center axis.
• Sketch section – Defines the shape to be swept along the helix. For example, the section for a typical
spring is a circular section.
• Pitch values – The distance between the spring coils. The pitch value can also be defined by a
relation, for example, the profile length divided by the number of coils.
Helical Sweep Options
The following options are available in the dashboard when defining a helical sweep feature:
• Pitch points – Adding a single pitch value causes the pitch to remain constant along the entire
sweep profile, whereas adding multiple pitch values enables you to define a graph that specifies the
pitch values at specific points.
• Section orientation – Defines how the cross-section is oriented as it sweeps along the trajectory. For
Normal to trajectory, the cross-section is oriented normal to the trajectory, as shown in the upper
image of Figure 4. For Through axis of revolution, the cross-section lies in a plane that passes through
the axis of revolution, as shown in the lower image of Figure 4.
Figure 4 - Cross-section Angle

• Variable section – Defines the behavior of the cross-section as it travels along the trajectory of the
sweep. Vary section enables the cross-section to change size and shape, based on its position
along the sweep trajectory.
• Helix direction – Defines which direction the trajectory is wrapped about the helix. For Use Right
Handed, the trajectory is defined using the right-hand rule, and for Use Left Handed, the trajectory
is defined using the left-hand rule.
Using Trajpar with a Helical Sweep
Helical Sweeps, like variable section sweeps, can utilize the trajpar parameter. Trajpar can reference a
datum graph using the EVALGRAPH function if desired. Trajpar can also be used in section relations to
control dimensions as the section is swept along the helix. For example, trajpar enables you to vary
the spring section size along the swept helix length, or it enables you to taper the end of a worm gear
helix to blend into the shaft.

Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs
You can create springs using helical sweep features.
• Spring characteristics:
– Typically normal to the trajectory.
– Typically a round or rectangular section.
• Tips:
– Create hooked ends or extensions using an
additional sweep.
– Use a relation to control pitch based on
length.
Figure 1 – Spring Profile
Figure 3 – Completed Right and Left

Figure 2 – Spring Section Hand Springs
Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs

You can create springs using helical sweep features. Typically, the helical sweep feature maintains the
following characteristics for solid spring models:
• The section is usually normal to the trajectory.
• The sketched section is usually round or rectangular in shape.
Figure 3 depicts two completed springs, one right-handed, the other left-handed. Consider these
tips for further enhancing the spring:
• You can create an additional sweep feature from the ends of the spring to create hooked ends or
extensions.
• You can write a relation to control the spring's pitch based on its length, while maintaining an equal
number of coils. This enables both natural, as well as stretched or compressed, versions of the
spring by simply modifying its length.

PROCEDURE - Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs
Sweep\Helical_Springs NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create a spring.
1. Click New , select Part, edit the Name to SPRING, and click OK.
3. From the Shapes group, select Helical Sweep from the Sweep types drop-down list.
5. Click Define to create the Helix sweep profile.
6. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree, as the Sketch plane.
• Click Sketch.
• Disable Plane Display .
7. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
8. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.
9. Click Centerline from the Datum group and
sketch a centerline on the vertical reference.
• Click One-by-One .
10. Click Line Chain and sketch a vertical line
to the left of the centerline, starting on the
horizontal reference.
11. Edit the revolved diameter to 4.
• Notice that the system created the revolved
diameter automatically.
12. Edit the height to 10.
13. Click OK .

15. Click Center and Point from the Sketching
group and sketch a circle as shown.
16. Click One-by-One and edit the diameter to 1.
17. Click OK .
18. Select the Pitch tab.
19. Edit the Pitch value from 1.00 to 2.00.
20. Click Left Handed from the dashboard.
21. Click OK .

Task 2: Create a relation to control the spring pitch.
1. Edit Heclical Sweep 1.
2. Right-click and enable Display Sketch
Dimensions .

4. Click Relations from the Model Intent group.
5. Select pitch dimension d2.
6. In the Relations dialog box, type =.
7. Select length dimension d1.
8. Type /6, where 6 is the desired number of coils.
9. The final equation should read d2=d1/6.
10. Click OK from the Relations dialog box and
press CTRL+G.
11. Edit Heclical Sweep 1.

12. Right-click and enable Display Sketch
Dimensions .
13. Select the upper endpoint of the profile and drag
to approximately 12.00, then to approximately
8.00.
to regenerate the model.
15. Notice the new compressed spring shape, with
the same number of coils.

Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads
You can create threads using helical sweep features.
• Create protrusions or cuts.

– Protrusions add material to the model.
– Cuts remove material from the model.
• Usually use the Through axis of revolution
option.
Figure 1 – Completed Threads
Figure 2 – Viewing the Sketched Profile Figure 3 – Viewing the Sketched Section
Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads

You can create threads using helical sweep features. You can create threads as both protrusions and
cuts. Protrusions are created for adding material to the model, while cuts are created to remove
material from the model. You typically use the Through axis of revolution option when using helical
sweeps to create threads.
Best Practices
Typically, you do not create threads for fasteners, threaded holes, and so on, because the threads
would be for purely cosmetic purposes. You typically create helical sweeps for major helical model
geometry that needs to be visualized, or in cases where clearances are close and must be measured or
where tolerances are of importance.

PROCEDURE - Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads
Sweep\Helical_Threads THREADS.PRT
Task 1: Create a helical sweep cut.

2. Select Helical Sweep from the Sweep types drop-down list in the Shapes group.
3. Click Left Handed and Remove Material from the dashboard.
• Select Through axis of revolution, if necessary.
• Click Define to define the Helix sweep profile.
5. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch plane.
• Click Sketch.
types: .
toolbar.
8. Click References .
• Select the left and right edges, and the top
silhouette edge.
• Click Close.
9. Click Centerline from the Sketching group
and sketch a centerline on the center horizontal
reference.
10. Click Line Chain and sketch a horizontal
line from left to right, on top of the horizontal
silhouette edge reference, overhanging at both
ends.
11. Click Dimension and dimension each
overhanging end to the closest vertical edge,
editing each dimension to 3.
12. Click OK .

13. Edit the Pitch value to 20.
Helix axis.
15. Click Create Section .
17. Click Palette and drag the thread sketch into
the graphics window, then click Close from the
dialog box.
• Drag the rotation handle to rotate the sketch
180 degrees.
• Right-click the location handle and drag it to
the midpoint of the left, vertical line.
• Locate the sketch at the intersection of the
bottom horizontal and left vertical references.
• Edit the Scale to 1 and click Accept Changes
.
18. Click OK .
20. Orient to the Standard Orientation and
de-select all geometry.
Task 2: Copy the helical sweep to make two sets of threads.

1. Select Helical Sweep 1 in the model tree, click
Copy and then click Paste Special from
the Paste types drop-down list.
2. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply
move/rotate transformations to copies check
box, and click OK.
3. In the dashboard, click Rotate .
• Select the axis running through the part.
• Edit the rotation angle to 180.

Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps
You can define a section for a helical sweep to be variable along the length of the sweep.
• Along Trajectory options include:
– Constant
– Variable
• Constrain the section to other geometry with
Variable.
Figure 1 – Viewing the Original Constant

Section Helical Sweep
Figure 3 – Viewing the Variable Section

Figure 2 – Redefining the Section Helical Sweep
Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps

You can define a section for a helical sweep to be variable along the length of the sweep. This is
accomplished by selecting the desired Along Trajectory option in the dashboard. Along trajectory
can be set to either of the following:
• Constant
• Variable
By setting the Variable option, you are able to constrain the section to other geometry, as long as the
system can regenerate the section along the entire helical path. For example, a surface that followed
the range of the helical sweep can be utilized as a reference, whereas a datum plane referenced in
the sketch plane is not valid.
PROCEDURE - Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps

Sweep\Helical_Variable-Section_Solid HELICAL_VAR-SOLID.PRT
Task 1: Redefine a helical sweep to use the Vary section option.
2. Notice the constant section in the helical sweep
feature.
3. In the model tree, select Extrude 1 and click

Show from the mini toolbar.
• Edit the definition of Extrude 1 and notice it
is a surface.

4. Edit the definition of Helical Sweep 1.
6. Notice the current sweep profile raises the
center of the circular section.
7. In the dashboard, click Create Section .

8. Click Tangent from the Constrain group in
the ribbon, and constrain the circle to be tangent
to the cylindrical surface.
• Click Delete from the Resolve Sketch dialog
box to delete the dimension.
9. Click OK .
• Select Variable.
12. Hide Extrude 1.
13. Notice that the current sweep profile still raises
the center of the circular section, but the section
is constrained to the cylinder, resulting in a
smaller diameter.

Module 19
Swept Blends and Advanced Bends

Understanding Swept Blend Theory
A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend multiple sections along a main
trajectory.
• Create a solid or surface feature.

• Add or remove material.
• Main components:
– Trajectories
♦ Use one or two
– Sections
♦ Two sections minimum
♦ Each must have same number of entities
Figure 1 – Swept Blend Feature
♦ Select or sketch sections
Figure 2 – Trajectories Highlighted in Green Figure 3 – Sections Highlighted in Green
Understanding Swept Blend Theory

A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend multiple sections along a main
trajectory. With the Swept Blend feature, you can create a solid or surface feature. You can add or
remove material, and the sections can be open or closed.
Trajectory Information
A swept blend can have two trajectories: an Origin trajectory (required) and a Secondary trajectory
(optional). The swept blend in the figures uses both an Origin trajectory and a Secondary trajectory. To
define a trajectory of the swept blend, you can select a sketched curve, a chain of datum curves, or
edges. Each selected trajectory has end handles that you can dynamically drag if you want the feature
to not follow the entire trajectory. You can specify a length from the end of the trajectory, or you
can use the Trim At and Extend To options. Plus, you can use SHIFT to snap the trajectory endpoint
onto other existing geometry.
Section Information
Each Swept Blend feature must have at least two sections, and additional sections may be added
between these two sections. While the sections may change shape, they must each contain the same
number of entities. The one exception to this rule is that you can blend sections to a point. You can
also add blend vertices to sections that need additional entities to equal those of other sections.
Each blend vertex counts as one entity.
You can sketch the sections to be blended at specified segment vertices or datum points on the
Origin Trajectory . To orient a section, you specify the direction of the sketch plane (the Z-axis) and the
horizontal and vertical direction to that plane (the X or Y axis).
You can use the Selected Sections option to select existing sketches, or edge and curve references
and use them as sections for a swept blend.
Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections

You can select existing sketches to become sections for a swept blend feature.
• Insert
– Enables you to select the next section
– Section inserted after currently selected
section
– # entities in section displayed
• Remove
– Removes currently selected section
• Details
– Enables advanced selection Figure 1 – Selecting Sections
Figure 2 – Inserting a Section Figure 3 – Start Point Moved
Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections

After selecting an Origin trajectory, you can select existing sketches or edge and curve references to
become sections for the swept blend protrusion or cut.
Options for selecting sections include:
• Insert – Used to insert the next section after the currently selected section. If two sections are already
selected, you can insert a new section between these existing sections by selecting the first section
and clicking Insert. In Figure 1, two sections are selected, one at the trajectory start and another at the
trajectory end. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, a new section was inserted.
Selected sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard. The system lists the number
of entities in the reference sketch next to each section. If the sections contain an unequal number
of sides, you can use the divide tool to maintain an equal number of entities. For example, you can
blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three arcs. In the figures, a circle
is blended into a rectangle.
• Remove – Removes the currently selected section.
• Details – Opens the Chain dialog box for advanced selection tools for selecting series of chains
for sections.
Manipulating Selected Sections
The start point is displayed on the selected section. The system lines up the start points from each
section. A twisting effect occurs if the start points for each of the sections are not in same relative
position, as shown in Figure 2. You can select and drag the start points to a different vertex to remove
or change the twisting effect, as shown in Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections
Swept_Blend\Select_Sections SELECT_SECTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Create a swept blend protrusion by selecting sections.
2. In the model tree, select SEC_1.
3. Notice that the feature is a rectangle.
4. Edit the definition of SEC_2.

types: .
6. Notice that this section is a circle divided into
four entities.
7. Click OK .
8. Edit the definition of SEC_3.

9. Notice that this section consists of four arcs.
10. Click OK .
12. In the model tree, select TRAJ and click Swept

Blend from the mini toolbar.
13. Click Solid from the dashboard, if necessary.

• Select the Selected Sections option.
15. Select the right circle as Section 1.
16. In the Sections tab, click Insert and select the

rectangle as Section 2.
17. In the graphics window, select the Section 1 tag,

right-click, and select Insert Section.
18. Notice that a new section is inserted, making
Section 2 now Section 3.
19. Select the left circle as Section 2.
20. Notice the twisting effect in the geometry.

21. Drag the start point up to the next entity
endpoint to remove the twisting effect.
23. Edit SEC_1.

24. Edit the angle from 0 to 20 and click Regenerate
from the quick access toolbar.
25. Spin the model, and notice that the sections do
not have to be all the same angle.
Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections

You can create all the sections within the swept blend feature if desired.
• Select trajectory
– You can flip the trajectory direction.
• Select section location
– Default locations
– Optional locations
• Sketch the section
– Start point
• Manage Sketched Sections
– # entities in section displayed
– Insert Figure 1 – Sketching Sections
– Remove
Figure 2 – Changed Section Location
Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections

You can create all the sections within the swept blend feature if desired. Use the following procedure
to create swept blend protrusions or cuts by sketching the sections.

First, you must select the Origin trajectory. The direction of the sweep along the trajectory is displayed
with an arrow. You can flip the direction of the arrow, which reverses the direction of the swept blend.
Selecting the Section Location
Next, you can select where to place a section along the trajectory. The default locations are the
trajectory start and trajectory end, both denoted by an “X” symbol, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Optionally, you can also select vertices or datum points as the location to place a section. In Figure
1, Section 2 is placed at the vertex of the arc and line. When you select the location of the section, it
is specified in the Section Location collector. To relocate a section after sketching it with this option,
select the section, activate the Section Location collector, and select a different chain end, vertex, or
datum point as the section location. In Figure 2, the section location for Section 2 has been relocated to
the right trajectory endpoint.
Note: You cannot locate a section at a sharp corner of a trajectory, because the system is not able to
determine the orientation of the section at that point.
Sketching the Sections
Once the location for a section is specified, you can sketch that section. When sketching the section in
Sketcher, a start point appears on the first entity sketched. The system lines up the start points from
each section when they are swept along the trajectory. A twisting effect occurs if the start points
are not in the same relative position. You can change the location of the start point within Sketcher
by selecting the desired vertex, right-clicking, and selecting Start Point. Unlike selecting sections for
creating swept blends, you cannot move the start point except within Sketcher.
Managing Sketched Sections
The sketched sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard. The system lists the number
of entities in the reference sketch next to each section. If the sections contain an unequal number of
sides, you can use the divide tool to maintain an equal number of entities. For example, you can blend a
triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three arcs.
Within the Section tab of the dashboard, the following two options are available for managing sketched
sections:
• Insert – Used to insert the next section, after the currently selected section. If two sections are
already selected, you can insert a new section between these existing sections by selecting the first
section and clicking Insert.
• Remove – Removes the currently selected section.
PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections

Swept_Blend\Sketch_Sections SKETCH_SECTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Create a swept blend protrusion by sketching a section.

2. Select the curve and click Swept Blend from the mini toolbar.
5. Notice that the ends are available points for
sketching sections.
6. Select the left endpoint and click Sketch.

types: .
8. Click Corner Rectangle and starting in
the upper-left corner, sketch a symmetrical
rectangle.
9. Click One-by-One and edit the width and
height to 150 and 100, respectively.
10. Click OK .
12. Select the vertex between the line and arc and
click Sketch.

14. Click Center and Point from the Circle types
drop-down list and sketch a 100 diameter circle.
15. Click Centerline from the Sketching group
and sketch two centerlines at angles of 45.
16. Click Divide from the Editing group and
divide the circle at each of the four centerline
intersections, starting from the upper-right
quadrant.
17. Select the upper-left corner, then right-click
and select Start Point.
Orientation.
19. Select the far-right trajectory endpoint, and
notice that the section relocates.
20. In the Sections tab, select Section 1 and click

Insert.
21. Select datum point PNT0 from the model tree
and click Sketch.
23. Click Corner Rectangle and starting in
the upper-left corner, sketch a symmetrical
rectangle.
24. Click One-by-One and edit both the width
and height to 75.
25. Click OK .

27. Right-click and select Trajectory .
28. Click the trajectory direction arrow to flip the
blend.
29. Notice that the sections maintain the same
reference numbers.
31. Edit PNT0.
32. Edit the point ratio value from 0.5 to 0.7 and
click Regenerate .
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options

There are numerous section options available when creating a swept blend feature.
• Z-Rotation
– Each section independent
– Range: +/-120 degrees
• Section X-axis directions
– Sets X-axis direction for active section
– Only available with Automatic
Horizontal/Vertical control
• Blend vertices
– Sketched sections:
¨ Managed in section
– Selected sections:
¨ Managed using Sections tab and drag
handles Figure 1 – Blend Vertices
Figure 2 – Modified Section X-Axis Directions Figure 3 – Z-Rotation Modified

Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options
Consider the following section options that are available when creating a swept blend protrusion or cut.
Adding Blend Vertices
For a sketched section, blend vertices are created and managed in the section itself, within Sketcher.
That is, you add blend vertices within Sketcher while sketching the section.
For selected sections, blend vertices are added using the Add Blend Vertex option in the Sections tab
of the dashboard. Each blend vertex displays in the graphics window as a drag handle. You can move
the blend vertex locations by dragging their handles. In Figure 1, two blend vertices were added to
the rear section and dragged to the top corners.
Note: You cannot add a blend vertex at the start point of a section.You can add blend vertices only to start
and end sections that are located at trajectory vertices. You cannot add blend vertices to intermediate
sections.
Modifying the Section X-Axis Directions
The Section X-axis directions option enables you to set the X-axis direction for the active section. When
Horizontal/Vertical control in the References tab is specified as Automatic, the Section X-axis directions
in the Sections tab is synchronized with the X direction reference at the start in the References tab.
This option is available only when Automatic is specified as the Horizontal/Vertical control. In Figure
2, the X-axis direction was modified from one datum plane to another datum plane. Notice how the
section reoriented.
Modifying the Z-Rotation
You can specify the section’s rotation angle about the Z-axis for each location at which a sketched
section is defined. Rotation angles can range in value between –120 and +120 degrees. In Figure 3, the
Z-rotation was modified for each section individually to create different geometry.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options

Swept_Blend\Section_Options OPTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Edit the swept blend Z rotation and section X-axis direction.
2. Edit the definition of Swept Blend 1.
3. Select the Sections tab and select Section 2.
• Edit the Rotation angle to 20.
4. Select Section 3 and click Sketch.

types: .
toolbar.
7. Notice the default X-direction in the Sketch
view.
8. Press CTRL, select both construction lines and
click Toggle Construction from the mini
toolbar.

9. Click Delete Segment and delete all of the
top, right, and bottom line segments.
10. Click One-by-One , then select the right
triangle point and right-click Blend Vertex.
11. Notice that the triangle faces in the X-direction.

Orientation.
13. In the Sections tab, click in the Section X-axis
directions collector and select datum plane
DTM1 from the model tree.
14. Notice the change in geometry orientation.
Task 2: Create a swept blend protrusion and add blend vertices to a section.
1. Select TRAJ_2 and click Swept Blend from

the mini toolbar.

• Select the Selected Sections option.
4. Select the rectangle as Section 1.
5. In the Sections tab, click Insert and select the

front sketch as Section 2.
• Notice that the # column in the Sections tab
has 4 and 6 entities, respectively.

6. Select Section 1 and drag the start point to the
lower-left.
7. Click Add Blend Vertex and drag it to the
upper-right corner.
8. Click Add Blend Vertex again and drag it to the
upper-left corner, if necessary.
9. Notice that the # column in the Sections tab
now has 6 and 6 entities.
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control

You can modify the swept blend's moving section frame orientation to create different geometry.
• Section plane control options:

– Normal To Trajectory
¨ Normal to Origin trajectory by default
– Constant Normal Direction
¨ Section Z-axis parallel to specified
reference direction
– Normal To Projection
¨ Origin trajectory projected onto specified
reference
Figure 1 – Section Normal to Trajectory
Figure 2 – Section Constant Normal Direction Figure 3 – Section Normal to Projection
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control

Each sketched or selected section is placed on a moving section frame. You can adjust the orientation
of this moving section frame using section plane control settings in the References tab of the dashboard.
The following three section plane control options are available:
• Normal To Trajectory – The moving section frame is always normal to a specified trajectory. By
default, the section frame is normal to the Origin trajectory. If you have specified a Secondary
trajectory, you can make the section frame normal to it by selecting the N check box in the
References tab for the Secondary trajectory. In Figure 1, the section frame has been specified normal
to the Secondary trajectory. Notice that the section is perpendicular to this Secondary trajectory.
• Constant Normal Direction – The Z-axis (or section normal) of the moving frame is parallel to a
specified direction. In the case of a datum plane, the Z-axis is parallel to the plane normal direction,
so the section becomes parallel to the plane. The Direction reference collector enables you to add
or delete the reference to which the Z-axis is parallel. In Figure 2, the section plane control has
been set to Constant Normal Direction, with the direction reference set to a datum plane. Notice
that the section is parallel to the datum plane.
• Normal To Projection – The section frame remains normal to the Origin trajectory as it is viewed along
the projection direction. The Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the Origin trajectory at the direction
specified. In Figure 3, the section plane control has been set to Normal To Projection. The Origin
trajectory is projected onto Direction reference TOP. The resulting section frame is normal to this
projected Origin trajectory.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control

Swept_Blend\Section_Plane SECTION_PLANE.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the section plane control options available for a swept blend protrusion.
2. Select TRAJ_1.
4. Notice that the trajectory is curved in this view,
also.
7. In the dashboard, select the References tab.
• Notice that the Section plane control is
Normal To Trajectory .
• Press CTRL and select the additional
trajectory.
8. Orient to the TOP view orientation.
9. In the References tab, select the N check box
for the Secondary trajectory.
10. Notice that the section is normal to the
Secondary trajectory.
11. In the References tab, select the N check box

for the Origin trajectory.
• Right-click Secondary and select Remove.
12. Reorient the model and notice that the section
is normal to the Origin trajectory.

13. Edit the Section plane control from Normal To
Trajectory to Constant Normal Direction.
15. Select datum plane DTM1, orient to the TOP
view orientation, and notice that the section is
parallel to the datum plane.
17. Edit the Section plane control from Constant
Normal Direction to Normal To Projection.
• Select the References tab to close it and
select datum plane TOP from the model tree.
• Select the References tab and click Flip.
19. Notice that the section is normal to datum plane
TOP.

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame rotation around the sketch
plane's normal is controlled along the swept blend feature.
• Automatic
– Section plane automatically oriented in XY
direction
• Normal To Surface
– Y-axis “points” normal to selected surface
• X-Trajectory
– Only available with two trajectories
– X-axis of section plane “points” to Secondary
trajectory
Figure 1 – Automatic Control
Figure 2 – Normal to Surface Control Figure 3 – X-Trajectory Control
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame rotation around the sketch plane's
normal is controlled along the swept blend protrusion or cut. There are three types of Horizontal and
Vertical control:
• Automatic – The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction. Creo Parametric
calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic
is the default for an Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference
collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation at the start of the
swept blend. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the X-axis direction, for example, for straight line
trajectories or trajectories that have a straight segment at the start.
When the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as Automatic, you can specify the X-Direction
reference at start. The X-Direction reference at start sets the initial X-orientation of the section
frame. The X-orientation is the positive X direction in the sketch view for the section. You can either
specify this reference or leave it at Default, meaning that the system specifies a default orientation.
In Figure 1, the Horizontal/Vertical control is set to Automatic. In turn, the X-Direction reference at
the start is a datum plane.
• Normal To Surface – The Y-axis of the section frame points in the direction of the surface selected,
normal to any surface associated with the Origin trajectory. This is the default selection when the
Origin trajectory has at least one associated surface. Click Next to toggle through possible surfaces,
as shown in Figure 2.

• X-Trajectory – This option becomes available when there is both an Origin and Secondary trajectory
specified. The X-trajectory is the Secondary trajectory, and it must be at least as long as the Origin
trajectory. For this option, the X-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection point of the
specified X-trajectory and the section plane along the sweep, as shown in Figure 3.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend

Swept_Blend\Horiz_Vert HORIZ-VERT.PRT
Task 1: Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend.
.
2. View the geometry:
• Orient to the TOP view orientation.
• Orient to the RIGHT view orientation.

Orientation.
5. In the dashboard, select the References tab
and view the current settings.
6. Notice that the current Horizontal/Vertical
control is specified as Normal To Surface in the
drop-down list.
• Click Next four times to view the different
possibilities.
7. Select Automatic from the Horizontal/Vertical
control drop-down list.
8. Notice that the sections have been reoriented.
9. Click in the X direction reference at start

collector, select the References tab to close it,
and select datum plane RIGHT from the model
tree.
• Select the References tab to open it and click
Flip.
10. In the graphics window, select Section 2, then

right-click and select Sketch.
types: .
toolbar.
13. Notice the current X direction.
14. Click OK .

16. Right-click and select Trajectory , if necessary.
17. Press CTRL and select the Secondary trajectory.

• Edit the Horizontal/Vertical control from
Automatic to X-Trajectory .
• Notice that the X check box is now selected
for the Secondary trajectory.
19. Notice that the sections have been reoriented.

22. Notice the new X-direction.
23. Click OK .
Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency

You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end of the swept blend feature.
• Tangency conditions:
– Free
– Tangent
– Normal
• Sketcher point conditions:
– Sharp
– Smooth
Figure 1 – Geometry Before Tangency
Figure 2 – Geometry After Tangency Figure 3 – Smooth and Sharp Conditions

Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency
You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end of the swept blend protrusion or
cut. You can change tangency condition settings either in the Tangency tab of the dashboard or by
right-clicking the tangency condition icons in the graphics window and selecting the desired condition.
There are three available tangency conditions:
• Free – The start or end section is a free end; tangency is not defined.
• Tangent – The specified end is to be tangent to the selected adjacent surfaces. You must
specify the adjacent surface to which each edge is to be tangent. The Entities collector advances
automatically to the next entity.
• Normal – The start or end of the swept blend is normal to the section plane. The Entities collectors
are not available and references are not required.
If a Sketcher point is used at the start or end of the swept blend feature, you can define the condition
for the geometry as Sharp or Smooth.
Note: You cannot define tangency for a thin protrusion.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency

Swept_Blend\Tangency TANGENCY.PRT
Task 1: Add tangency constraints to the End Sections of a swept blend protrusion.
3. In the dashboard, select the Tangency tab.
• Edit the Boundary Condition for the Start
Section from Free to Tangent .
• Select the surface adjacent to the highlighted
edge.
4. Continue selecting the remaining three adjacent
surfaces. Notice that the first surface highlights
after all four surfaces have been selected.
5. In the graphics window, right-click the icon for
the End Section and select Tangent .
• Select the surface adjacent to the highlighted
edge.
6. Continue selecting the remaining three adjacent

surfaces.
7. Notice the change in the geometry shape.

Task 2: Edit the tangency for a Sketcher point condition of a swept blend protrusion.
2. Select Section 2, if necessary.

types: .
5. Drag a window around the existing rectangle
sketch and delete it.
6. Click Point from the Sketching group and
place a sketch point at the crosshairs.
7. Click OK .
8. Orient to the Standard Orientation, if necessary.
9. Click Preview Feature .
10. Notice the sharp cap that has formed at the end.

12. In the dashboard, select the Tangency tab.
• Edit the Boundary Condition for the End
Section from Sharp to Smooth.
14. Edit Draft 1.

15. Edit the draft angle from 10 to -10 and click
Regenerate .

Creating Spinal Bends
You can bend a model along a curve with Spinal Bend.
• Spinal Bend:
– Spine
– Bend Geometry
• Options
– Lock Length
– Depth
– X-Section Properties Figure 1 – Original Model
Figure 2 – Lock Length Option Figure 3 – Completed Model
Creating Spinal Bends

The Spinal Bend option bends a solid or quilt about a curved spine by continuously repositioning
cross sections along a curve.
When creating a spinal bend, planar cross sections perpendicular to an axis are repositioned
perpendicular to the trajectory with no distortion. All compression or distortion is done longitudinally
along the trajectory.
To create a spinal bend, first select a curve to be used as the spine, and then select a solid or surface
quilt to bend:
• The spine must be C1 continuous (tangent). If the spine is not also C2 continuous (curvature
continuous), the feature surfaces might not be tangent. If using X-Section Properties Control, the
plane that passes normal through the start point of the spine, must intersect the original quilt
or solid feature.
• You can bend one selected surface quilt, or you can bend all the solid features in the part. If you
select a solid feature, the system makes the original solid feature invisible after the spinal bend
feature is created. If you select a quilt feature, the original quilt feature remains visible.
Spinal Bend includes the following options in the dashboard:
• Lock Length – When enabled, maintains the original length of the geometry after bending it. When
disabled, sets the length of the resulting bent geometry to be equal to the length of the spine curve.
• Depth – Bend the entire object, bend a blind distance, or bend up to a reference. Use the Remove
unbent geometry option in the Options tab with the Blind depth option to remove geometry beyond
the spine.
X-Section Property Control options:
• You can select one of the following x-section properties to control:
– Area
– Ixx, Ixy, Iyy
– Ixx, Ixy, Iyy at centroid
– Principal inertia 1 and 2
– Centroid x and y
• After the selection of a property to control, you can click Sketch csys to sketch the coordinate system
to be used in the calculation of cross section properties. This coordinate system will be projected
onto the plane of each cross section.
• The system places each cross section of the original quilt or solid at the trajectory parameter (trajpar)
on the spine, according to the following formula:
– G(Trajpar) = (F(p) - F(0)) / (F(p1) - F(p0))
– The variables are as follows:
¨ G() – If you chose Graph, this is the function defined by the reference graph feature. If you chose
Linear, this is the function defined by trajpar itself (the identity function).
¨ F() – The cross section property function defined by feature relations.
¨ p – The chosen property of the original quilt or solid cross section (For example, Area, Moment
of Ineria, or Centroid).
¨ p0, p1 – The properties of the first and last cross sections.
• You can also write your own Relation. You can type feature relations that define the symbol
SEC_PROP as a function of the mass properties of the original quilt or solid cross sections. The right
side of the relations can include the following:
– Area
– CENTROID_X, CENTROID_Y – Coordinates, with respect to the sketched coordinate system, of the
center of area of the cross section.
– IXX, IXY, IYY – Planar moments of inertia of the cross section, with respect to the sketched
coordinate system.
– IXX_AT_CENTROID, IXY_AT_CENTROID, IYY_AT_CENTROID – Planar moments of inertia of the
cross section, with respect to a coordinate system at the centroid and with axes parallel to the
specified coordinate system.
– PRINCIPAL1 – Greater planar principal moment of inertia.
– PRINCIPAL2 – Lesser planar principal moment of inertia.
X Section Property Control Types:
• Adjust the resulting geometry to control the distribution of a varying cross section mass property
along the spine. This property is defined by relations. The resulting spinal bend feature is defined by
the same family of cross sections, regardless of the chosen option. However, the distribution of the
cross sections in the spinal bend differs for each of these options:
– Linear – The section property varies linearly between the values at the start and end points.
– Graph – The section property varies, per the graph values, between the values at the start and
end points. Select an existing graph feature. The graph must pass through the points (0, 0) and
(1, 1) and must be monotonically non-decreasing (that is, with no horizontal tangent to the curve)
in the interval 0 to 1.
PROCEDURE - Creating Spinal Bends

Advanced_Bends\Spinal WRENCH.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with a Spinal Bend.
2. Observe the original model.

Graphics toolbar and select FRONT.

4. Click the Engineering group drop-down menu
and select Spinal Bend .
• Select the datum curve on the model.
6. Click in the Bend Geometry collector from the
dashboard.
• Select the solid model.
7. Click Unattached Preview from the
dashboard.
8. Select the Lock Length check box.
9. Clear the Lock Length check box.

10. Click Attached Preview from the dashboard.
12. Press CTRL+D to return to the standard
orientation.
13. In the model tree, select SPINE and click Hide

Creating Toroidal Bends
You can bend solids, surfaces, or curves into revolved, toroidal shapes.
• Profile Section
– Csys location sets neutral plane
• Bend Radius
– Radius Value
– Bend Axis
– 360 Degree Bend
¨ Select 2 planes
Figure 2 – Toroidal Bend Created Figure 3 – Completed Model

Creating Toroidal Bends
A toroidal bend can form solids, surfaces, or datum curves into revolved toroidal shapes.
To create a toroidal bend, define the following:
• Profile Section (sketch) – Defines the profile section of the revolved geometry.
• Bending Geometry – Solid, Surface, or Datum Curves.
• Bend Radius – Sets the distance between the origin of the coordinate system and the bend axis.
The profile section can be sketched internal within the tool, or selected from the model. The section
must contain a Coordinate system, whose x-axis defines the neutral plane during the bend operation.
The Bending Geometry can be defined by selecting quilts, curves, or by enabling the Solid Geometry
option, which selects all solid geometry in the model.
You can specify the bend radius of the neutral plane using three methods:
• Bend Radius – Sets the distance between the origin of the coordinate system and the bend axis.
• Bend Axis – Select an axis that lies on the profile section plane.
• 360 degrees Bend – Sets a full bend (360°). You must specify two planes that define the geometry to
bend. The bend radius is internally determined from the distance between the two planes divided
by 2π.
You can define the following additional options for a toroidal bend:
• Normals Reference Section – Defines the post-bending direction of surfaces normal to the neutral
plane. All surfaces that are normal to the neutral plane in the flat state become normal to the profile
surface after bending. You can apply the Normals Reference Section to set the selected surfaces to
become normal to the referenced surface, instead of becoming normal to the profile surface. Use
one of the following methods to use the Normals Reference Section option:
– Create both sections as external sketch features.
– Create the profile section as an external sketch feature and the normals reference section as
an internal sketch of the toroidal bend feature. To create a feature containing multiple internal
cross-referencing sketches, first create the profiles section and then the normals reference section.
The Sketcher setup for the normals reference section is then automatically selected to be the
same as the profile section and cannot be modified within the normals reference section sketch.
• Curve Bend – Defines the bending options for all curves in the curves collector:
– Standard – Bends the chains according to the standard algorithm for toroidal bends.
– Preserve length in angular direction – Bends curve chains so the distance from points on the
curves to the plane of the profile section is maintained along the angular direction.
– Keep flat and contract – Keeps the curve chains flat and in the neutral plane. The distance from
points on the curves to the plane of the profile section is shortened. If a second toroidal bend is
created with the Preserve length in angular direction option, the result is equivalent to creating a
single toroidal bend with the Standard option.
– Keep flat and expand – Keeps the curve chains flat and in the neutral plane. The distance from
points on the curves to the plane of the profile section is increased. If a second toroidal bend is
created with the Standard option, the result is equivalent to creating a single toroidal bend with
the Preserve length in angular direction option.
Note: You can apply the nonstandard options only if the curves to bend lie on the neutral plane.
PROCEDURE - Creating Toroidal Bends

Advanced_Bends\Toroidal TIRE.PRT
Task 1: Create a toroidal bend with a radius value.
With Edges from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.
3. In the model tree, select Extrude 1 and click

• Notice the width is 250.

4. In the model tree, select Profile.
• Notice the perimeter dimension is driving the
length of curve to 250.
• Notice the coordinate system on the left end
of the sketch.
5. Click the Engineering group drop-down menu

and select Toroidal Bend .
• Select the Profile curve.
6. Select the References tab from the dashboard.
• Select the Solid Geometry check box.
7. Edit the Radius to 200 in the dashboard and
press ENTER.
• Click Preview Feature from the dashboard.
Task 2: Create a 360 degree toroidal bend.
1. Select Extrude 1 and click Edit Definition

• Edit the length from 300 to 1500.

3. In the model tree, select Toroidal Bend 1 and
click Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.
• Select 360 degrees Bend from the define
bend type drop-down menu in the dashboard.
• Press CTRL+D to reorient to the standard
orientation.
4. Zoom in and select the end surface.
5. Pan to the other end of the model.

• Select the other end surface.

7. Press CTRL+D.
Task 3: Mirror the model to complete the tire shape.

1. In the model tree, select TIRE.PRT.
• Click Mirror from the Editing group.
• Select the RIGHT datum plane.

Module 20
Family Tables

Understanding Family Table Theory
Family tables enable you to create a large number of common parts quickly based upon an initial
or "generic" design model.
• Family tables:
– Collection of parts, assemblies, or features.
– Spreadsheets comprised of rows and
columns.
– Promote use of standardized components.
• Family tables consist of:
– A “generic” model.
♦ Original model
– Items that can be varied. Figure 1 – Family Table
– One or more “instance” models.
♦ Family members
Figure 2 – Family Table Instances Figure 3 – Selecting the Instance

Understanding Family Table Theory
Family tables are a collection of parts, assemblies, or features that are similar, but deviate slightly in
some aspect, such as size or which detail features are included. For example, bolts of a certain type,
though different in size, all look alike and perform the same function. Thus, it is useful to think of them
as a “family” of part models. Parts in family tables are also known as table-driven parts. Family tables
promote the use of standardized components.
Family Table Structure
Family tables are essentially spreadsheets, comprised of columns and rows. A family table consists
of the following three components:
• The generic object, or base object – All members of the family table are based on the generic object.
• The items specified in the generic that can be varied in the instances.
• Instances – The family members created in the table based on the generic model.
The family table rows contain the generic model and instances of parts and their corresponding values.
The generic model is the first row in the family table.
The family table columns are used to specify the items in the generic model that can be varied in the
instances.
The family table also contains a header that specifies the column names.
It is important to note that when creating a family table, the system is not actually creating additional
*.prt files for each instance; the instances are virtual. When a particular instance is opened, the system
actually opens the “generic” model first, and then regenerates it according to the information in the
family table row for that instance.
Family Tables Uses
You can use family tables for any of the following reasons:
• Create and store large numbers of objects simply and compactly within a single model.
• Save time and effort by standardizing part generation.
• Generate variations of a part from one part file instead of having to model each one.
• Create slight variations in parts without having to use relations to change the model.
• Create a table of parts that can be included in part catalogs or on a drawing.
Family Table Instance Identification and Facts
Instances are identified in the following ways:
• You can set the config.pro option menu_show_instances to yes to display all instances in the File
Open dialog box and Browser. Instances display as instance_name<generic_name>.prt.
• When you open a generic model, the system prompts you to specify which file to open in the Select
Instance dialog box. You may select to open the generic file or an instance associated with it. You
can open a file By Name or By Column. The By Column option enables you to filter which instance to
open based on the values defined for the variable items in the family table.
• When a family table model is opened in Creo Parametric, the lower-left corner of the graphics
window indicates whether it is a generic or instance.
• You use the config.pro option modeltree_show_gen_of_instance to control the display of the name of
the generic instance in the model tree. The default setting displays the generic name. For example,
if the generic model is called BOLT _FAM.PRT and you open instance BOLT _6-15.PRT from it, the
instance displays in the model tree as BOLT _6-15<BOLT _FAM>.PRT.
• You can right-click an instance and select Open Generic to open the generic model. This option is
available from the top node in a part model, or from a component in an assembly model.
Creating a Family Table

You can create variations of design models using family tables.
• To create a family table:
– Create the generic
– Create the table and specify items to be
varied
– Insert and configure new instances
– Verify instances
• Other family table operations: Figure 1 – Family Table
– Cut/Copy/Paste
– Find Instance
– Preview Instance
– Lock/Unlock Instance
– Edit With Excel
Figure 2 – Family Table Instances

Creating a Family Table
Adhere to the following steps to create a family table:
• Create the model that is to be used as the generic model in the family table.
• Create the new family table in the model. Specify the items in the generic model that can be varied
in the instances using Add Columns in the Family Table dialog box. Each item specified in the
generic is added as a new column to the table, in the order in which the items were specified. The
following items can be added to the family table:
– Dimensions
– Components
– Groups
– Features
– Parameters
– Pattern Tables
– Merge Parts
– Ref Models
– Other
All aspects of the generic model that are not included in the family table as items to be varied,
automatically occur in each instance. For example, if the generic model contains a 2” hole, all
instances contain the same 2” hole in the same location.
• Add rows with the names of instances using Insert Instance , and configure each instance based
on the items available to be varied in the table. For each instance, depending upon the item type,
you can specify a value of Y or N (Yes or No) or type a numerical value. For example, you can
specify a different value for a dimension or parameter. All dimension table cells must have a value
specified. If the value is specified as an asterisk (*), that item uses the generic's value. If a value is
specified as N, the feature is suppressed in the regeneration cycle for that instance. If the value is
specified as Y, the feature is included in the regeneration cycle for that instance. In Figure 1, the
6-POINT feature is included in only the 1/4” socket, while the 12-POINT feature is included in only the
3/8” and 1/2” sockets. In Figure 2, the left image displays the 1/4” socket and notice that only the
6-POINT feature is visible.
• Verify the family table instances using Verify Instances in the Family Table dialog box. The
Verify function attempts to regenerate each instance in the table utilizing the values specified for
that instance. If the values enable the instance to properly regenerate, its verification status is listed
as “Success”. If the values cause a geometry failure or some other type of failure, the verification
status is listed as “Failure .”
Note: Any time a change is made to the family table you must reverify all instances.
Other Family Table Operations
Within the Family Table dialog box, the following additional operations can be performed:
• Cut Cells /Copy Cells /Paste Cells Operations – You can cut, copy, and paste cell values.
You can also use CTRL+C, CTRL+X, and CTRL+V, or right-click and select Delete Rows to remove any
unwanted instances.
• Find Instance – Enables you to find a particular instance or group of instances based on Type
and the Type's value.
• Preview Instance – Enables you to preview an instance in a separate window.
• Lock Unlock Instance – Enables you to lock an instance so its values cannot be modified.
• Edit With Excel – Enables you to use Microsoft Excel (if it is installed) to populate the family table.

Best Practices
To make identification easier, rename dimensions that are to be used in family tables. The column
header name for dimensions displays as the name of the dimension. Thus, in the family table it is easier
to identify the dimension as “DRIVE_SIZE”, rather than d3, as shown in Figure 1.
PROCEDURE - Creating a Family Table

Feature_Tools \Create_Fam-Tab FAMILY _TABLE.PRT
Task 1: Create a family table for a socket set.
2. Edit DRIVE.
3. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu
and select Switch Dimensions .
4. Notice the dimensions defining the socket drive.
5. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Family Table .
6. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns .
7. In the Family Items dialog box, select Dimension
if necessary, then select the DRIVE_SIZE
dimension.
• Select Parameter.
• Select Description, if necessary.
• Click Insert Selected.
• Click Close.
• Select Feature.
• Select the 6-POINT feature.
• Select the 12-POINT feature.
• Click Done.
• Click OK.
8. In the Family Table dialog box, click Insert
Instance .
• Click Insert Instance two more times to
add a total of three instances.
• Edit the three Instance Names to 1-4_SOCKET,
3-8_SOCKET, and 1-2_SOCKET.
9. In the DRIVE_SIZE column, type 6.35, 9.55,

and 12.70 for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets,
respectively.
10. In the DESCRIPTION column, type 1/4”
SOCKET, 3/8” SOCKET, and 1/2” SOCKET for
the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets, respectively.

11. In the 6-POINT column, type Y, N, and N for the
1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets, respectively.
12. In the 12-POINT column, type N, Y, and Y for the
1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets, respectively.
13. In the Family Table dialog box, click Verify

Instances .
14. In the Family Tree dialog box, click VERIFY.
15. Click CLOSE.
16. Notice that the graphics window now displays
the original model as the GENERIC Instance.
17. In the Family Table dialog box, select the
1-4_SOCKET and click Preview Instance .
• Click Close.
18. In the Family Table dialog box, right-click

1-2_SOCKET and select Open .
19. Notice that the instance opens in a new window
and that the graphics window displays its name.
20. Notice that 6-POINT is absent from the model
tree.
21. Click Open , select FAMILY _TABLE.PRT, and

click Open.
22. In the Select Instance dialog box, select
3-8_SOCKET, and click Open.
23. Notice the model tree displays the instance
name with the generic name in brackets.

Patternizing Family Table Instances
You can use the Copy with Increments tool to automatically generate a large number of instances
by incrementing dimensions.
• Direction
• Quantity
• Items
• Increment value
Figure 1 – Patternizing Instances
Figure 2 – Family Table Figure 3 – Patternized Models
Patternizing Family Table Instances

You can use the Copy With Increments tool to automatically generate a large number of instances
by incrementing dimensions. This tool works well for family tables of parts whose family items are
consistently incremented, such as nuts, bolts, socket sets, and so on.
When you start the Copy with Increments tool, the Patternize Instances dialog box appears, enabling
you to configure the patternizing options. The following options are available for patternizing instances:
• Direction – Defines the group of items that are to be patternized.
• Quantity – Specifies the quantity of instances that are patternized in a given direction.
• Items – Specifies which Family Items are to be patternized. Any Family Item that requires a value can
be patternized. Features that are defined as Y or N in the family table cannot be patternized.
• Increment value – Defines the value that the Item is patternized for each instance.
If you define multiple directions to be patternized, the system creates a matrix of instance results. In
Figure 2, the socket size is incremented in the first direction for a total quantity of 6, and the socket
depth is incremented in the second direction for a total quantity of 2. Therefore, a total of 12 instances
are created, 6 for all socket sizes at one depth, and 6 for all socket sizes at the second depth.

PROCEDURE - Patternizing Family Table Instances
Feature_Tools \Patternize PATTERNIZE .PRT
Task 1: Patternize a part model to create multiple instances.
and select Parameters .
3. Notice that there is a parameter named
SOCKET_SIZE.
• Click OK.
4. Edit Extrude 1.
and select Relations .
7. Notice that the DIA dimension is controlled by
the SOCKET_SIZE parameter.
• Click OK.
and select Family Table .
9. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add
Columns .
10. In the Family Items dialog box, select Parameter,
then select the SOCKET_SIZE parameter.
• Click Close.
• Select Dimension.
• Select DEPTH dimension.
• Click OK.
Instance .
12. Click Copy With Increments .
13. In the Patternize Instance dialog box, edit the
Quantity for Direction1 to 6.
• Select SOCKET_SIZE and click Add Item .
• Edit the Increment to 1.
• Select Add and edit its quantity to 2.
• Select d1, DEPTH, and click Add Item .
• Edit the Increment to 30.

14. Click OK in the Patternize Instance dialog box.
15. In the Family Table dialog box, right-click
PATTERNIZE _INST and select Delete Rows.
16. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box.
17. Edit the Instance Names for the 25.4 depth to
XXmm_SHALLOW, where XX is the socket size.
18. Edit the six “*” values to 25.4.
19. Edit the Instance Names for the 55.4 depth to
XXmm_DEEP, where XX is the socket size.

Instances .
22. Click CLOSE.
23. In the Family Table dialog box, select
15MM_SHALLOW and click Preview Instance
.
• Click Close.
• Select 15MM_DEEP and click Preview
Instance .
• Click Close.
24. Click OK in the Family Table dialog box.
Exercise 1: Creating Family Tables

Objectives
• Create a family table of parts using the Copy with Increments tool.
Scenario
You are assigned to create a family table of drill bits to be sold as extras for a drill.
Feature_Tools \Drill_Bit STD_BIT.PRT
Task 1: Create a family table of the STD_BIT.PRT.
2. Edit MAIN_PROTRUSION.
3. Select the 266 dimension.
• Edit the Name from d0 to BIT_LENGTH.
• Click in the graphics window to de-select
dimension.

4. Select the diameter 14 dimension.
• Edit the Name from d1 to BIT_DIA.
• Click in the graphics window to de-select
dimension.
5. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu,

6. Click Add Columns in the Family Table dialog
box.
• Select the MAIN_PROTRUSION feature from
the model tree and select the 14 and 266
dimensions (BIT_DIA and BIT_LENGTH).
• Click OK in the Family Items dialog box.
7. Click Insert Instance in the Family Table
dialog box.
8. Type STD_BIT_8-218 for the Instance Name.
9. Type 8 for the BIT_DIA and 218 for the
BIT_LENGTH.
10. Select the STD_BIT_8-218 instance and click

Copy With Increments . Configure the Pattern
Instance dialog box, as shown in the figure:
• Type 18 as the Quantity, and press ENTER.
• Select the BIT_DIA dimension and click Add
Item .
• Type 1 as the Increment, and press ENTER.
• Select the BIT_LENGTH dimension and click
Add Item .
• Type 8 as the Increment, and press ENTER.

11. Click OK in the Patternize Instance dialog box.
12. Select the duplicate STD_BIT_8-218 instance
(called STD_BIT_8-2180), then right-click and
select Delete Rows.
• Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
13. Edit the Instance Names, as shown in the figure.
14. Leave the Family Table dialog box open.
Task 2: Add a feature to the family table.
1. Click Add Columns in the Family Table dialog

box.
2. Click Feature in the Family Items dialog
box, then press CTRL and select the
REDUCTION_CUT feature from the model tree.
• Click Done > OK.
3. Edit the instances, as shown in the figure.
4. In the Family Table dialog box, click Verify Instances .

• Click VERIFY.
• Note that all instances regenerate successfully.
• Click CLOSE.
5. Select STD_BIT_8-218 in the family table.
6. Click Preview Instance . Click Close.

7. Select STD_BIT_14-266 in the family table.
9. Select STD_BIT_20–314 in the family table.


Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

You can use an instance from a family table as the generic for a different family table.
• Creation
– Instance from one family table is the
generic for another family table.
• Recognition
– Folder icon in original generic table's
Type column.
– Select Instance dialog box displays twice.
Figure 1 – The 1/4 Inch Drive 12mm Socket
Figure 2 – Opening a Multi-Level Instance Figure 3 – Multi-Level Family Table
Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

A family table is not restricted to a single level of a table. You can create instances of instances by
opening an instance and creating a new family table for it. In other words, the instance of the first family
table is now the generic for a second family table. This is known as a “nested” family table. Another way
to create a nested family table is to open a generic model's family table, select the desired instance
that is to become the generic of the new family table, and click Insert > Instance-Level Table in the
Family Table dialog box main menu.

Recognizing a Multi-Level Family Table
When you open a generic model, the Select Instance dialog box enables you to select any instance
in the family table. If you select an instance that is the generic for another family table, the Select
Instance dialog box opens again and displays the instances for this second family table, enabling you to
select any instance in the second family table.
If you open the family table of the original generic model, the instances that contain family tables of
their own display a folder icon in the Type column of the Family Table dialog box, as shown in Figure 3.
You can also switch from the generic family table into the instance's family table within the Look In
drop-down list, as shown in Figure 3. Because the nested instances are children of the original family
table, they must also be reverified any time a change is made to the generic model.
PROCEDURE - Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

Feature_Tools \Multi-Level MULTI _FAM-TAB.PRT
Task 1: Create a multi-level family table.
1. In the Select Instance dialog box, select The
generic and click Open.
3. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and
select Family Table .
4. Notice that the family table consists of three
different drive sizes.
5. In the Family Table dialog box, select the
1-4_DRIVE instance.
• Click Insert > Instance-Level Table from the
top menu.
6. A new family table is created for the 1-4_DRIVE
instance.
7. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns .
8. In the Family Items dialog box, select Parameter, then select SOCKET_SIZE.
• Click Close.
• Select Feature.
• Select Revolve 1.
• Click Done.
• Click OK.
Instance six times to insert six instances.
• Increment the cells in the SOCKET_SIZE
column from 8 to 13, one millimeter at a time.
• Type Y for REVOLVE _1 for the 8 and 9
SOCKET_SIZE.
• Type N for REVOLVE _1 for the 10–13
SOCKET_SIZE.
• Type XXmm_SOCKET for the Instance Name,
where XX is the SOCKET_SIZE.

Instances .
11. Notice that these instances are sub-instances to
the 1-4_DRIVE instance.
13. Click CLOSE.
14. In the Family Table dialog box, edit the Look In

drop-down to MULTI _FAM-TAB.
15. Notice that the 1-4_DRIVE instance now displays
a folder icon in the Type field.
16. Right-click 1-4_DRIVE and select Open .
17. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and
select Family Table .
18. Notice the family table and click OK.
19. Click Open , select MULTI _FAM-TAB.PRT,
and click Open.
1-4_DRIVE and click Open.
12MM_SOCKET and click Open.
22. In the model tree, right-click 12MM_SOCKET<MULTI _FAM-TAB>.PRT and select Open Generic.
23. In the Select Instance dialog box, select 1-2_DRIVE and click Open.
24. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and select Family Table , click Add Columns , and
add the SOCKET_SIZE parameter.
• Click Insert Instance six times to insert six instances.
25. Increment the cells in the SOCKET_SIZE column
from 14 to 19, one millimeter at a time.
26. Type XXmm_SOCKET for the Instance Name,
where XX is the SOCKET_SIZE.

27. In the Family Table dialog box, click Verify Instances .
• Click VERIFY.
• Click CLOSE.
29. Select the View tab, click Windows , and
select MULTI _FAM-TAB.PRT.
30. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu
and select Family Table and notice that
1-2_DRIVE is now a multi-level family table.
31. Edit the Look In drop-down list to 1-2_DRIVE.

Editing Family Table Members

The resulting geometry and behavior of models varies depending upon whether you edit a family
table generic or instance.
• Editing feature dimensions in the generic model.

• Editing feature dimensions in an instance.
• Adding or editing features in the generic model.
• Adding or editing features in an instance.
Figure 1 – Creating a Feature in the Generic
Figure 2 – Creating a Feature in the Instance

Editing Family Table Members
The behavior of Creo Parametric models and the resulting geometry can be different depending upon
whether you edit a generic model or an instance. Consider the following scenarios and what happens
to the generic model and family table instances.
Editing Feature Dimensions in the Generic Model
If you edit a dimension in the generic model that is not a dimension able to be varied in the family table,
the geometry updates in both the generic model and all instances.
If you edit a dimension in the generic model that is a dimension able to be varied in the family table,
only the geometry in the generic model updates unless an instance's dimension value in the family
table is set to “*”. The instance geometry remains at the dimension value set in the family table column.
Editing Feature Dimensions in an Instance
If you edit a dimension in an instance that is not a dimension able to be varied in the family table, the
geometry updates in both the generic model and all instances.
If you edit a dimension in an instance that is a dimension able to be varied in the generic's family
table, the system informs you that the dimension is table-driven. Upon confirming the family table
modification, you can edit the value and update the geometry in the instance. The family table in the
generic is updated for that particular instance row, but no other instance.
Adding or Editing Features in the Generic Model
If you suppress or delete a feature in the generic model that is not a feature able to be varied in the
family table, the feature is automatically suppressed or deleted in all instances.
If you suppress a feature in the generic model that is able to be varied in the family table, only the
feature in the generic model updates unless the variable value in the family table is set to a value of “*”.
The instance feature remains at the value set in the family table column. That is, if the value is set to Y,
then the feature is displayed; if the value is set to N then the feature is suppressed.
If you delete a feature in the generic model that is a feature able to be varied in the family table, the
column is removed from the family table, and the feature is deleted from all instances.
If you add a feature to the generic model, the feature is added to all instances, as shown in Figure 1.
Adding or Editing Features in an Instance
If you suppress a feature in an instance that is not a feature able to be varied in the generic's family
table, the feature is suppressed only in that particular instance. You are warned that suppressing
instance features has only a temporary effect. If you delete a feature, it is deleted only in that particular
instance. The generic's family table is modified by adding the deleted feature as an item that can be
varied. This then enables you to suppress the feature in other instances.
If you suppress a feature in an instance that is a feature able to be varied in the generic's family table,
the feature is suppressed only in that particular instance. You are warned that suppressing instance
features has only a temporary effect. The feature in the other instances is suppressed or resumed
according to the value set in the family table column. The value in the family table for the feature that
was suppressed does not change. If you delete a feature from an instance, the feature is deleted only
in that particular instance. The feature in the other instances is suppressed or resumed according to
the value set in the family table column. The value in the family table for the feature that was deleted
changes to N for that particular instance.
If you add a feature to an instance, the feature is added as an item to be varied in the generic's family
table. The column value is set to Y for the instance to which the feature was added, and N for the
generic and all other instances. In Figure 2, the round was added to the instance. Consequently, the
round was added to the generic's family table as an item to be varied.

PROCEDURE - Editing Family Table Members
Feature_Tools \Edit_Members EDIT-MEMBERS.PRT
Task 1: Edit the members of a family table.
1. In the Select Instance dialog box, double-click
The generic.
4. Notice that the family table drives the socket's
depth, but not its diameter.
5. Click OK.
6. Edit Extrude 1.
• Edit the diameter from 27 to 30 and edit the depth from 31.86 to 40.
• Regenerate the model.
7. Click Open and double-click EDIT-MEMBERS.
PRT.
3-8_SOCKET and click Open.
9. Edit Extrude 1.
10. Notice the diameter updated, but not the depth.
11. Edit the diameter from 30 to 35.

12. Double-click the 31.86 depth dimension and
notice it is table driven.
13. Click Yes from the Confirmation window.
• Regenerate the model.
14. Click Close .
and select Family Table , and notice that the
3/8” socket depth value updated to 45.
• Click OK.
Task 2: Create new features in family table members.
1. Spin the model, then select the edge and click
Edge Chamfer from the mini toolbar.

• Right-click 1-2_SOCKET and select Open .
5. Notice that the chamfer is found in the instance
model.
6. Right-click to select the four intent edges and

click Round from the mini toolbar.
7. Edit the radius to 1.
9. Click Close .
10. Notice that the round is not found on the generic
model in the graphics window.
11. In the model tree, click Settings .

• Select Tree Filters .
12. Enable Suppressed objects in the Model Tree
Items dialog box, and click OK.
13. Notice that the round is in the generic model's
model tree, but it is suppressed.
15. Notice that the round has been added to the
family table, and it is only turned on in the
1-2_SOCKET instance.
16. Click OK.

Module 21
Reusing Features

Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) save time by helping establish a library of commonly used geometry.
• Define a UDF from a “template” model.

– Stand Alone
¨ Reference Part option
– Subordinate
• Select features to include.
– Must be sequential
• Define prompts.
– Every reference requires a prompt.
• Define any variable items (optional).
– Variable elements or dimensions
– Family Table Figure 1 – “Template” Model
Figure 2 – Highlighted Surface While

Defining Prompts
Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) are groups of features, references, and dimensions that can be saved for
use on future models. UDFs save time by helping you establish a library of commonly used geometry.
Defining a UDF from a “Template” Model
To create a UDF, you must first create a "template" part containing the same base geometry that is
in the target model (new model). Then model the features that you wish to include in the UDF on
this part. An example is shown in Figure 1. When modeling the features, be sure to consider the
number of references being created. In most cases, minimizing the number of references makes
the most efficient UDFs.
Define the UDF (*.gph file) in the UDF library, and give it a recognizable name. The UDF library location
is most likely a location unique to your company, and is defined by your administrator. The UDF library
can be accessed from the Group Directory Common Folder, which displays when appropriate.
Specify the storage option type. There are two types of storage options:
• Subordinate – Creates a reference to the original template model and automatically uses the
template model as a reference part to guide the UDF placement in the future. The original model
must be present for the subordinate UDF to function. If you make any dimensional changes to the
original model, they are automatically reflected in the UDF.
• Stand Alone – Does not reference the template model. It copies all the original model information
into the UDF file. If you make any changes to the original model, they are not reflected in the UDF.
When you create a standalone UDF, you have the option to create a separate reference part. If
created, the reference part has the same name as the UDF, but with a “_GP” suffix.
Selecting Features to Include
Next, you must select the features to be placed in the UDF. The features must be sequential in the
model tree.
Defining Prompts
You must define a prompt for each reference created within the selected features. All references
from the features selected for the UDF require prompts. The prompts are displayed for each original
feature reference when placing a UDF to help you select a corresponding reference in the target
model. Therefore, the prompts you create for each reference should be descriptive. Each reference is
highlighted in the graphics window as you define its prompt, as shown in Figure 2. If a reference
was used to create more than one feature, you are asked to create either Single or Multiple prompts
for that reference.
• Single – Specifies a single prompt for the reference used in several features. When the UDF is
placed, the prompt appears only once, but the reference you select for this prompt applies to all
features in the group that use the same reference.
• Multiple – Specifies an individual prompt for each feature that uses this reference. If you select
Multiple, each feature using this reference is highlighted, so you can type a different prompt for
each feature.
Defining Variable Items
You can also define any variable items to be stored in the UDF. This is an optional step in UDF creation.
Variable dimensions provide a prompt for a dimension value upon placement. Variable elements
enable the feature's dashboard to be accessed during placement, to redefine the feature for the
current application. A family table enables you to create different instances of the feature, with each
instance containing different combinations of features, dimensions, and parameters.
Modifying a UDF
When the UDF is complete, a *.gph file is saved to the current directory. You can edit a defined UDF by
selecting the Modify option in the UDF menu.
PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs

Feature_Tools \Create_udf CREATE_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Create a UDF from a feature in a part model.
.
2. Right-click Extrude 2 in the model tree and
select Information > Reference Viewer.
3. In the Reference Viewer dialog box, notice that
Extrude 2 references datum plane RIGHT and
Extrude 1.
4. Click the down arrow next to Extrude 1 and
cursor over each of the surface references.
5. Notice that the top, flat surface and the circular
surface are the two references on the model.
6. Click Close from the Reference Viewer.

8.Click UDF Library from the Utilities group.
9.Click Create from the menu manager.
10. Type keyway as the name and press ENTER.
11.In the menu manager, click Subordinate > Done
> Add > Select.
12. Select Extrude 2 as the feature to add and click
Done/Return.
13. Notice the top surface highlighted in blue. This
is the first required reference.
14. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt
for the surface.
15. Type sketching plane and press ENTER.
16. Notice datum plane highlighted in blue. This is

the second required reference.
for the surface.
18. Type orientation reference plane and press
ENTER.
19. Notice the cylindrical surface highlighted in

blue. This is the third required reference.
for the surface.
21. Type cylinder surface and press ENTER.
22. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
23. In the UDF dialog box, select Var Dims and click Define.
24. Zoom in on Extrude 2 and select the left (width) and right (length) 2 dimensions.
25. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.
26. Notice that the first dimension is highlighted.
for the dimension.
28. Type key width and press ENTER.

29. Notice that the second dimension is highlighted.
for the dimension.
31. Type key length and press ENTER.
32. Click OK > Done/Return to complete UDF
creation.
Exercise 1: Creating User-Defined Features (UDFs)

Objectives
• Reuse designs by creating user-defined features.
Scenario
You are assigned to create a spline end on the connector ends of the front engine block where it
interfaces with the rear engine block. Due to the large number of connector ends in future models, use
a generic connector end part to create a UDF.
Feature_Tools \Create_udf SPLINE_UDF_TEMPLATE.PRT
Task 1: Create a UDF from the end spline of the SPLINE_UDF_TEMPLATE.PRT.
.
3. Click UDF Library from the Utilities group.
4. Click Create from the menu manager.
5. Type spline_end as the name and press ENTER.
6. Click Stand Alone > Done from the menu
manager.
7. Click No in the Confirmation dialog box to not
create a reference part.
8. Press CTRL and select the features in the model
tree, as shown in the figure, to be included in
the UDF.
Note: All references from the features selected for
the UDF require prompts.

9. Click Done > Done/Return from the menu
manager.
10. Note the highlighted surface in the model.
11. Click Single > Done/Return from the menu
manager.
12. Type end surface as the prompt and press
ENTER.
Info: The end surface was used for both the hole and
the cut.
13. Note the highlighted datum axis in the model.

manager.
15. Type axis as the prompt and press ENTER.
Info: The axis was used for both the hole and the
angled datum plane.
16. Note the highlighted edge in the model.

17. Type end edge as the next prompt and press
ENTER.
Info: The edge was used for the chamfer.

18. Note the highlighted datum plane in the model.
manager.
20. Type reference plane as the next prompt and
press ENTER.
Info: The plane was used for the angled datum plane.
21. Note the highlighted surface in the model.

22. Type cylindrical surface as the next prompt
and press ENTER.
Info: The surface was used as a reference for the cut.
23. Click Next and Previous from the menu manager to review the prompts you have typed in and
correct any prompts, if necessary.
Task 2: Define optional UDF elements.
1. In the UDF dialog box, double-click Var Dims.
2. Select the 10.5 dimension (d15) that defines the
length of the cuts.
3. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the
menu manager.
4. Type spline length as the prompt for this
dimension and press ENTER.
5. In the UDF dialog box, double-click Var Elements.

6. Select END_CHAMFER from the model tree.
7. Click All > Done from the menu manager.
8. Middle-click in the graphics window to complete selecting variable elements.

9. In the UDF dialog box, double-click Family
Table .
10. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add
Columns to add a column to the table.
11. In the Family Items dialog box, do the following:
• Select Feature.
• Select CTR_HOLE from the model tree.
• Click OK.
12. In the Family Table dialog box, do the following:
• Click Insert Instance twice to add two
additional instances.
• Edit the values for the instance name and
feature columns, as shown in the figure.
• Click OK.
13. Click OK in the UDF dialog box to save the UDF
to your working directory.
15. Click Save from the Quick access toolbar.

Placing UDFs
To save time, place user-defined features (UDFs) from your company's UDF library into your model.
• Open existing UDF (*.gph)
• Select Placement references
– Prompts can aid you
• Edit Variable Dimensions and Annotations
Elements
• Options
– Scaling
– Dimension display
– Redefine features on-the-fly
• Adjustments
– Flip orientation Figure 1 – Viewing References on the Original UDF
Figure 2 – Selecting References for

UDF Placement Figure 3 – The Placed UDF
Placing UDFs
If you recreate the same geometry regularly when creating your design models, it can be more
efficient to have the system create that geometry for you using UDFs. Creating geometry by placing a
pre-existing UDF can be much faster than creating it new each time.
Opening an Existing UDF (*.gph)
When placing a UDF, first you must open the target model. You can insert a UDF by clicking UDF
Library from the Get Data group in the ribbon, and selecting the corresponding *.gph file. The
original template model is required when placing a subordinate UDF. Creo Parametric provides the
User Defined Feature Placement dialog box to enable you to easily place UDFs in multiple models.
When you place a UDF, the system copies the features into the target model. The copied features
become a group. The resulting group of features created from a UDF can be dependent or independent
of the UDF.
Selecting Placement References for the Prompts
Next, you must select references in the target model for each prompt that was defined during the
creation of the UDF. When selecting the references, you can view the reference part in a subwindow
to help you select the correct references. As you select references, the UDF preview placement
dynamically updates in the graphics window.
Editing Variable Dimensions and Annotation Elements
You can edit any of the items defined as Variable Items during UDF creation. These include Dimensions,
Parameters, and any Annotation Element Items.
Specifying Options
Next, you can specify options, such as scaling dimensions upon placement. You can keep the same
dimension values or feature sizes, or specify a scaling factor for the features to be placed. This enables
you to scale the size of the UDF for different size models, or between models of different units.
Plus, you can specify whether you want to lock, unlock, or hide dimensions of the elements that are
not specified as variables in the UDF.
You also have the ability to redefine any features contained in the UDF on-the-fly. This enables you to
customize a UDF upon placement. After selecting features to redefine, you must step the regeneration
of the UDF back past the selected features, and then step forward to regenerate them. After the
selected UDF feature is regenerated, its dashboard appears, enabling you to redefine it.
Adjusting Placement Orientation and Finishing Placement
Certain portions of UDFs, depending on what they are, can be oriented in one of two ways. These items
are displayed as Orientation Items in the Adjustments tab. You can select each available Orientation
Item and flip its orientation, watching the preview dynamically update. If the placement is successful,
a local group is created in the model tree. Items hidden in the UDF remain in their hidden status
when placed into the model.
Note: You can duplicate UDFs easily using the Copy and Paste tools.
Updating a Modified UDF
If you make the placed group of features independent of the UDF, then it results in all the UDF
information being copied to the target model as a group without any associative ties to the UDF.
If the UDF is modified, the copied group is not updated. However, if you establish a dependency to
the original UDF, then changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the group. You
must manually update the group to the UDF change by clicking UDF Operations > Update All from the
Operations group drop-down menu and then regenerating the model.
PROCEDURE - Placing UDFs

Feature_Tools \Place_UDF PLACE_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Place a UDF for a keyway in a model.

2. Click User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group.
• Select KEYWAY .GPH and click Open.
• Accept the default selection of Advanced reference configuration and click OK.
3. Notice that a reference model has been created
for this UDF, and displays in a subwindow.
• Notice that the first required reference is
highlighted in the subwindow, and placement
preview of the feature is shown in the main
graphics window.
• Notice that Reference 1 is highlighted in the
User Defined Feature Placement dialog box
and the description prompt reads sketching
plane.
• Select a corresponding planar surface, as
shown.

4. Select Reference 2 in the dialog box, if
necessary.
• Notice that this reference is highlighted in the
subwindow.
• Notice that the description prompt reads
orientation reference plane.
• Select a corresponding plane, as shown.
5. Select Reference 3 in the dialog box, if

necessary.
• Notice that this reference is highlighted in the
subwindow.
• Also notice that the description prompt reads
cylinder surface.
• Select a corresponding surface, as shown.
6. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog

box, select the Variables tab.
7. Edit the Value for the d5 dimension from 2.00
to 4.

box, select the Adjustments tab.
box, click Flip and then click Accept .
Note: For a more complex UDF, there may be
multiple reference directions that can be flipped. The
system lists each reference direction in the dialog box,
enabling you to flip/preview each reference.

Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems
UDFs gain capability when utilizing an on-surface Csys.
• Set up UDF features to reference only an

on-surface Csys.
– Quick and flexible placement.
– Drag location and angle.
• Include on-surface Csys in UDF.
– No UDF prompts required.
– Specify on-surface Csys references upon
placement.
Figure 1 – UDF Features Referencing
On-Surface Csys
Figure 2 – Locating UDF On-Surface Figure 3 – Placing UDF on Alternate Surface
Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems

The placement of a User-Defined Feature (UDF) gains some capabilities when the features used to
create the UDF reference is an on-surface coordinate system. Upon placement, the UDF appears in a
dynamic preview that can be dragged to locate the UDF. You can also specify an additional rotation
angle for the UDF.
Keep in mind the following regarding the on-surface Csys and UDFs:
• The features comprising the UDF should reference ONLY the on-surface Csys. They should not
have any parents other than the on-surface Csys in the model from which the UDF is created. To
simplify this, create three orthogonal datum planes through the on-surface Csys to act as a set
of “default datum planes.”
• If an on-surface Csys is included in the UDF features, the UDF setup requires prompt creation only
for the references of the Csys.
– When placing the UDF in this case, you can select references to place the on-surface Csys in
the destination model.
• If an on-surface Csys is NOT included in the UDF features, the UDF setup requires the creation of one
prompt for the selection of a coordinate system.
– When placing the UDF in this case, you have the option to create an on-surface Csys on-the-fly.

PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems
Feature_Tools \UDF_On-Surface CREATE_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Create and place a UDF using an on-surface coordinate system.
.
2. Edit CS0.
Note: This in an on-surface Csys, and is the only
parent to the geometry for the UDF.
3. Select the Tools tab and click UDF Library .

• Click Create, type UDF1 as the name, and
press ENTER.
4. Click Stand Alone > Done > No.
5. Select CS0, press SHIFT, and select HOLE from
the model tree.
6. Click Done > Done/Return.
7. Press ENTER, if necessary, to accept the default
prompts.
8. Click Done/Return and OK.

10. Click Open . Select PLACE_UDF.PRT and click Open.
12. Click User-Defined Feature from the Get
Data group, select UDF1, and click Open.
13. Click OK and select a surface to place the
on-surface Csys.
14. Drag the placement handles to the front and
right surfaces, then position the UDF as shown.
15. Drag the additional rotation handle to

approximately 90.
• Scroll down and select the HOLE check box.
• Disable Auto Regeneration.
• Click First Feature and then Last Feature
.

17. Enable Countersink from the dashboard.
• Disable Counterbore .
18. Click Complete Feature to complete the
UDF.

Data group, select UDF1, and click Open.
20. Click OK and select a surface to place the UDF.
21. Right-click and select Offset References. Press
CTRL and select the top and right surfaces, then
position the UDF.

• Select the Pattern 1 check box.
• Disable Auto Regeneration.
• Click First Feature and then Last Feature
.
23. Edit the 5 quantity to 3 in the dashboard.
• Click Set Angular Extent .
24. Click Complete Feature to complete the
UDF.
25. Regenerate the model.

Exercise 2: Placing User-Defined Features (UDFs)
Objectives
• Reuse designs by inserting user-defined features.
Scenario
You are assigned to create a spline end on the connector ends of the front engine block where it
interfaces with the rear engine block. Due to the large number of connector ends in future models, you
have already created a UDF. Insert the UDF on the connector ends of the front engine block.
Feature_Tools \Place_UDF_Ex FINAL_GEAR_SHAFT_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Place the UDF on the Final Gear Shaft UDF part.
.
Data group.
3. In the Open dialog box, select SPLINE_END.GPH
and click Open.
4. In the Select Instance dialog box, select the
NO_HOLE instance and click Open.
5. In the Insert User-Defined Feature dialog box,
accept the default selection of Advanced
reference configuration and click OK.
6. Click OK in the Information window.
box, do the following:
• Select the Options tab and select Keep
dimension values for Scaling.
• Clear the check box for redefining feature
END_CHAMFER.
• Select the Placement tab.

box, if necessary, select SURFACE (Reference 1)
from the list of original feature references.
9. Select the surface shown in the figure as the
corresponding reference for End Surface.

box, if necessary, select AXIS (Reference 2) from
the list of original feature references.
11. Select datum axis A_2, shown in the figure, as
the corresponding reference for Axis.

box, if necessary, select EDGE (Reference 3)
13. Select the edge shown in the figure as the
corresponding reference for End Edge.

15. Select datum plane FRONT shown in the figure
as the corresponding reference for Reference
Plane.

corresponding reference for Cylindrical Surface.

box, select the Variables tab and type 15 as the
value for the d15 cut dimension.
• Click Accept .

20. Click Close .
Task 2: Place the UDF on the Chuck UDF part.
1. Click Working Directory from the Navigator.

2. Double-click CHUCK_UDF.PRT from the
Browser to open it.
Data group.
and click Open.
NO_HOLE instance and click Open.
• Select the Options tab and select Keep
dimension values for Scaling.
• Clear the check box for redefining feature
END_CHAMFER.

corresponding reference for End Surface.

box, if necessary, select AXIS (Reference 2) from
the list of original feature references.

box, if necessary, select EDGE (Reference 3)

16. Select datum plane RIGHT shown in the figure
Plane.


• Click Accept .
Note: In both cases, the UDF is removing material. However, it is possible to have a UDF that uses
various features to add and remove material at the same time. Also, since a feature tool such as Extrude
can be used to create cuts or protrusions, it is possible to create a UDF that can be toggled between
Cut and Protrusion upon placement.
20. Click Save from the main toolbar.
21. Click Close .

Task 3: Place the UDF on the Engine Block Front part.
1. Click Working Directory from the Navigator.

2. Double-click ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.PRT from
the Browser to open it.
Data group.
and click Open.
HOLE instance and click Open.
• Select the Options tab.
• Select Scale by value for Scaling and type
0.33 as the Scaling factor.

box, select SURFACE (Reference 1) from the list
of original feature references.
10. Zoom in and select the surface shown in the
figure as the corresponding reference for End
Surface.

box, select AXIS (Reference 2) from the list of
original feature references.

box, select EDGE (Reference 3) from the list of
original feature references.

16. Select datum plane DTM1, shown in the figure,
Plane.


20. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, clear the Auto Regeneration check box.
• Click First Feature .
• Click Last Feature .
21. Notice that you are now redefining the chamfer feature within the UDF.
22. In the dashboard, do the following:
• Change 45 x D to Angle x D from the
Dimensioning Scheme drop-down list.
• Click Switch Surfaces .
• Type 30 as the angle value.
• Type 0.75 as the chamfer distance (D) value,
as shown in the figure.
23. Click Accept in the User Defined Feature

Placement dialog box.
24. Click Save from the main toolbar.
25. Click Close .
26. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not
Displayed and click OK to erase all files from
memory.

Creating Inheritance Features
You can transfer geometry from existing design models by creating inheritance features.
• Transfer features from one design model to another.

• Inheritance features can be dependent or independent of the original design model.
• Inheritance features can be edited without affecting the original design model.
• External inheritance features can be created.
Figure 3 – Completed Inheritance

Figure 1 – Reference Part Figure 2 – Target Part Feature
Creating Inheritance Features

Inheritance features enable one-way associative propagation of geometry and feature data from a
reference part (the original, existing model) to a target part (the new model). The created target part is
fully functional, even when the reference part is not in session, and can contain one or more inheritance
features. Inheritance features promote data reuse.
Defining Inheritance Feature Dependency
You can control whether inheritance features are dependent on the reference part. By default,
inheritance features are dependent on the reference part. Any design changes that you make in the
reference part are associatively propagated to the dependent inheritance feature when both reference
and target parts are in the same Creo Parametric session. Independent inheritance features do not
update when the reference part is modified.
Defining Varied Items in an Inheritance Feature
By default, the geometry and data contained in the inheritance feature are identical to the reference
part from which they are derived. However, you can define geometry items that can be varied in the
inheritance features without changing the reference part, by selecting Varied Items from the Options
tab of the dashboard. These items include dimensions, parameters, geometric tolerances, and a
suppressed or resumed state of features. You can modify these items without having the reference
part in the session.
External Inheritance Features
External inheritance features are useful when representing the evolution of a design during
manufacturing, or when creating standard design elements. You can externalize an inheritance feature,
thus creating an external inheritance feature. The relative location of the target and reference part in
the assembly is used for placement of inheritance features in the target part. The externalize operation
removes reference to the assembly context and enables you to use placement constraints to define
placement of the external inheritance feature in the target part. An inheritance feature created within a
part model is automatically created as an external inheritance feature.
A target part can contain one or more external inheritance features. Features propagated from the
reference part are represented in the target part as sub-features of the external inheritance feature.
You can create a reference pattern in the target part based on the pattern of external inheritance
sub-features.
Editing External Inheritance Features
An external inheritance feature displays in the model tree as a single feature. Expanding its node
displays the features that comprise the original reference part, as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4 – Inheritance Feature Model Tree

Editing the definition of an external inheritance feature enables you to view the varied items for that
feature and modify them accordingly in the Varied Items dialog box. If you know the items that can
be modified, you can simply edit them in the graphics window. You cannot edit any area of the
inheritance feature that is not specified as a varied item. However, if you try to edit a dimension within
the inheritance feature that is not a varied dimension, the system enables you to add it as a varied
dimension, thus enabling you to edit the dimension.
If you update the reference part, any dependent external inheritance feature must be updated to
reflect those changes. You can do this by right-clicking the external inheritance feature in the model
tree and selecting Update Inheritance. A warning dialog box appears, indicating that the inheritance
will be recreated according to the current base model state and defined modifications. The base
model is the reference part.
PROCEDURE - Creating Inheritance Features

Feature_Operations\Inheritance SPROCKET.PRT
Task 1: Create an external inheritance feature in a part model.
.
close SPROCKET.PRT.
3. Click Working Directory in the folder
browser.
• Double-click INHERITANCE.PRT from the
Browser to open it.
4. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and
select Merge/Inheritance.
5. In the dashboard, click Open .
6. In the Open dialog box, select SPROCKET.PRT
and click Open.
7. Select coordinate system SPROCKET in the
SPROCKET.PRT window.
8. Select coordinate system SPROCKET in the
INHERITANCE.PRT window.
9. In the Component Placement dialog box, select
the Preview check box.

10. Click Apply-Save Changes in the Component
Placement dialog box.
11. In the dashboard, click Toggle Inheritance .
13. Spin the model to observe it.
Task 2: Add a varied item to the inheritance feature, and update the reference model SPROCKET.PRT.
1. Edit the definition of External Inheritance.
• Click Varied Items.
3. In the SPROCKET.PRT model tree, select the
Protrusion id 5388 feature.
• Select the 8 dimension.
4. In the Varied Items dialog box, edit the New
Value to 12.
• Click OK.
6. Notice that the sprocket depth has increased.
7. In the model tree, right-click External

Inheritance and select Open Base Model. The
SPROCKET.PRT model opens.
8. Edit Pattern (CUT_1).
• Edit the number of cuts from 57 to 43.
10. Click Close to return to INHERITANCE.PRT.

Notice that the teeth have not updated.
11. In the model tree, right-click External
Inheritance and select Update Inheritance.
• Click OK in the Warning dialog box.
12. Notice that the teeth have updated.

Using External Merge to Add Material
Using the merge feature to add material, you can add geometry from another model into the
current model.
• Process
– Insert merge into target model.
– Open source model.
– “Assemble” source model into target model.
• References:
– Annotations
– Copy Datums
• Options:
– Dependent
– Refit Datums
Figure 1 – Completed External Merge
Figure 2 – Target Model Figure 3 – Source Model

Using External Merge to Add Material
Using the merge feature to add material, you can add geometry from another model into the current
model. You can use the external merge feature to add solid geometry into a part model that already
contains solid geometry, or you can use the external merge feature to add solid geometry into a
part with no current solid geometry.
To use a merge feature to add material, insert the merge from the current model to which you wish to
add material (the target model), then open or select the source model. Next, “assemble” the source
model into the target model using assembly-type constraints. Finally, toggle the Add Material icon,
if necessary, to enable it before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of the following from the
source model:
• Annotations
• Copy Datums – If the datums are copied into the target model from the source model, the copied
datums have a “_1” suffix appended to their names.
There are also two different options available when creating the merge feature:
• Dependent – Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the source model.
• Refit Datums – Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums. This option is only available when
you decide to copy the datums from the source model.
Note: There is also a Merge component operation in Assembly mode, used to add component geometry in
the current assembly.
PROCEDURE - Using External Merge to Add Material
Feature_Operations\Merge_Add-Mtl CASTING.PRT
Task 1: Use external merge to create a machined part from its casting.
.
2. Notice the model geometry.
3. Click Close .
4. Click Open and double-click ADD_MATL.PRT.

5. Notice that there is no geometry.
6. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and
select Merge/Inheritance.
7. In the dashboard, click Open and double-click
CASTING.PRT.
8. Resize and reposition the accessory window,

if necessary.
• Edit the Constraint Type to Default and
click Apply-Save Changes .
• Notice that the Automatic Update check box
is selected.
12. Notice that the target model seems identical to
the source model.
13. In the model tree, notice the External Merge
feature.
14. Click File > Options.
15. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, click Model Display and select Show silhouette
edges to enable it.
16. Click OK and then No in the warning dialog box.

17. Select one surface of the model, then right-click
and select Solid Surfaces .
18. Select the View tab and click the Appearances
drop-down menu.
19. From the Library section, select the
ptc-std-steel appearance.
20. Select datum plane FRONT and click Revolve from the mini toolbar.
21. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.
22. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Model Display types drop-down
menu.
types: .
24. Click References from the Setup group and
select the three additional vertical references.
25. Click Centerline from the Datum group and
sketch the centerline.
26. Sketch and dimension as shown.
27. Click OK .
28. Select Shading from the Model Display types
drop-down menu.
29. Right-click and select Remove Material, then
click Change Material Direction .
30. Click Complete Feature and spin the model
to view the underside.
Orientation.
32. Select the flange surface and click Hole .

Collector.
• Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT
and FRONT from the model tree.
• Edit the Offset for datum plane RIGHT to 22.
• Edit the Offset for datum plane FRONT to
Align.
35. Edit the diameter to 4 and the depth to Through
All .
37. Select Hole 1 again and click Pattern .
38. Edit the pattern type to Axis and select the
datum axis running through the model.
39. Accept the default options and click Complete
Feature .
40. Disable Plane Display and Axis Display .
41. Right-click the External Merge feature and

select Open Base Model.
42. Edit Hole 1.
43. Edit the diameter from 10 to 20 and regenerate
the model.
44. Click Close .

• Notice that the hole diameter updated.

Using External Merge to Remove Material
Using the merge feature to remove material, you can subtract geometry in another model from the
current model.
• Process:
– Insert merge into target model.
– Open source model.
– “Assemble” source model into target model.
– Toggle on Remove Material icon.
• References:
– Annotations
– Copy Datums
• Options:
– Dependent
– Refit Datums Figure 1 – Completed External Merge
Figure 2 – Target Model Figure 3 – Source Model
Using External Merge to Remove Material

Using the merge feature to remove material, you can subtract geometry in another model from the
current model. You can use the external merge feature to remove solid geometry from a part model
that already contains solid geometry.
To use a merge feature to remove material, insert the merge from the current model to which you
wish to remove material (the target model), then open or select the source model. Next, “assemble”
the source model into the target model using assembly-type constraints. Finally, toggle the Remove
Material icon, if necessary, to enable it before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of the following from the
source model:
• Annotations
• Copy Datums – If the datums are copied into the target model from the source model, the copied
datums have a “_1” suffix appended to their names.
There are also two different options available when creating the merge feature:
• Dependent – Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the source model.
• Refit Datums – Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums. This option is only available when
you decide to copy the datums from the source model.
Note: There is also a Cutout component operation in Assembly mode, used to subtract component
geometry in the current assembly.

PROCEDURE - Using External Merge to Remove Material
Feature_Operations\Merge_Remove-Mtl LATCH .PRT
Task 1: Use external merge to remove material from a part model.
2. Notice the model geometry.
3. Click Close .
4. Click Open , select REMOVE_MATL.PRT, and click Open.

5. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and select Merge/Inheritance.
6. In the dashboard, click Open , select LATCH .PRT, and click Open.
7. Resize and reposition the accessory window,
if necessary.
• Edit the Constraint Type to Default .
• Click Apply-Save Changes .
• Notice that the Automatic Update check box
is selected.
10. Click Remove Material .
toolbar and select the Sections tab.
• Right-click Xsec0001 and select Show
Section.
• Click Close.
14. In the model tree, right-click the External Cut
Out feature and select Open Base Model.
15. Edit Extrude 1.
16. Edit the thickness from 1.5 to 3.5 and regenerate
the model.
17. Click Close twice.

18. Click Open , select SEAT_BELT .ASM, and
click Open.
19. Regenerate the model and notice that the cut
out geometry has been updated.

Module 22
Measuring and Inspecting Models

Viewing and Editing Model Properties
There is a consolidated dialog box for all model properties.
Figure 1 – Model Properties Dialog Box

Viewing and Editing Model Properties
The Model Properties dialog box provides common locations for viewing and editing model properties
in several categories. Each line item in the dialog box provides basic information at a glance.
Some properties can be expanded by clicking Expand to display additional information.
Clicking Info produces a separate information window that provides more detailed information.
To create or edit any of the properties, click the change link in the dialog box. The appropriate dialog
box for that property then appears.
Note: You can access several of the model properties listed in this dialog box through other menus or
dialog boxes.
The following is a list of the properties contained in the Model Properties dialog box, which is accessed
by clicking File > Prepare > Model Properties.
• Materials
– Material
– Units
– Accuracy
– Mass Properties
• Relations, Parameters, and Instances
– Relations
– Parameters
– Instance
• Features and Geometry
– Tolerance
– Names
• Tools
– Flexible
– Shrinkage
– Simplified Representation
– Pro/Program
– Interchange
• Model Interfaces
– Reference and Backup
• Detail Options
Investigating Model Units

You can specify a model's units.
• Analyses are reported in current model units.

• Units are derived from templates.
• You can change units, if desired.
– Convert dimensions
– Interpret dimensions
Figure 1 – Units Manager
Figure 2 – Converting Model Dimensions Figure 3 – Interpreting Model Dimensions

Investigating Model Units
A model's units are typically derived from a specific model template that was chosen when you
first began creating a part model. Creo Parametric's default system of units is English, specifically
in_lbm_sec.
There are several unit systems available, including:
• Centimeter Gram Second (CGS)
• Foot Pound Second (FPS)
• Inch Pound (mass) Second (IPS)
• Inch Pound (force) Second (IPS)
• Meter Kilogram Second (MKS)
• Millimeter Kilogram Second (mmKs)
• Millimeter Newton (force) Second (mmNs)
If none of these default unit systems are desirable, you can customize your own unit system using any
combination of units. Any analyses performed on a model are reported in the current model units.
You can edit the units used in a model in the Units Manager dialog box, which is accessed by clicking
change in the Units row of the Materials section of the Model Properties dialog box. When you
switch from one set of units to another, you must specify how to manage the dimensions. There
are two different methods:
• Convert dimensions – Enables the model to retain its original size after the system of units is modified.
The dimension values update accordingly, based on your decision. In Figure 2, the diameter of the
socket is 25.4 mm. The system of units is converted from Metric to English, and therefore the English
diameter is now 1 in (the same size).
• Interpret dimensions – Enables the model to change size based on the system of units specified. The
dimension values remain the same. In Figure 3, the diameter of the socket is 1 in. The system of units
is interpreted from English to Metric, and therefore the Metric diameter is now 1 mm (the same value).
Note: The same systems of units are also available for assemblies.
PROCEDURE - Investigating Model Units

Properties\Units MODEL-UNITS.PRT
Task 1: Investigate the model units of a model.
2. Double-click the outer cylindrical model
surface.
• Notice the main outer diameter is 25.4.

3. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to open
the Model Properties dialog box.
• Notice the current unit system for the model.
4. In the Materials section, click change in the

Units row.
• Notice the current unit system in the Units
Manager dialog box and view the Description.
5. In the Units Manager dialog box, select the Inch

lbm Second system of units and click Set.
• In the Changing Model Units dialog box, select
the Convert dimensions option, if necessary.
• Click OK > Close > Close.

surface.
• Notice the main outer diameter is now 1.
Note: The model is the same size. The diameter
changed from 25.4 millimeters to 1 inch.

Units row.
9. In the Units Manager dialog box, select the
millimeter Kilogram Sec system of units and
click Set.
10. In the Changing Model Units dialog box, select
the Interpret dimensions option.
11. Click OK > Close > Close.

surface.
• Notice the main outer diameter is still 1.
Note: The model is now much smaller. The diameter
changed from 1 inch to 1 millimeter.
Assigning Materials
You can assign new or predefined materials to a model or component.
• Material assignment methods:
– In the Model Properties dialog box, select the
desired material from the available list.
– In the model tree, right-click the model.
• In the model tree, the assigned materials display.
• You can also add multiple materials to a model.
– Only one can be assigned.
Figure 1 – Assigning a Material
Figure 2 – Material Assigned Figure 3 – Materials Assigned in an Assembly

Assigning Materials
You can assign new or predefined materials to a model or component within an assembly. To assign a
material, in the model tree, right-click the model node and select Edit Materials . In the Materials
dialog box, select the desired material from the available list and click Assign . Alternatively, you can
double-click the desired material to assign it directly. When the material is selected, the properties of
the material preview on the right side of the Materials dialog box.
You can verify whether a material is assigned or not by viewing the model’s properties. Also, the
assigned material density is used for the model mass properties. The model tree also displays the
assigned material.
You can add multiple materials to a model. The first added material is assigned as the default; however,
in the model tree, you can assign a different material. In doing so, the system alerts you to the fact
that there is a material already assigned to the model. You can then decide whether to assign the new
material or retain the existing assigned material.
PROCEDURE - Assigning Materials

Properties\Materials ARM.PRT
Task 1: Assign a material to an individual model.
3. In the Model Properties dialog box, notice that
there is no material assigned.
• In the Mass Properties row, click Expand .
• Notice the currently used density.
4. In the Model Properties dialog box, click change

for the Material row.
5. In the Materials dialog box, double-click
Legacy-Materials and select the FE20.MTL
material.
6. Click Assign from the toolbar.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Model Properties dialog box, notice

that the material has now been assigned, and
that the density has updated to the assigned
material density.
9. Click Close.
10. In the model tree, notice the new Materials

node.
11. Expand the Materials node.
• Notice that the material assignment is visible.

Task 2: Assign materials to components in an assembly.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.

2. In the File Open dialog box, double-click
ASSIGN-MATERIAL.ASM.
3. In the model tree, right-click BODY.PRT and

select Edit Materials .
Legacy-Materials and select AL6061.MTL.
• Click Assign .
• Click OK.
5. Expand the BODY.PRT node and the Materials
node.
6. Right-click SHAFT.PRT and select Edit Materials
.
Legacy-Materials and double-click FE20.MTL.
• Click OK.
8. Expand the SHAFT.PRT node and the Materials
node.
Note: Double-clicking the material automatically
assigns it to the model.
9. Right-click PLATE.PRT and select Edit Materials
.
Legacy-Materials and double-click BRASS.MTL.
• Double-click MG.MTL.
• Double-click SS.MTL.
• Click OK.
11. Expand the PLATE.PRT node and the Materials
node.
• Notice that multiple materials were added to
the component, but BRASS, the first added
material, is assigned.

12. In the model tree, right-click MG and select
Assign .
• Notice that the system warns you that there is
a currently assigned material.
13. Click OK in the Question dialog box.
Analyzing Mass Properties

You can calculate a model's mass properties.
• Mass properties include:

– Volume
– Surface area
– Density
– Mass
– COG
• Analyses require model material or density.
• Density units are the same as model units.
• For assemblies, a density for each component
is required.
Figure 1 – Viewing Mass Properties
Figure 2 – Performing a Mass Properties Analysis
Analyzing Mass Properties

You can view a model's mass properties within the Materials section of the Model Properties dialog
box. You can also calculate the mass properties by selecting the Analysis tab from the ribbon and
clicking Mass Properties from the Model Report group. Before you can calculate accurate mass
properties for a model, however, you must define its material, or at least its density. A mass properties
calculation is dependent upon the density entered for a given model. If the density is updated for a
model and its mass properties are recalculated, the results update.
When the system performs a mass properties analysis, the following mass property information is
calculated:
• Volume
• Surface Area
• Density
• Mass
• Center of Gravity – The center of gravity (COG) displays on the model as a coordinate system with
axes 1, 2, and 3, as shown in Figure 2.
You can also perform mass properties analyses on assemblies. However, you must first configure the
density of each part model.
Mass Properties Analysis Options
There are three options available when performing a mass properties analysis:
• Quick – Enables you to compute mass properties without saving the analysis or creating a mass
properties feature in the model tree.
• Saved – Enables you to save the mass properties analysis for future use. You can specify a unique
name for the analysis so you can easily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses
by clicking the Analysis tab and clicking Saved Analysis from the Manage group.
• Feature – Enables you to save the mass properties analysis as a feature in the model tree.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mass Properties

Properties\Mass-Properties MASS-PROPS.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the mass properties of a model.
3. In the Model Properties dialog box, click Expand
in the Mass Properties row of the Materials
section.
• Notice that the density is specified as
3.613e+4.
Material row.
5. In the Materials dialog box, double-click the
Legacy-Materials folder and select STEEL.MTL .
• Click Assign .
• Click OK.
6. Notice the updated density value in the Model
Properties dialog box.

7. In the Materials section, click Info in the Mass
Properties row.
• Notice the values for volume, surface area,
density, mass and center of gravity in the
Mass Properties Report.
8. Close the Mass Properties Report dialog box.
9. Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.
Task 2: Analyze the mass properties in an assembly.

• Select VALVE .ASM and click Open.

3. Click Mass Properties from the Model Report
group.
4. Click Preview in the Mass Properties dialog box.
• Notice the values for volume, surface area,
density, mass, and center of gravity.
5. Notice the center of gravity 1-2-3 coordinate
system location.
6. Click OK in the Mass Properties dialog box.

Using the Measure Tools
You can make several types of measurements on models.
• Measurements include:
– Length
– Distance
– Angle
– Diameter
– Area
– Volume
– Transform
Figure 1 – Measuring Length
Figure 2 – Measuring Distance Figure 3 – Measuring an Angle

Using the Measure Tools
You can make several types of measurements on models. Use either of the following workflows
for measure tools:
• Start the desired measurement tool and then select references.
• Select references and then start the desired measurement tool. This workflow enables you to use
advanced chain or surface selection.
Regardless of workflow, the references remain selected, and you can toggle between the various
measure tools to view the different measurement results. Press CTRL to select multiple references for
a measure tool. The tool provides cumulative results based on the selected measurement type.
Measurement results display in the graphics window within on-screen panels. You can drag these
panels as well as collapse them. You can restore any collapsed panel by clicking its on-screen icon.
You can also view measurement results by expanding the Results area of the Measure dialog box.
You can copy and paste the contents of this Results table to other programs such as spreadsheet
applications.
You can save the measurement by clicking Save Analysis from the Measure dialog box. Save the
measurement as either of the following types:
• Make Feature – Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in the model tree.
• Save Analysis – Enables you to save the measurement for future use. You can specify a unique name
for the measurement analysis so you can easily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved
analysis by clicking Saved Analysis from the Manage group in the Analysis tab.
Measurement Tool Types
The following measure tool types are available:
• Length – Measures the length of a selected edge or curve. Pressing CTRL and selecting multiple
curves or edges also calculates a cumulative length measurement. Selecting a surface reference
calculates either the perimeter total for all loops in the surface or the external perimeter for only the
outer loop. Selecting multiple surface references calculates either the cumulative perimeter total for
all loops of all surfaces or the cumulative external perimeter for only the outer loops of all surfaces.
• Distance – Measures the distance between two selected references. You can optionally provide a
projection reference or measure the maximum distance between references. You can also use a
cylindrical surface reference as an axis.
• Angle – Measures the angle between two selected references. You can specify a measurement
range of +/-180 degrees or 0-360 degrees. You can also specify the desired angle type you wish to
measure, including Main, Supplement, Conjugate, and Second Conjugate.
• Diameter – Measures both the diameter and radius of a selected surface or edge reference. You can
also select a point reference on a non-ruled surface to measure the radius at that selected point.
• Area – Measures the area of a selected surface reference. Optionally, you can specify a projection
reference. You can also select multiple surface references and measure a cumulative area
measurement. Selecting the model measures the total model surface area.
• Volume – Measures the volume of a model. You can also measure the volume on either side of a
selected plane.
• Transform – Generates a transform matrix between two coordinate system references, consisting of
the X, Y, and Z distances between the coordinate system references.
Measurement Options
Within the Measure dialog box, you can edit various options by clicking Measure Options . The
following options are available:
• Units by Model – Units are the same as those of the model.
• Length Units – Specify the desired length units from a drop-down list.
• Angular Units – Specify the desired angular units from a drop-down list.
• Decimal Places – Specify the number of decimal places displayed for measurements.
• Show Feature Tab – Displays the Feature tab in the Measure dialog box, enabling you to specify
regeneration order as well as create parameters for a given measurement.
• Panel display – You can toggle panels to either hide or display them in the graphics window. You
can also toggle panels by collapsing them or expanding them.
PROCEDURE - Using the Measure Tools

Analysis\Measure MEASURE.PRT
Task 1: Measure the length of edges and surfaces.
3. Select Length from the Measure types
drop-down menu in the Measure group.
4. Select the diagonal edge.

5. Press CTRL and select the two adjacent edges.
6. Click the first panel to expand it and drag the
panels as necessary.
7. Expand the Measure dialog box and expand the

Results section.
• Notice the individual values for all three
lengths, as well as the sum total of all
references.
8. Right-click the model and select Clear.
9. Select the top, right surface.
• Notice the perimeter values.
10. Press CTRL and select the top, left surface.
• Notice the five values in the Results section.
11. In the graphics window, expand the first panel
and drag it as necessary.
12. Click Close from the Measure dialog box.
Task 2: Measure the distance between vertices, edges and surfaces.
1. Select Distance from the Measure types

2. Select the front, right vertex.
3. Press CTRL and select the rear, right-most
vertex.
4. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Projection
collector and select datum plane FRONT.
5. In the Projection collector, right-click and select
Remove.
6. In the Measure dialog box, right-click the
second vertex reference and select Remove.
7. Press CTRL and select the rear edge.

8. In the Measure dialog box, select the Measure
maximum distance check box.
9. Clear the Measure maximum distance check
box.
10. In the Measure dialog box, select the Use as

Line check box.
11. Right-click the vertex reference in the dialog
box and select Remove.
12. Press CTRL and select the front cylindrical

surface.
13. In the Measure dialog box, clear the Use as Axis
check box.
• Clear the Use as Line check box.
• Notice the result is the closest diagonal
distance.

Graphics toolbar and select TOP.
Axis check box.

Line check box.
17. In the Measure dialog box, select the Measure

maximum distance check box.
Orientation.

Task 3: Measure the angle between surfaces and edges.
1. Select Angle from the Measure types

2. Select the front, left surface.
3. Press CTRL and select the right, front surface.
4. In the Measure dialog box, select 0–360 from

the Range drop-down list, if necessary.
• Select Supplement from the Angle
drop-down list.
• Notice the angle.
5. In the Measure dialog box, select Conjugate

from the Angle drop-down list.
6. In the Measure dialog box, select Second

Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list.
7. Select Main from the Angle drop-down list.
8. In the Measure dialog box, select +/-180 from

the Range drop-down list.
• Select Supplement from the Angle
drop-down list.
9. In the Measure dialog box, select Conjugate

from the Angle drop-down list.

10. In the Measure dialog box, select Second
Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list.
11. Select Main from the Angle drop-down list.
12. Leave the dialog box open.
Task 4: Measure the diameter and radius of surfaces and edges.
1. In the Measure dialog box, click Diameter .

• Notice that the references are automatically removed due to the different measurement type.
2. Select the front, cylindrical surface.
• Notice the diameter and radius values.
3. Press CTRL and query-select the rear hole edge.
• Notice the diameter and radius values.
4. Expand the panels and drag them as necessary.
Task 5: Measure the area of surfaces.
1. In the Measure dialog box, click Area .

3. Select the top, right surface.
4. Press CTRL and select the top, left surface.
5. Expand the first panel and drag both as
necessary.
6. Select the top, angled surface.

7. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Projection
collector.
8. Select datum plane TOP.
9. Right-click the Projection collector and select
Remove.

Task 6: Measure the volume of a model.
1. In the Measure dialog box, click Volume .

2. Select the model from the model tree.
3. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Plane

collector and select datum plane RIGHT.
4. Click the arrow in the graphics window to flip
the volume direction.

Using the Measure Summary Tool
The Summary measure tool provides all applicable measurement results based on the references
selected.
• Multiple references yields the sum total of

applicable measurements.
– Distance between references is also provided.
– Individual reference results panels are
collapsed by default.
• Toggle between the Measure tool and other
individual measure tools.
– Selected references are retained.
Figure 1 – Summary Measurement using

Vertex References
Figure 2 – Summary Measurement using Figure 3 – Summary Measurement using

Edge References Surface References
Using the Measure Summary Tool

The Summary measure tool is similar to any of the other individual measure tools. However, the
Summary measure tool provides results for all measurements based on the references selected.
Pressing CTRL and selecting multiple references yields the sum total of the applicable measurements
as well as the distance between those references. For example, in Figure 3, the two surfaces are
selected as references, and the system provides the sum total results for measurements relative to
surfaces including angle, area, and perimeter, as well as the distance between those two surfaces.
When specifying multiple references, the system automatically collapses the measurement results
for the individual references. However, you can always expand these collapsed panels. Within the
Measure dialog box you can select the individual measure tools after measuring a summary, and then
switch back to the Summary tool, still retaining the references.

Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections
You can create planar cross-sections in a 3-D model.
• Available types:
– Planar
– X Direction
– Y Direction
– Z Direction
• Cross-section options
• Edit cross-section hatching
• Display management:
– Show Section
– Activate/Deactivate Figure 1 – Planar Cross-Section
Figure 2 – Z Direction Cross-Section with Figure 3 – X Direction Cross-Section with

Filled Surface Modified Hatching
Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections
You can create new planar part cross-sections in a 3-D model. The following planar cross-section
types are available:
• Planar – Enables you to select a planar surface or datum plane to create a cross-section through.
• X Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the model’s default
coordinate system X-axis.
• Y Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the model’s default
coordinate system Y-axis.
• Z Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the model’s default
coordinate system Z-axis.
These cross-section types are created using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section
dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View
ribbon tab, or from the Sections tab of the view manager.
New cross-sections are given the default names of XSEC0001, XSEC0002, and so on. You can always
rename a cross-section either during or after creation, similar to any feature. You can also redefine
cross-sections or manage their display using either the Sections node in the model tree or the Sections
tab in the view manager.
Cross-Section Options
The following are various cross-section creation options available in the Section dashboard:
• Distance from plane – Enables you to type a distance to offset the cross-section from the specified
reference. You can also dynamically drag the cross-section in the graphics window.
• Direction from plane – Enables you to flip the direction from the specified reference that the
cross-section is offset.
• Cap section – Enables you to cap the surface of the cross-section.
• Fill surface color – Enables you to fill the capped surface with a specified color. This option is only
available if the cross-section is capped.
• Enable hatching – Enables you to toggle the cross-section’s hatch pattern on or off.
• 3D Dragger – Similar to Assembly mode, you can enable the 3D Dragger and use it to translate or
rotate the cross-section about the three axes.
• View 2-D section in separate window – Enables you to display the 2-D cross-section in a separate
window.
Editing Cross-Section Hatching
If the hatch pattern is enabled for a given cross-section, you can edit the hatching either from the
Sections node in the model tree or from the view manager. When editing the hatch pattern, the Edit
Hatching dialog box displays with the following options:
• Hatch Patterns – Enables you to edit the hatch pattern used. You can select from a default library of
ANSI or ISO hatch patterns, or choose from a user-defined library hatch pattern.
• Angle – Enables you to specify the angle to orient the hatch pattern.
• Scale – Enables you to size the pattern. You can type a value, or use the two options to either halve
or double the existing hatch spacing.
• Color – Enables you to modify the color that the hatch pattern displays in the graphics window.
Cross-Section Display Management
You can manage the display of a given cross-section from the Sections node in the model tree, from
the view manager, or by selecting the cross-section in the graphics window. The following right-click
• Show Section – Enables you to enable or disable the cross-section within the graphics window. This
option enables or disables both the section itself and the hatch pattern.
• Activate/Deactivate – Activates or deactivates cut on the geometry based on the cross-section.
PROCEDURE - Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections

View\Cross-Section_Part-Planar SECTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Create default X, Y, and Z cross-sections.
3. Select X Direction from the Section types
drop-down menu in the Model Display group.
4. In the graphics window, drag the section offset
to the right, to approximately 15.
5. Drag the section offset back to 0.

8. In the model tree, right-click XSEC0001 and
select Edit Hatching .
• Edit the Angle to 45 and press ENTER.
• Click Halve Hatch Size .
• Click OK to close the Edit Hatching dialog box.

Deactivate from the mini toolbar.
• Right-click and select Show Section to toggle
it off.
10. Click in the graphics window background to
de-select all geometry.
11. Select Y Direction from the Section types

drop-down menu.
12. In the graphics window, edit the section offset
to 10.
• Notice the hidden hole profile is now visible.
13. In the dashboard, click 2D View .

14. In the 2D Section Viewer dialog box, click
Rotate Right .
16. Right-click and select Deactivate .
17. Select Z Direction from the Section types

drop-down menu.
18. In the dashboard, click Cap Section to toggle
it on.
19. Click Cap Section to toggle it off.

20. In the dashboard, click Fill Surface and select
the darkest red color.
Task 2: Create and pattern a cross-section based on a selected plane.
1. Select Planar from the Section types

drop-down menu.
2. Select the surface on the right.
3. Edit the offset to -12 and press ENTER.
7. Select XSEC0004 and click Pattern from the mini toolbar.

8. Select the same surface on the right.
9. In the dashboard, click Flip First Direction .
• Edit the quantity to 5.
• Edit the spacing to 12.
11. In the model tree, expand the Pattern feature.
• Select XSEC0004, press CTRL, and select the
remaining four patterned sections.
• Right-click and select Show Section.
Task 3: Investigate cross-sections from the view manager.

toolbar.
• Click New and view the available options.
• Click in the background.
• Right-click XSEC0001 and notice the available
options.
• Click in the background.
• Click Close.

Measuring Global Interference
You can calculate interferences between components in an assembly.
• Setup:
– Parts only
– Sub-assembly only
• Computation type:
– Exact
– Quick
• Interference pairs:
– Highlighted in the model
– Volume can be calculated
Figure 1 – Viewing Exact Global Interference

Computation
Figure 2 – Viewing Quick Global Interference

Computation
Measuring Global Interference
You can calculate interferences between components in an assembly. There are two different setup
options available when computing global interference:
• Parts only – Interference is checked between all parts, regardless of which sub-assembly, if any,
to which they belong.
• Sub-assembly only – Interference is checked between all sub-assemblies in the top level assembly
without determining whether individual parts within the sub-assembly interfere.
When components interfere, the geometry of one part is embedded in another part. The system
displays the interference between these two components as a pair in the Global Interference dialog
box. Selecting the interfering pair in the dialog box causes the components to highlight in the graphics
window, as shown in the figures. There are two different computational methods available for
computing interferences:
• Exact – When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting the interfering components, the
system also highlights the interfering volume shared between the two components. In addition, the
volume of interference is calculated and displayed in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 1.
• Quick – When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting the interfering components, the
system highlights the approximate interfering volume with a plus symbol (+) in the graphics window,
as shown in Figure 2. The volume of interference is not calculated.
Analysis Options
There are three options available when computing global interference on models:
• Quick – Enables you to compute global interference without saving the analysis or creating a feature
in the model tree.
• Saved – Enables you to save the analysis for future use. You can specify a unique name for the global
interference analysis so you can easily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses
by selecting the Analysis tab from the ribbon and clicking Saved Analysis from the Manage group.
• Feature – Enables you to save the global interference analysis as a feature in the model tree.
PROCEDURE - Measuring Global Interference

Analysis\Global-Interference INTERFERENCE.ASM
Task 1: Measure global interferences in an assembly.
3. Click Global Interference from the Inspect
Geometry group.
4. Click Preview in the Global Interference dialog
box.
• Notice the four interfering pairs.
• Select each pair to view the highlighting and
notice the volume of interference.
• Click OK.
7. In the model tree, select BODY.PRT and click
Activate from the mini toolbar.
8. Expand BODY.PRT and the second Pattern
(Hole).
9. Select Hole id 299 and click Edit Definition
• Edit the diameter to 4 and press ENTER.
toolbar.
12. In the model tree, select INTERFERENCE.ASM
13. Select the Analysis tab.
14. Click Global Interference .
15. Click Preview.
• Notice that there is only one interference pair.
• Click OK.

16. Select BODY.PRT and click Activate .
17. Select Hole id 37 and click Edit Definition .
• Edit the diameter to 51 and press ENTER.
19. Click Regenerate .
20. Select INTERFERENCE.ASM and click Activate

.
22. Click Global Interference .
23. Click Preview.
• Notice that there are now no interfering parts,
as shown in the Message Log.
• Click OK.
Exercise 1: Analyzing Design Models

Objectives
• Configure the mass properties of a model.
• Analyze components for distance, angles, surface area, and interferences.
Scenario
While designing a drill at your company, your manager asks you to confirm that the component models
adhere to the design specifications. For example, you need to verify the mass properties of the fuel
tank to confirm that the raw material estimates are correct. Next, you need to calculate the surface area
of the cylinder to confirm the proper thermal cooling. Also, the crankshaft's center of gravity needs
to be set along the axis of rotation. Finally, you need to check the engine assembly for interferences
between its components.
Analysis\Models FUEL_TANK.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the FUEL_TANK.PRT. Determine the volume of fluid that fits in a full tank. Also
determine the volume and mass of material to use when molding the part.
access the Model Properties dialog box. Notice
the current system of units specified in the Units
row of the Materials section.

4. Select the Analysis tab from the ribbon.
group.
6. Type the Density (kg/mm3) for the nylon fuel
tank as 1.2E-6 in the Mass Properties dialog box.
7. Click Preview in the Mass Properties dialog box.
Notice the computed volume and mass values.
9. Select the Model tab.
SHELL TANK feature.

12. Click Mass Properties .
• Click Preview.
• Notice that the values have updated, as
shown in the following figure.
13. Note that the volume of the fluid that fills the tank can be computed as follows:
VOLUME_BEFORE_SHELL – VOLUME_AFTER_SHELL = FLUID_VOLUME 434,300 – 101,600
= 332,700 MM3 = 0.333 L.
14. The volume of material required to mold the tank model is approximately 101,600 mm3.
15. The mass of material required to mold the tank model is approximately 0.122 KG.
Task 2: Analyze the mass properties of the CYLINDER.PRT. Determine whether the model has
adequate surface area for air-cooling the engine. Thermal analysis has indicated that the surface area
must be greater than 50,000 mm2.

• Select the CYLINDER.PRT and click Open.

2. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties. Notice
3. In the Materials section, click change in the Mass
Properties row. Type the Density (kg/mm3) for
the cylinder as 2.7E-6 and click OK in the Mass
4. In the Materials section, click Info in the Mass
Properties row. Notice the surface area of the
model, as shown in the following figure.
5. The surface area of the model is approximately 64,290 mm2. This is greater than the stated
minimum requirement of 50,000 mm2 for air-cooling the engine. If the calculated value does not
meet the specification, we could modify the pattern to add additional cooling fins.
6. Close the Mass Properties Report dialog box and click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.
Task 3: Determine the diameter of the spark plug hole to ensure that sufficient material is present to
tap threads for a standard 16 mm spark plug. At least 2 mm smaller is required.
2. In the Measure group, select Diameter from
the Measure types drop-down menu and select
the cylindrical surface of the spark plug hole,
as shown.
3. Note that the diameter is 13.75 mm. Since
this value is less than 14 mm, it meets the
requirement.
Task 4: Measure the area of the base of the cylinder to determine whether there is sufficient surface
area to adequately seal the cylinder to the crankcase. For an engine of this displacement, the
recommended gasket surface area is at least 850 mm2.
1. Orient the model, as shown.
2. Click Area from the Measure dialog box.
Select the engine block interface surface, as
shown.
3. Note that the area is 1,005.55mm2. Since this
value is greater than 850 mm2, it meets the
requirement.

Task 5: Measure the distance between the exhaust and intake surfaces.
1. Orient the model, as shown.
2. Click Distance from the Measure dialog box.
• Select the exhaust interface surface, as
shown.

4. Press CTRL and select the carburetor interface
surface, as shown.
5. Note that the distance is 62mm.
7. Click Save .
Task 6: Analyze the mass properties of the CRANKSHAFT.PRT. Determine the location of the center of
gravity (COG) on the model.
1. Click Open .
• Select the CRANKSHAFT.PRT and click Open
2. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties. Notice
Mass Properties row.
• Type the Density (kg/mm3) for the steel
crankshaft as 7.8E-6 and click OK in the Mass
• Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.
4. Click Saved Orientations and select RIGHT.
6. Click Mass Properties and click Preview.
Note that the center of gravity (indicated by the
arrow) is below the axis of revolution (horizontal
axis of the other coordinate system).
Note: The system displays the default coordinate
system as a reference when computing model
mass properties.

Task 7: Measure the CRANKSHAFT.PRT. Determine the length of the keyway slot. This length must be
between 11 mm and 12 mm so the flywheel key does not shear during normal operating conditions.
2. In the Measure group, select Length from
the Measure types drop-down menu.
• Select the edge of the keyway.
3. Note that the distance is approximately 8.19mm.
This value does not meet the requirement.
4. In the Measure dialog box, click Save and
select Save Analysis.
• Type KEYWAY _LENGTH in the text box field
and click OK.
• Close the Measure dialog box.
5. Click Saved Analysis from the Manage group
to open the Saved Analysis dialog box. Click
All > Hide all. This hides the analysis from the
graphics window. Close the Saved Analysis
dialog box.
6. In the model tree, select KEYWAY and click Edit
Dimensions .
• Edit the diameter from 13 to 15.5.
• Click twice in the background of the graphics
window to de-select all features.
7. Click Saved Analysis and double-click
the KEYWAY _LENGTH analysis in the Saved
Analysis dialog box.
8. Note that the distance is now 11.75mm. This value meets the requirement.
Tip: If the Saved Analysis is left unhidden, the result of the analysis automatically updates in the
graphics window. Icons enable you to easily determine whether the analysis is unhidden or hidden.
10. In the Saved Analysis dialog box, select the KEYWAY _LENGTH analysis and click Delete Analysis
to delete it.
11. Close the Saved Analysis dialog box.
Task 8: Measure the angle between the lobes of the CRANKSHAFT.PRT.
1. Orient to the standard orientation.
2. In the Measure group, select Angle from the
Measure types drop-down menu.
• Select the left surface.
• Press CTRL and select the right surface.

3. The indicated angle is approximately 30°.
4. Expand the Measure dialog box, if necessary,

and select Supplement from the Angle
drop-down list. The angle is now approximately
150°.
6. Click Save .
Task 9: Analyze the mass properties of the ENGINE.ASM.
1. Click Open .
• Select ENGINE.ASM and click Open.

Note: The components of the engine have been
assigned appropriate density values for either
steel or aluminum.
4. Note the displayed values for volume, surface
area, average density, mass, and center of
gravity.
5. Click OK from the Mass Properties dialog box.

Task 10: Analyze interferences within ENGINE.ASM components.
1. In the Inspect Geometry group, click Global
Interference and click Preview. Notice that
there is one pair of interfering components.
2. The ENG_BLOCK_REAR.PRT interferes (areas
in dark red) with the ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.PRT
around the alignment pins. Click OK in the
Global Interference dialog box.
Task 11: Resolve the interference.

1. Resolve the interferences in ENG_BLOCK_
FRONT.PRT by editing the depth of the
ALIGN_PINS, as shown in the figure.
• In the model tree, select ENG_BLOCK_
FRONT.PRT and click Open .
• Select the ALIGN_PINS and click Edit
Definition .
• Drag the depth handle to 5.
2. Click Close to return to the ENGINE.ASM.

3. Click Global Interference and click Preview.
4. The Message Log indicates that there are no interfering parts.
5. Click OK in the Global Interference dialog box.
6. Press CTRL+G to regenerate the assembly.
7. Click Save .
8. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK to erase the model
from memory.

Module 23
Relations and Parameters

Understanding Relation Theory
Relations are user-defined equations written between dimensions and/or parameters.
• Uses:
– Control effects of modifications
– Define dimension values based on
other dimensions
– Set min./max. constraints
– Conditional relationships between
dimensions
• Relation syntax:
– Symbolic dimension name
– Parameter name
Figure 1 – Viewing Dimension Symbolic Names
• Naming dimensions:
– d1 versus HEIGHT
• Equation types:
– Equality
– Comparison
• Modifying relation-driven dimensions.
• Order of operations. Figure 2 – Section of Relations Dialog Box
Understanding Relation Theory
Relations are user-defined equations written between dimensions and/or parameters. Relations
let you capture design intent by defining relationships within sketches, features, parts, or assembly
components. Relations can be simple assignments, equations, or complex, conditional, branching
statements. The relation equations themselves are simply stored in the model.
Relation Uses
You can use relations in the following ways:
• To control the effects of modifications on models.
• To define values for dimensions based on other dimensions.
• To set minimum or maximum constraints for dimension values.
• To describe conditional relationships between dimensions.
Relation Syntax
You compose a relation using the symbolic dimension name, as shown in Figure 1, or parameter name.
An example of a relation is, d1=d2+d3. The dimension values switch to their symbolic names when using
the Relations dialog box, a portion of which is shown in Figure 2.
You can also click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Switch Dimensions or view a
dimension's contents of the Name field from the Value group on Dimension tab.
Naming Dimensions
You can edit the properties for a dimension, and give it a meaningful name. For example, instead of d1
and d2, you could edit the dimension names to WIDTH and HEIGHT. These names can then be used in
the relation. If a dimension name is modified, the change is automatically reflected in the relation.
Equation Types
The two types of equations are:
• Equality – Equates a parameter on the left side of the equation with an expression on the right side.
This type of relation is used for assigning values to dimensions and parameters. For example:
– Simple assignments: d3=25, d3=HOLE_DIA, or d5=d2/3
– More complex assignment: d5=LENGTH * (SQRT (d7 / 3 + d4) )
• Comparison – Compares an expression on the left side of the equation with an expression on the
right side. This type of relation is commonly used as a constraint or in conditional statements
for logical branching. For example:
– Simple constraint: d6>30
– More complex constraint: (d1+d2)>(d3+2.5)
– Conditional statement: IF(d0+3)>=10, d3=30
Modifying Dimensions Driven by Relations
If a dimension is driven by a relation, the dimension cannot be modified directly. You can edit the
relation that is driving it, or remove that dimension from the relation. For example, if you type the relation
d0=d1+d2, you cannot modify d0 directly. You must modify d1 or d2, or edit the relation to change the
value of d0. If a dimension name is modified, the change is automatically reflected in the relation.
Order of Operations
Relations are not evaluated until the model is regenerated. During a regeneration, relations are
evaluated in the following order:
1.At the beginning of a regeneration, the system solves model relations in the order in which they
were typed in.
2. In an assembly, the assembly relations are calculated first. Then the system calculates all
sub-assembly relations in order of component placement. This means that all sub-assembly
relations are calculated before any features or components begin regeneration.
3. The system starts regenerating features in the order of creation. If a feature is attached to feature
relations, these relations are solved before regenerating that feature.
4. If you specified any relations as Post Regeneration, the system solves these relations after the
regeneration is complete.
Understanding Relation Types

There are numerous types of relations that can be created within a Creo Parametric model.
• Types of relations include:

– Section
– Feature
– Part
– Assembly
– Inherited
– Pattern
– Skeleton
Figure 1 – Sketcher Dimensions
– Component
– Weld Solid
• Specify a feature and model in a relation
• Rules
Figure 2 – Feature Dimensions

Understanding Relation Types
There are numerous types of relations that can be created within a Creo Parametric model. The types
of relations that can be created include:
• Section relations – Relations created in Sketcher to control geometry of complex sections. The
relation is calculated with the sketch. In Figure 1, the Sketcher dimensions displayed can be used
in the creation of a Section relation.
• Feature relations – Relations added to a selected feature. During a part regeneration, these relations
are resolved after part relations, but before the regeneration of the feature to which they apply. You
can use feature relations to change feature geometry after part relations are applied and some
features have been regenerated. In Figure 2, the feature dimensions displayed can be used in the
creation of a Feature relation.
• Part relations – Relations added on a part level. During a part regeneration, these relations can be
calculated before or after the part features are regenerated. Part relations are typically the most
common type of relation created between model features. The feature dimensions displayed in
Figure 2 can be used in the creation of a Part relation.
• Assembly relations – You can write relations to control geometry between components, either
by using session ID or component ID.
– Using session ID – If you refer to a parameter that belongs to another model, the parameter must
include the Session ID of the referenced model. The format for assembly relations is as follows:
¨ parameter_in_driven_model:session_id = parameter_in_driving_model:session_id
You can determine the session ID from the Relations dialog box by clicking Show > Session ID or
by selecting the desired object type, whether Assembly, Part, or Skeleton, and then selecting a
component. The name and session ID display in the message window.
– Using component ID – When creating a relation in Assembly mode, you may need to use a
component's internal ID. Every component in an assembly has a unique component ID, even if two
components have the same component name and the same session ID. Use the following syntax
when referencing a component ID:
¨ d#:cid_(component ID #), or d2:CID(2), for example.
You can determine the component internal ID by clicking Component from the Investigate
group in the Tools tab of the ribbon and then selecting a component and clicking Apply. The name
and component ID display in the message window.
• Inherited relations – Access relations from an inheritance feature from Part and Assembly modes.
• Pattern relations – Access relations specific to a pattern in the Part or Assembly mode.
• Skeleton relations – Access relations for a skeleton model in Assembly mode.
• Component relations – Access relations for an assembly component.
• Weld Solid relations – Access relations for a solid weld created in the Part or Assembly mode.
Specifying a Feature and Model in a Relation
You can write relations that use the parameters of a feature. Within a feature relation, you can identify a
feature parameter attached to that feature by the parameter name. For example: d2 = parameter_name.
However, if you write a relation in the feature’s parent model (part or assembly) or in another feature,
you must use one of the following formats to reference that feature:
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_#, where # is the feature ID (obtained by clicking Feature Information
from the Investigate group in the Tools tab of the ribbon)
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_N, where N is the feature Name
In Assembly mode, you can access a user parameter in a feature of another model by adding the
session ID:
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_#:session_id
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_N:session_id
Rules for Creating Relations in Parts
The following rules apply to creating or modifying relations in parts:
• Driven variables can be as follows:
– Dimensions in the part, for example, d#.
– User parameters in the part, for example, parameter_name.
– User parameters in features, for example, parameter_name:fid_N or parameter_name:fid_feature_
name.
• Driving variables can be the same as the driven variables. For example, d2 = d2 +d3.
• In addition, you can use Reference dimensions from the part (rd#), or Analysis feature measurements
in the following format:
– measurement_name:fid_N
– measurement_name:fid_feature_name
Rules for Creating Relations in Features
The rules for creating relations in features are as follows:
• Feature relations are saved with the feature, and stay with it regardless of the model in which the
feature is used.
• Feature relations are evaluated after part relations and they are solved when the feature to which
they belong is regenerated. Therefore, if a relation performs geometry evaluation (such as the
distance between two points), it can provide different results depending on whether it is used as
a feature relation or as a part relation. Note that you can modify existing model parameters by
name from the feature level.
Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions

You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and operators when writing a relation.
• Commenting
– Use /*
• Symbols
– d#, for example
• Predefined variables
– PI, for example
• Arithmetic
– +, –, /, *, ^, ( )
• Assignment
– Equal sign “=”
• Mathematical functions
– sin (), cos (), tan (), for example
• Mass properties Figure 1 – Relations Dialog Box
Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions
You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and operators when writing a relation.
Commenting
It is a best practice to use comments in your relations. Comments can help you remember why you
added the relation. They also benefit others who use your models. Every comment line must begin
with a forward slash and an asterisk, and then the relation follows on the next line. For example:
/* Width is equal to 2*height
d1=2*d2
The comment should precede the relation to which it applies. This way, when relations are sorted, the
comment moves with the relation and remains above it.
Symbols
The various dimension types use a symbolic code followed by an index number:
• Dimensions – The following are the different dimension syntaxes:
– d# – Dimensions in Part or Assembly mode.
– d#:# – Dimensions in a component in Assembly mode. The session ID of the assembly or
component is added as a suffix.
– rd# – Reference dimensions in a part or top-level assembly.
– rd#:# – Reference dimensions in Assembly mode. The session ID of assembly or component
is added as a suffix.
– ad# – Associative (Driven) dimensions in Part, Assembly, or Drawing mode.
• Sketcher – These dimension symbols are used in Sketcher relations:
– sd# – Dimensions in Sketcher mode.
– rsd# – Reference dimensions in Sketcher.
– kd# – Known dimensions in Sketcher. A dimension created between existing geometry (not
between section entities) is given this symbol.
• Patterns – Displayed as p#, where # is the number of instances in the pattern. Direction patterns in
two directions have two p#'s. Note that if you edit the instance number to a non-integer value, the
system truncates it. For example, 2.90 becomes 2 pattern instances.
• Tolerances – Parameters associated with tolerance formats. You must enable tolerances to view
these symbols:
– tpm# – Tolerance in plus/minus symmetrical format; # is the dimension number.
– tp# – Positive tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension number.
– tm# – Negative tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension number.
Predefined Variables
The following predefined variables are available:
PI = 3.141592654 G = 9.8 m/sec2 C1 = 1
C2 = 2 C3 = 3 C4 = 4
Arithmetic Symbols
The following arithmetic symbols are available:
+ = Addition – = Subtraction / = Division
* = Multiplication ^ = Exponentiation ( ) = Parenthesis for grouping, d0 =
(d1–d2)*d3
If you are using negative dimensions, and you want to capture the true signed value in your relation,
precede the symbol with a dollar sign (for example, $d20 or $depth). You must do this regardless of
the setting for the show_dim_sign configuration option.
Assignment
The assignment symbol “=” sets one item equal to another item.
Mathematical Functions
The following mathematical functions are available:
cos () = Cosine tan () = Tangent sin () = Sine
sqrt () = Square root asin () = Arc sine acos () = Arc cosine

atan () = Arc tangent sinh () = Hyperbolic sine cosh () = Hyperbolic cosine
tanh () = Hyperbolic tangent log () = Base 10 logarithm ln () = Natural logarithm
exp () = e to an expoential abs () = Absolute value
degree
ceil () = Smallest integer not less than the real value
floor () = Largest integer not greater than the real value
Mass Properties
You can calculate mass properties for a given model in a relation. You must set a density value and
calculate the mass properties before using these functions. Functions include:
mp_mass (path) mp_volume (path)
mp_surf_area (path) mp_cg_x (path1, coord_sys, path2)
mp_cg_y (path1, coord_sys, path2) mp_cg_z (path1, coord_sys, path2)
Where:
• path = the path to the desired component if in an assembly. If the path is the current model, type (" ").
The format is either assy_name.asm : part_name.prt or assy_id : part_id : session_id.
• path1 = the path format to the component for which the value is to be calculated.
• coord_sys = the reference coordinate system name.
• path2 = the path format to the component that contains the coord_sys.
Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions

You can also utilize comparison operators and conditional statements when writing a relation.
• Comparison operators:
– ==, <, &, !
• Conditional statements:
– IF, ENDIF, ELSE
• String functions:
– <>, itos(int), for example
• Specify the number of decimal places to ceil
and floor.
Figure 1 – Viewing Symbolic Dimensions
Figure 2 – Different Result of ENDIF Statement Figure 3 – Different Result ENDIF Statement

Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions
You can utilize more advanced mathematical functions and operators when writing a relation, including
comparison operators, conditional statements, and string functions.
Using Comparison Operators
Comparison operators are used when a TRUE/FALSE value can be returned. For example, the
following relation returns TRUE whenever d1 is greater than or equal to 3.5, and FALSE whenever
d1 is less than 3.5: d1 >= 3.5
The following comparison operators are available:
== – Equal to > – Greater than >= – Greater than or equal to
!=, <>, ~= – Not equal to < – Less than <= – Less than or equal to
| – Or & – And ! – Not
Using Conditional Statements

You can add IF statements to relations to create conditional statements. For example:
IF d1 > d2
dia = 25
ENDIF
IF d1 <= d2
dia = 60
ENDIF
In Figure 2 and Figure 3, this IF statement was used to determine the diameter value. In Figure 2,
because d1 is greater than d2, the resulting diameter is 25. In Figure 3, d1 is less than d2, so the
resulting diameter is 60.
By adding the ELSE statements in the branches, you can create more complex conditional
constructions. With these statements, the previous relation may be modified as follows:
IF d1 > d2
dia = 25
ELSE
dia = 60
ENDIF
There can be several features listed between the IF, ELSE, and the ENDIF statements. In addition, the
IF/ELSE/ENDIF constructions can also be nested within feature sequences.
Consider the following rules:
• ENDIF is spelled as one word.
• ELSE is added on a separate line.
• Equal to in conditional statements is entered as two equal signs (==). Assignment is entered as a
single equal sign (=).
Using String Functions
The following operators and functions are supported for strings:
• == – Compares strings as equal.
• !=, <>, ~= – Compares strings as unequal.
• + – Concatenates strings.
• itos(int) – Converts integers to strings. Here, int can be a number or an expression. Nonintegers
are rounded off.
• search(string, substring) – Searches for substrings. The resulting value is the position of the substring
in the string (0 if not found).
• extract(string, position, length) – Extracts pieces of strings.
The following functions enable you to pass strings as arguments:
• string_length() – Returns the number of characters in a parameter.
• rel_model_name() – Returns the current model name.
• rel_model_type() – Returns the current model type.
• exists() – Evaluates whether an item, such as a parameter or dimension, exists.
Specifying the Number of Decimal Places
You can add an optional argument to both the ceil and the floor functions that enables you to specify
the number of decimal places for rounding. The syntax for functions with the rounding parameter is
as follows:
• ceil (parameter_name or a value, number_of_dec_places)
• floor (parameter_name or a value, number_of_dec_places)
• where number_of_dec_places is an optional value.
Examples include the following:
• ceil (10.2) evaluates to 11
• floor (–10.2) evaluates to –11
• ceil (10.255, 2) evaluates to 10.26
• floor (10.255, 1) evaluates to 10.2
Exact Relation
Exact relations prevent rounding errors.
• Uses exact value for repeating decimals.
• No rounding/truncation.
• Uses parenthesis.
• Example: OFFSET = (1/7) * LENGTH.
Figure 1 – Exact Relation Result Figure 2 – Relations Dialog Box

Exact Relation
In earlier versions of the software, the system would round, or truncate, repeating decimals, making
exact modeling difficult. Now, you can use exact values in relations; the repeating decimal is not
rounded or truncated, and is carried out to a maximum of 14 decimal places. This is particularly
useful when you pattern or space features using a fraction that results in a repeating decimal, such
as 1/3, 1/6, and 1/7.
• The syntax notation to use this option is = (x/y).
In the example in Figure 1 and Figure 2, the hole offset from the left edge of the model is desired to be
exactly 1/7 of the total length. In this case, the syntax would be:
• OFFSET = (1/7) * LENGTH
Creating Parameters
Parameters enable you to add additional text or numeric information to a model.
• Parameter types:
– Integer
– Real Number
– String
– Yes/No
• Parameter categories:
– Local
– External
– User-defined
– System
• Display parameters in the model tree.
• Create parameter rules. Figure 1 – Parameters Dialog Box
Creating Parameters
Parameters enable you to add additional text or numeric information to a model. Example uses for
parameters include: capturing non-geometry types of information such as COST or VENDOR, using a
numeric parameter to drive dimension values through relations, and defining a parameter value based
on other dimension or parameter values. Parameters can also be used with family tables to define
different information for each instance, drawings to report information in tables or formats, and data
management tools, such as Windchill.
Parameter Types
You can create the following types of parameters:
• Integer – A whole number numerical value, for example, 1, 3, 100, and 267.
• Real Number – Any numerical value, for example, 1.25, 25, 75, and PI.
• String – A series of alphanumeric values (numbers or letters), for example, STEEL, JOHN SMITH,
and PTC.
• Yes/No – A parameter whose value is either YES or NO.
You can create parameters associated with the following object types:
• Assembly • Skeleton • Component
• Part • Feature • Inherited
• Quilt • Surface • Edge
• Curve • Composite Curve • Annotation Element
• Material
Parameter Categories
The following categories of parameters are available:
• Local parameters – Parameters that are created in the current model. You can edit local parameters
in the model.
• External parameters – Parameters created outside the current model and used to control some
aspects of the model. External parameters cannot be modified in the model. For example, you can
add parameters in Layout mode to define certain part dimensions. When you open that part, these
part dimensions are controlled from Layout mode and are read-only in the part. Similarly, you can
create parameters in the PDM system and apply them to the part.
• User-defined parameters – Additional information that you can attach to geometry. You can add
user-defined parameters to an assembly, part, feature, or entity. For example, you can create a COST
parameter for each part in the assembly. Then, you can include the COST parameter in your Bill of
Materials to calculate the total cost of the assembly.
• System parameters – Parameters defined by the system, for example, the Mass Properties parameter.
These parameters are generally read-only. You can use them in relations, but you cannot control
their value.
Creating Multiple Parameters
You can create several parameters at once for multiple objects. To do this, press CTRL and select
multiple features or components from the model tree. Then, right-click and select Edit Parameters and
use the Parameters dialog box to create or edit parameters for all of the selected objects.
Displaying and Creating Parameter Values in the Model Tree
You can display parameter values in the model tree as a column by using the Model Tree Columns
dialog box to add the columns. This enables you to add columns for Feature parameters in a part
model and Component parameters in an assembly model. Once the column is added, you can click an
empty cell in the column to add the parameter to that feature or component.
Parameter Naming Rules
Consider the following rules for naming user parameters:
• User parameter names must begin with a letter if they are to be used in relations.
• You cannot use d#, kd#, rd#, tm#, tp#, or tpm# as user parameter names because they are reserved
for use with dimensions.
• User parameter names cannot contain non-alphanumeric characters such as !, @, #, and $.
• You cannot change the name of a user parameter once it has been created.
PROCEDURE - Creating Parameters

Feature_Tools \Parameters PARAMETERS.PRT
Task 1: Create parameters in a part model.
3. In the Parameters dialog box, notice the default
parameters created by the model template.
4. Drag the column widths as necessary to resize
them and notice that the existing parameters
are of String Type.

5. Select the Value field for the DESCRIPTION
parameter.
• Type Hex Socket Screw.
6. Select the Value field for the MODELED_BY
parameter.
• Type your first initial and last name.
7. In the Parameters dialog box, click New

Parameter .
• Edit the Name to COST.
• Edit the Type to Real Number and type 0.075
as the Value.
8. Click New Parameter and edit the Name to
LOT_QTY.
• Edit the Type to Integer.
• Type 100 as the Value.
VENDOR.
• Edit the Type to String and type
FASTENERS_123 as the Value.
PURCHASED.
• Edit the Type to Yes No.
• Edit the Value to YES and click OK.

12. In the Parameters dialog box, edit the Look In
from Part to Feature.
• Select feature HEX.
TOOL_CLEARANCE.
• Edit the Type to String and type .002 – .005
as the Value.
• Click OK.
15. In the Parameters dialog box, edit the Look In
from Part to Surface.
• Select the large cylindrical surface of the bolt
head.

KNURLING.
• Edit the Type to Yes No and type YES as the
Value.
• Click OK.

Tree Columns .
18. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, edit the
Type to Feat Params.
• Type TOOL_CLEARANCE as the Name and
press ENTER.
• Click OK.
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options

The Parameters dialog box enables you to perform additional, more advanced, operations to
parameters.
• Operations include:
– Set units
– Designate
– Set access
¨ Full
¨ Limited
¨ Locked
– Source
– Description
– Restricted
– Reordering parameters Figure 1 – Parameters Dialog Box
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options
The following advanced parameter options are available within the Parameters dialog box:
• Units – The Unit column defines the units for a parameter from the available list of units. You can only
define units for parameters of Real Number type and only while creating a parameter.
• Designate – You can designate selected system and user parameters for use as attributes in a
PDM system.
• Access – Defines access to the parameter as follows:
– Full – Parameters with full access are user-defined parameters. You can modify these parameters
from any application.
– Limited – You can set full access parameters to Limited access. You cannot modify parameters
with Limited access by a relation. Limited access parameters are modified only through Family
Tables and Program.
– Locked – Parameters with locked access are parameters that can be locked either by a user, or
by an external application such as a Data Management System, an Analysis feature, a Relation,
or a Program. You can modify parameters locked by an external application only from within
an external application. You cannot modify user-defined locked parameters from within any
external application.
• Source – Indicates where the parameter was created or from where it is driven.
• Description – Provides a description for the parameter.
• Restricted – Indicates a restricted value parameter whose properties are defined by an external file.
• Reordering parameters – You can reorder parameters within the Parameters dialog box using the
up and down arrows on the right side of the dialog box. The order is preserved when exiting the
Parameters dialog box and when saving the model.
Creating Relations
You use the Relations dialog box to view dimension symbols and write relations. It also contains
various relation tools.
• View dimension symbols:
– Switch Dimensions
• Write relation using relation tools.
• Examples:
– Equality
– Constraint
– Logical
• Specify regeneration position.
• Use parameters/create parameters in
relations.
Figure 1 – Relations Dialog Box

Creating Relations
You use the Relations dialog box to view dimension symbols and write relations. It also contains
various relation tools.
Viewing Dimension Symbols
You can view dimension symbols from the Relations dialog box. The dimension symbols display by
default as you select features while in the Relations dialog box. You can also click Switch Dimensions
to switch between dimension symbols and values.
From the part model, you can view dimension symbols by editing a feature, which displays its
dimensions. You can then click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Switch Dimensions
. You can select a dimension, right-click and select Properties, and then view the symbol in the
Name field of the Dimension Te xt tab.
Writing Relations
You should begin every relation with a comment line (a line starting with /*). You can type the complete
relation, or select dimension symbols in the graphics window to insert them into the relation. You
can type in math operators and parenthesis directly, or use the icons. The following are examples
of relations:
Equality d3 = 2.5*d2 d1 = DEPTH d3 = sin(d1+1) + d2
Constraints d3 >= 10 d2 != 100 d1 < (d2*d3) -1

Logical IF d1 == 6 d1 = d1 + 10 IF MATL == "STEEL"
d2 = 15 IF d1 > 350 d2 = 10
ENDIF d1 = 5 ENDIF
ENDIF
Note: Editing dimensions such that a constraint is violated, simply creates a warning message, which
you can override.
Relation Tools
The following tools are available within the Relations dialog box:
• Provide Value – Enables you to type a dimension symbol, parameter, or a portion of a relation
to compute the result.
• Display Dimension – Type a dimension symbol or name to highlight it on the model.
• Select Units – Enables you to select a unit to insert. You can also set relations to take units
into consideration when computing.
• Insert Function – Display a complete list of functions for relations.
• Insert Parameter – Select a parameter to insert into the relation.
• Sort Relations – The sort function sorts relations in order of precedence, based on how they are
evaluated by the system. If one relation depends on the value of another relation, it is reordered
accordingly. Sorting relations helps you detect undesired circular relations. Relations with comment
lines can also be sorted. The comment line is attached to the relation below it, and moves with
that relation during a sorting. If multiple comment lines precede a relation, they are all attached
to that relation.
For example, if you type the relations d0=d1+3*d2 and d2=d3+d4, then when you sort them, the
system reorders them based on the order in which they are evaluated. Since the first relation needs
the value from the second relation, the order is reversed when sorted.
• Verify Relations – Computes the relations and verifies they are valid.
Regeneration Position
You can specify the regeneration position as either Initial, where relations are calculated before the
first feature, or Post Regeneration, where relations are calculated after the last feature. Initial is the
default option.
Using Parameters in Relations
You can access a parameter from a relation, or create a parameter as the result of a relation. For
example, you can create a real number parameter named LENGTH, equal to 15. You can then add a
relation of d5=LENGTH. When you regenerate the model, the d5 dimension updates to new values as
the LENGTH parameter is updated. Note that you can type string values for parameters by enclosing
them within quotation marks in relations.
You can expand the Relations dialog box to display the Parameters dialog box.
Creating Parameters in Relations
You can create or edit a parameter directly from a relation. For example, you can type LENGTH = d5. If
the parameter LENGTH did exist previously, the system would modify its value. If the parameter
LENGTH did not exist previously, the system would create it as a Real Number parameter.
Best Practices
Sort relations and verify them often to avoid errors, especially when writing multi-line relations. Test the
relation by modifying dimensions and parameters on the model to ensure it works as expected.

PROCEDURE - Creating Relations
Feature_Tools \Relations RELATIONS.PRT
Task 1: Create relations in a part model.
2. Edit HEX.
4. Notice the dimension symbols are generic in
name.
5. In the graphics window, select d1 dimension.

• Edit the name from d1 to HEX_SIZE.
• Click in the graphics window to de-select any
geometry.
6. Repeat the procedure to edit the name of
dimension d2 to HEX_DEPTH.
8. In the model tree, select BOLT _HEAD and
BOLT _SHAFT.
9. In the Relations dialog box, type the following
comment and press ENTER:
• /* Adjust HEAD size based on BOLT diameter
10. Type the following logical relations, pressing
ENTER after each line:
• IF BOLT _DIA == 8
• HEAD_DIA = 14
• HEAD_THK = 7
• ENDIF
11. Type the comment:
• /* Adjust HEX size relative to HEAD size
12. Type the relations, pressing ENTER after each
line:
• HEX_SIZE = HEAD_DIA / 2
• HEX_DEPTH = HEAD_THK / 1.5

• /* Create a parameter value
14. Type the relation:
• OVERALL_LENGTH = HEAD_THK +
BOLT _LENGTH
• /* Constrain the overall model length
16. Type the relation:
• OVERALL_LENGTH <= 40
17. Click Verify Relations and click OK.
18. Expand the Local Parameters pane and notice
the OVERALL_LENGTH parameter and its value
of 21. Click OK.
19. Edit BOLT _SHAFT.

20. Edit the BOLT _DIA to 8.
21. Edit the bolt length from 15 to 25 and click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.
22. Edit BOLT _SHAFT.
23. Edit the bolt length from 25 to 35 and click
Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.
24. Notice the warning message.
25. Click No in the Confirmation dialog box to stop
regeneration.
26. In the menu manager, click All Changes >
Confirm.
27. Click Close in the Information Window.

Creating Relations for Patterns
You can use relations to control pattern increments and quantities.
• Pattern increments: d#
• Pattern quantities: p#
• Relations with linear patterns
– Control linear pattern spacing:
¨ d1 = 100 / p1
– Control the quantity:
¨ p1 = 100 / d1
• Relations with angular patterns
– Control angular pattern spacing:
¨ d1 = 360 / p1
– Control the quantity:
¨ p1 = 360 / d1 Figure 1 – Controlling Linear Spacing
Figure 2 – Controlling Angular Spacing
Creating Relations for Patterns

You can use relations to control pattern increments and quantities. Pattern increments display like a
standard dimension with symbol d#. Pattern quantities display with symbol p#.
Note: If you have a pattern in two directions, you will see p# displayed twice.
Using Relations with Linear Patterns
You can use relations with various linear patterns, including Direction and Dimension patterns. For
example, given spacing dimension d1 and pattern quantity p1, you could:
• Control the linear pattern spacing based on a given quantity, for example d1 = 100 / p1.
• Control the quantity based on a given linear pattern spacing, for example p1 = 100 / d1.
In Figure 1, a relation has been created that controls the linear spacing based on the pattern quantity.
When the number of pattern members is decreased, they remain equally spaced due to the relation.
Using Relations with Rotational Patterns
You can also use relations with rotational patterns, including Axis and Dimension patterns. For example,
given angle d1 and pattern quantity p1, you could:
• Control the angular pattern spacing based on a given quantity, for example d1 = 360 / p1.
• Control the quantity based on a given angular pattern spacing, for example p1 = 360 / d1.
In Figure 2, a relation has been created that controls the quantity of pattern members based on the
angular spacing value. In the left image of Figure 2, the relation has not yet been created. In the middle
image, the relation has been applied and the quantity has increased based on the spacing value to

maintain equal spacing about 360 degrees. In the right image, the spacing value has been increased.
To maintain equal spacing about 360 degrees, the quantity has been automatically reduced.
Note: When using a Dimension pattern, it is necessary to use these types of relations to maintain equal
pattern spacing around a given angle. However with the Axis pattern, you can use the Set Angular Extent
option to achieve the same result without a relation.
PROCEDURE - Creating Relations for Patterns

Feature_Tools \Relation_Patterns RELATION_PATTERN .PRT
Task 1: Create relations to control the spacing of features in a part model.
2. Edit DIR_PATTERN .
• In the graphics window, select the 5
EXTRUDES dimension.
• Edit the Name to VERT_QTY in the Value
group.
• Click in the graphics window to de-select any
geometry.
• Repeat the process to edit the 10 spacing
dimension name to SPACING.
4. Click the Model Intent group drop-down list and
select Relations .
5. Type the following comment and press ENTER:
• /* Adjust spacing and offset based on
vertical pattern quantity and length
6. Select the front-left, oval extrude, and select
the base protrusion.
7. Notice that the other dimensions have already
been renamed.
8. Type the following relations, and then press

ENTER after each line:
• OFFSET = LENGTH / (VERT_QTY+1)
• SPACING = OFFSET
9. Click OK.
10. Click Regenerate and notice that the pattern
spacing is equal to the spacing from both ends.

11. Edit DIR_PATTERN .
• Edit the quantity from 5 EXTRUDES to 4 and
click Regenerate .
Creating Section Relations

Section Relations are relations typically created in Sketcher mode involving dimensions of the
current section.
• Symbolic section dimension symbols:
– sd# – Sketcher dimension
– rsd# – Reference Sketcher dimension
– kd# – Known Sketcher dimension
• Advantages of Section relations:
– Real-time dimension updates.
– Relation is regenerated with the feature in
which it resides.
Figure 1 – Showing Symbolic Sketcher

Dimensions
Figure 3 – Showing Updated Sketcher

Figure 2 – Showing Numeric Sketcher Dimensions Dimensions
Creating Section Relations
Section Relations (also referred to as Sketcher relations) are relations typically created in Sketcher mode
and involve dimensions of the current section. However, you can also create a section relation from the
part level by selecting the Section option in the Relations dialog box, and then selecting a feature.
When writing relations between section dimensions, you must use the symbolic section dimension
symbols:
• sd# – Dimensions in Sketcher mode.
• rsd# – Reference dimensions in Sketcher.
• kd# – Known dimensions in Sketcher. This symbol is given to a dimension created between existing
geometry (not between section entities). The top and right dimensions in Figure 1 are known
dimensions in the Sketch.
Advantages of Writing Section Relations
The advantages of writing a section relation as opposed to a part relation are:
• The relation is active in Sketcher mode, so you can change Sketcher dimensions and view the
relations take effect. In Figures 2 and 3, a relation was written that centered the cut feature in the
middle of the main base protrusion. When the relation was applied, the driven rectangle dimensions
automatically updated in real time.
• The relation is regenerated along with the feature in which it resides.
Tips for Writing Section Relations
Keep the following in mind when writing relations within Sketched sections:
• Relations that define dimensions other than section dimensions are best defined at the feature or
part level.
• You cannot reference a parameter in another feature as a driving variable. For example, if dia
is a dimension in another feature with fid_20, the system does not accept the following section
relationship: sd3 = dia:fid_20
• However, you can establish the same relationship at the feature level or model level by using
the model-level equivalent (d#) of the section dimension (sd#). Alternatively, you can create an
intermediate user parameter in the parent model, and then reference it from the section.
• If you try to assign a relation outside of the section to a parameter that is already driven by another
relation in the section, the system issues an error message upon regeneration. The same applies if
you try to assign relations to a parameter in a section that is already being driven by a relation outside
the section. Remove one of the relations and regenerate again.
PROCEDURE - Creating Section Relations

Feature_Tools \Section_Relations SECTION_REL.PRT
Task 1: Create section relations in a part model.
2. Orient to the FRONT view.
3. Edit Extrude 1.
• Notice the dimensions, and notice that there
are no overall width or height dimensions to
use in a relation.

4. Edit the definition of Extrude 2.
5. Right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch.
types: .
7. Review the dimension scheme.
8. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, and then

click the Model Intent group drop-down menu
comment:
• /* Change width based on height
10. Type the following relation:
• sd1 = 2.25 * sd7
11. Click OK to update the dimensions.
12. Edit the height from 0.5 to 1.
13. Notice that the dimensions update in Sketcher
because of the relation.
Note: If this relation was written as a part relation,
you would not be able to view the dimension update
in Sketcher.
14. In the ribbon, select the Sketch tab, then click

Dimension and dimension the overall height
and width of the model.
Note: Dimensioning existing geometry to existing
geometry creates a known dimension (kd#).
15. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, then click

the Model Intent group drop-down menu and
select Relations .
comment:
• /* Center sketch on model
17. Type the following relations:
• sd12 = kd13 / 2
• sd10 = kd14 / 2

18. Click OK to update the dimensions.
19. In the ribbon, select the Sketch tab, then click
OK .
Using the Evalgraph Function

The Datum Graph evaluation function enables you to use graph features to drive dimensions
through relations.
• Relation syntax:
– y = evalgraph(“graph_name”, x)
¨ graph_name = name of graph feature.
¨ x = value along X-axis of graph for which
the y value is returned.
• x can be the value specified by a dimension.
Figure 1 – Graph Feature Controlling

Feature Height
Figure 2 – Feature with Width of 8 Figure 3 – Feature with Width of 12.5

Using the Evalgraph Function
The Datum Graph evaluation function enables you to use graph features to drive dimensions through
relations. The dimensions can be section, part, or assembly dimensions. The syntax for using Evalgraph
in a relation is:
• evalgraph("graph_name", x)
where:
• graph_name – The name of a graph feature.
• x – The value along the X-axis of the graph for which the y value is returned.
A relation was written that uses the graph feature shown in Figure 1. The relation controls the feature
height using feature width based on the graph. In Figure 2, the feature width is 8; using the graph in
Figure 1, you can determine that the associated height is 4.
In Figure 3, the feature width is 12.5; using the graph in Figure 1, you can determine that the associated
height is slightly more than 2 (it is 2.33).
For variable section sweep features, you can also specify the trajectory parameter “trajpar” in the
function.
The following is an example of using Evalgraph in a relation:
• d1 = EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1" , d2)
In this case, you control dimension d1 throughout the relation. When d2 is modified on the model,
the system evaluates this value as the x-value using the specified graph, and returns with the
corresponding y-value for d1.
You can also involve Evalgraph in more complex relations, for example:
• d1 = 1.5* EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1", d2+d3*sin(d4) )
Note: A graph feature is usually evaluated for its defined X-axis values. When it is evaluated beyond
the defined range, the Y-axis values are extrapolated. The system calculates the extrapolated y value
for values of x that are less than the initial value by extending a tangent line back from the initial point.
Similarly, the system calculates the extrapolated y value for values of x that are greater than the final
value, by extending a tangent line out from the final point.
Note: When you create a section relation of a graph feature, for example, sd1=evalgraph("CONIC",
trajapar*5), this relation becomes a feature relation. Feature relations are evaluated after part relations
and are solved when the feature to which they belong is regenerated. Therefore, if a relation performs
geometry evaluation (for example, the distance between two points), it can provide different results if used
as a section relation as opposed to being used as a part relation.
PROCEDURE - Using the Evalgraph Function

Feature_Tools \Evalgraph EVALGRAPH .PRT
Task 1: Use the Evalgraph function in a relation to control a feature’s height.
2. Edit Extrude 1.
• Edit the 2 dimension name to WIDTH.
• Edit the 10 dimension name to HEIGHT.
3. Edit the definition of GRAPH1, click Done from

the menu manager, and press ENTER to accept
the default name.
types: .
5. Notice that the graph is an x-y function.
6. Click OK .

8. Type the comment /* Control HEIGHT by
changing WIDTH, based on GRAPH1 and press
ENTER.
9. Select the feature and select dimension HEIGHT.
10. In the Relations dialog box, type
=EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1" , WIDTH) and
click OK.
12. Edit Extrude 1.

13. Notice that the height dimension updated for
the current width.
14. Double-click the 6.67 height dimension to edit it.
15. Notice the message in the Status bar.
16. Edit the 2 width dimension to 8 and click
17. Edit the definition of GRAPH1, click Done from

the menu manager, and press ENTER to accept
the default name.
18. Click Line Chain and sketch a new diagonal
line on the end.
19. Click Dimension and create the horizontal
and vertical endpoint dimensions, editing as
shown.
20. Click OK .
21. Edit Extrude 1.
22. Edit the 8 width dimension to 12.5 and click
23. Notice that the height has updated for the new
width based on the graph.

Using Simultaneous Equations
Simultaneous equations are relations in which several variables or dimensions must be solved
simultaneously.
• Procedure:
– Define known values.
– Place SOLVE on a line.
– Type simultaneous equations.
– Type FOR and variables to be computed.
• Rules:
– Must declare variables used in beginning
of equation.
– System returns only one result, even if
more than one is possible.
– You can intermix simultaneous equations
with single variable relations. Figure 1 – Relation and Variable Definition
Figure 2 – Solution with Depth of 16 Figure 3 – Solution with Depth of 10
Using Simultaneous Equations

In some cases, it may not be possible or convenient to arrange the desired relation so that only the
driven dimension is on the left side of the equation. In such cases, the relation can be set up so that the
system can solve a set of simultaneous equations for the desired variables. Simultaneous equations are
relations in which several variables or dimensions must be solved simultaneously.
Setting Up Simultaneous Equations
To set up a set of equations to be solved, use the following procedure:
• Define the known values.
• Place SOLVE on a line of the relation.
• Type the equations to be solved simultaneously.
• Type FOR and then indicate the variables to be computed, separated with commas.
Rules for Creating Simultaneous Equations
Consider these rules for creating simultaneous equations:
• You must declare variables used in simultaneous equations in the beginning of the equations.
• When solving the simultaneous equation, the system returns only one set of results, even if more
than one solution for the system of equations is possible.
• You can intermix simultaneous equations with single variable relations.
Simultaneous Equation Examples
For example, you have a box with dimension defined by the parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, and DEPTH,
and you want to specify the following conditions:
• The volume remains constant at 320.
• The width is twice the height.
• The length is variable.
You can type the following simultaneous equations:
SOLVE
LENGTH*WIDTH*HEIGHT = 320
WIDTH=2*HEIGHT
FOR HEIGHT WIDTH ...or... FOR HEIGHT,WIDTH
All lines between the SOLVE and FOR statements become part of the simultaneous equations. The
FOR line lists the variables to be solved (note that there are two possible variations). Any variables that
appear in the simultaneous equations, but do not appear in the FOR list, are interpreted as constants.
Alternatively, you can set the same conditions by typing the following simultaneous equations:
VOLUME = 320
SOLVE
VOLUME=LENGTH*WIDTH*HEIGHT
WIDTH=2*HEIGHT
FOR HEIGHT WIDTH
Figure 2 and Figure 3 display variations of the model where the DEPTH was edited to different values.
PROCEDURE - Using Simultaneous Equations

Feature_Tools \Simultaneous_Eq SIMULTANEOUS .PRT
Task 1: Use simultaneous equations in a relation.
Note: In this example, the volume of a rectangular solid is to remain constant. The width is to be twice
the height. The depth value must be variable. The system should solve the necessary equations and
return the dimensions for height and width.
2. Edit Extrude 1.
3. Notice the 16 depth dimension, 20 height
dimension, and 40 width dimension.
4. Edit the 16 dimension name to DEPTH.

5. Edit the 20 dimension name to HEIGHT.
6. Edit the 40 dimension name to WIDTH.

7. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Relations .
8. In the Relations dialog box, type the comment /* solve simultaneous equations for height
and width and press ENTER.
• Select the feature to display the dimensions, if necessary.
• Type volume = 320 and press ENTER.
• Type SOLVE and press ENTER.
• Type volume =, select dimension HEIGHT, and click x from the Relations dialog box.
• Select dimension WIDTH and click x.
• Select dimension DEPTH and press ENTER.
• Type width = 2*height and press ENTER.
• Type FOR height, width.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Regenerate and notice the geometry

updates.
11. Edit Extrude 1.

12. Notice that the 16 depth dimension stayed the
same.
13. Notice the new 3.16 height dimension.
14. Notice the new 6.32 width dimension, which is
twice the height.
15. Double-click the 3.16 height dimension and try
to edit it.
16. Notice the message in the message window.

17. Edit the depth from 16 to 10.
18. Notice the 10 depth dimension, the 4 height
dimension, and the 8 width dimension.
19. Notice that the width is still twice the height.

Module 24
Capturing and Managing Design Intent

Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items
In Creo Parametric, you have three options for handling the children of suppressed or deleted items.
• Three options for child handling include:
– Suppress/Delete
– Suspend
– Fix
Figure 1 – Children Handling Dialog Box Figure 2 – Suspending Child Rounds
Figure 3 – Handling a Fixed Child Component

Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items
If you attempt to suppress or delete an item that has children, the system highlights these child items in
blue. In Figure 1, the piston component is being suppressed, and the system highlights the piston pin
and piston ring in blue because they are children of the piston. In Figure 2, the two rounds highlighted
in blue are children of the round that is being suppressed.
The system also displays a Delete or Suppress dialog box. When you click Options in this dialog box,
the system displays the Children Handling dialog box, as shown in Figure 1. The Children Handling
dialog box displays each of the child items highlighted in blue. You have three different options
available for handling these children, and each child can be handled independently:
• Suppress/Delete – When suppressing a parent, you can also suppress a child item, and when
deleting a parent, you can also delete a child item. If this is the desired option for all child items, you
can click OK in the original Suppress or Delete dialog box without having to consider the options
available in the Children Handling dialog box.
• Suspend – Suppresses or deletes the parent, thus suspending the child item's regeneration
temporarily. Once the parent is suppressed or deleted, the suspended child item regenerates.
This results in one of the following:
– The child item regenerates successfully. However, if the child item is a feature, it may have
different geometry; if the child item is a component, it may be in a different position. In Figure 2,
the two round children were suspended. After the parent round was suppressed, these two child
rounds successfully regenerated, although their geometry is different.
– The child item does not regenerate successfully. If this occurs, Creo Parametric indicates
the failure. You can then acknowledge and accept the failure or undo the changes. If you
acknowledge the failure, you can continue to work normally, but you should ultimately fix the
failure. You can fix the failure in the following ways:
¨ Suppress or delete the child item.
¨ Modify another feature or part.
¨ Modify the child item – You can edit the definition of the failing child item and resolve the issue.
For example, if the failure occurs due to a now missing reference, you can specify a different
reference to resolve the failure.
• Fix – The Fix option is available only for assembly components. This option causes the system to
create a Fix constraint which locks, or fixes, the component in its current orientation but retains it as
fully constrained. The Fix constraint is created as a new constraint set, and causes the component to
display green when using the predefined model tree search option Fixed Placement. The system
retains the original, failing constraints but disables that constraint set that contains them. If you
resolve the placement failure by specifying new references you can re-enable the original constraint
set and delete the Fix constraint set, as shown in Figure 3.
PROCEDURE - Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items

Edit\Delete-Suppress_Child CHILD_HANDLING.ASM
Task 1: Suppress PISTON.PRT and fix PISTON_PIN.PRT after it is suspended.
2. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters .
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed objects check box and click OK.
4. Right-click PISTON.PRT and select Delete .
• Notice that because PISTON_PIN.PRT
and PISTON_RING.PRT are children of
PISTON.PRT, they are also to be deleted.
7. Select PISTON.PRT and click Suppress from the mini toolbar.

• Again, notice that because PISTON_PIN.PRT and PISTON_RING.PRT are children of
PISTON.PRT, they are also to be suppressed.
8. In the Suppress dialog box, click Options.
• Edit the Status of PISTON_PIN.PRT to Fix,
leaving PISTON_RING.PRT to be suppressed.
• Click OK.
9. Notice that PISTON_RING.PRT is suppressed,

while PISTON_PIN.PRT is not.

10. At the top of the model tree, click the drop-down
arrow next to the search field and select Fixed
Placement.
• Notice that the PISTON_PIN.PRT is specified
as having fixed placement.
11. In the search field, click Clear Search .
12. Select PISTON_PIN.PRT and click Edit Definition
• Notice that the assembly reference is missing
for the Coincident constraint.
14. Select the inner hole surface on
CONNECTING_ROD.PRT into which you
need to insert the pin. The pin was formerly
inserted into the piston.
15. In the Placement tab, select the Set2 constraint set.

• Notice that the Set Enabled check box is cleared for that constraint set.
16. Select the FIX_PLACED_5 constraint set.
• Notice that the Set Enabled check box is
selected for this constraint set.
• Notice also that this constraint set contains a
Fix constraint.
Note: When you fixed the location for PISTON_PIN.PRT, the system added the FIX_PLACED_5 constraint
set and disabled the original constraint set. Since you have updated the reference for the Coincident
constraint, you can now re-enable it.
17. Right-click FIX_PLACED_5 and select Delete.
18. Select Set2 and select the Set Enabled check
box.
Note: Since you updated the missing Coincident
constraint reference, you can delete the Fix
constraint.
dashboard.

Task 2: Suppress SIDE_ROUND and suspend the resulting child rounds.
1. Select CONNECTING_ROD.PRT and click Open
2. Right-click SIDE_ROUND and select Delete .
• Notice the two child round features.
4. Click Undo .
5. Select SIDE_ROUND and click Suppress .

• Again, notice that the child rounds also are
to be suppressed.
6. In the Suppress dialog box, click Options.
• Edit the Status of both Round ids to Suspend.
• Click OK.
7. Notice the geometry changes made to the
model because SIDE_ROUND is no longer
present.

Reordering Features
You can reorder features in the model tree by dragging them to a new location.
1. Original model
• Through All hole
2. Protrusion added
• Hole no longer meets design intent
3. Hole reordered
• Hole again meets design intent
Figure 2 – Protrusion Added Figure 3 – Hole Reordered
Reordering Features
When regenerating a model, Creo Parametric regenerates features one at a time, following the order
in which they display in the model tree. As you create new features, they are added to the bottom
of the list in the model tree.
The order of features is the sequence in which features display in the model tree. You can drag a
feature within the model tree to place it such that it immediately succeeds its parent, even though
you may have added several features to it after the parent was created. Since you must regenerate
a parent before you regenerate its children, you cannot reorder a parent to succeed its children; nor
can you reorder a child to precede its parents.
Feature order can affect the geometry of a model. When a feature is created, it can only add or remove
material from the model as the model exists at that point in time. For example, in Figure 1, the hole
feature's depth is Through All, which drills the hole through the unseen side of the block. If you add an
additional protrusion to the block, you need to reorder the hole to succeed this new protrusion if you
want to retain its Through All design intent. In that case, the Through All depth would include the new
protrusion and drill the hole through the entire block.

PROCEDURE - Reordering Features
Edit\Reorder REORDER.PRT
Task 1: Reorder features in a part model.
2. Locate Hole 1 in the model tree.
• Notice its position in the feature order.
3. Select Hole 1 and click Edit Definition from

the mini toolbar.
• Select the Shape tab from the Hole
dashboard.
• Notice the hole depth is Through All.
dashboard.
4. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.
5. Select Sketch 2.
6. Select Hole 1.
• Notice that the hole does not appear to have
a depth of Through All, but recall that it did
at the time of creation.
Note: A feature can only add or remove material from
the model as the model exists at the point in time in
which the feature is created.

7. In the model tree, click and drag Hole 1 to
reorder it to succeed Extrude 2.
8. Select Hole 1.
• As previously observed, the hole still removes
material Through All from the model;
however, since the extrude feature now
precedes the hole feature, the Through All
depth has the desired effect.
9. Click Shell from the Engineering group.
10. Select the front face to remove it.
11. Edit the thickness to 0.50.
• Notice the boss around the hole feature.
13. In the model tree, click and drag Shell 1 to

reorder it to precede Hole 1.
14. Reorient the model and notice that the shell
feature now hollows out the entire model.

Inserting Features
You can insert new features or components in the model tree where desired.
1.Original model
• One protrusion
• Shell has square edge
2. Insert mode activated
• Protrusion mirrored and rounds
created before shell
3. Insert mode cancelled
• Hole on left goes through
mirrored protrusion
• Shell hollows out mirrored
protrusion and rounds
Figure 2 – Insert Mode Activated
Figure 3 – Insert Mode Cancelled
Inserting Features
The model tree insertion indicator, shown in the model tree as Insert Indicator , indicates where
features are inserted upon creation. By default, its position always succeeds all items listed in the
model tree. You may drag it higher or lower in the model tree to insert features between other
features in the tree. When you move the insert indicator, you enter Insert Mode and the model is rolled
backward or forward in its regeneration in response to its new position, and all features update in the
graphics window. If a feature precedes the indicator, then it is displayed in the graphics window and
processed during regeneration. If a feature succeeds the indicator, it is temporarily suppressed. Thus, it
is not regenerated or displayed in the graphics window.
In addition to dragging the Insert Indicator up into the model tree, you can specify an insert location
in the tree. To do this, select a feature, right-click, and select Insert Here. The insert indicator is then
placed directly below the selected item.
You can exit Insert Mode and return the insert indicator to its default location at the bottom of the
model tree by cursoring over it, right-clicking, and selecting Exit Insert Mode. You are then prompted to
resume the features you suppressed when you activated Insert mode. When you select to resume
them, Creo Parametric places them after the inserted features.
For example, the model in the figures is a cast metal cover. However, a design change is needed to
make another protrusion with a rounded notch in the middle. Hence, we need to mirror the existing
protrusion and round the edges of the resulting notch. Additionally, these rounded edges should also
be located on the inside of the part to enable easier extraction from the cast.
As shown in the part's model tree, you can delete and recreate the shell and hole features after creating
the necessary protrusion and rounds. Alternatively, you can use Insert mode to add the protrusion and
round features before the Shell feature. Notice that this includes the round feature in the shell, which
accomplishes the task of having round edges on the inside of the part.
Insert Mode operates the same way when you are in an assembly. You may select a component,
right-click, and select Insert Here to insert components between other components in the model tree.
If you display features in the model tree, you can also drag the Insert Indicator. Again, when you
move the Insert Indicator, you enter Insert Mode and the assembly is rolled backward or forward in its
regeneration in response to its new position, and all components update in the graphics window.
PROCEDURE - Inserting Features

Edit\Insert INSERT.PRT
Task 1: Insert new features in a part model.
2. Select each of the five solid features in the
model tree to highlight them in the graphics
window.
3. In the model tree, click the Insert Indicator
and drag it so that it precedes Shell 1.
• Notice the features that are suppressed and
therefore not currently regenerated.
4. Select Extrude 2 and click Mirror from the
mini toolbar.
• Select datum plane RIGHT.
• Click Complete Feature from the Mirror
dashboard.
Graphics toolbar and select 3D-2.

• Press CTRL and select both edges of the
notch bottom.
• Right-click and select Full round.
• Click Complete Feature from the Round
dashboard.
7. Click Round .
• Press CTRL, and select a vertical edge on the
front and back of the notch.
8. In the model tree, select the Insert Indicator ,

right-click, and select Exit Insert Mode.
9. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box.
10. Click Saved Orientations and select 3D-1.

• Notice the hole on the left that goes through
the mirrored protrusion.
• Also notice that the shell now hollows out
both the mirrored protrusion and the newly
inserted rounds.

Redefining Features and Sketches
The Edit Definition option provides you with complete control of a feature.
• Edit Definition
– Datum Features
– Feature Tools
– Sketch Features
– Pre-Wildfire Features
• Complete control of a feature
– Feature Type
– Size
– Shape
– Location
– Options
– References
Figure 1 – Various Edit Definition Options
Figure 2 – Feature Dashboard

Redefining Features and Sketches
In Creo Parametric, altering the parents of a feature or sketch can drastically affect the outcome of
the resulting geometry. To modify a parent/child relationship, the easiest method is to use the Edit
Definition option. This option enables you to select your references using dialog boxes, the dashboard,
or menu options depending on the feature you are redefining. You can redefine a feature or sketch by:
• Selecting it and clicking Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.
• Right-clicking it and clicking Edit Definition from the mini toolbar.
• Clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Edit Definition .
Note: If you edit the definition of legacy model features, you may encounter a different interface than that
of the dashboard. For example, if you redefine a legacy sweep or blend feature, you will see a dialog box of
options rather than the dashboard, as shown in the lower-left image in Figure 1.
For example, if you redefine a datum feature, you can select new references in a dialog box. If you
redefine a Sketch feature, you can use the Sketch dialog box to edit its placement. You can also use
the References dialog box to modify references internal to the sketch. For most solid features, you
can use the dashboard to edit references; for example, selecting a different sketch for an extrude, or
selecting different edges for a round.
Controlling Features with Edit Definition
The Edit Definition functionality provides you with complete control over a feature within its tool.
Consider the control that Edit Definition provides in the following areas:
• Feature Type – Switch the feature type for many features. For example, you can edit a feature to
modify it from a solid feature to a surface feature.
• Size – Increase or decrease the size of many features. For example, you can edit the radius value of
a round feature.
• Shape – Edit the resulting geometry shape of a model. For example, you can edit a feature's Sketch,
depth or angle value, or switch the external sketch used.
• Location – Edit the location of a feature. For example, you can edit the sketching plane specified
for a Sketch feature which modifies the location of the resulting sketch feature and therefore any
features using that Sketch.
• Options – Edit numerous options of a feature. For example, you can edit the depth of a hole from
Blind to Through All, or you can add an additional side for material to be removed.
• References (Parents) – Edit the parent references to a feature. For example, you can switch which
external sketch is used in the creation of a feature, or you can specify different references to different
features in the Sketch References dialog box.
The Edit Definition Workflow
When you redefine, or edit the definition of, a feature or sketch, the following occurs:
• The model regenerates back to the feature being redefined. The model tree reflects that this has
happened by removing all features that succeed the feature being redefined. In addition, the feature
being redefined displays with a yellow icon preceding its name in the model tree, as shown here:
• Most features being redefined display in their orange dynamic preview color. In this state, the
feature's drag handles display, enabling you to edit their respective values. In addition, the on-screen
flip arrows display.
• The feature's UI is presented. Depending upon the feature being redefined, this could be either a
dialog box or the dashboard. The UI or dialog boxes enable you to make changes to the feature.
• Once modifications have been made, most features can be previewed solid, if desired. This option
regenerates the feature to determine whether the changes you have made are valid.
• Once you have completed the feature, it regenerates. After this occurs, the child features also
regenerate to reflect the modifications made to their parent.
PROCEDURE - Redefining Features and Sketches

Edit\Redefine REDEFINE.PRT
Task 1: Redefine features and sketches in a part model.
2. Select RING_CUT and click Edit Definition
3. Select the Placement tab from the Revolve
dashboard, and notice that the Sketch is Internal.
• Click Edit.
4. Edit the 1.5 dimension to -1.5.
5. Click OK from Close group.

Orientation.
7. Click Remove Material to toggle it off.
8. Drag the handle from 360 to 75.
9. Click Complete Feature from the Revolve
dashboard.

Graphics toolbar and select FRONT.
12. Select SKIRT_CUT and click Edit Definition .
13. Select the Placement tab from the Extrude
dashboard, and notice that the Sketch is
external to the extrude feature.
• In the model tree, select Sketch 2.
14. Click Complete Feature from the Extrude
dashboard.
• Notice the new skirt shape.
15. Click Undo .
16. Select Sketch 1 and click Edit Definition .
17. Click Sketch Setup from the Setup group.
Orientation and notice the sketch in the model.
19. Select datum plane RIGHT from the model tree

as the new sketching plane.
20. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
21. Click OK .

22. Notice that the SKIRT_CUT has been rotated 90
degrees.
Capturing Design Intent in Sketches

You must carefully consider how to define a sketch since several other features use sketches
in their creation.
• Considerations include:
– Sketch/Reference plane selection
– Reference selection
– Dimension scheme
– Constraints
– Sketched geometry type
• Open sketch results may differ from closed
sketch results
Figure 1 – Captured Design Intent
Figure 2 – Closed Sketch Design Intent Examples Figure 3 – Open Sketch Design Intent Examples
Capturing Design Intent in Sketches

Design intent is captured in Sketcher by selecting references and by sketching, constraining, and
dimensioning entities. It is important to capture design intent in sketches since several other features
originate from sketches. Consequently, you must carefully consider how to define a sketch and then
capture it. You can always modify the sketch's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have
planned for future changes.
Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Sketches
When you create a new sketch in Creo Parametric, consider the options available for capturing design
intent in each of the following areas, and in some of the examples listed. Your decisions in these areas
at the time of sketch creation impact the overall model downstream when you wish to modify it.

• Sketch/Reference Plane – Should these selected references be default datum planes or a
construction plane created with an adjustable offset or angle? Perhaps the sketch plane should
be on a surface created from another feature?
• References – Remember that when you select additional sketching references or dimension to
existing geometry, you are selecting the parents for your sketch. If the references you select update,
so does the sketch. Consider whether you want your sketcher references to be default datums or
another feature. In Figure 1, the sketch feature references the angled surface of existing geometry,
so if that angled surface updates, the sketch also updates. Additionally, the sketch references the
existing hole. Therefore, if the hole location updates, the sketch's location updates as well.
• Dimensioning scheme – When dimensioning circles and arcs, should the dimension be a radius
or diameter? Should the sketch be dimensioned with an X-Y scheme or a radius-angle scheme?
Deciding whether the sketch must pivot can help you determine which scheme to use. Consider
which dimensions you might want to modify at a later time if the design changes.
• Constraints – You must decide which constraints to use, and to which reference you wish to constrain
because you are again creating parents when selecting constraint references. How should the sketch
entities react to each other? Should they be parallel, perpendicular, or tangent? Should the sketch be
symmetrical? If so, you need a centerline. Do you want arc and circle centers to remain aligned?
In Figure 1, the sketch's construction line between each arc center is constrained to be parallel to
the angled surface. Therefore, if the angle of the existing surface changes, so too must the angle of
the sketch. Similarly, if the existing hole diameter is modified, this sketch's upper arc diameter also
changes because it is constrained to be of equal radius.
• Sketched geometry type – When sketching arcs, for example, you should use the arc type which
helps you obtain your desired design intent. Remember to use construction geometry or sketched
datum points to your advantage.
Open Sketches Versus Closed Sketches
There are two different techniques for creating sketch features:
• Closed-section sketch — The sketched geometry forms a closed loop.
• Open-section sketch — The sketch geometry does not form a closed loop.
Closed-section sketches are the more robust of the two options and should therefore be used
whenever possible. However, your desired design intent should ultimately dictate which type of sketch
section is created. The yellow extrude features shown in Figure 2 are created from closed-section
sketches, whereas the yellow extrude features created in Figure 3 are created from open-section
sketches. The geometry created using an open-section sketch causes the resulting geometry to follow
the 3-D contour of a surface. The endpoints of the open-section sketch must be constrained to the
surface edge. The geometry created using the closed-section sketches ignores the 3-D contour of the
surface and simply extends the geometry upward.
There are two specific rules regarding open-section versus closed-section sketches in regards to
feature requirements:
• Rib features require an open-section sketch.
• You must create the first extrude or revolve feature using a closed-section sketch.

Capturing Design Intent in Features
Capture design intent in your model's features by deciding which feature options to use.
• Option considerations include:
– Depth
– Solid/Thicken
– Round/Chamfer type
– Hole type
– Sketch or select sweep
trajectory
• Internal versus external sketches
• Embedded datum features Figure 1 – Internal Versus External Sketches
Figure 2 – Embedded Datum Features

Capturing Design Intent in Features
Design intent is captured in features by specifying the correct feature and its options. As a result,
you must carefully consider which feature options to specify to properly capture your design intent.
You can always modify the feature's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for
future modifications.
Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Features
When you create a new feature in Creo Parametric, consider the options available for capturing design
intent in each of the following areas. Your decisions in these areas at the time of feature creation
impact the overall model downstream when you wish to modify it.
• Depth – When creating an extrude feature, determine whether the depth should be symmetric or
defined with 2-sided blind depth values. Determine whether the depth is to be defined to a reference.
If so, remember that the reference you select becomes a parent to the feature. Or consider if the
depth should be Through All?
• Solid or Thicken – Determine whether the feature you create should be a solid feature in which you
create a cut through, or a thickened feature with a defined thickness. If so, which side?
• Round/Chamfer type – Determine which type of chamfer best captures your design intent. Is it better
to use a 45 x D or a D x D? Again, considering how the design may change in the future helps you
decide. Should the round be created by selecting the edge or by selecting the two surfaces in your
model? If you believe that the design may change so that the edge disappears, use the two surfaces.
• Hole type – Determines which dimensioning scheme works best in your design. Which would be
best – to the tip or to the shoulder of the hole?
• Internal versus external sketches – In Figure 1, notice that feature Extrude 2 was created using an
external sketch, but feature Extrude 3 was created using an internal sketch. Which sketch you
ultimately use for feature creation depends upon these factors:
– You must use an internal sketch to create Geometry Points in the sketch.
– Internal sketches reduce clutter in the model tree. As shown in Figure 1, there are two additional
model tree entries for Sketches 1 and 2 due to the fact that these were external sketches. Had
Extrude 1 and Extrude 2 been created with internal sketches, neither of these entities would
exist in the model tree.
– External sketches are helpful when you want to test multiple design alternatives for a feature. You
can select alternate external sketches to test these design alternatives.
• Embedded datum features – Embedded datum features are useful when you want to edit features
as if they are one feature. This also simplifies the tree and reduces the display clutter. In Figure 2,
Extrude 4 was created using five embedded datum features. However, embedded datum features
are not recommended if you want to reuse the datums for other features.
Capturing Design Intent in Parts

Capture design intent in parts with proper planning, feature selection, and feature order.
• Planning model design
– 80/20 rule
• Feature type
• Feature order
• Parent/child effects
Figure 1 – Following the 80/20 Rule
Figure 2 – Feature Order Example 1 Figure 3 – Feature Order Example 2

Capturing Design Intent in Parts
Design intent is captured in parts by properly planning your model design and specifying which
features to use and in which order. Often the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many
different types or combinations of features. As a result, you must carefully consider which features
to use to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify the part's design intent, but it
is easiest to do when you have planned for future modifications.
Planning Your Model Design
Before you begin your new part model, you should plan its design. As a general guideline, you should
follow the 80/20 rule, which states that 80 percent of the overall shape of the model should typically
be created in the initial 20 percent of the model's features. Figure 1 illustrates the 80/20 rule. The
left image displays only the first four extrude features of the muffler, while the right image displays
the completed model. Although only the first four features are displayed, roughly 80 percent of the
overall model shape is present.
Here are some guidelines to follow when planning your part model design:
• Begin with the feature that determines the overall size and shape of the model. This is your base
feature. The left image of Figure 1 displays the first four extrude features of a muffler model. The first
feature is an extruded rectangle, which is the base feature of this model.
• Create major geometry features that add or remove material from your model. In the left image of
Figure 1, the extruded cut along the front face of the muffler is an example of this type of major
geometry feature.
• Create minor geometry features that add or remove material. These include smaller features such as
protrusions, cuts, bosses, ribs, or holes. In Figure 1, the smaller extruded cuts are an example of this
type of feature in the left image, and the holes in the right image are another example.
• Finally, add finishing features such as rounds and chamfers. In the right image of Figure 1, the rounds
and shell are both finishing features.
Deciding Upon Feature Type and Order
Often the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many different types or combinations of
features. It is your responsibility to decide how to best create the geometry so that when the design is
later modified, it updates in a predictable manner. For example, an extrude is common, but consider
what occurs if any of the following situations arise:
• You need the profile to change along the extrude length later in the design – In this case, a blend
feature may be the best option. You could initially create the blend straight back, and edit the
individual blend sections at a later time.
• The path of extrusion may change – In this case, a sweep may be the best option. You could initially
create a straight sweep trajectory, and modify it at a later time.
• You need the feature to rotate – In this case, a revolve may be the best option.
The feature order also has an impact later on if the design is modified. In the bottom figures, the
resulting geometry is identical, but was created differently. In Figure 2, the first feature extrudes the
entire length, with subsequent features adding or removing material. In Figure 3, three extrudes were
stacked in a series, with the overall length being created as the sum of the three features. If the length
must be modified later, it is easier to modify the length of the design in Figure 2.
Considering Parent/Child Effects
It is important to always consider parent/child relationships when creating features in parts. Build
new features using references from other features only as necessary. To create features without
establishing parent/child relationships to other features, you can create default datum planes instead.
These are common references that are not deleted. Using default datums also minimizes unwanted
parent/child relationships.

Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies
You can capture design intent in assemblies by determining which assembly type to use, which
component to assemble first, and which constraints to use during the assembly process.
• Considerations include:
– Assembly type
¨ Static
¨ Dynamic
¨ Mixture
– Assembly/Sub-assembly
structure
– Choice of base model
– Assembly references
– Fit/Interference issues Figure 1 – Assembly Structure Examples
Figure 2 – Vice Assembly

Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies
Design intent is captured in assemblies by specifying which assembly type to use, the
assembly/sub-assembly structure, choice of base model, assembly references used, and any fit or
interference issues. As a result, you must carefully consider how to create your assembly to properly
capture your design intent. You can always modify the assembly's design intent, but it is easiest to do
when you have planned for future modifications.
Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies
When you create a new assembly in Creo Parametric, consider the options available for capturing
design intent in each of the following areas. Your decisions in these areas at the time of feature creation
impact the overall assembly model later on when you wish to modify it.
• Assembly type – There are three different types of assemblies that you can create in Creo Parametric.
Create the assembly type that best fits your needs:
– Static – Assemblies are created using constraints. If you decide to create this type of assembly,
determine whether some components require angular or linear offsets. If so, remember to create
the proper constraint types.
– Dynamic – Assemblies are created using connections. Determine whether your assembly needs
to contain components that can be dynamically moved. If so, a dynamic assembly with pin, slider,
and cylinder connections may be your best option.
– Mixture – Assemblies are created with both static and dynamic components.
• Assembly/Sub-assembly Structure – There are usually multiple ways to assemble components and
still achieve the same assembly result. In Figure 1, notice that in one assembly example, component
D is assembled into the sub-assembly SUB, while in the other example, it is assembled directly to
the top-level. The end result may appear the same, but could cause the assemblies to behave
differently should another component's placement be modified.
• Choice of base model – The base model is the first component assembled into the assembly. It is
important to consider which component you set as the base model because if all other models
reference this component it becomes difficult to remove the base model.
• Assembly references used – Remember that the assembly references you select for placing
components create parent/child relationships between these components. Be sure to select
references that are more robust if possible, such as selecting surfaces over edges.
• Fit or interference issues – Determine what occurs when you assemble all your components into
the assembly and you find you have interference or fit issues. Remember that you can always
activate components to edit them within the context of the assembly. Once the top-level assembly
is activated and regenerated, the other components update. Be careful when creating features in
components in an assembly because you may inadvertently select a reference from a different
component. If this occurs, it creates a parent/child relationship both between the two components
and between the component and the assembly.

Module 25
Resolving Failures and Seeking Help

Understanding and Identifying Failures
When a model fails regeneration, the system indicates the failing features or components.
• Failures occur due to:

– Invalid/Impossible geometry
– Missing/Broken references
– Missing models
• Failure Indications: Figure 1 – Notification Pop-Up
– Model Notifications
– Notification Pop-Up
– Red Highlighting
¨ Model tree
¨ Model geometry
Figure 2 – Notification Center
Figure 3 – Feature Highlighting
Figure 4 – Regeneration Manager
Understanding and Identifying Failures

When Creo Parametric regenerates a model, it recreates the model feature by feature, in the order
in which each feature was created, and according to the hierarchy of the parent/child relationships
between features. Occasionally during the model regeneration, a problem occurs that causes the
model to fail regeneration. Regeneration can fail for any of the following reasons:
• Invalid or impossible geometry.
• Missing or broken references between parent/child relationships.
• Missing models for an assembly.
The fact that a model fails regeneration is beneficial, as you would not want to hand off or continue
working with a problematic model.
Failure Indications
When a failure occurs, the system alerts you using several methods.
• The Model Notifications icon in the status bar appears red and indicates the number of failures.
• The Notification Pop-Up appears. The Notification Pop-Up displays at the bottom, right of the
graphics window by default, and displays the number of active notifications at the top. In Figure 2,
the Notification Pop-Up is displaying one active notification. You can open the notification center by
selecting any of the active notifications in the pop-up.
• The system highlights the failed features or components in the model tree. The failed items are
shown in bold red text and any children of the failed item are shown in standard red text. In Figure 3,
the Chamfer feature is the failing item, and the Round is a child of the failed Chamfer.
– If possible, the system also highlights failed geometry on the model in red, with child geometry
highlighted in blue.
Using the Notification Center
The Notification Center displays warnings and failures that have occurred within the model. It further
displays the model and feature to which that notification pertains.
From the Notification Center you can redefine the selected item, edit its references, or launch the
Regeneration Manager, among other actions. More information on the Notification Center is displayed
in another topic.
Using the Regeneration Manager
The Regeneration Manager can be used any time changes are made to a model to selectively
regenerate certain features or components.
However, the Regeneration Manager is particularly useful during a failure to identify failed features
or components. Once activated in a failure situation, the Regeneration Manager lists the failed items
and any children of the failed items.
You can then select any of the listed items and right-click to obtain feature information or reference
information for that item. This information can be useful in determining the cause of the failure, so you
can intelligently resolve the failure.
You can activate the Regeneration Manager in several ways:
• By selecting Regeneration Manager from the Regenerate types drop-down menu in the
Operations group.
• By clicking Regeneration Manager from the Notification Center.
Locating Failed Features or Components
Failed features or components are always identifiable within the Notification Center. However, you can
use these additional methods to locate failed features or components:
• Add the Feature Status column in the model tree. The parent failed feature or component displays
with a status of Failed.
• Search in the model by clicking Find .
– You can search for features or components that have Failed or Child of Failed regeneration
statuses.
– Once the failed items are located and selected, you can click Filter Tree from the Options
drop-down menu to display only the failed items in the model tree.
Working on Failed Models
Even when a model or assembly has failures, you can continue working normally, or Save or Erase the
model to resolve at a later time. However, it is recommended that you promptly resolve the failure
by following these three basic steps:
• Investigate the failure by obtaining feature information or reference information.
• Resolve the failure using tools such as Edit Dimensions or Edit Definition on the failed
feature(s), parent features, or any feature in the model.
– You can also click Suppress to remove failing feature(s) from the current regeneration, or
Delete to remove them from the model.
• Regenerate the model to obtain a successful regeneration.

Understanding the Notification Center
The Notification Center displays warnings and failures that have occurred within the model.
• Customize:
– Notification Pop-Up behavior
– Notification Severity
• Select a notification and perform an action to
resolve it.
• Filter the Notification Center:
– Warnings
– Errors Figure 1 – Notification Center Pop-Up
Figure 2 – Notification Types and Severity Figure 3 – Notification Center

Understanding the Notification Center
The Notification Center displays warnings and failures that have occurred within the model. When
there is a warning or failure, the status bar displays the Model Notifications icon. Any error in the
model causes the flag to display red, whereas if there are only warnings the flag displays yellow. This
icon also displays the quantity of warnings or failures in the model. Additionally, a Notification Pop-Up
displays at the lower, right corner of the graphics window and then dissolves. You can click Model
Notifications to display the Notification Pop-Up again at any time.
Customizing the Notification Pop-Up Behavior
You can customize the Notification Pop-Up behavior by clicking Options at the top, right of the
pop-up or by clicking File > Options and selecting the Notification Center category. The following
Notification Pop-Up behaviors are available:
• Show and dissolve – The Notification Pop-Up displays and then slowly dissolves away. This is the
default behavior.
• Show and stay – The Notification Pop-Up displays and does not dissolve.
• Do not show – The Notification Pop-Up does not display.
Configuring the Severity of Notifications
There is a default set of notification types that determines what triggers the Notification Pop-Up. These
are located in the Notification Center category of the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, and each
type has a default severity assigned to it. With few exceptions, each notification type can be set to
one of the following severity types:
• Do not show – Does not trigger a Notification Pop-Up.
• Warning with message – Triggers a warning notification type and displays a Notification Pop-Up.
• Warning – Triggers a warning notification type but does not display a Notification Pop-Up.
• Error – Triggers an error notification type and displays a Notification Pop-Up.
Using the Notification Center
You can open the Notification Center either by clicking Model Notifications from the status bar and
then either clicking the active notification or clicking Open Notification Center. You can also right-click
any feature or component in the model tree with a yellow triangle and select Notification Center .
Conversely, if you select a notification from the Notification Pop-Up, the system automatically performs
a locate in tree function to take you directly to the problematic component or feature in the model tree.
In the Notification Center, you can review the different warnings and errors displayed. Selecting the
warning or error in question enables you to perform context-sensitive actions to resolve the warning or
error.
Filtering the Notification Center
Within the Notification Center dialog box, there are two different filter types that you can configure:
• Display – There is both an Errors check box and a Warnings check box, enabling you to filter the
display of each notification type in the Notification Center.
• Group by – Enables you to specify how the notifications are grouped in the Notification Center.
The following options are available:
– Type – Groups the notifications by their type. For example, all regeneration errors in an assembly
are grouped together.
– Object – Groups the notifications by the object. For example, all warnings and errors related to
component CONNECTING_ROD.PRT are grouped together.
Analyzing Geometry Failures

Geometry failures are caused either by geometry that is invalid, or geometry that is impossible
to create.
• Invalid geometry examples:

– Round radii too small or too large
– Blend start points mismatch
– Sweep Radii Rule
– Extrude Through Until
Figure 1 – Round Radius Too Large
Figure 2 – Sweep Radius Section Radius

Comparison Figure 3 – Blend Start Points Mismatch

Analyzing Geometry Failures
When a feature fails due to invalid or impossible geometry, the failing feature and its children highlight
in the model tree. A message indicating that the feature geometry could not be constructed displays in
the feature information. Some examples of invalid or impossible geometry include:
• Round radii too small or too large – If a round radius becomes too large for the geometry that is being
rounded, then it fails. In Figure 1, the round in the left image previews properly because it is small
enough to fit on the geometry. In the right image, the round becomes too large for the size of the
geometry and cannot be created. Hence, the round preview is no longer available.
• Sweep radii – If a circular section of radius T is swept along a curved trajectory of radius R, the
radius R must be greater than or equal to radius T or else the resulting geometry overlaps, resulting
in invalid geometry. In Figure 2, the circular section is swept along the curved trajectory, resulting
in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the red cross-section lines in the FRONT view
show that the geometry does not overlap. Hence, it is valid and R ≥ T. In the right image; however,
the cross-section radius T has increased, as shown by the red cross-section lines. As a result, the
cross-section lines overlap, and thus the geometry overlaps. As a result, the rule of R≥T is not valid,
and the geometry cannot be created.
• Blend start points mismatch – If the start points between blend sections are mismatched by an angle
that is too large, the resulting geometry twists upon itself, which cannot occur. In Figure 3, the blend
section start points are mismatched by 90 degrees and the resulting geometry twists. If the start
points are mismatched by 180 degrees, the feature fails.
• Extrude Through Until – If a feature is extruded to a depth of Through Until, the feature must actually
pass through the selected reference. If it does not, the feature fails because the geometry cannot
be created.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Geometry Failures

Resolve_Failures \Part_Invalid-Geometry GEOM-FAILURE .PRT
Task 1: Resolve geometry failures using the Undo option.
3. In the model tree, select Chamfer 1 and click
4. Edit the chamfer D value to 2.
geometry.
• Notice the failed chamfer and its children are
indicated on the model and in the model tree.

Task 2: Resolve geometry failures by fixing the failing feature.
1. Click Saved Orientations and select FRONT.

2. In the model tree, select TRAJ_2 and click Edit
Dimensions .
Note: The smallest trajectory radius (R) is 2. The sweep diameter is currently 3, therefore T=1.5, and R ≥ T.
3. Edit the R2 dimension to 1, and click twice in the background to de-select all geometry.
Note: Editing the trajectory radius to 1 violates the R ≥ T rule.
4. Click Model Notifications from the status bar

and select the regeneration failure notification in
the Notification Pop-Up.
5. In the Notification Center, notice the sweep
feature is failing.
• Cursor over Sweep 1 and notice that the
reason for failure displays.
6. Click Regeneration Manager from the

Notification Center.
• Notice the children of the failing sweep
feature.
7. Click Cancel.
8. Select the notification again.

9. In the Notification Center, select Sweep 1.
• Click Edit Definition from the Notification
Center.
Orientation.
12. Edit the diameter from 3 to 2.
15. Click Saved Orientations and select FRONT.
• Notice the model has regenerated
successfully.

Task 3: Resolve geometry failures by fixing a non-failing feature.
Orientation.
2. In the model tree, select Sweep 1 and click Edit
Dimensions .
3. Edit the diameter from 2 to 3 and click twice in
the background to de-select all geometry.
4. Select TRAJ_2 and click Edit Dimensions .
5. Edit the R1 radius to 2 and click twice in the
background.
• Notice the model has regenerated
successfully.
Analyzing Open Section Failures

Open section failures occur when the open section extends beyond the solid geometry that
bounds it.
• Open section features must be bounded by

other solids.
• Failure message indicates when a part cannot
be intersected with a feature.
Figure 1 – Open Section Versus Closed Section
Figure 2 – Open Section Sketch Feature Figure 3 – Open Section Sketch Failure
Analyzing Open Section Failures

Most sketches for solid features should be closed sketches. However, when the design intent for a
sketch requires an open section, the resulting feature must be bounded by other solid geometry. In
Figure 2, the highlighted feature was extruded from an open-section sketch.
However, if the depth is extended further than the bounding solid geometry, the feature fails because it
is no longer bounded entirely by solid geometry, as shown in Figure 3.
When a feature fails due to an open section, the failing feature and its children highlight in the model
tree. A message indicating that the part could not be intersected with the feature displays in the
feature information.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Open Section Failures
Resolve_Failures \Part_Open-Section OPEN-SEC_FAIL.PRT
Task 1: Resolve an open-section failure in a part model.
2. In the model tree, select LEFT_TOOTH and click
3. Edit the height from 9 to 11.

geometry.
• Notice the failed feature and its children are
highlighted.
5. Click Model Notifications from the status bar

and select the regeneration failure notification in
the Notification Pop-Up.
6. In the Notification Center, select the failing
LEFT_TOOTH feature and click Feature
Information .
• Notice that the system could not intersect
the part with the feature, and the feature is
unattached.
7. In the Web browser, scroll down to Section
Data and notice that the feature was created
with an open section.
8. Scroll back up to the Children section for

RIGHT_TOOTH and click Feature Info .
9. Scroll down to Section Data and notice that this
feature does not indicate an open section.
10. Click Show Browser from the Status Bar to
minimize the Web browser.
11. In the model tree, select LEFT_TOOTH and click
• Notice that the open section is not visible
in the feature preview. The system cannot
create the open section protrusion beyond
the existing solid material.

Edit Internal Sketch.
types: .
14. Select Concentric from the Arc types
• Select the existing arc and sketch an arc to
close the section.
• Middle-click to complete the arc.
Orientation.
dashboard.
• Notice the model regenerates successfully.
Note: Alternatively, you could have resolved this
failure by increasing the height of the main cylinder to
prevent the open section from falling off the cylinder’s
edge.

Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures
Missing part reference failures occur when a parent feature is changed, and the child feature can
no longer find the parent's reference.
• Missing part reference failure examples include:
– Missing axes
– Missing references for rounds/chamfers
– Editing a sketch
¨ Replace sketched entities
¨ Replace Sketcher dimensions
• Old, missing references display.
Figure 1 – Sketch Feature Referencing Hole Axis
Figure 2 – Round Edges Figure 3 – Editing a Sketch

Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures
When you modify a parent feature, any children of that feature automatically update. This functionality
is highly beneficial and demonstrates Creo Parametric’s aptitude for efficiency. However, if a
modification to a parent feature results in the inability of a child feature to locate its parent's reference,
a failure occurs.
When a feature fails due to a missing reference, the failing feature and its children highlight in the model
tree. A message indicating that the feature references are missing displays in the feature information.
The following are common causes of missing part reference failures:
• Missing axes – In Figure 1, the slot sketch is dimensioned off of the hole axis. If the hole is deleted,
its axis is deleted, and therefore the dimensioning reference for the slot is deleted. Thus, the slot
feature now fails due to missing part references.
• Missing references for rounds or chamfers – Occurs if you delete or redefine a feature and remove
the edge that a round or chamfer uses. In Figure 2, the edges where the boss intersects the
remainder of the part are rounded. If the boss is deleted, the edges are therefore deleted, and the
rounds fail. Missing references can also occur if you insert a feature before the round or chamfer
that causes the edge to be removed. For example, if you cut material off of an extrude feature,
consequently cutting the edge off that a round references, the round fails.
• Editing a sketch – Can result in changed or removed edges and surfaces in a model. If those changed
or removed edges and surfaces are parents to other features, failures can occur. In Figure 3, the
sketched entity is being deleted because you want to modify the sketch. However, Creo Parametric
informs you that this entity is referenced by other entities. If you decide to continue and delete this
entity, the child features fail due to the removal of this reference.
Displaying Missing References
If you edit the definition of a failed feature, the old, missing references display to help you select
appropriate replacement references. This is also true for missing references in Sketcher, as shown
in Figure 3. You can see the previous location of the missing references and replace it with new
references.
Missing references can also be highlighted and displayed when investigating the failure in the
Reference Viewer.
Using the Replace Function
One way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketches is to use the Replace
function. The Replace function transfers references from an old entity to the new entity you have
created. Simply select the original entity that contains the references, click Replace from the mini
toolbar, and select the new entity to which you want to transfer the references.
You can also replace dimensions within Sketcher. When you select a dimension to replace, you must
create the new dimension. The new dimension maintains the original dimension's sketcher dimension
number (sd#), enabling any relations using the sketcher dimension to remain valid.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures

Resolve_Failures \Part_Missing-Reference MISSING-REF_FAIL.PRT
Task 1: Resolve a failure caused by missing part references.
2. In the model tree, select BASE_PROTRUSION
and click Edit Definition from the
mini-toolbar.
types: .
5. Select the right-side angled line, right-click, and
select Delete.
6. Review the warning message and click Yes.
7. Select 3-Point / Tangent End from the Arc
8. Sketch an arc in its place.
9. Middle-click to complete the arc.

dashboard.
• Notice that SIDE_ROUND and its children fail.
12. In the model tree, right-click SIDE_ROUND and

select Information > Feature Information.
• Notice that SIDE_ROUND is failing because
feature references are missing.
close the Web browser.
14. Select SIDE_ROUND and click Edit Definition .
• Select Set 2 and click in the Driving surface
collector to activate it.
• Notice the old, missing flat surface reference.
16. Spin the model and select the surface shown to
satisfy the missing reference.
• Notice the model regenerates successfully.
Task 2: Transfer references using the Replace function to avoid a missing references failure.
1. Select BASE_PROTRUSION and click Edit
Definition .
toolbar.
4. Select the right arc.
5. Click Mirror from the Editing group.
• Select the vertical centerline.

6. Select the left-side angled line and click
Replace from the mini toolbar.
• Select the newly mirrored arc.
• Click Yes in the Replace Entity dialog box.
7. Click OK .
Note: Using the Replace functionality, you have
transferred references to the arc entity, thus avoiding
a failure.
Analyzing Missing Component Failures

Missing component failures occur when Creo Parametric cannot locate all of the necessary
components to properly open an assembly.
• Reasons include:
– Component renamed on operating
system.
– Component renamed in Creo Parametric
without assembly in session.
– Component located in a different folder
on operating system.
Figure 1 – Folder View of Components
Figure 2 – Assembly and Model Tree

Analyzing Missing Component Failures
If an assembly fails regeneration due to a missing component, the failing component and its children
highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the component model is missing displays in the
feature information for that component. Reasons for missing components in assemblies include:
• The component was renamed in the operating system – Creo Parametric is not aware if the
component was renamed on the operating system. Consequently, the assembly containing this
renamed component fails because the assembly searches for the component using its original name.
• The component was renamed in Creo Parametric without the assembly in session – Again, if the
assembly containing the component is not in session at the time that one of its components is
renamed, the assembly continues to search for the original name. Thus, the assembly fails.
• The component was moved to a different folder – If a component is moved from its original
location, Creo Parametric continues to search for the component in its original location. Because
the component has been moved, the assembly fails. In Figure 1, component HANDLE.PRT has been
moved out of the Assy_Missing-Comp folder and placed into the Handle_Folder. Because the
assembly requires this component (as shown in the model tree in Figure 2), it fails when opened.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component Failures

Resolve_Failures \Assembly_Missing-Component MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM
Task 1: Resolve a missing component failure in an assembly.
Note: Notice a failure occurs when opening the assembly. Also notice the Message Log indicates that
the system can not retrieve model HANDLE.

3. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group.
• Click OK.
4. Click Working Directory from the Folder
Browser.
• Double-click Handle_Folder.
• Notice that this sub-folder contains
HANDLE.PRT, which is the cause of the failure.
5. Click Working Directory again.
6. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to open it.
• The assembly fails for the same reason.
7. Click Model Notifications from the status
bar and select the notification in the Notification
Pop-Up.
• Notice that the HANDLE component within
the JAW_SUB assembly has failed.
8. In the Notification Center, select component

HANDLE.PRT and click Feature Information .
• Notice the handle is failing because the model
is missing.

10. At the top of the model tree, type handle* and
press ENTER.
• Notice that HANDLE.PRT is located in
subassembly JAW_SUB.ASM, and that
JAW_SUB.ASM is also highlighted red.
11. Click Clear Search at the top of the model
tree.
12. Right-click HANDLE.PRT and select Retrieve

Missing Component .
• Double-click Handle_Folder.
• Select HANDLE.PRT, and click Open.
13. Press CTRL+G to regenerate the model.
• Notice it regenerates successfully and that
there are no more notifications.
15. Click Close .
16. Click Erase Not Displayed .
• Click OK.
17. Click Working Directory .
18. Double-click Handle_Folder.
19. Right-click HANDLE.PRT and select Cut.
20. Click Working Directory and click in the Web
browser to clear the selection of any files.
21. Right-click in the Web browser and select Paste.
22. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to verify that the failure has been resolved.

Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures
Missing Component Reference failures occur when you modify a component feature that removes
the reference used for its placement or its children's placement in an assembly.
• Failure displays as:

– Failed to regenerate component
placement.
– Feature references are missing.
Figure 1 – Parent/Child Relationship Graph
Figure 2 – Model Tree and Assembly
Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures

If a component's placement cannot be resolved in an assembly, Creo Parametric reports the failure in
the message window, indicating that some features failed to regenerate. Remember, this message
is displayed within Assembly mode, so the feature it is referring to is actually a failing component
in this context. Feature information on the failing component reveals messages indicating that the
regeneration of the component placement failed or that there are feature references missing. This
type of failure occurs when features in a component that have parents or children in an assembly are
modified . If the feature modification removes the reference used in the assembly, this causes either
the component or the component's children to fail placement.
In Figure 1, the Reference Viewer displays the parent/child relationships for the JAW_SLIDE.PRT
component in the assembly. Component LEADSCREW.PRT is a child to the jaw slide component. In
referring to the Reference Graph, LEADSCREW.PRT is assembled to surface id 238 of JAW_SLIDE.PRT.
As such, if the feature containing surface id 238 in JAW_SLIDE.PRT were modified, it could cause
the leadscrew to fail.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures
Resolve_Failures \Assembly_Missing-Reference JAW_SLIDE.PRT
Task 1: Resolve a missing component reference failure.
2. Select Hole 2 and click Edit Definition from
the mini toolbar.
• A leadscrew in the assembly mates to the flat
base surface of this hole.

• Select the Shape tab.
• Notice that the flat base surface of the hole
has been replaced by a drill point.

dashboard.
6. Click Working Directory from the Folder

Browser.
• Double-click MISSING-REFS.ASM to open it.
• Notice that the assembly fails to regenerate,
but still displays all components.
7. At the top of the model tree, click the drop-down
arrow next to the search field and select Failed
items.
• Notice that LEADSCREW.PRT within
JAW_SUB.ASM is failing along with failing
child component HANDLE.PRT.
8. In the search field, click Clear Search .
9. Right-click LEADSCREW.PRT and select

Information > Feature Information.
• Notice that LEADSCREW.PRT is failing due to
missing placement references.

11. Select JAW_SLIDE.PRT and click Activate
12. Query-select the Hole 2 surface and click Edit
Definition .
13. In the dashboard, click Rectangle Hole Profile
to remove the drill point.

15. In the model tree, select MISSING-REFS.ASM
toolbar.
• Notice that the model regenerates
successfully.
Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures

Invalid assembly constraint failures occur when constraints from one set conflict with constraints
from another set for a given component.
• Reasons include:
– Parent components modified or deleted.
– Features in parent components modified or
deleted.
• Resolve the failure:
– Change constraints.
– Modify features to satisfy constraints.
– Suppress or suspend component.
Figure 1 – Invalid Assembly Constraints
Figure 3 – Features Modified to Satisfy

Figure 2 – Coincident Constraints Disabled Constraints

Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures
Assembly constraints are based on component references. A component's references can change, and
therefore become invalid. This occurs if parent assembly components are modified or deleted, or if the
features in parent components are modified or deleted. In Figure 1, the ends of a rod are inserted into
holes on each block using Coincident constraints. The holes in the transparent block were then moved
outward, without modifying the holes on the other block. Consequently, the holes do not align, and it
becomes impossible for the rod ends to be inserted into both holes given the misalignment. The result
is that the rod constraints become invalid. A message indicating the failure to regenerate component
placement displays in the feature information for the failed component.
Fixing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures
When assembly constraints become invalid, you can perform one of the following:
• Change constraints – You can constrain the component differently so that all constraints are satisfied,
or you can disable constraints. Disabling constraints maintains the original references, but sets
the constraint inactive for regeneration purposes. In Figure 2, the Coincident constraints for the
rods were disabled. Notice that the components are still misaligned with respect to the holes. The
disabled constraints can always be re-enabled at a later time. You can also disable constraints
to test different assembly scenarios.
• Modify features to satisfy constraints – You can modify either the features in the failing component or
in the other components. In Figure 3, the holes in the other two components were moved outward
so all constraints are again satisfied.
• Suppress or suspend the failing component – You can then either modify the part or delete it from
the assembly at a later time.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures

Resolve_Failures \Assembly_Invalid-Constraint INVALID-CONST.ASM
Task 1: Resolve invalid assembly constraint failures.
Note: Our goal is to modify the rod spacing by modifying the hole spacing from 10 to 8 for the three
block-shaped components.
2. In the model tree, select JAW_FIXED.PRT and
click Activate from the mini toolbar.
3. Select the hole geometry on the right and click
• Edit the offset value from 10 to 8 and press
ENTER.

toolbar and select INVALID-CONST.ASM.
toolbar.
• Notice that the two ROD.PRT components
and their child assembly fails.

6. In the model tree, right-click the first ROD.PRT
and select Information > Feature Information.
• Notice that ROD.PRT failed to regenerate due
to component placement.
8. Select the first ROD.PRT and click Edit Definition
9. In the dashboard, notice that the constraint
STATUS is Constraints Invalid.
• Placement has failed due to conflicting
Coincident constraints.
• Select the third Coincident constraint and
clear the Constraint Enabled check box for
testing purposes.
dashboard.
• The first ROD.PRT now regenerates
successfully.
11. Select the second ROD.PRT and click Edit

Definition .
12. Notice the dashboard constraint STATUS .
• Select the third Coincident constraint and
clear the Constraint Enabled check box.

• The second ROD.PRT now regenerates
successfully, but JAW_SUB.ASM fails
because its hole spacing still needs to be
modified.

14. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM.
15. Select JAW_SLIDE.PRT and click Activate .
16. Select the lower right hole geometry edge and
click Edit Dimensions .
• Edit the offset value from 10 to 8 and press
ENTER.
17. Click Windows and select INVALID-CONST.

ASM.
19. Collapse JAW_SUB.ASM.
• Notice the model now regenerates
successfully.
20. Zoom in and notice the rod misalignment. Recall

that the Coincident constraints were disabled
at this end.
21. In the model tree, select HEAD_BLOCK.PRT and

click Activate .
22. Double-click the bottom right hole geometry
edge and edit its offset from 10 to 8 and press
ENTER.
23. Click Windows and select INVALID-CONST.

ASM.
• The hole spacing has been resolved for all
three block components.
Note: The Coincident constraints for this end
could now be re-enabled to essentially detect
misalignment in the future.

Recovering Models
You can recover models in the event of a system crash.
Dialog appears automatically upon restart:

• Retrieve
– Opens previous model
• Continue
– Starts a new Creo Parametric session
Figure 1 – Retrieval Dialog Box
Recovering Models
In the event of a system crash, Creo Parametric captures a snapshot of the models in session, as well
as any applied configuration settings.
Upon restarting Creo Parametric, you are prompted to either Retrieve the previous model or Continue
onto a new Creo Parametric session.
Selecting the Retrieve option is very useful for avoiding lost work on your models.

Using Creo Parametric Help
You can obtain help from various locations, either from Creo Parametric or from links on PTC's
Online Resources.
• PTC Creo Parametric Help

• PTC Learning Connector
• Command Search
• Online Resources
• File > Help
Figure 1 – Help Center
Figure 2 – PTC Learning Connector Figure 3 – Resource Center

The Help Center
The Help Center provides access to Creo Parametric's help system. Within the Help Center you can
find information on specific modeling topics, as well as tutorials, books, and quick links. You can access
the Help Center by clicking PTC Creo Parametric Help from the top of the interface.
The Help Center is subdivided into various Help Modules to help narrow your search regarding a given
question. Once the Help Module has been selected, you can further navigate within specific Books.
The Help Modules and Books, respectively, pertaining to the Introduction to Creo Parametric course are:
Help Module Book
Fundamentals Fundamentals
Part Modeling Part Modeling, Sketcher
Detailed Drawings Detailed Drawings
Assembly Design Assembly
Once the desired Help Module and Book have been selected, you further narrow your search for
information by browsing in sub-books.
You may also search documents, videos, and more within the Help Center by typing specified
keywords into the Search field. You can filter your search to specific Help Modules, as well as specific
sites, including PTC Learning Exchange, PTC User Community, and PTC YouTube channel.
PTC Learning Connector
PTC Learning Connector enables you to receive context-sensitive help specific to the feature or icon
you want help on. You can access Learning Connector by clicking PTC Learning Connector from
the top of the interface. This launches the PTC Learning Connector window next to the Creo Parametric
window. You can then click any icon or feature that you want to know more about in Creo Parametric.
After doing so, the PTC Learning Connector window displays the following information:
• A quick, high-level overview video tutorial about that feature (if one is available).
• Links to context-sensitive PTC University eLearning topics.
• Context-sensitive information in the Help Center.
• Context-sensitive information from the Knowledge Base.
Note: To access PTC Learning Connector, your company must have purchased a subscription to the PTC
University eLearning library.
Command Search
You can activate the command search by clicking Command Search from the top of the interface.
This activates the Command Search field, which enables you to type commands. As you begin typing a
command, a list appears and dynamically filters results as you type.
When you cursor over any of the list’s results, the system locates and highlights the command in the
ribbon. If you select any of the list’s results, the command starts.
Online Resources
Click File > Help > Online Resources to launch the Resource Center, as shown in Figure 3. The Resource
Center also launches by default when you launch PTC Creo Parametric. Links to online resources
include:
• Seeing what is new in PTC Creo 4.0.
• Getting Started tutorials for new users of Creo 4.0.
• Access to Learning Exchange free tutorials.
• Access to the Global Support portal.
Additional Resources
The following additional options are available from the File > Help menu:
• Search Online Knowledge Base – Enables you to search PTC’s online knowledge base.
• Log Support Case – Enables you to log a support case to PTC Technical Support for any issues.
• Reference – Enables you to view various reference information, including what’s new for your version
of Creo Parametric as well as all config.pro options available in the software.
Obtaining System Information
Clicking File > Help > System Information launches an Information Window dialog box. This dialog
box provides the following information:
• License Information – Provides important licensing information that you may find useful if you need
to log a call with PTC Technical Support.
• Configured Option Modules – Displays which Creo Parametric optional license extensions are being
used.
• Machine Information – Provides information about the machine on which Creo Parametric is running.
• Installation Directories and Command Information – Provides information about Creo Parametric
software installation directories.
• Configuration Information – Provides information about which config.pro files are read.
You can also view information regarding the specific version of Creo Parametric you are running by
clicking File > Help > About PTC Creo Parametric. In the dialog box that displays, you can view the Creo
Parametric date code and your company’s Service Contract Number (SCN). If you need to log a case
with PTC Technical Support, you need the SCN.
PROCEDURE - Using Creo Parametric Help
Interface\Help HELP.PRT
Task 1: Use the Command Search functionality with Learning Connector.
2. Click PTC Learning Connector to display the
PTC Learning Connector dialog box.
• Log into your eLearning account, if necessary.
Note: Your company must have a PTC University
eLearning subscription to access Learning
Connector.
3. In Creo Parametric, click Command Search
to enable it.
4. In the Command Search field, type ble and
notice that the commands dynamically filter
down.
5. Cursor over Blend and notice its location in the
Shapes group.
6. Click Blend to start the tool.
7. In the PTC Learning Connector dialog box,
notice that the eLearning topics that are
recommended all relate to the Blend tool.
8. Click Cancel Feature from the dashboard.
9. Select Profile Rib from the Rib types

10. Notice the eLearning topic available for the
profile rib.
11. Click Cancel Feature .

Task 2: Use the Help Center to browse for additional help.
1. Click PTC Creo Parametric Help .

2. The Help Center launches as a new tab in your
default Web browser.
3. In the Help Center, select Part Modeling to
expand it.
• Select Part Modeling to expand it.
• Select Engineering Features to expand it.
• Select Rib to expand it.
• Select Profile Rib to expand it.
• Click About the Profile Rib Feature.
4. Scroll through the information on the Profile Rib
feature.
5. In the Help Center Search field, type line

tangent and click Search.
6. Notice that the system performs an internet
search on help.ptc.com, and displays a list of
results based on the search criteria specified.
7. In the list of results, click To Create a Line
Segment Tangent to Two Entities and read the
associated information.
8. Close the Help Center tab in the Web browser.
Task 3: Start to log a case through PTC’s Case Logger.
1. Click File > Help > Log Support Case.
2. Log into your PTC account.
3. In the Web browser, verify your customer
contact information and click Next.
4. Notice that you can now provide a brief
description of your issue, the product, impact,
product details, and so on.
Note: You would continue adding the necessary
information and continue on to complete logging the
case. When the case is logged, you receive a case
number and a representative from PTC Technical
Support contacts you to help resolve your case.

Task 4: Use the Resource Center to view available beginner videos.
1. Click File > Help > Online Resources.
2. In the Resource Center, click in the Getting
Started panel.
• Click Beginners Tutorials .
• Scroll through the different tutorials that are
available.
• Close the Resource Center.
Task 5: Use System Information Help.

1. Click File > Help > System Information. Notice the information available under the License
Information, Configured Option Modules, and Machine Information sections.
• Click Close.

Module 26
Creating and Using Component Interfaces

Understanding Component Interfaces
Component interface features contain stored constraints and references used to assemble
components more efficiently.
Elements of a component interface:
• Interface Name
• Interface Template
• Interface Type: Placing or Receiving
Figure 1 – Constraints and References
• Constraints and References
on the Model
Figure 2 – Constraints and References Figure 3 – Constraints and References

in the Model Tree in the Dialog Box
Understanding Component Interfaces
Component interfaces are user-defined sets of constraints stored in a model and used to quickly
place components during assembly operations. After a component interface is defined, you can
reuse it during any assembly operation.
You can add Component Interface features to part or assembly models. Like any feature, component
interfaces appear in the model tree, have their own identifying icon, and can be edited.
Elements of a Component Interface
A unique set of elements are used to define a component interface.
• Interface Name – Used to identify and select the component interface.
• Interface Template – Used to create interfaces with mechanism connection sets.
• Placement/Receiving Interface – Determines if the component interface is used for placing the
component or receiving another component.
• The Either type interface can be used for either placing or receiving.
Figure 4 – Elements
• Constraints – Each component interface contains a set of predefined constraints that are applied
when using the interface.
• References – Each component interface contains selected geometry, corresponding to each
constraint in the interface.
Figure 5 – Constraints and References

• Dependent – Select Dependent to ensure that Offset types (Coincident, Orient, Offset) and
orientations (Mate, Align) cannot be changed.
Note: If you delete a component interface, any components referencing the interface fail to regenerate and
you are required to select new references.
Creating a Component Interface
Component interfaces are created explicitly using the Component Interface dialog box or on-the-fly by
saving a component's existing set of assembly constraints.
Figure 6 – Dialog Box
Figure 7 – Save as Interface

Placing Components using Component Interfaces
When placing a component containing an interface, the placement dashboard presents you with the
following placement options:
• Interface to Geom – Place a component containing an interface in an assembly without a receiving
interface. You are required to select matching references from the assembly.
Figure 8 – Interface to Geom

• Interface to Interface – Place a component containing an interface in an assembly containing
a receiving interface. To position components, you click one or more white circles. Each circle
represents a receiving interface.
Figure 9 – Interface to Interface

• Multiple Interfaces – When the component being placed contains multiple component interfaces,
the default is used unless you select another interface from the drop-down list.
Figure 10 – Multiple Interfaces

• Place Manually – Click Place Manually from the dashboard to assemble a component without
using an existing interface.
Figure 11 – Place Manually
Using a Placing Component Interface

You use a Placing Component interface when inserting a component into an assembly.
Placing Component Interface:
• Interface Name
• Component Constraints
• Component References
Figure 1 – Component Interface Dialog Box
Figure 2 – Placing Interface in the Model Tree Figure 3 – References and Constraints
Understanding Placing Interfaces
You use Placing Component interfaces to save constraints and associated references that you
typically use to assemble a component. Each time you assemble that component, the constraints and
references of the component interface are preselected, enabling a more efficient assembly process.
These interfaces are typically added to standard hardware components so that you can easily and
quickly place them in assemblies.
The Either type interface can also be used as a Placing interface. The Either type interface behaves as a
Placing interface when it is inserted into an assembly. The Either type also behaves as a Receiving
interface when components are added to it. While flexible, this behavior may or may not meet your
needs.
Placing Interface Feature Location
By default, both the Placing and Either component interfaces are created in the Interfaces folder,
found in the footer of the model tree. To move an interface from the footer, select it in the model
tree, right-click, and select Move from footer.
Designate Default
If a model contains more than one Placing or Either interface, the first one created is the default
interface. The default interface is the interface first used when the component is placed in an assembly.
You can select the other interfaces of a component from the drop-down list in the assembly dashboard.
To designate another interface as the default, select the feature in the model tree, right-click, and
select Set Default.
Using a Placing Interface
When you assemble a component with a Placing interface in a model that does not contain receiving
interfaces, the constraints and associated references of the component interface are automatically
selected. This is an Interface to Geometry assembly, and you are only required to select corresponding
reference geometry from the assembly model.
If a component contains multiple interfaces, select the interface you would like to use from the
interface list in the assembly dashboard.
If you do not want to use any of a component's interfaces, select Place Manually from the dashboard.
PROCEDURE - Using a Placing Component Interface

Assembly\Interface_Placing PLACING_BOLT .PRT
Task 1: Create a Placing Component interface.
Tree Filters .
Placement folder check box and click OK.
4. Click Component Interface from the Model
Intent group.
• Type insert_mate as the Interface Name and
press ENTER.
• Notice the Interface Template drop-down list
contains only Mechanism connection sets.
• Select Placing from the Placement/Receiving
Interface drop-down list.
Note: At any time, you can edit the interface properties defined by clicking the interface name in the
upper-left corner of the dialog box.
5. Select the cylindrical surface of PLACING_
BOLT .PRT as an Insert reference.
6. Select the bottom of the bolt head as a Mate
reference.
7. Click Apply from the COMPONENT
INTERFACE dialog box.
Note: Both Coincident constraints were created using the Automatic option. You can select specific
constraint types from the Constraint Type drop-down list.

8. In the model tree, expand the Footer and
INTERFACES nodes. Observe the INSERT_MATE
feature.
9. Expand the INSERT_MATE feature and notice
the feature’s listed constraints.
Task 2: Insert a component using its placing interface.
1. Click Open . Select PLACING_INTF.ASM and click Open.

2. Click Assemble from the Component group.
3. In the Open dialog box, select PLACING_BOLT .PRT and click Open.
Note: In the ribbon, notice that because PLACING_BOLT .PRT contains a Component interface, the
placement method has defaulted to Place Using Interface .
4. Select a surface in the upper-left hole in
PLACING_INTF.PRT as the assembly's first
Coincident reference.
5. Select the top surface of PLACING_INTF.PRT as

the assembly's second Coincident reference.
7. Using the previous steps, place three additional

bolts into the assembly.

Using a Receiving Component Interface
You use a Receiving type component interface to receive and automatically place components
containing Placing interfaces.
Receiving component interfaces:

• Automatic Interface to Interface assembly.
• Select multiple receiving interfaces to place multiple components.
Figure 1 – Viewing Receiving Interfaces
Using a Receiving Component Interface

Receiving type interfaces automatically receive and position components containing Placing or Either
type interfaces.
You typically add Receiving interfaces to components that routinely have models assembled to
them that contain component interfaces. These include models with holes that receive bolts, bolts
that receive nuts, washers, and so on.
The Either type interface can also be used as a Receiving interface. The Either type interface behaves
as a Receiving interface when components are assembled to it. The Either type interface behaves as
a Placing interface when inserted into an assembly. While flexible, this behavior may or may not
meet your needs.
Receiving Interface Feature Location
By default, Receiving component interfaces are placed in the model tree along with other features
and components. Unlike Placing interfaces, you do not create them in the footer of the model tree. To
move a Receiving interface to the footer, right-click it in the model tree and select Move to footer.
Designate Default
Unlike Placing or Either type interfaces, you cannot designate a Receiving interface as a default
component interface. This is because all receiving interfaces are active when you place a component.
Using Receiving Interfaces
When you insert a component with a Placing or Either type interface into an assembly with a Receiving
interface, Creo Parametric defaults to the Interface To Interface assembly method. Small white circles
appear in the assembly. Each white circle represents a Receiving interface in the assembly. Select one
or more of the white circles to place a component at that interface location.
If a component being assembled does not contain a Placing or Either interface, the Receiving interface
is not recognized and cannot be referenced.
If you do not want to use the Receiving interface, edit the assembly method to Interface To Geom and
select assembly references as required.
If you do not want to use interfaces for assembly, click Place Manually from the dashboard.

PROCEDURE - Using a Receiving Component Interface
Assembly\Interface_Receiving RECEIVE_INTF.ASM
Task 1: Create a Receiving Component interface.
2. Open RECEIVE_INTF.PRT from the model tree.
4. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Placement folder check box and click OK.
5. Click Component Interface from the Model
Intent group.
• Type insert_mate_hex as the Interface Name
and press ENTER.
• Select Receiving from the Placement/
Receiving Interface drop-down list.
• Click Yes in the Remove Default warning
dialog box.
Note: You receive the Remove Default warning because Receiving Component interfaces cannot be set
to default.
6. Select the cylindrical surface of the hole in the
lower-left corner of RECEIVE_INTF.PRT as an
Insert reference.
7. Select the top surface of the model as a
Note: Both Coincident constraints were created using the Automatic option. You can select specific
constraint types from the Constraint Type drop-down list.
9. In the model tree, expand the INSERT_MATE_
HEX feature.
Note: Notice that the Receiving Component interfaces
are not located in the model footer.
10. In the model tree, select the INSERT_MATE_HEX component interface and click Pattern
11. Click OK to complete the Reference pattern.
12. Click Close .
Task 2: Insert a component using an Interface to Interface placement.

2. In the Open dialog box, select RECEIVE_BOLT .PRT and click Open.

3. You immediately notice eight small yellow
diamonds, each representing a Receiving
Component interface.
Place the component three times by clicking the
interfaces shown in the figure.
4. In the dashboard, select INSERT_MATE_OFFSET from the Component Interface drop-down list.
This selection changes the interface used to place the highlighted component.
Note: The RECEIVE_BOLT .PRT model contains two Component Interfaces, INSERT_MATE and
INSERT_MATE_OFFSET. The INSERT_MATE interface is the default interface.
5. Click the fourth interface shown.
This component is also placed using the selected
INSERT_MATE_OFFSET interface.
Creating a Component Interface Using the Save as Interface Dialog Box

You can save assembly constraints and references to a component interface on-the-fly.
Right-Click > Save as Interface:
• Efficient
• Reuse
• Creates the Either type
interface
Figure 1 – Save as Interface Dialog Box

Creating a Component Interface Using the Save as Interface Dialog Box
You can save the constraints and references used to assemble a component to a component interface
feature using the Save as Interface dialog box.
With the assembly dashboard open, right-click in the graphics window and select Save as Interface.
This opens the Save as Interface dialog box, enabling you to create the Either type interface.
You can save interfaces by editing the definition of a component and then saving its interface during
the initial assembly process, after all constraints and references have been defined, or at a later time.
Save as Interface Type
An interface saved using the Save as Interface dialog box is created as an Either type interface. If you
need to change it to a Placing or Receiving interface, you can edit the definition of the interface to do so.
PROCEDURE - Creating a Component Interface Using the Save as Interface

Dialog Box
Assembly\Interface_Save-As SAVE_AS_INTF.ASM
Task 1: Insert a component and save the interface.
3. In the Open dialog box, select INTF_CAP.PRT
and click Open.
4. Select a cylindrical surface on INTF_CAP.PRT
and a surface in the lower-left hole of
SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT to create a Coincident
constraint.
5. Drag INTF_CAP.PRT up and out of
SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT, if required.
6. Select the small surface at the bottom of the
sphere-shaped head of INTF_CAP.PRT and the
top surface of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT to create a
Coincident constraint.
7. Right-click in the graphics window and select Save as Interface.

8. Type insert_mate in the Name field of the dialog box and click OK.
Task 2: Insert the cap model again using the new component interface.
1. Click Assemble .
2. In the Open dialog box, select INTF_CAP.PRT and click Open.
3. Using the newly created component
interface, select the lower-right hole in
SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT as the assembly's first
4. Select the top of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT as the
assembly's second Coincident reference.

Task 3: Edit the interface to a Placing type component interface.
1. Open the topmost INTF_CAP.PRT from the model tree.
2. In the model tree, expand the Footer and INTERFACES nodes.
3. Edit the definition of INSERT_MATE.
4. Click INSERT_MATE in the upper-left corner of
the COMPONENT INTERFACE dialog box.
5. Select Placing from the Placement/Receiving
Interface drop-down list.
Auto Placing Components

You can position components containing component interfaces in an assembly by using Auto Place.
Auto Place dialog box:

• Screen point
• Search scope
• Locations found
• Locations selected
• Preferences
Figure 1 – Auto Place Button
Figure 2 – Viewing Different Found Locations Figure 3 – Auto Place Dialog Box
Understanding Auto Place

The Auto Place functionality in Creo Parametric positions a component containing a component
interface into an assembly based on a selected screen point location and search scope.
Auto Place Workflows
There are two basic workflows you can follow when positioning components using Auto Place.
• Before selecting any references, click Auto Place from the assembly dashboard. This opens the Auto
Place dialog box enabling you to do the following:
– Select a screen point for Creo Parametric to begin searching for a suitable assembly location.
– Select components limiting the search scope for Creo Parametric to use when searching for a
suitable assembly location.
– After locating the correct position(s), use Add Item to select the position. You can select
multiple locations for assembly.
• Preselect components to limit the search scope of the Auto Place position search. In this case, as
soon as you insert a component, the Auto Place dialog box opens with the search scope model(s)
already listed.
– Select a screen point for Creo Parametric to begin searching for a suitable assembly location.
– The search scope is already defined with this workflow.
– After locating the correct position(s), use Add Item to select the position. You can select
multiple locations for assembly.
Auto Place Preferences
You can adjust placement search preferences at any time during the operation.
• You can adjust the maximum number of locations. By default, Creo Parametric searches for and
finds five possible assembly locations. Increasing this amount enables you to find more assembly
locations, but it also slows down the search process.
• You can also increase or decrease the search area around the selected screen point to effect
performance as well as the number of locations found.
Best Practices
With all but the smallest assemblies, it is important to limit the search scope to a component or two. An
assembly-wide search scope increases search time and may not provide good results.
PROCEDURE - Auto Placing Components

Assembly\Auto-Place AUTO-PLACE.ASM
Task 1: Place a component using Auto Place.
3. Select BOLT _6-20.PRT and click Open.
4. Click Auto Place from the dashboard and click
the left hole to auto place the component.
5. In the Auto Place dialog box, select each of

the locations found to identify the correct
placement location.
6. Select the correct location and click Add Item
.
• Click Close.

Task 2: Auto place additional components, limiting the search scope to a selected component.
1. Select GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT.
2. Click Assemble , select BOLT _6-20.PRT, and click Open.
Note: Because GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT was preselected, the Auto Place dialog box automatically
opens, listing the first five potential placement locations found in the part.
3. In the Auto Place dialog box, select and review
each of the locations found.
Note: Notice that GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT is
specified in the Auto Place dialog box as an item to
define the search scope.
4. Click Preferences.
5. Edit the Max. number of locations to 20.
6. Begin selecting each location starting at number
6. Stop when you have identified the location
that positions the bolt in either the center or
right-side hole shown in the figure.
7. Click Add Item .
8. Review the remaining locations to find the bolt

positioned in the remaining hole.
9. Click Add Item .
10. Click Close.

Copying and Pasting Components
You can copy and then paste a component, its placement constraints, and its references.
• Use CTRL+C and CTRL+V.

• Select assembly references.
• Paste components multiple times.
Figure 2 – Pasting a Second Instance

Figure 1 – Copy and Pasting a Component of the Component
Copying and Pasting Components

You can copy and then paste components within the current assembly or into other assemblies. One of
the most efficient methods for placing a component multiple times within an assembly is to use Copy
and Paste. This is also an efficient method for copying a component from one assembly into another.
When you copy a component, the constraints and references used to place it are also copied. When
you paste the component into an assembly, you also paste the constraints and references with it,
enabling you to place the component by selecting corresponding assembly references.
Copy and Paste Component Workflow
Use the following workflow to copy and paste components within an assembly.
• Select the component to copy and either click Copy from the Operations group or use the
keyboard shortcut CTRL+C to copy it.
• Paste the component into the desired assembly by clicking Paste from the Operations group
or use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+V. An unconstrained copy of the component appears in the
graphics window.
• Select assembly references corresponding to those in the component.
Best Practices
Copy and Paste is a very efficient method to use when copying a single component in an assembly
multiple times. Depending on your situation, the Repeat functionality may be even more efficient.

PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Components
Component_Operations\Copy_Paste COPY_PASTE.ASM
Task 1: Copy and paste a component within the assembly.
2. Select BOLT _6-25.PRT.
3. Press CTRL+C to copy the component.
4. Press CTRL+V to paste the component.
5. Select a surface in the middle hole as the
assembly's first Coincident reference.
6. Select the front surface as the assembly's

second Coincident reference.
8. Press CTRL+V again to paste a second instance

of the bolt.
9. Select a surface in the far-right hole as the
assembly's first Coincident reference.

Task 2: Copy and paste a component to another assembly.
1. Click Open and double-click CARBURETOR.

ASM to open the assembly.
2. Press CTRL+V to paste the component into the
new assembly.
3. Drag the copied bolt to the position shown in
the figure.
4. Select a surface in the left hole as the assembly's
first Coincident reference.

Repeating Component Placement

You can use the Repeat Component tool to place a component multiple times within an assembly.
• Select component, right-click and select Repeat.
– Select which assembly refs are variable.
– Place component by selecting new refs.
– Multiple occurrences, if desired.
• Repeat constraints in model tree, too.
– One component at a time.
Figure 1 – Repeating Constraint Placement Figure 2 – Repeat Component Dialog Box

Repeating Component Placement
You can use the Repeat Component dialog box to quickly place a component multiple times
throughout an assembly. To open the Repeat Component dialog box, select the component you want
to repeat, then right-click the component and select Repeat .
You can also repeat the placement of a component one time by right-clicking one or more of its
constraints in the model tree and then selecting Repeat .
Using the Repeat Component Dialog Box
The Repeat Component dialog box contains the following elements used to repeat the placement
of a component:
• Component – The component selected prior to opening the Repeat Component dialog box is listed
in the Component section of the dialog box.
In the dialog box, you can leave the component selected or select a different component to be
repeated.
Note: A component must be preselected or the Repeat menu option is grayed out and unavailable.
• Variable assembly references – This section lists all constraints used to place the selected
component. Select the constraint that will be different for each repeated component placement.
For example, when repeating the placement of a bolt into various holes in a block, you select only
the cylindrical Coincident constraint, not the planar Coincident constraint. This is because the bolt will
be inserted into different holes, but the head of the bolt will always mate to the same surface.
If more than one constraint will vary, press CTRL and select each varying constraint.
• Place component – To repeat a component's placement, click Add after selecting constraints to vary.
As you select new assembly references, components are added to the assembly and listed in the
Place component section.
To remove a repeated component, select it in the list and click Remove.
Repeat using the Model Tree
To repeat the placement of a component using the model tree, expand the component’s placement
and constraint set nodes. In the constraint set node, right-click the constraint(s) you wish to repeat and
click Repeat . This opens the component placement dashboard and displays the new component in
the graphics window, enabling you to select required references for the component’s placement.
Unlike the Repeat Component dialog box that enables you to repeat the placement of a component
multiple times, this technique only enables you to repeat placement one component at a time.
PROCEDURE - Repeating Component Placement

Component_Operations\Repeat REPEAT.ASM
Task 1: Repeat the placement of a component and vary a single reference.
Tree Filters .
Placement folder check box and click OK.
4. In the model tree, right-click BOLT _5-18.PRT
and click Repeat .
5. In the Variable assembly references section of
the Repeat Component dialog box, select the
first Coincident reference and click Add.
6. Reorient the assembly, as necessary, to select
the three inside hole surfaces.
7. Click OK in the Repeat Component dialog box
to complete the assembly of the three bolts.

Task 2: Repeat the placement of a component and vary two references.
1. In the model tree, right-click the last instance of
BOLT _6-25.PRT and click Repeat .
2. In the Variable assembly references section of
the Repeat Component dialog box, select both
Coincident references and click Add.
3. Reorient the assembly and select the inner
hole surface as the first Coincident constraint
reference and the front surface as the second
Coincident constraint reference.
4. Click OK in the Repeat Component dialog box.
Task 3: Repeat the placement of another component using the model tree.
1. In the model tree, expand the first instance of BOLT _6-25.PRT.
2. Expand the Placement node and the Set25 node.
3. Right-click the top Coincident constraint and select Repeat .
4. Select the cylindrical surface of the
hole located at the upper-center of
GEARBOX_REAR_REPEAT.PRT, as shown in the
figure.
Note: Using this method, you can only repeat one
component at a time.

Module 27
Creating and Using Flexible Components

Adding Flexibility to a Component
Flexibility enables selected component items to vary, or “flex,” within an assembly.
Variable Items:
• Dimensions
• Features
• Parameters
• Surface Finish
• Geometric Tolerances
• Components
Figure 1 – Prepare Varied Items
Figure 2 – Free State Contact Figure 3 – Compressed Contact in Assembly
Understanding Flexibility
Components such as springs, clips, rubber washers all typically vary geometrically in their assembled
condition. These are called flexible components. A spring, for example, can have various compression
lengths throughout an assembly.
Creo Parametric enables you to add flexibility to a component by changing the value of selected
component items. Note that this change is only within the assembly; the part remains unaltered. You
can select dimensions, parameters, surface finishes, geometric tolerances, features, and components
as flexible items and vary their values during assembly.
Flexible Items
To open the Flexibility: Prepare Varied Items dialog box, click File > Prepare > Model Properties and
click change in the Flexible row of the Tools section of the Model Properties dialog box. Flexible items
are selected in the model and added to the Flexibility dialog box.
• Dimensions – You can select any model dimension as a flexible item. When the component is
placed in an assembly, you are given the option to vary one, none, or all of the flexible dimension
values in the dialog box.
• Geometric Tolerances – You can vary the value of geometric tolerances to ensure that a component
is not flexed to the breaking point.
• Parameters – You can designate a parameter as flexible and vary the value upon assembly. This is a
powerful tool when used in conjunction with relations to define known assembly states.
• Surface Finish – You can vary the value of a flexible Surface Finish symbol within an assembly to
meet the varying finish conditions at different locations within an assembly.
• Features – You can suppress and resume flexible features within an assembly.
• Components – You can suppress and resume components within an assembly. You only see the
Components tab when adding flexibility to an assembly model.

Best Practices
You should always test your model to ensure that it will regenerate successfully using the same
dimension values and feature statuses that are used when it is placed in an assembly as a flexible
component. To test the model, edit the value and status of all flexible items to ensure they regenerate
successfully at those values.
PROCEDURE - Adding Flexibility to a Component

Component_Operations\Flexible_Adding ADDING_FLEX.PRT
Task 1: Add a flexible dimension.
3. In the Tools section, click change in the Flexible row.
4. In the Flexibility dialog box, select the
Dimensions tab, if necessary.
5. In the model tree, select Extrude 1.
6. Select the 60 degree dimension.
7. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
8. Notice the dimension is added to the list of
variable dimensions.
Task 2: Add a flexible feature.

1. In the Flexibility dialog box, select the Features
tab.
2. Select the topmost section of the part.
3. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
4. Notice the extrude feature is added to the list of
variable features.
5. Click OK in the Flexibility dialog box.
6. In the Tools section, click Expand in the Flexible row to verify that one flexible dimension and
one flexible feature has been defined.
7. Click Close.

Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly
When placing a flexible component, you can use or ignore the flexible definition.
• Confirm the use of flexible definition.

• Type values for variable items.
• Assemble the component.
Figure 1 – Confirming Use of Flexible Definition
Figure 2 – Typing Values for Variable Definition Figure 3 – Specifying Feature Status
Placing Flexible Components

Placing a flexible component is not much different than placing a non-flexible component. There are
just two additional steps added to the process.
• Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box to confirm that you want to use the flexibility defined in the
component.
• In the Varied Items dialog box for the component, type new values for the items you want to make
flexible.
Note: If you do not want to place a component in its flexible state, click No in the Confirm dialog box and
continue with the assembly as normal.
Flexible Items
You are not required to type a new value for every item in the Varied Items dialog box. You should only
type values that are required to define flexibility for the instance being placed. A flexible component
used several times within an assembly may have a different flexible definition each time it is used.
Flexible Values
Except for features, the flexible value for any item is, by default, defined using the By value method, in
which you type a new value in the New Value field of the dialog box.
For flexible dimensions, the following are five additional measurement-based methods that can be
used to define the flexible value:
• Curve Length – Measures a curve length to define the flexible dimension value.
• Distance – Measures a distance between two entities to define the flexible dimension value.
• Angle – Measures an angle to define the flexible dimension value.
• Area – Measures a surface area to define the flexible dimension value.
• Diameter – Measures the diameter to define the flexible dimension value.
Flexible features are not varied using a flexible value. Instead, they have a flexible status that you can
edit to either Resumed or Suppressed.

PROCEDURE - Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly
Component_Operations\Flexible_Placing PLACING_FLEX.ASM
Task 1: Add a flexible part to an assembly.
2. Click Assemble from the Component group, select FLEX_CONTACT .PRT, and click Open.
3. Click Yes to confirm using the model’s predefined flexibility.
4. Select the Dimensions tab in the Varied Items
dialog box, if necessary.
5. Click in the New Value field for the ang
dimension, and type 90.
6. Select the Features tab and then click in the
New Status field. Select Suppressed from the
drop-down menu.
7. Click Yes from the Warning prompt, and OK to
close the Varied Items dialog box.
8. Select the radial surface at the bottom of the connector slot as the assembly's Coincident
reference.
9. Select the surface in the connector slot as the assembly's Coincident reference.
10. Select the top surface of the connector as the assembly's Parallel reference.
Task 2: Pattern the contact placement and verify the correct placement.
1. In the model tree, select FLEX_CONTACT .PRT
and click Pattern from the mini toolbar.
2. Click OK to create the Reference pattern.
3. Activate section A.
4. Verify the correct placement of FLEX_
CONTACT .PRT.
Task 3: Edit the free state contact part and update the connector assembly.
1. In the model tree, expand the pattern, then open any FLEX_CONTACT .PRT.

2. Edit Extrude 1.
3. Edit the 4 dimension to 8 and press ENTER.
geometry.
return to the assembly.
Exercise 1: Using Measure to Define a Flexible Dimension

Objectives
• Use a measured distance to define a flexible dimension.
• Assemble part components using flexible components.
Scenario
To create real life figures for the Marketing Department’s brochures, you are assigned to assemble the
drill’s clutch using flexible components. First, define the clutch springs as flexible components. Then,
assemble the clutch springs into the clutch assembly.
Component_Operations\Flexible_Dimension CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT
Task 1: Define the component flexibility.
.
2. Edit the datum point SPRING_LENGTH.
3. Edit the value of the SPRING_LENGTH from 18
to 22 and click twice in the graphics window to
update the geometry.
Note: The length of the spring is controlled by this
single dimension, reflecting the design intent of
the spring. Now that you have tested the extended
length, you know that this model can easily be
used as a flexible component.

select CLUTCH.ASM, and click Open.
6. Click Assemble from the Component group,
select CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT, and click Open.
7. Click Complete Component to leave the
spring packaged.
8. In the model tree, right-click CLUTCH_SPRING.
PRT and select Make Flexible > Make Flexible.
• Enable the display of Point Tag Display
from the Show group.
• Select the Component Placement tab.
10. In the graphics window, select datum point
PNT1.
11. Select the 18 dimension in the graphics window,
Task 2: Assemble the first CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT.
1. Orient to the TOP view orientation.
• Notice that the distance between the holes for SPRING1 and SPRING 2 points are different.

2. Edit the Method from By value to Distance in the Varied Items dialog box.
3. To measure the distance between them, press CTRL and select both SPRING1 datum points.
Note: This measured value, currently 18, now determines the length of this spring instance, no matter
what the distance between the points changes to.
4. Click OK from the Distance dialog box.
Note: Using the measurement method of defining the flexible value of the spring length ensures that
the spring length updates according to changes in the assembly.
5. Click OK from the Varied Items dialog box.
6. Use the 3D Dragger to move the component to the approximate position shown below.
7. Select datum point PNT1 on CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and the left datum point SPRING1 on
CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT to create a Coincident constraint.
8. Reorient the assembly and rotate the spring slightly away from the assembly, as shown below.
9. Reorient to the TOP view orientation.

10. Select datum point PNT2 on CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and the right datum point SPRING1 on
CLUTCH_SHOE_R.PRT to create the Coincident constraint.
11. Right-click and select Fix Constraint to fully constrain the spring.
Task 3: Assemble the second clutch spring.
1. Click Assemble , select CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT, and click Open.

2. Click Complete Component to leave the spring packaged.
3. In the model tree, right-click the newly packaged CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and select Make
Flexible > Make Flexible.
4. In the graphics window, select datum point PNT1.
5. Select the 18 dimension in the graphics window, and click OK to add it to the list of variable
dimensions.
6. Edit the Method from By value to Distance in the Varied Items dialog box.
7. Press CTRL and select both SPRING2 datum points in the assembly.
8. Click OK from the Distance dialog box.
9. Click OK from the Varied Items dialog box.
10. Use the 3D Dragger to move the component above the top of the clutch assembly.
11. Select datum point PNT1 on CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and the left datum point SPRING2 on
CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT. If necessary, change this to a Coincident constraint.
12. Reorient the assembly and rotate the spring slightly away from the assembly.

13. Select datum point PNT2 on CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and the right datum point SPRING2 on
CLUTCH_SHOE_R.PRT to create the Coincident constraint.
14. Right-click and select Fix Constraint to fully constrain the spring.

• Disable Point Tag Display .
Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components

You can add flexibility to any component already in an assembly.
• Right-click and select Make Flexible.

• Add Varied Items.
• Edit flexibility in the dashboard.
Figure 1 – Add Varied Items Figure 2 – Add Flexibility to an Assembly

Adding Flexibility to an Already Placed Component
Many designs contain flexible components such as springs, clips, and rubber washers. All of these
components typically vary geometrically in their assembled condition. For example, you can position a
spring with various compression lengths in different locations throughout an assembly.
Creo Parametric enables you to select any component in an assembly and make it flexible. The
component does not have to contain predefined flexible items.
Adding Flexible Items
To make a component of an assembly flexible, select the component, right-click it, and select Make
Flexible > Make Flexible. This opens the File Name: Varied Items dialog box.
With the dialog box open, you can select flexible items and type values that are used by the flexible
component.
Editing Flexibility of an Already Placed Component
To edit the flexibility of an already placed component, select the component, right-click it, and select
Edit Definition . From the Component Placement dashboard, select the Flexibility tab. Then select
the Varied Items button.
Best Practices
Predefined flexibility that you add to a component is saved with that component model and can be
used anytime that component is placed. Flexibility that is added to an already-placed component is not
saved with the component. The flexibility is only saved within the assembly model.
To save time, you should add and save flexible items in components that are regularly assembled in a
flexible state. This way you are not required to re-select the items each time the component is placed.
There are use cases where you may want to define flexibility at the assembly level. For example, if you
are not exactly sure what a dimension value needs to be until it is assembled, you can define flexibility
for the component at the assembly level and determine the correct dimension using a measurement.
Once the correct value is determined, it can be propagated back to the model by right-clicking the
newly flexible component and selecting Make Flexible > Propagate to > Model. The model regenerates
to the new values, and flexibility remains undefined at the part model.
If desired, you can then remove the assembly flexibility defined for the component by right-clicking
the component and selecting Make Flexible > Remove Var Items.
PROCEDURE - Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components

Component_Operations\Flexible_Placed FLEX_PLACED.ASM
Task 1: Add flexibility to a component in the assembly.
geometry.
4. Notice the interferences between the models.

5. From the model tree, right-click
NOZZLE_HOUSE_B.PRT and select Make
6. In the Varied Items dialog box, select the
• In the graphics window, select feature Hole 1.
• Click OK from the Select dialog box to add it
to the list of variable dimensions.
• Edit the New Value to 14.
• Click OK.

Note: The interference has been eliminated
from NOZZLE_HOUSE_B.PRT but remains in
NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT.
Task 2: Add flexibility to a second component in the assembly.

1. From the model tree, right-click
NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT and select Make
• In the graphics window, select feature
Extrude 3. This is the inner cut in the
NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT model, highlighted
in green.
• Click OK from the Select dialog box.
• Edit the New Value to 9.
• Click OK.
Note: The interference has increased. The dimension
was flexed in the wrong direction.

Task 3: Edit the flexibility of a component in the assembly.
1. Edit the definition of NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT.
2. From the Component Placement dashboard,
select the Flexibility tab.
3. On the Flexibility tab, click Varied Items.
4. In the Varied Items dialog box, edit the New
Value to 7.
5. Click OK.
Note: The interference has been eliminated.
Task 4: Propagate the new value to the part model and remove the assembly flexibility.
1. Open NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT from the model
tree.
2. Edit Extrude 3.
3. Notice the dimensions.

4. Click Windows and select FLEX_PLACED.
ASM.
5. In the model tree, right-click NOZZLE_HOUSE_
T.PRT and select Make Flexible > Propagate
to > Model.
6. Click OK from the Changing Models dialog box.
7. Right-click NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT and select
Make Flexible > Remove Var Items.
8. Read the Warning dialog box and click Yes.
9. Click Windows and select NOZZLE_HOUSE_
T.PRT.
10. Edit Extrude 3.
11. Notice the updated dimension.
Creating Flexible Components with Varied Material

You can add material flexibility to already placed components.
• Add variable materials to the top level assembly.

• Make component or subassembly flexible.
• Choose from the top level assembly materials
as flexible option.
• Material passed to component.
Figure 1 – Materials Added to the Top
Level Assembly
Figure 2 – Selecting the New Flexible Material Figure 3 – Material Flexibility Added
Creating Flexible Components with Varied Material

You can add material flexibility to already placed components. The Varied Items dialog box now
displays a Materials tab that enables you to select components whose material you wish to make
flexible. The Orig Material column displays the material assigned at the component level, if any. The
New Material column has a drop-down list that enables you to select from the list of materials added at
the top-level assembly level. Like any other flexible item, the component icon updates in the model
tree, and the new flexible material passed from the top level assembly displays under the Materials
tab for that component.

PROCEDURE - Creating Flexible Components with Varied Material
Component_Operations\Flexible_Material VARIED-MATERIAL.ASM
Task 1: Verify the mass properties of the assembly.
2. In the model tree, expand the BODY.PRT and
Materials nodes.
• Expand the first BOLT .PRT and Materials
nodes.
3. Every component has had a material assigned
to it.
4. Select the Analysis tab in the ribbon.

group.
6. Click Preview from the Mass Properties dialog
box.
7. Notice the overall assembly mass is 0.656 kg.
• Click OK.
Task 2: Make the material of already-placed components flexible.
1. In the model tree, right-click VARIED-
MATERIALS.ASM and select Edit Materials .
2. In the Materials tab, double-click
Legacy-Materials.
• Double-click the mg.mtl, ss.mtl, and tially.mtl
materials.
• Click OK.
3. Expand the newly added Materials node in the
model tree.
4. Notice that the newly added materials have
been added to this node.

5. Right-click BODY.PRT and select Make Flexible
> Make Flexible.
Materials tab.
• Click Add .
7. Notice that the original material is specified in
the Orig Material column.
8. Click in the New Material column and expand
the drop-down list.
9. Notice that the materials added to the assembly
are available for selection for the components.
10. Select SS as the New Material.
11. Click OK.
13. Expand the BODY.PRT and Materials nodes.
14. Notice that the component is now assigned the
stainless steel material, passed from the top
level assembly.

16. Notice that the assembly mass has updated due
to the material change.
17. Click OK.
18. Expand the SUB.ASM sub-assembly.
19. Right-click SUB.ASM and select Make Flexible
> Make Flexible.
Materials tab.
21. Select component ARM.PRT from the graphics
window and middle-click to add it.
22. Click in the New Material field and select
TIALLY .
23. Click OK.

Exercise 2: Using Flexibility to Remove Interference
Objectives
• Add a feature as a flexible item in a model.
• Use a measured diameter to define a flexible dimension.
• Add flexibility to a component that is already assembled.
• Edit the flexibility of a component in an assembly.
Scenario
The insert and base models used in this exercise are assembled in the workshop using a press-fit
type interface. In real life, the interference caused by the press-fit is intended to be used to keep the
parts together. In Creo Parametric, an interference between components is an annoyance because it
is listed every time a global interference check is run. Also, the interference can cause line display
inconstancies in drawings. To avoid these problems, use flexibility to remove the interference yet
maintain both the component and assembly design intent.
Component_Operations\Flexible_Interference FLEX_PRESS_FIT.ASM
Task 1: Identify interference in the assembly.
• Click Global Interference from the Inspect
Geometry group.
3. In the Global Interference dialog box, click
Preview.
Note: The interference between the components
highlighted in red.
4. Click Cancel.
Task 2: Make the insert model flexible within the assembly.

1. In the model tree, right-click FLEX_PRESS_
INSERT.PRT and select Make Flexible > Make
Flexible.
2. Select the Features tab in the Varied Items
dialog box.
3. Select one of the knurl features shown and click
OK in the Select dialog box.
4. Click Yes in the Warning dialog box.

5. Click Suppressed from the New Status field.
6. Click OK.
Note: Even though the knurled geometry has
been removed, there is still interference in the
assembly. The head diameter of the insert is too
large and you should reduce it to eliminate the
interference.
Task 3: Edit the defined flexibility.

1. In the Component Placement dashboard, select
the Flexibility tab.
2. Click Varied Items.
3. Select the Dimensions tab, if necessary, and
select the head of the insert, Extrude_1, as
shown.
4. Select the 15 dimension and click OK in the
Select dialog box. This places the dimension in
the list of variable dimensions.
5. Edit the Method from By value to Diameter in

the Varied Items dialog box.
6. Select the inner cylindrical surface, as shown, to
measure the diameter of the hole in the base
model.
• Notice this measured value, currently 14, now
determines the diameter of this assembled
insert model, no matter how the diameter of
the hole changes.
7. Click OK in the Diameter dialog box.
8. Click OK to close the Varied Items dialog box.

Task 4: Verify that the interference has been removed from the assembly.
• Notice the interference appears to be
eliminated.
2. Ensure that there are no interfering models by
clicking Global Interference .
Preview.
• The interference has been removed.
4. Click OK.
5. Open FLEX_PRESS_INSERT.PRT from the model
tree.
Note: Even with flexible dimensions and features
applied to the assembly instance of the insert, the
part model maintains its design state.
Using Flexible Parameters

You can use flexible parameters with relations to create predefined flexible states of a model.
• Flexible Parameter
– CLAMP_POS
• Dimensions
– head_ang_dim
– stroke_dim
• Relations
– IF (CLAMP_POS) == 1
head_ang_dim = 45
stroke_dim = 0 Figure 1 – Flexible Parameter Values
ELSE ...
Figure 2 – Flexible State #1 Figure 3 – Flexible State #2

Predefined Flexible States
You can use flexible parameters and relations to establish a predefined set of flexible model states.
You select and use a set of dimension values defining each flexible state of the model, based on the
flexible parameter value used during assembly.
For example, if the value of flexible parameter CLAMP_POS is 1, the stroke distance and head angle
dimensions receive one set of values. If the value of CLAMP_POS is 2, the dimensions receive another
set of values.
Parameter Controlled Relations
Relations using a parameter called CLAMP_POS to define two predefined states of a flexible model
are shown below.
IF (CLAMP_POS) == 1
stroke_dim = 0
head_ang_dim = 45
ELSE
IF (CLAMP_POS) == 2
stroke_dim = 34
head_ang_dim = 0
ENDIF
PROCEDURE - Using Flexible Parameters

Component_Operations\Flexible_Parameters
FLEX_PARAMS.ASM
Task 1: Verify that the parameter and relations control the assembly.
2. Click Relations from the Model Intent group.
• Highlight stroke_dim in the set of relations
and then click Display Dimension to
display it in the model.
• Highlight head_ang_dim and click Display
Dimension .

3. Click Local Parameters to expand the dialog
box.
4. Edit the value of CLAMP_POS to 2 and click OK.
Note: The parameter change has forced a change in
the assembly dimensions.
6. Click Parameters from the Model Intent group, edit the value of CLAMP_POS to 0, and click OK.
Note: The assembly does not change after this regeneration. Your relations do not specify dimension
values to use when the CLAMP_POS is edited to 0, thus the assembly has not changed.
Task 2: Edit dimensions and the parameter to be flexible.
access the Model Properties dialog box. In the
Tools section, click change in the Flexible row.
2. In the model tree, select CYL_CLAMP_PIN.PRT.
3. In the graphics window, press CTRL and select
both dimensions.
5. Select the Parameters tab.

6. Select the CLAMP_POS parameter, and then click Insert Selected > Close.
7. Click OK in the Flexibility dialog box.
8. In the Tools section, click Expand in the Flexible row to verify that two flexible dimensions
and one flexible parameter have been defined.
Task 3: Insert the flexible clamp assembly into another assembly.
1. Click Open from the Quick access toolbar, select TOOL.ASM, and click Open.
2. Click Assemble from the Component group, select FLEX_PARAMS.ASM, and click Open.
3. Click Yes to confirm using the model’s predefined flexibility.

4. On the Dimensions tab of the Varied Items
dialog box, type 0 in the New Value field for the
stroke_dim.
5. Click OK to close the Varied Items dialog box.
6. Place the sub-assembly by clicking the yellow
diamond of the receiving interface in the
lower-left corner of the assembly.
8. Click Assemble , select FLEX_PARAMS.ASM,
and click Open.
9. Click Yes to confirm using the model's
predefined flexibility.
10. Select the Parameters tab in the Varied Items
dialog box and type a new value of 1 for the
CLAMP_POS parameter.
• Click OK.
11. Place the sub-assembly by clicking the yellow
diamond of the receiving interface in the
upper-left corner of the assembly.
13. Place a third instance of FLEX_PARAMS.ASM
in the upper-right corner of the assembly; this
time use a flexible CLAMP_POS value of 2.

Module 28
Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies

Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components
The Restructure tool enables you to move components to different locations in an assembly
structure.
• Restructure:
– Drag and drop component(s).
– Places the components where you drop them.
– There are some limitations.
• Move to New Subassembly:
– Creates a new sub-assembly and moves
components into it in one step.
– Sub-assembly is placed at the same level as
source components. Figure 1 – Restructured Assembly
Figure 2 – Restructuring Components Figure 3 – Reordering Components
Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components

You can move components to different locations in an assembly structure. This is called restructuring.
You can restructure and/or reorder multiple components by dragging and dropping them in the model
tree. You can reorganize components from one sub-assembly to another, and from the top-level
assembly to a sub-assembly, or vice versa. Prior to Creo Parametric, you used the Restructure
dialog box to reorganize components and this option is still available by clicking Restructure from
the Component drop-down menu in the ribbon.
The drag-and-drop method of restructuring is easier and less restrictive than using the Restructure
dialog box. When restructuring components using drag-and-drop, the system also reorders the
components to where you drop them in the target sub-assembly. The Restructure dialog box simply
places the components at the bottom of the target assembly structure, requiring an additional reorder
step.
Note: In some cases, displaying Features in the model tree makes it easier to select the appropriate
drop location.
New Sub-Assemblies
It is common for an assembly to be reorganized during a design process. Top -level components are
often restructured into numerous sub-assemblies.
You may create a new, empty sub-assembly and restructure a number of components into that
new sub-assembly or you may use Move to New Subassembly to accomplish this in a single
operation. After you select components to be restructured, you can right-click and select Move to
New Subassembly to create a new sub-assembly and automatically restructure the selected
components into that sub-assembly. The new sub-assembly is placed at the same level as the
selected source components.

Assembly References
The Restructure tool enables you to move components from a top-level assembly into a sub-assembly,
from one sub-assembly to another sub-assembly, and from a sub-assembly to a higher level assembly.
Restructuring a component often places the assembly references of the moved component outside
of the new assembly level.
It is a best practice to always keep assembly references within one level rather than permitting them to
travel through multiple levels of an assembly. For example, it is best to avoid assembling a component
contained in a sub-assembly to references in a higher or lower level assembly. In addition, be sure to
keep the reference inside of that sub-assembly. This practice enables you to more easily restructure
the reference and work with an assembly.
Tip: Edit the definition of restructured components so that you can verify their references are inside of
the new sub-assembly and not external to it. If the component uses references external to the current
assembly level, the Remove External References dialog box appears and enables you to remove any
external references.
Restructuring Limitations
The Restructure tool contains several limitations. Some of the limitations are not related to the tool, but
rather to the logical function of assembly references.
• You cannot restructure components that are part of a pattern.
• If an assembly contains multiple copies of the same sub-assembly, restructuring components
from that sub-assembly reduces the total number of the restructured components located in the
assembly to only one. All other instances of the component are simply removed from the assembly.
• You cannot restructure a parent component to succeed any child components.
• If you restructure components with children into a sub-assembly, you cannot restructure the same
component out of the sub-assembly unless you first restructure those children into the same
sub-assembly.
PROCEDURE - Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components

Component_Operations\Restructure_Reorder VALVE .ASM
Task 1: Restructure components into a sub-assembly.
2. In the model tree, expand COVER.ASM and
ARM.ASM.
3. Press CTRL and select both HANDLE.PRT and
RING.PRT from the model tree.
4. Drag HANDLE.PRT and RING.PRT and drop
them just below ARM.PRT.
Task 2: Simultaneously restructure and reorder components out of a sub-assembly.

1. In the model tree, select the first BOLT _HEX.PRT
model, press CTRL, and then select the
remaining two BOLT _HEX.PRT models.
2. Drag the three selected components and drop
them just before PLATE.PRT.
• Move the cursor to the left until VALVE .ASM
highlights (instead of ARM.ASM) to ensure the
correct location is selected.

Task 3: Restructure components into a new sub-assembly.
1. In the model tree, select the PLATE.PRT model,
press CTRL, and then select both SCREW.PRT
models.
2. Right-click and select Move to New
Subassembly .
3. In the Create Component dialog box, type plate
in the Name field and click OK.
4. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog box.
5. In the Choose template dialog box, double-click
MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM.
6. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.
8. In the dashboard, click Complete Component
.
9. In the model tree, expand PLATE.ASM.
Task 4: Remove external references from the new sub-assembly.
1. Open PLATE.ASM from the model tree.
2. Edit the definition of PLATE.PRT.
Note: The Remove External References dialog box opens because PLATE.PRT was originally assembled
to the VALVE .ASM and still has references to it.
3. Click OK from the Remove External References dialog box. Creo Parametric automatically
removes any external reference and enables you to create new assembly constraints within
PLATE.ASM.
4. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab, select Set15 (User Defined), and then right-click and
select Delete.
5. Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint.
7. Click Close .
8. Edit the definition of PLATE.ASM.
9. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab,
select Set30 (User Defined), and then right-click
and select Delete.
10. Select the center of the 3D Dragger and drag
the sub-assembly out of the top-level assembly.
11. Click Coincident to add coincident
constraints referencing the front face and two
holes of SHAFT.PRT.
• Note that the second hole’s coincident
constraint automatically changes to Oriented.

Task 5: Reorder components within an assembly.
1. Collapse all nodes in the model tree.
2. Reorder the plate assembly by dragging it
before the cover assembly.
Creating Mirrored Assemblies

You can create a mirrored copy of an assembly directly within Creo Parametric.
• Options:
– Dependency control
– Symmetry analysis
• Component actions:
– Mirror Geometry
– Reuse
– Exclude
Figure 1 – Mirroring Assembly Components
Figure 2 – Original Assembly Figure 3 – Mirrored Assembly
Creating Mirrored Assemblies

You can create a mirrored copy of an assembly directly within Creo Parametric. To begin, click File >
Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly to open the Mirror Assembly dialog box.
In the Mirror Assembly dialog box, complete the following:
• Determine if mirrored assembly geometry should be dependent or independent from the source
assembly. If you mirror geometry independently without selecting the Geometry dependent check
box, it does not update when the source model changes.
• Type a name for the new mirrored assembly file.
• Preview the mirrored assembly.

Figure 4 – Mirror Assembly Dialog Box
Performing a Symmetry Analysis
In the Mirror Assembly dialog box, if you select the Perform symmetry analysis check box, the system
performs an analysis on the geometry of all components in the assembly to check for potential reuse
of symmetric components. By default, the system automatically reuses components deemed to be
symmetric. If you expand the Options area, you can clear the Reuse symmetric components check
box to disable that behavior. Additionally, you can specify whether the system should consider Quilts,
Datums, and Curves in its symmetry analysis, too.
Symmetry analysis cannot be performed on the following model types:
• Skeletons
• Non-geometric simplified reps.
• Assemblies with excluded or non-geometric simplified rep components.
Advanced Mirrored Assembly Actions
After defining the mirrored assembly name, geometry dependency, and whether or not you want a
symmetry analysis, you can click Advanced from within the Mirror Assembly dialog box. This launches
the Mirror Assembly Components dialog box, and enables you to assign mirror actions for each
component of the assembly. You can manually define the following actions for each component:
• Mirror Geometry – The default option for every component in the original assembly is Mirror
Geometry. A mirrored copy of the assembly and every component in the source assembly is created.
You can assign new names to components mirrored with geometry or you can accept the default
“_MIR” suffix added to each file name. You can also specify a prefix as well as a naming convention
template.
• Reuse – This option reuses the selected component and only mirrors its placement. New models
are not created for these components. This is useful for symmetrical models that you can use in
both the original and mirrored location.
• Exclude – Use this option to exclude any component from the mirrored assembly.
If the system performs a symmetry analysis, it automatically sets the Reuse action for any component
deemed to be symmetric, although you can manually change this action if desired.
Dependency Questions
What happens to the mirrored assembly if the original source assembly is deleted?
• You can open and reference the mirrored assembly; however, all mirrored geometry is frozen. You
can add features but you cannot edit the Mirrored Merge feature.
What happens to a component of a mirrored assembly if the original source component is deleted?
• You can open and reference the mirrored component; however, all mirrored geometry is frozen as if
the model was created without dependency.
Best Practices
Only use Mirror Assembly when creating assemblies that are truly mirrors of the original model. The
functionality is not intended for creating mirrored assemblies that you later turn into independent
assemblies with little resemblance to the original.
PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Assemblies

Component_Operations\Mirror_Assembly MIRROR_ASSY.ASM
Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of MIRROR_ASSY.ASM.
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.
4. Click File > Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly.
5. In the Mirror Assembly dialog box, type mirror_assy_mir in the Fine name field.
6. Select the Perform symmetry analysis check
box.
7. Select the Preview check box and spin
the model to observe the preview of
MIRROR_ASSY_MIR.ASM.
8. Click Advanced in the Mirror Assembly dialog box.

9. Notice that the symmetry analysis runs.
10. In the Mirror Assembly Components dialog box, select the Preview check box to preview the
mirrored assembly, as it is configured:
• Notice that STOPPER_COVER.PRT, STOPPER.ASM, and STOPPER_BASE.PRT receive the Mirror
Geometry action.
• Accept the default new name suffix “_MIR” for the mirrored copies.
• The STOPPER_PLUG.PRT and STOPPER_SCREW.PRT components have been found to be
symmetric from the analysis and therefore have been assigned the Reuse action.

11. Select Exclude from the Action drop-down list for STOPPER_SCREW.PRT.
12. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new assembly.
Task 2: Observe the new mirrored assembly and make edits to the original.
1. In the model tree, expand the node of each
component. Notice the following:
• Each component mirrored with geometry
contains a Mirrored Merge feature.
• The stopper plug does not contain a Mirrored
Merge feature because it was reused.
• The screw components are removed because
they were excluded.

toolbar and select MIRROR_ASSY.ASM.
3. Expand STOPPER_COVER.PRT and edit Extrude
1.
4. Edit the 50 dimension to 70 and the 30
dimension to 50.
6. Click Windows and select MIRROR_ASSY_

MIR.ASM.
Note: You can edit the definition of the Mirrored Merge feature to change dependency between the
original and mirrored geometry.

Creating Mirrored Components
You can create a mirrored part from inside of an assembly.
• Select the part to mirror.
• Select the planar reference.
• Mirror options:
– Geometry only
– Geometry with features
• Dependency control:
– Geometry dependent Figure 1 – Assembly
– Placement dependent
• Symmetry Analysis
Figure 2 – Assembly with Mirrored Part

Creating Mirrored Components
You can create a mirrored copy of a part from within an assembly by clicking Mirror Component
from the Component group in the ribbon. This opens the Mirror Component dialog box, in which you
can complete the following:
• Select the part to mirror as the Component.
• Select the Mirror plane.
• Type a name for the new mirrored part.
Mirror Part Options
When creating a mirrored copy of a part, the Mirror Component dialog box enables you to define
the mirrored copy.
The following mirror options are available:
• Geometry only – Creates a mirrored merge of only geometry from the selected part.
• Geometry with features – Creates a mirrored copy that includes feature structure. You include all
features of the original part in this mirrored copy.
Having feature structure in the mirrored part enables you to edit the structure, independent of the
original model.
The following dependency controls are available:
• Geometry dependent – This option defines the mirrored geometry as dependent or independent
of the original model.
• Placement dependent – Sets placement of the mirrored part dependent or independent of the
original model's placement.
In the Mirror Component dialog box, if you select the Perform symmetry analysis check box, the
system performs an analysis on the geometry of the component being mirrored for potential reuse.
By default, the system automatically reuses the component if it is deemed to be symmetric. If you
expand the Options area, you can clear the Reuse symmetric components check box to disable that
behavior. Additionally, you can specify whether the system should consider Quilts, Datums, and Curves
in its symmetry analysis, too.
What happens to the mirrored part if the original source part is deleted?
• You can open and reference the mirrored part; however, all mirrored geometry is frozen. You can
add features but you cannot edit the mirrored feature.
PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Components

Component_Operations\Mirror_Component
MIRROR_COMP.ASM
Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
Tree Filters .
4. Click Mirror Component from the Component

group.
5. Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT as the Component
reference.
6. In the Mirror Component dialog box, edit the File
name field as base_left-1.
• Select datum plane ASM_RIGHT as the Mirror
plane reference.
• If necessary, clear the Common name field.
• Select Geometry only as the Mirror type.
• Select the Geometry dependent check box,
if necessary.
• Clear the Placement dependent check box,
if necessary.
• Select the Perform symmetry analysis check
box.
• Select the Preview check box.
• Click OK.
7. In the model tree, expand the BASE_LEFT-1.PRT node.
Note: Because Geometry only was used, the part's feature structure is a single Mirrored Merge
feature.

Task 2: Edit the geometry of BASE_RIGHT.PRT and observe the results.
1. Expand component BASE_RIGHT.PRT and edit
the radius dimension in Round 2 from 1 to .25.
Note: Because Geometry dependent was used, the
corresponding round geometry in BASE_LEFT-1.PRT
also updates.
Task 3: Edit the placement of BASE_RIGHT.PRT and observe the results.

1. Edit BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
2. Edit the assembly offset dimension value from
0 to 5.
Note: Because Placement dependent was not
used, the placement of BASE_LEFT-1.PRT is
independent of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
4. Suppress BASE_LEFT-1.PRT.
Task 4: Create another mirrored copy of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
1. Click Mirror Component .

2. Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT as the Component
Reference.
3. In the Mirror Component dialog box, edit the File
name field as base_left-2.
• Select ASM_RIGHT as the Mirror plane
reference.
• Select Geometry with features.
• Select the Placement dependent check box.
box.
• Click OK.

Task 5: Edit the geometry and placement of both models. Observe the results.
1. In the model tree, expand the BASE_LEFT-2.PRT
node.
2. Select Chamfer 3, right-click, select Delete ,
and click OK.
3. Notice that Chamfer 3 remains in
BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
4. In BASE_RIGHT.PRT, edit the radius dimension

in Round 2 from .25 to 1.
6. Because Include all Feature data was used, this

mirrored part contains a full feature structure,
each independent of the original source model.
7. Edit BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
8. Edit the assembly offset dimension value from 5
to 0.
Note: Because Placement dependent was used, the placement of BASE_LEFT-2.PRT changes with
that of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.

Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies
You can create a mirrored sub-assembly from inside of an assembly.
• Select the sub-assembly to mirror.
• Select the planar reference.
• Options:
– Dependency control:
¨ Geometry dependent
¨ Placement dependent
– Symmetry analysis
• Component actions:
– Mirror Geometry
– Reuse
– Exclude Figure 1 – Assembly
Figure 2 – Mirroring Sub-Assembly

Components Figure 3 – With Mirrored Sub-Assembly
Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies
You can create a mirrored copy of a sub-assembly from within an assembly by clicking Mirror
Component from the Component group in the ribbon. This opens the Mirror Component dialog
box, in which you:
• Select the sub-assembly to mirror as the Component.
• Select the Mirror plane.
• Type a name for the new mirrored sub-assembly.
Instead of defining a name while using the Create a new model option, you could instead reuse the
original model and elect the symmetry analysis:
• Select the Reuse selected model option for New Component.
• Select Perform symmetry analysis for Symmetry Analysis options.
Dependency Control Options
When creating a mirrored copy of a sub-assembly from within an assembly, you create all mirrored
components as geometry-only models.
You can configure Dependency Control as follows:
• Geometry dependent – Defines the mirrored geometry of each component as dependent or
independent of the original models.
• Placement dependent – Sets placement of the mirrored components dependent or independent of
the original model's placement.
In the Mirror Component dialog box, if you select the Perform symmetry analysis check box, the system
performs an analysis on the geometry of all components in the sub-assembly to check for potential
reuse of symmetric components. By default, the system automatically reuses components deemed to
be symmetric. If you expand the Options area, you can clear the Reuse symmetric components check
box to disable that behavior. Additionally, you can specify whether the system should consider Quilts,
Datums, and Curves in its symmetry analysis, too.
Symmetry analysis cannot be performed on the following model types:
• Skeletons
• Non-geometric simplified reps.
• Assemblies with excluded or non-geometric simplified rep components.
Advanced Mirrored Sub-Assembly Actions
After defining the mirrored sub-assembly name, geometry dependency, and whether or not you want a
symmetry analysis, you can click Advanced from within the Mirror Component dialog box. This launches
the Mirror Subassembly Components dialog box, and enables you to assign mirror actions for each
component of the sub-assembly. You can manually define the following actions for each component:
• Mirror Geometry – The default option for every component in the original assembly is Mirror
Geometry. A mirrored copy of the assembly and every component in the source assembly is created.
You can assign new names to components mirrored with geometry or you can accept the default
“_MIR” suffix added to each file name. You can also specify a prefix as well as a naming convention
template.
• Reuse – This option reuses the selected component and only mirrors its placement. New models
are not created for these components. This is useful for symmetrical models that you can use in
both the original and mirrored location.
• Exclude – Use this option to exclude any component from the mirrored sub-assembly.
If the system performs a symmetry analysis, it automatically sets the Reuse action for any component
deemed to be symmetric, although you can manually change this action if desired.
What happens to the mirrored sub-assembly if the original source sub-assembly is deleted?
• You can open or reference the mirrored assembly. All mirrored geometry is frozen and cannot
be edited. Component placement is also frozen; however, you can edit the placement definition
for each component.
Best Practices
Only mirror a new sub-assembly when you create sub-assemblies that are true mirrors of the original
sub-assembly. The functionality is not intended for creating mirrored sub-assemblies that you later
turn into independent sub-assemblies with little resemblance to the original.

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies
Component_Operations\Mirror_Subassembly
MIRROR_SUB.ASM
Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of STOPPER_BACK.ASM.
Tree Filters .
4. Click Mirror Component from the Component
group.
5. In the Mirror Component dialog box, complete

the following:
• Select STOPPER_BACK.ASM as the
Component Reference.
• Edit the File name field to stopper_front.
• Select ASM_TOP as the Mirror Plane reference
from the model tree.
• Select both the Geometry dependent and
Placement dependent check boxes.
box.
6. Click Advanced.
7. Notice that the symmetry analysis runs.
8. If necessary, in the Mirror Subassembly Components dialog box, select the Preview check box
to preview the mirrored assembly:
• Notice that the STOPPER_BASE.PRT receives the Mirror Geometry action.
• Accept the default new name suffix “_MIR” for the mirrored copy.
• The STOPPER_PLUG.PRT and STOPPER_SCREW.PRT components have been found to be
symmetric from the analysis, and therefore have been assigned the Reuse action.
• Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new assembly.

9. In the model tree, expand the STOPPER_FRONT.
ASM and STOPPER_BASE_MIR.PRT nodes.
Notice the two Mirrored Merge features.
Task 2: Edit the geometry of STOPPER_BASE.PRT and observe the results.

1. In the model tree, expand STOPPER_BACK.ASM.
2. Expand STOPPER_BASE.PRT and edit Round 2.
3. Edit the radius dimension from 1 to .25.
Note: Because Geometry dependent was used, the corresponding round geometry in
STOPPER_BASE_MIR.PRT also updates.
Task 3: Edit the placement of STOPPER_BACK.ASM and observe the results.
1. Edit STOPPER_BACK.ASM and edit the
assembly offset dimension value from 0 to 5.
Note: Because Placement dependent was used, the placement of STOPPER_FRONT.ASM changes with
that of STOPPER_BACK.ASM.

Module 29
Replacing Components in an Assembly

Understanding Component Replace
Creo Parametric provides many options for efficiently replacing one component with another
in an assembly.
• Right-click > Replace:

– Family Table
– Interchange
– Reference Model
– Notebook
– By Copy
– Unrelated Component
• Transfers P/C Relationships. Figure 1 – Reference Pairing
• Reduces rework.
Figure 2 – Assembly With Original Component Figure 3 – Assembly With Replaced Component
Understanding Component Replace

The Component Replace tool enables you to exchange one component with another. Tools within
the Replace dialog box provide multiple methods for replacing selected components and managing
references between them.
To open the Replace dialog box, select the component or components you want to replace, then
right-click and select Replace .
The Replace dialog box remains open, enabling you to select and replace multiple components. When
you are finished replacing components, click OK to close the dialog box.
Replace and References
Typically, you assemble a component using references between its geometry and other components
in the assembly. If you replace a component in an assembly with a new component, you need to
specify the geometry that the new component should reference for placement. For example, you
replace a bolt that was assembled to a hole in a block with another bolt. You must specify in Creo
Parametric the exact geometry for the new bolt to use as the Coincident reference or Creo Parametric
does not properly position the bolt.
This same rule applies to the assembly that contains the components. If you replace the block with
a new block containing many holes, Creo Parametric does not automatically insert the bolt in the
correct hole.
In the Replace dialog box, you can select a variety of Replace By tools that enable you to replace
components of different types and requirements. Some of the tools automatically replace a component
and all references, while others enable you to identify and pair references between the old and new
component.
Note: Replacing and substituting components are two different actions. Substitution exchanges one
component for another. You perform substitution in the context of a simplified representation.

Benefits of using Replace By Tools
The Replace By tools enable you to exchange components in an assembly, while transferring the
original component's parent/child relationships to the new component. By transferring relationships
to the new component, you can significantly reduce the amount of rework that may be required in
future assemblies or drawings.
• Family Table – You can automatically replace any component that is part of a family table with
another instance of that family table.
• Interchange – You can automatically replace a member of a functional interchange assembly with
other members of the same interchange assembly. You can use interchange assemblies to replace
components in multiple assemblies.
• Module or Module Variant – When using Creo Parametric Options Modeler, you can replace a
module or module variant with other modules or module variants.
• Notebook – You can automatically replace components that are declared to a notebook that contains
global datums that define assembly intent.
• By Copy – You can copy a current component and replace it with the new component, while
maintaining all original assembly relationships.
• Unrelated Component – You can exchange components that are not related to each other.
Note: The component that you select determines the Replace By tools that appear in the Replace dialog
box. For example, the Family Table tool is not available if you are replacing a component that is not
a member of a family table.
Best Practices
When replacing components, avoid disrupting any future applications by using the method that best
enables you to transfer references between the new and old model.
Replacing Components Using Family Table

You can automatically replace components that are members of a family with other members of
the table.
• Replace By: Family Table
– Choose from family table members.
– Assembly preferences transferred.
Figure 1 – Family Table Component List
Figure 2 – Original Instances Figure 3 – Replaced Instances

Replacing Components Using Family Table
You can automatically replace any component that is part of a family table with another instance of
that family table.
In the Replace dialog box, click Family Table , then click Open . In the Family Table dialog box, select
a component to replace the current instance.
Assembly References
When you automatically replace a component, the children of the original component may not be able
to reference the new component. For example, an instance of a family table may not have the same
number of holes as the original instance. In this situation, after replacing the instance, you need to edit
the assembly definition to account for fewer holes.
Best Practices
Replacing components by family table is a fast and easy way to swap components in and out of an
assembly. This is a common method when working with standard hardware libraries that are often
created with family tables.
PROCEDURE - Replacing Components Using Family Table

Component_Operations\Replace_Family-Table
CLAMP_RFT.ASM
Task 1: Replace BOLT _10-15_RFT.PRT with BOLT _10-36_RFT.PRT using Family Table .
2. In the model tree, select the first instance of
BOLT _10-15_RFT.PRT.
3. Right-click and select Replace .
4. If necessary, in the Replace dialog box, select
Family Table .
5. Click Open from the Replace dialog box.

6. Select BOLT _10-36_RFT and then click OK from
the Family Tree dialog box.
7. Click OK from the Replace dialog box.
8. In the model tree, press CTRL and select

the three remaining BOLT _10-15_RFT.PRT
components.
10. If necessary, in the Replace dialog box, select
Family Table .

12. Select BOLT _10-36_RFT and then click OK from
the Family Tree dialog box.
13. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Replacing Components Using Reference Model

You can replace components related by inheritance, merge, or shrinkwrap using the Reference
Model method.
• Replace By: Reference Model
– Inheritance Feature
– Merge Feature
– Shrinkwrap Feature
– Assembly references transferred
Figure 1 – Cast Model Figure 2 – Machined Model
Replacing Components Using Reference Model

You can automatically replace any components related by inheritance, merge, or shrinkwrap features
using the Reference Model method.
In the Replace dialog box, select Reference Model, then click Open . In the Open dialog box, select
a related reference model.
Assembly References
When you automatically replace a component, the children of the original component may not be able
to reference the new component. After the new component has been placed, you may need to edit
the assembly to account for new or missing assembly references.
Best Practices
Replacing components by reference model is a fast and easy way to exchange components in and
out of an assembly. This is a common method when working with standard hardware libraries created
using the Inheritance feature. Also, you can use the Inheritance or Merge feature when creating various
machined versions of a cast model. You can then exchange any model referencing the cast model
in and out of the assembly.
PROCEDURE - Replacing Components Using Reference Model
Component_Operations\Replace_Reference-Model
RM_MACH.PRT
Task 1: Replace the cast part with the machined part.
2. In the model tree, right-click the External Merge
feature and select Open Base Model .
Note: The base model referenced by the External Merge feature is RM_CAST.PRT. Geometry from the
cast part is merged into the machined part where additional features have been applied. Because these
models reference each other, they can be replaced in an assembly using the Reference Model option.
4. Select VALVE _RM.ASM and click Open.
5. In the graphics window, select RM_CAST.PRT.
7. In the Replace dialog box, ensure Reference

Model is selected.
9. Click RM_MACH.PRT and click Open.
10. Click OK from the Replace dialog box.
Note: The cast model is replaced by the machined
model, yet all related components remain assembled.

Replacing Components Using By Copy
You can replace components by copying a selected component in an assembly.
• Replace By: By Copy

– Edit the new component name.
– Creates a new component based on a copy of the existing model.
– Assembly references transferred.
• Great for evaluating design changes.
Figure 1 – Copy to be Replaced
Replacing Components Using By Copy

With this method of replacement, you can replace a component with a copy by creating a new
component based on a copy of the existing model.
This method is similar to saving a copy in part mode. However, in this case, you are saving a copy in
the context of an assembly.
Select one or more components to replace. Right-click and select Replace . In the Replace dialog
box, select By Copy. Edit the name of the new component in the Name field in the New Copy section of
the dialog box. If you select multiple components, type a suffix to add to the current name of each
component.
Note: This new copied model is unrelated to the original model. Changes made to the new component do
not affect the original.
Assembly References
Because this component is an exact copy of the original model, all models referencing the original
model now reference the new component.
Best Practices
This is a great tool for evaluating design changes to selected components in an assembly.

PROCEDURE - Replacing Components Using By Copy
Component_Operations\Replace_Copy CLAMP_BYCOPY.ASM
Task 1: Replace the clamp base using the By Copy method.
Tree Filters .
4. In the model tree, select CLAMP_BASE_
BYCOPY.PRT, right-click and select Replace .
5. In the Replace dialog box, select By Copy.
6. Edit the Name to clamp_base_2.
7. Click OK to complete the replacement.
Task 2: Edit the new CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT.
1. Activate CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT.
2. In the model tree, expand the CLAMP_BASE_2.
PRT node.
3. Edit Sketch 1.
4. Edit the 80 dimension to 120 and the 40
dimension to 100.

6. Activate CLAMP_BYCOPY.ASM.
7. Click Open , select CLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.

PRT, and click Open.
Note: The size of CLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.PRT has
not changed. Only the new CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT has
increased in size.

Replacing Unrelated Components
You can replace any component with another using the Unrelated Component tool.
• Replace By: Unrelated

– You must transfer assembly references:
¨ Reference Pairing
¨ Manually
¨ Reference Evaluation
¨ Reassemble Figure 1 – Reference Pairing Table
Figure 2 – Assembled Component to Replace Figure 3 – Unrelated Component
Replacing Unrelated Components

You can replace unrelated components by using the Unrelated Component method.
In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated Component. In the Open dialog box, select the new
component to swap into the assembly.
Note: You can replace parts with sub-assemblies and sub-assemblies with parts using the Unrelated
Component functionality.
Assembly References
The components you are swapping have no relationship to each other; you must place the new
component and redefine the placement of any component referencing the component that was
replaced. There are two methods for handling the new assembly references:
• Reference Pairing – You can click Edit Ref Table to create a pairing table. The table contains the
placement references from the component that you are replacing and enables you to pair them with
geometry in the new component. By identifying and pairing the new assembly references prior to
replacing the original model, you avoid assembly regeneration failures. You can pair references
manually or automatically using the Evaluation tool.
You can save the pairing table information with the assembly and use it to return the original
component to the assembly.
• Reassemble – If you do not assign reference tags in the Reference Pairing Table, Creo Parametric
fails the placement of the new, unrelated component. You can then edit the definition of that
component and specify the missing placement references for the new component. Then, you should
use Edit Definition or Edit References to edit the placement of any components that have
references to the replaced model.
Reference Evaluation
In the Reference Pairing Table, you can click Evaluate to automatically pair reference tags in both
models, using a set of evaluation rules. By default, all rules are applied. These evaluation rules
include the following:

Figure 4 – Reference Pairing Table
However, Evaluation Rules enables you to configure which rules to apply.
• Same ID (and Type) – Is the most powerful evaluation rule. This option pairs all component references
that are of the same feature ID and type. This rule enables the easy replacement of an unrelated
component that was created by copying the original model. This evaluation also automatically pairs
datum references that originated in the same template model.
• Component Interfaces – Compares component interfaces from two components and pairs interfaces
with the same name. This option is efficient when the same name is given to similar interfaces
configured in each component.
• Same Name (and Type) – Pairs all component references that are of the same name and type.
This option depends on careful planning since you must consistently name geometric features
throughout your projects.
• Same History – Searches for copied data-sharing features from the existing component in the
incoming component. Such features are then automatically used as pairs.
• Same Parameters – Searches for all references with the given parameter name, type, and value, and
automatically pairs those that match.
Best Practices
Replacing components using the Unrelated Component method is useful because it does not require
the swapped components to have a predefined relationship, such as Reference Model, Family
Table, Interchange Assembly and so on. The Reference Pairing tool enables you to swap unrelated
components and avoid rework to downstream assemblies, drawings, and other applications.
PROCEDURE - Replacing Unrelated Components

Component_Operations\Replace_Unrelated REPL_UNREL.ASM
Task 1: Replace an unrelated component using the Edit Ref Table .
2. In the model tree, right-click CLAMP_BASE_
UNREL.PRT and select Replace .
3. In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated
Component.
4. Click Open .
5. Select CLAMP_BASE_CIR.PRT and click Open.

6. Click Edit Ref Table .
7. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, do
the following:
• Click Evaluate.
• Select each tag and observe the paired
geometry highlighted in the display window.
• Click OK.
8. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Note: Because CLAMP_BASE_CIR.PRT was originally
a copy of CLAMP_BASE_UNREL.PRT, Creo Parametric
automatically evaluated and paired their common
assembly references.
Task 2: Manually pair references to replace an unrelated component.
1. In the model tree, right-click CLAMP_SHAFT_UNREL.PRT and select Replace .

2. In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated Component.
3. Click Open .
4. Select IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT and click Open.
5. In the Replace dialog box, click Edit Ref Table .
6. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Evaluate.
7. Notice that only TAG_3 was automatically paired as datum plane RIGHT.
Note: IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT is not a copy of CLAMP_SHAFT_UNREL.PRT. The only reference that can
be automatically paired is datum plane RIGHT.
8. Select TAG_0.
9. Select a surface in IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT
that corresponds to the highlighted TAG_0
reference.
10. Select TAG_1.

11. Select a surface in IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT that
corresponds to the highlighted TAG_1 reference.
12. Select TAG_2.

13. Select a surface in IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT
that corresponds to the highlighted TAG_2
reference.
14. Click OK.

15. In the Replace dialog box, click OK.
Note: If you had not manually paired missing
references, the new unrelated component would
have failed placement, enabling you to redefine the
component's placement. You would also be required
to edit the definition of any components assembled
to the replaced part.
Exercise 1: Replacing Unrelated Components Using the Reference Table

Method
Objectives
• Replace an unrelated component using a reference table.
Scenario
Remove interference in the top-level tool assembly by replacing the circular base in the clamp
sub-assembly with a smaller, rectangular base model. The new base is imported from the Step file
of a vendor's standard part database.
Component_Operations\Replace_Reference-Table TOOL_01.ASM
Task 1: Identify interference in the assembly.
3. Click Global Interference from the Inspect
Geometry group.
Preview.
Note: The interferences between the round base
parts and the main clamp tool are highlighted in
red.
5. Click Cancel.

Task 2: Activate CLAMP_RT.ASM and select CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT to be replaced.
1. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1. Activate
the first instance of CLAMP_RT.ASM.
2. In the model tree, expand CLAMP_RT.ASM.
Right-click CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT and
select Replace .
Note: This opens the Replace dialog box, enabling
you to select from various replacement methods.
Task 3: Replace CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT with CLAMP_BASE_RT.PRT.

1. In the Replace dialog box, do the following:
• Select Unrelated Component.
• Click Open .
2. In the Open dialog box, select CLAMP_BASE_RT.PRT and click Open.
3. Click Edit Ref Table to open the Reference Pairing Table .
4. Click Evaluate and notice that no references were automatically paired.
Note: Creo Parametric identifies each piece of geometry in CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT that is

referenced in the CLAMP_RT.ASM. Because the two models have nothing in common, Evaluate cannot
automatically pair any references. You must now manually select corresponding geometry in the new
model for each reference tag listed.
5. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, select TAG_0.
6. In the graphics window, select the reference in CLAMP_BASE_RT.PRT that corresponds to the
highlighted TAG_0 reference in CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT.







21. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click

OK.
22. In the Replace dialog box, click OK.
23. Activate TOOL_01.ASM.
Note: The Reference Pairing table pairs references
used to assemble components to the base, and pairs
references used to assemble the sub-assembly to the
top-level tool assembly.

CREO Module 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CREO Module 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Creo for Design Engineers

Course Handbook Layout:

Course Handbook Layout

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

3. Click Working Directory to view the current

3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as

This completes the procedure.

Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Figure 3 – Creating a New Assembly by Figure 4 – Creating a Drawing of the

PROCEDURE - Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 3

3. To edit the hole diameter from 3.5 to 5, do the

Module 1 | Page 4 © 2021 PTC

7. From the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 5

3. To start a new Sketch feature, do the following:

4. To sketch a circle and edit its diameter to 5, do

Module 1 | Page 6 © 2021 PTC

6. To create an Extrude feature using the sketch

7. To start a second new Sketch feature, do the

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 7

Module 1 | Page 8 © 2021 PTC

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 9

16. To modify geometry dimensions to their proper

Module 1 | Page 10 © 2021 PTC

21. To apply an appearance to the whole model,

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 11

23. To apply a second appearance to surfaces of

24. To see the realistic appearances displayed, do

Module 1 | Page 12 © 2021 PTC

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 13

7. To edit the Distance constraint value and

Module 1 | Page 14 © 2021 PTC

13. Middle-click and drag to re-orient the model.

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 15

Module 1 | Page 16 © 2021 PTC

4. To move the Ø7 dimension to the other drawing

8. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and close the window, do the following:

© 2021 PTC Module 1 | Page 17

This completes the procedure.

Module 1 | Page 18 © 2021 PTC

Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts

© 2021 PTC Module 2 | Page 1

Figure 1 – Interference Check Figure 2 – Mass Properties

Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts

Module 2 | Page 2 © 2021 PTC

With feature-based modeling:

Figure 1 – Connecting Rod Features

Understanding Feature-Based Concepts

© 2021 PTC Module 2 | Page 3

Figure 1 – Parametric Feature Relationships

Understanding Parametric Concepts

Understanding Associative Concepts

© 2021 PTC Module 2 | Page 5

Figure 1 – Model-Centric Development Tool

Understanding Model-Centric Concepts

Module 2 | Page 6 © 2021 PTC

The following are common Creo Parametric file

Figure 1 – Part File

Figure 2 – Drawing File Figure 3 – Assembly File

Recognizing File Extensions

© 2021 PTC Module 2 | Page 7